You are on page 1of 1098

MiCOM P139

Feeder Management and Bay Control
P139/EN M/R-21-A
Version

P139 -313 -420/421/422 -651

Technical Manual
Volume 1 of 2

General Note on the PDF Version of this Technical Manual
All entries in the Table of Contents and all cross-references to other sections,
figures etc. in green letters are hyperlinks, i.e. by a single mouse click on the
reference one can navigate directly to the referenced part of the manual.
In the Adobe Reader (or the Acrobat Pro), one can return back to the previous
view by using the menu point View / Page Navigation / Previous View (keyboard
shortcut: ALT + Left cursor key). (It might be necessary to do this several times,
if the view at the target location has also been changed (e.g. by scrolling or
changing the zoom setting).

Warning!

When electrical equipment is in operation dangerous voltage will be present in
certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect
use or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and cause
personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the P139 must be isolated. Where
stranded conductors are used, insulated crimped wire end ferrules must be
employed.
The signals MAI N: Bl ocke d/f aul ty and SFMO N: War ning (LE D)
(permanently assigned to the LEDs labeled OUT OF SERVICE and ALARM) can
be assigned to output relays to indicate the health of the P139. Schneider
Electric strongly recommends that these output relays are hardwired into the
substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.
Any modifications to this P139 must be in accordance with the manual. If any
other modification is made without the express permission of Schneider
Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
Proper and safe operation of this P139 depends on appropriate shipping and
handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful
operation, maintenance and servicing.
For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this P139.
The User should be familiar with the warnings in the Safety Guide
(SFTY/4LM/G11 or later version), with the warnings in Chapter 5, (p. 5-1),
Chapter 10, (p. 10-1), Chapter 11, (p. 11-1) and Chapter 12, (p. 12-1)
and with the content of Chapter 14, (p. 14-1), before working on the
equipment. If the warnings are disregarded, it will invalidate the warranty, and
may render the product unsafe.
Installation of the DHMI:
A protective conductor (ground/earth) of at least 1.5 mm² (US:  AWG14 or
thicker) must be connected to the DHMI protective conductor terminal to link
the DHMI and the main relay case; these must be located within the same
substation.
To avoid the risk of electric shock the DHMI communication cable must not be
in contact with hazardous live parts.
The DHMI communication cable must not be routed or placed alongside highvoltage cables or connections. Currents can be induced in the cable which
may result in electromagnetic interference.

Qualified Personnel
are individuals who

are familiar with the installation, commissioning and operation of the P139
and of the system to which it is being connected;

are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety
engineering standards and are authorized to energize and de-energize
equipment and to isolate, ground and label it;

are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with
safety engineering standards;

are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Note
This operating manual gives instructions for installation, commissioning and
operation of the P139. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable
circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of
questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper
authorization. Contact the appropriate technical sales office of Schneider Electric
and request the necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on
the part of Schneider Electric, including settlement of warranties, result solely
from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of
the operating manual.

Changes after going to press

P139
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1

2

APPLICATION AND SCOPE ................................................................................... 1-1
1.1

Overview .....................................................................................................................1-1

1.2

General Functions ....................................................................................................... 1-6

1.3

Control Functions ........................................................................................................ 1-7

1.4

Global Functions ......................................................................................................... 1-8

1.5

Design .........................................................................................................................1-9

1.6

Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................... 1-10

1.7

Control and Display ...................................................................................................1-11

1.8

Information Interfaces ...............................................................................................1-12

TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1

Conformity .................................................................................................................. 2-1

2.2

General Data ...............................................................................................................2-2

2.2.1

General Device Data ..................................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.3

Tests ........................................................................................................................... 2-4

2.3.1

Type Tests ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-4

2.3.2

Routine Tests .................................................................................................................................................2-7

2.4

Environmental Conditions ........................................................................................... 2-9

2.5

Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................... 2-10

2.5.1

Measuring Inputs ......................................................................................................................................... 2-10

2.5.2

Binary Signal Inputs .....................................................................................................................................2-11

2.5.3

IRIG‑B Interface ........................................................................................................................................... 2-12

2.5.4

Direct Current Input .....................................................................................................................................2-12

2.5.5

Resistance Thermometer ............................................................................................................................ 2-12

2.5.6

Direct Current Output ..................................................................................................................................2-12

2.5.7

Output Relays ..............................................................................................................................................2-13

2.5.8

BCD Measured Data Output ........................................................................................................................ 2-13

2.6

Interfaces ..................................................................................................................2-14

2.6.1

Local Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................2-14

2.6.2

PC Interface ................................................................................................................................................. 2-14

2.6.3

Serial Communication Interface .................................................................................................................. 2-14

2.6.4

IEC Communication Interface ...................................................................................................................... 2-15

2.6.5

IRIG‑B Interface ........................................................................................................................................... 2-16

2.7

Information Output ................................................................................................... 2-17

2.8

Settings – Typical Characteristic Data .......................................................................2-18

2.8.1

Main Function .............................................................................................................................................. 2-18

2.8.2

Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection ............................................................................. 2-18

2.8.3

Short-Circuit Direction Determination ......................................................................................................... 2-18

2.8.4

Time-Voltage Protection .............................................................................................................................. 2-18

2.8.5

Power Directional Protection ....................................................................................................................... 2-18

2.9

Deviations ................................................................................................................. 2-19

2.9.1

Deviations of the Operate Values ................................................................................................................ 2-19

2.9.2

Deviations of the Timer Stages ................................................................................................................... 2-20

2.9.3

Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition .................................................................................................... 2-21

2.10

Resolution of the Fault Data Acquisition ................................................................... 2-23

2.10.1

Time Resolution ...........................................................................................................................................2-23

2.10.2

Phase Currents System ............................................................................................................................... 2-23

2.10.3

Neutral Current ............................................................................................................................................2-23

2.10.4

Phase-to-Ground Voltages and Neutral-Point Displacement Voltage ...........................................................2-23

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

1

P139

3

2

Table of Contents

2.11

Recording Functions ................................................................................................. 2-24

2.11.1

Organization of the Recording Memories .................................................................................................... 2-24

2.12

Power Supply ............................................................................................................ 2-26

2.13

Current Transformer Specifications .......................................................................... 2-27

2.13.1

Symbols .......................................................................................................................................................2-27

2.13.2

General Equations ....................................................................................................................................... 2-29

2.13.3

Overcurrent Protection ................................................................................................................................ 2-29

OPERATION ......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1

Modular Structure ....................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2

Operator-Machine Communication ............................................................................. 3-3

3.3

Configuration of the Bay Panel and of the Measured Value Panels, Selection of the
Control Point (Function Group LOC) ............................................................................ 3-4

3.3.1

Bay Panel .......................................................................................................................................................3-5

3.3.2

Signal Panel ...................................................................................................................................................3-8

3.3.3

Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................................3-9

3.3.4

Fault Panel ...................................................................................................................................................3-10

3.3.5

Ground Fault Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 3-11

3.3.6

Overload Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 3-12

3.3.7

Selection of the Control Point ...................................................................................................................... 3-13

3.3.8

Configurable Clear Key ................................................................................................................................ 3-13

3.4

Serial Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 3-14

3.4.1

PC Interface (Function Group PC) ................................................................................................................ 3-15

3.4.2

Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1) ................................................................................ 3-16

3.4.3

Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2) ................................................................................ 3-25

3.4.4

Communication Interface 3 (Function Group COMM3) ................................................................................ 3-27

3.4.5

Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE) .......................................... 3-32

3.5

IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB) ...............................................3-48

3.6

Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP) ......... 3-49

3.7

Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI) .......................................................... 3-51

3.7.1

Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y ...................................................................................... 3-52

3.7.2

Connecting a Resistance Thermometer to the “PT 100 Analog Input” on the Analog (I/O) Module Y .......... 3-55

3.7.3

Connecting Temperature Sensors to the Temperature P/C Board (the RTD Module) .................................. 3-56

3.8

Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays (Function Group
OUTP) ........................................................................................................................3-59

3.9

Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO) ......................................................3-62

3.9.1

General Settings ..........................................................................................................................................3-62

3.9.2

BCD Measured Data Output ........................................................................................................................ 3-64

3.9.3

Analog Measured Data Output .................................................................................................................... 3-68

3.9.4

Output of “External” Measured Data ........................................................................................................... 3-74

3.10

Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED) ...... 3-75

3.10.1

Configuring the LED Indicators .................................................................................................................... 3-75

3.10.2

Layout of the LED indicators ........................................................................................................................3-75

3.10.3

Operating Mode of the LED Indicators ......................................................................................................... 3-76

3.11

Main Functions of the P139 (Function Group MAIN) .................................................. 3-79

3.11.1

Conditioning of the Measured Variables ...................................................................................................... 3-79

3.11.2

Phase Reversal Function ..............................................................................................................................3-81

3.11.3

Operating Data Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 3-82

3.11.4

Configuring and Enabling the Device Functions .......................................................................................... 3-97

3.11.5

Activation of “Dynamic Parameters” ......................................................................................................... 3-100

3.11.6

Current Flow Monitoring ............................................................................................................................ 3-100

3.11.7

Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint) .................................................................................................. 3-101

3.11.8

Function Blocks ......................................................................................................................................... 3-103

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

Table of Contents

P139

3.11.9

Multiple Blocking ....................................................................................................................................... 3-104

3.11.10

Blocked/Faulty ........................................................................................................................................... 3-105

3.11.11

Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Closed Signal .......................................................... 3-105

3.11.12

Monitoring and Processing of CB Status Signals ........................................................................................3-106

3.11.13

Close Command ........................................................................................................................................ 3-108

3.11.14

Multiple Signaling ...................................................................................................................................... 3-110

3.11.15

Ground Fault Signaling .............................................................................................................................. 3-111

3.11.16

Starting Signals and Tripping Logic ........................................................................................................... 3-112

3.11.17

CB Trip Signal ............................................................................................................................................ 3-119

3.11.18

Communication Error .................................................................................................................................3-121

3.11.19

Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization .................................................................................................. 3-121

3.11.20

Resetting Actions .......................................................................................................................................3-123

3.11.21

Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications Channels .......................................... 3-126

3.11.22

Test Mode ..................................................................................................................................................3-127

3.12

Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS) ................................................. 3-128

3.13

Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON) ................................................................3-130

3.13.1

Tests During Start-up ................................................................................................................................ 3-130

3.13.2

Cyclic Tests ................................................................................................................................................3-130

3.13.3

Signal ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-130

3.13.4

Device Response ....................................................................................................................................... 3-131

3.13.5

Monitoring Signal Memory .........................................................................................................................3-132

3.13.6

Monitoring Signal Memory Time Tag ......................................................................................................... 3-132

3.14

Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC) ............................................... 3-133

3.15

Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC) ............................................ 3-134

3.16

Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA) ............................................... 3-135

3.16.1

Overload Duration ..................................................................................................................................... 3-135

3.16.2

Acquiring Measured Overload Data from the Motor Protection ................................................................. 3-135

3.16.3

Acquiring Measured Overload Data from the Thermal Overload Protection .............................................. 3-136

3.17

Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC) ..........................................................3-137

3.17.1

Start of Overload Recording ...................................................................................................................... 3-137

3.17.2

Counting Overload Events ......................................................................................................................... 3-137

3.17.3

Time Tagging .............................................................................................................................................3-137

3.17.4

Overload Logging ...................................................................................................................................... 3-138

3.18

Ground Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group GF_DA) ......................................... 3-139

3.18.1

Resetting Measured Ground Fault Data .....................................................................................................3-139

3.18.2

Duration of Ground Fault Recording .......................................................................................................... 3-139

3.18.3

Measured Ground Fault Data from Steady-State Value Evaluation ........................................................... 3-140

3.18.4

Measured Ground Fault Data from Steady-State Power Evaluation ...........................................................3-142

3.18.5

Measured Ground Fault Data from Admittance Evaluation ........................................................................3-143

3.19

Ground Fault Recording (Function Group GF_RC) ................................................... 3-145

3.19.1

Start Ground Fault Recording .................................................................................................................... 3-145

3.19.2

Counting Ground Fault Events ...................................................................................................................3-145

3.19.3

Time Tagging .............................................................................................................................................3-145

3.19.4

Ground Fault Logging ................................................................................................................................ 3-146

3.20

Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA) ...................................................... 3-147

3.20.1

Running Time and Fault Duration .............................................................................................................. 3-147

3.20.2

Fault Data Acquisition Time .......................................................................................................................3-148

3.20.3

Acquisition of Fault Data ........................................................................................................................... 3-148

3.20.4

Acquisition of Fault Location ......................................................................................................................3-153

3.20.5

Fault Data Reset ........................................................................................................................................3-153

3.21

Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC) ................................................................ 3-154

3.21.1

Start of Fault Recording .............................................................................................................................3-154

3.21.2

Fault Counting ........................................................................................................................................... 3-155

3.21.3

Time Tagging .............................................................................................................................................3-155

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

3

P139

4

Table of Contents

3.21.4

Fault Recordings ........................................................................................................................................3-156

3.21.5

Fault Value Recording ............................................................................................................................... 3-157

3.22

Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group DTOC) ................................3-159

3.22.1

Enabling or Disabling DTOC Protection ......................................................................................................3-159

3.22.2

Phase Current Stages ................................................................................................................................ 3-159

3.22.3

Negative-Sequence Current Stages ...........................................................................................................3-165

3.22.4

Enabling or Disabling DTOC Residual Current Stages ................................................................................3-167

3.22.5

Residual Current Stages ............................................................................................................................ 3-167

3.22.6

Selecting the Measured Variable ............................................................................................................... 3-168

3.22.7

Hold-Time Logic for Intermittent Ground Faults ........................................................................................ 3-171

3.23

Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups IDMT1 and IDMT2) ............3-174

3.23.1

Disabling and Enabling IDMT Protection .................................................................................................... 3-174

3.23.2

Time-Dependent Characteristics ............................................................................................................... 3-175

3.23.3

Enable Thresholds ..................................................................................................................................... 3-179

3.23.4

Phase Current Stage ..................................................................................................................................3-181

3.23.5

Negative-Sequence Current Stage ............................................................................................................ 3-185

3.23.6

Selecting the Measured Variable for the Residual Current Stage .............................................................. 3-187

3.23.7

Residual Current Stage ..............................................................................................................................3-187

3.23.8

Holding Time ............................................................................................................................................. 3-190

3.24

Short-Circuit Direction Determination (Function Group SCDD) ............................... 3-192

3.24.1

Enable/disable the Short-Circuit Direction Determination ......................................................................... 3-192

3.24.2

Phase Current Stages ................................................................................................................................ 3-193

3.24.3

Enabling for Phase Current Stages ............................................................................................................ 3-194

3.24.4

Forming the Blocking Signal for the Phase Current Stages ....................................................................... 3-196

3.24.5

Residual Current Stages ............................................................................................................................ 3-198

3.24.6

Conditioning and Selecting the Measured Variables ..................................................................................3-199

3.24.7

Enabling for Residual Current Stages ........................................................................................................ 3-199

3.24.8

Forming the Blocking Signal for the Residual Current Stages ................................................................... 3-200

3.24.9

Signaling Logic .......................................................................................................................................... 3-203

3.24.10

Short-Circuit Direction Determination Using Voltage Memory ...................................................................3-203

3.25

Switch on to Fault Protection (Function Group SOTF) ............................................. 3-205

3.26

Protective Signaling (Function Group PSIG) ............................................................ 3-207

3.26.1

Disabling and Enabling Protective Signaling ..............................................................................................3-207

3.26.2

Readiness of Protective Signaling ..............................................................................................................3-208

3.26.3

Setting up a Communications Link ............................................................................................................ 3-209

3.26.4

Operation of Protective Signaling .............................................................................................................. 3-210

3.26.5

Monitoring and Testing the DC Loop for PSIG ............................................................................................3-212

3.27

Auto-Reclosure Control (Function Group ARC) ........................................................ 3-213

3.27.1

ARC Operating Modes ................................................................................................................................3-215

3.27.2

Enabling and Disabling the ARC Function ..................................................................................................3-215

3.27.3

ARC Blocking ............................................................................................................................................. 3-217

3.27.4

ARC Ready to Operate ...............................................................................................................................3-218

3.27.5

Tripping Times ...........................................................................................................................................3-219

3.27.6

Blocking and Resetting the Tripping Times ............................................................................................... 3-225

3.27.7

ARC Cycle .................................................................................................................................................. 3-226

3.27.8

Blocking the DTOC or IDMT Protection Function, the GFDSS Function, and Programmable Logic ............. 3-226

3.27.9

Example of Programmable Logic in the ARC ............................................................................................. 3-226

3.27.10

General Control Functions ......................................................................................................................... 3-227

3.27.11

High-Speed Reclosure (HSR) ..................................................................................................................... 3-229

3.27.12

Joint Operation of the ARC and ASC Functions .......................................................................................... 3-231

3.27.13

Test HSR ....................................................................................................................................................3-233

3.27.14

Time-Delay Reclosure (TDR) ......................................................................................................................3-234

3.27.15

ARC Counters ............................................................................................................................................ 3-236

3.27.16

Counter for Number of CB Operations ....................................................................................................... 3-236

3.28

Automatic Synchronism Check (Function Group ASC) ............................................ 3-237
P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

Table of Contents

P139

3.28.1

Disabling and Enabling the ASC Function .................................................................................................. 3-237

3.28.2

ASC Readiness and Blocking ..................................................................................................................... 3-239

3.28.3

Close Request ............................................................................................................................................3-240

3.28.4

ASC Operating Modes ................................................................................................................................3-242

3.28.5

Extended Settings for the Close Enable Conditions ................................................................................... 3-243

3.28.6

Considering the CB Close Time ..................................................................................................................3-244

3.28.7

Voltage-Checked Close Enable .................................................................................................................. 3-245

3.28.8

Synchronism-Checked Close Enable ..........................................................................................................3-248

3.28.9

Voltage/Synchronism-Checked Close Enable .............................................................................................3-251

3.28.10

Testing the ASC Function .......................................................................................................................... 3-251

3.28.11

Integrating the ASC Function into the Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units ...................................3-253

3.28.12

Measured Values Obtained by ASC ............................................................................................................3-254

3.28.13

ASC Counters .............................................................................................................................................3-255

3.29

Ground Fault Direction Determination Using Steady-State Values (Function Group
GFDSS) ....................................................................................................................3-256

3.29.1

Disabling and Enabling Ground Fault Direction Determination Using Steady-State Values .......................3-256

3.29.2

Ground Fault Direction Determination Using Steady-State Values Is Ready ............................................. 3-257

3.29.3

Conditioning and Selecting the Measured Values ......................................................................................3-258

3.29.4

Steady-State Power Evaluation ................................................................................................................. 3-258

3.29.5

Steady-State Current Evaluation ............................................................................................................... 3-263

3.29.6

Steady-State Admittance ...........................................................................................................................3-263

3.29.7

Counting the Ground Faults Detected by Steady-State Power and Admittance Evaluation .......................3-269

3.30

Transient Ground Fault Detection (Function Group TGFD) ......................................3-270

3.30.1

Disabling and Enabling the Transient Ground Fault Detection Function ....................................................3-270

3.30.2

Readiness of the Transient Ground Fault Detection Function ....................................................................3-271

3.30.3

Conditioning and Selecting the Measured Values ......................................................................................3-272

3.30.4

Determining the Ground Fault Direction ....................................................................................................3-272

3.30.5

Resetting a Directional Decision ................................................................................................................3-274

3.30.6

Monitoring the Measured Values ............................................................................................................... 3-275

3.30.7

Counting the Transient Ground Faults .......................................................................................................3-275

3.31

Motor Protection (Function Group MP) .................................................................... 3-276

3.31.1

Enable/Disable the Motor Protection Function ...........................................................................................3-276

3.31.2

Starting Conditions .................................................................................................................................... 3-277

3.31.3

Overload Protection ...................................................................................................................................3-278

3.31.4

Exceptional Overload Protection Cases ..................................................................................................... 3-287

3.31.5

Low Load Protection .................................................................................................................................. 3-290

3.31.6

Protection of Increased-Safety Machines ...................................................................................................3-290

3.31.7

Running Time Meter .................................................................................................................................. 3-293

3.32

Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM) .......................................... 3-294

3.32.1

Readiness of Thermal Overload Protection ................................................................................................3-294

3.32.2

Operating Modes ....................................................................................................................................... 3-294

3.32.3

Coolant Temperature Effect ...................................................................................................................... 3-295

3.32.4

Thermal Overload Protection Operation without Coolant Temperature (Ambient) Acquisition ..................3-296

3.32.5

Relative Replica .........................................................................................................................................3-297

3.32.6

Absolute Replica ........................................................................................................................................3-298

3.32.7

Tripping Characteristics .............................................................................................................................3-299

3.32.8

Warning Signal .......................................................................................................................................... 3-300

3.32.9

Trip ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-300

3.32.10

Cooling ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-300

3.32.11

Operation Together with the Motor Protection Function ............................................................................3-302

3.32.12

Resetting ................................................................................................................................................... 3-302

3.33

Unbalance Protection (Function Group I2>) ............................................................3-303

3.33.1

Disabling and Enabling the Unbalance Protection Function .......................................................................3-303

3.33.2

Functional Description ...............................................................................................................................3-304

3.34

Under and Overvoltage Protection (Function Group V<>) ......................................3-305

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

5

P139

6

Table of Contents

3.34.1

Disabling and Enabling V<> Protection .....................................................................................................3-305

3.34.2

V<> Protection Readiness .........................................................................................................................3-305

3.34.3

Minimum Current Monitoring .....................................................................................................................3-306

3.34.4

Monitoring the Phase Voltages .................................................................................................................. 3-307

3.34.5

Monitoring the Positive- and Negative-Sequence Voltages ....................................................................... 3-312

3.34.6

Monitoring the Neutral-Point Displacement Voltage ..................................................................................3-316

3.34.7

Monitoring the Reference Voltage ............................................................................................................. 3-316

3.35

Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>) ........................................ 3-319

3.35.1

Disabling or Enabling Over‑/Underfrequency Protection ............................................................................3-319

3.35.2

Selecting the Measuring Voltage ............................................................................................................... 3-320

3.35.3

Undervoltage Blocking and Evaluation Time ............................................................................................. 3-321

3.35.4

Operating Modes of Over-/Underfrequency Protection .............................................................................. 3-321

3.35.5

Frequency Monitoring ................................................................................................................................3-321

3.35.6

Frequency Monitoring Combined with Differential Frequency Gradient Monitoring (df/dt) ........................3-322

3.35.7

Frequency Monitoring Combined with Mean Frequency Gradient Monitoring (Δf/Δt) ................................ 3-322

3.35.8

fmin-/fmax Measurement ............................................................................................................................. 3-325

3.36

Directional Power Protection (Function Group P<>) ............................................... 3-326

3.36.1

Disabling and Enabling P<> Protection .....................................................................................................3-326

3.36.2

Power Determination .................................................................................................................................3-326

3.36.3

Power Monitoring .......................................................................................................................................3-327

3.36.4

Active Power Monitoring when Set Thresholds are Exceeded ................................................................... 3-328

3.36.5

Active Power Direction when Set Thresholds are Exceeded ...................................................................... 3-329

3.36.6

Reactive Power Monitoring when Set Thresholds are Exceeded ................................................................3-330

3.36.7

Reactive Power Direction when Set Thresholds are Exceeded .................................................................. 3-331

3.36.8

Active Power Monitoring when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds ..............................................................3-332

3.36.9

Active Power Direction when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds ................................................................ 3-334

3.36.10

Reactive Power Monitoring when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds ..........................................................3-337

3.36.11

Reactive Power Direction when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds ............................................................ 3-338

3.36.12

Starting Signal with Direction .................................................................................................................... 3-341

3.37

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF) ........................................ 3-342

3.37.1

Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Failure Protection .........................................................................3-342

3.37.2

Readiness of Circuit Breaker Protection .................................................................................................... 3-343

3.37.3

Detecting a CB Tripping .............................................................................................................................3-343

3.37.4

Current Flow Monitoring ............................................................................................................................ 3-344

3.37.5

Evaluation of CB Status Signals .................................................................................................................3-345

3.37.6

Startup Criteria ..........................................................................................................................................3-346

3.37.7

Timer Stages and Output Logic ................................................................................................................. 3-346

3.37.8

Trip Commands ......................................................................................................................................... 3-348

3.37.9

Starting Trigger ......................................................................................................................................... 3-349

3.37.10

Fault Behind CB Protection ........................................................................................................................ 3-349

3.37.11

CB Synchronization Supervision ................................................................................................................ 3-350

3.38

Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Function Group CBM) .................................................. 3-351

3.38.1

Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Monitoring ....................................................................................3-351

3.38.2

Variants ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-351

3.38.3

CB Wear Characteristic ..............................................................................................................................3-352

3.38.4

Calculating the CB Wear State .................................................................................................................. 3-353

3.38.5

Operating Modes ....................................................................................................................................... 3-353

3.38.6

Cycle for Circuit Breaker Monitoring ..........................................................................................................3-353

3.38.7

Linking Control Functions with the Trip Command .................................................................................... 3-354

3.38.8

Pole-Selective Counter Values and Measured Values ................................................................................ 3-355

3.38.9

Resetting Measured Values ....................................................................................................................... 3-356

3.38.10

Setting Measured Values ........................................................................................................................... 3-356

3.38.11

Monitoring the Number of CB Operations ..................................................................................................3-358

3.38.12

Monitoring Ruptured Currents ................................................................................................................... 3-358

3.38.13

Blocking Circuit Breaker Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 3-359

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

Table of Contents

4

5

P139

3.39

Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON) ......................................... 3-360

3.39.1

Current Monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 3-360

3.39.2

Voltage Monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 3-361

3.39.3

Phase-Sequence Monitoring ...................................................................................................................... 3-362

3.39.4

“Fuse Failure” Monitoring of the Reference Voltage ..................................................................................3-364

3.40

Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT) ....................................................... 3-365

3.40.1

Enable/Disable the Limit Value Monitoring Function ................................................................................. 3-365

3.40.2

Monitoring Phase Currents and Phase Voltages ........................................................................................ 3-365

3.40.3

Monitoring the Neutral-Point Displacement Voltage ..................................................................................3-368

3.40.4

Monitoring the Linearized Measured DC Values ........................................................................................ 3-369

3.40.5

Monitoring the Reference Voltage ............................................................................................................. 3-370

3.40.6

Monitoring the Measured “PT 100” Temperature Value ............................................................................ 3-371

3.40.7

Monitoring the Measured Temperature Values T1 to T9 ............................................................................3-372

3.40.8

Open Circuit PT 100 ...................................................................................................................................3-373

3.40.9

Backup Sensors ......................................................................................................................................... 3-373

3.40.10

2-out-of-3 Monitoring .................................................................................................................................3-373

3.40.11

Application Example .................................................................................................................................. 3-376

3.41

Programmable Logic (Function Groups LOGIC and LOG_2) ..................................... 3-377

3.42

Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (Function Groups DEV01 to DEV10) ... 3-385

3.42.1

Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions ................................................................. 3-385

3.42.2

Designation of External Devices ................................................................................................................3-387

3.42.3

Bay Type Selection .................................................................................................................................... 3-388

3.42.4

Defining a Bay Panel Type .........................................................................................................................3-389

3.42.5

Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units ....................................................... 3-390

3.42.6

Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units ............................................................................ 3-392

3.42.7

Direct Motor Control .................................................................................................................................. 3-404

3.43

Three Position Drive (Function Groups TPDx) ......................................................... 3-413

3.43.1

Setting up a Three Position Drive .............................................................................................................. 3-413

3.43.2

Monitoring and Control .............................................................................................................................. 3-413

3.44

Interlocking Logic (Function Group ILOCK) ..............................................................3-415

3.44.1

IEC 61850 Reporting ..................................................................................................................................3-416

3.45

Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1) ....................................................3-417

3.46

Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1) ............................................................ 3-418

3.46.1

Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control ....................................................................................................3-420

3.47

Binary Counts (Function Group COUNT) ..................................................................3-423

3.47.1

Enable/Disable the Counting Function .......................................................................................................3-423

3.47.2

Debouncing ............................................................................................................................................... 3-423

3.47.3

Counting Function ..................................................................................................................................... 3-423

3.47.4

Transmitting the Counter Values via Communications Interface ...............................................................3-424

3.47.5

Counter Values Reset ................................................................................................................................ 3-424

DESIGN ............................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1

Designs ....................................................................................................................... 4-2

4.2

Dimensional Drawings ................................................................................................ 4-4

4.2.1

Dimensional Drawings for the 40 TE Case .....................................................................................................4-4

4.2.2

Dimensional Drawings for the 84 TE Case .....................................................................................................4-5

4.2.3

Detachable HMI ............................................................................................................................................. 4-7

4.3

Hardware Modules ...................................................................................................... 4-8

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION .......................................................................5-1
5.1

Unpacking and Packing ...............................................................................................5-2

5.2

Checking Nominal Data and Design Type ................................................................... 5-3

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

7

P139

Table of Contents

5.3

Location Requirements ............................................................................................... 5-4

5.3.1

Environmental Conditions ..............................................................................................................................5-4

5.3.2

Mechanical Conditions ...................................................................................................................................5-4

5.3.3

Electrical Conditions for Auxiliary Voltage of the Power Supply .................................................................... 5-4

5.3.4

Electromagnetic Conditions ...........................................................................................................................5-4

5.4

Installation .................................................................................................................. 5-5

5.5

Protective and Operational Grounding ......................................................................5-11

6

7

5.6

Connection ................................................................................................................5-12

5.6.1

Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits .............................................................................................. 5-12

5.6.2

Connecting the IRIG‑B Interface .................................................................................................................. 5-18

5.6.3

Connecting the Serial Interfaces ................................................................................................................. 5-19

5.7

Location and Connection Diagrams .......................................................................... 5-22

5.7.1

Location Diagrams .......................................................................................................................................5-22

5.7.2

Terminal Connection Diagrams P139‑420/421/422 ..................................................................................... 5-22

LOCAL CONTROL (HMI) ....................................................................................... 6-1
6.1

Local Control Panel (HMI) ............................................................................................6-1

6.2

Display and Keypad .................................................................................................... 6-2

6.2.1

Graphic Display ............................................................................................................................................. 6-2

6.2.2

Display Illumination ....................................................................................................................................... 6-2

6.2.3

Contrast of the Display .................................................................................................................................. 6-2

6.2.4

Short Description of Keys .............................................................................................................................. 6-3

6.3

Display Levels ............................................................................................................. 6-6

6.4

Availability of the Bay Panel ....................................................................................... 6-7

6.5

Display Panels on the Graphic Display ........................................................................6-8

6.6

Menu Tree and Data Points ......................................................................................... 6-9

6.7

List Data Points ......................................................................................................... 6-10

6.8

Note Concerning the Step-by-Step Descriptions ....................................................... 6-11

6.9

Changing Between Display Levels ............................................................................ 6-12

6.10

Control at Panel Level ............................................................................................... 6-13

6.10.1

Bay Panel .....................................................................................................................................................6-13

6.10.2

Signal Panel(s) .............................................................................................................................................6-23

6.10.3

Measured Value Panels on the Graphic Display ...........................................................................................6-26

6.10.4

Event Panel on the Graphic Display .............................................................................................................6-27

6.11

Control at the Menu Tree Level .................................................................................6-28

6.11.1

Navigation in the Menu Tree ....................................................................................................................... 6-28

6.11.2

Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode .............................................................................. 6-29

6.11.3

Change-Enabling Function ...........................................................................................................................6-30

6.11.4

Changing Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 6-33

6.11.5

List Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 6-34

6.11.6

Memory Readout ......................................................................................................................................... 6-37

6.11.7

Resetting ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-40

6.11.8

Password-Protected Control Actions ............................................................................................................ 6-41

6.11.9

Changing the Password ............................................................................................................................... 6-43

SETTINGS ............................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1

Paramete rs .............................................................................................................. 7-1

7.1.1

D e v i c e I d e n t i f i c a t i o n ............................................................................................................................. 7-4

7.1.2

C o n f i g u r a t i o n P a r a m e t e r s .................................................................................................................. 7-13

7.1.3

F u n c t i o n P a r a m e t e r s .......................................................................................................................... 7-112

8

INFORMATION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS ......................................................... 8-1

8

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

Table of Contents

9

10

P139

8.1

Ope ration ................................................................................................................. 8-1

8.1.1

C y c l i c V a l u e s ............................................................................................................................................ 8-1

8.1.2

C o n t r o l a n d T e s t i n g ............................................................................................................................8-153

8.1.3

O p e r a t i n g D a t a R e c o r d i n g ................................................................................................................8-170

8.2

Eve nts ................................................................................................................... 8-171

8.2.1

E v e n t C o u n t e r s .................................................................................................................................... 8-171

8.2.2

M e a s u r e d E v e n t D a t a .........................................................................................................................8-180

8.2.3

E v e n t R e c o r d i n g .................................................................................................................................. 8-188

IEC 61850 SETTINGS VIA IED CONFIGURATOR ....................................................9-1
9.1

Manage IED .................................................................................................................9-2

9.2

IED Details .................................................................................................................. 9-3

9.3

Communications ......................................................................................................... 9-4

9.4

SNTP ........................................................................................................................... 9-5

9.4.1

General Config ...............................................................................................................................................9-5

9.4.2

External Server 1 ...........................................................................................................................................9-5

9.4.3

External Server 2 ...........................................................................................................................................9-5

9.5

Dataset Definitions ..................................................................................................... 9-6

9.6

GOOSE Publishing ....................................................................................................... 9-7

9.6.1

System/LLN0 ................................................................................................................................................. 9-7

9.7

GOOSE Subscribing .....................................................................................................9-9

9.7.1

Mapped Inputs ...............................................................................................................................................9-9

9.8

Report Control Blocks ............................................................................................... 9-12

9.8.1

System/LLN0 ............................................................................................................................................... 9-12

9.9

Controls .....................................................................................................................9-13

9.9.1

Control Objects ............................................................................................................................................9-13

9.9.2

Uniqueness of Control ................................................................................................................................. 9-13

9.10

Measurements .......................................................................................................... 9-15

9.11

Configurable Data Attributes .................................................................................... 9-16

9.11.1

System/LLN0 ............................................................................................................................................... 9-16

COMMISSIONING ............................................................................................... 10-1
10.1

Safety Instructions .................................................................................................... 10-1

10.2

Commissioning Tests ................................................................................................ 10-3

10.2.1

Preparation ..................................................................................................................................................10-3

10.2.2

Tests ............................................................................................................................................................10-5

10.2.3

Checking the Binary Signal Inputs ............................................................................................................... 10-5

10.2.4

Checking the Output Relays ........................................................................................................................ 10-5

10.2.5

Checking the Current-Measuring Inputs ...................................................................................................... 10-7

10.2.6

Checking the Protection Function ................................................................................................................10-7

10.2.7

Checking the Correct Phase Connection of Current and Voltage Transformers with Load Current ............. 10-7

10.2.8

Checking the Correct Phase Connection of the Residual Current Transformer with Load Current .............. 10-8

10.2.9

Simple Check of the Correct Phase Connection of the Residual Current Transformer with Load Current
..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-8

10.2.10

Checking the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection Function ................................................................... 10-10

10.2.11

Checking the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection Function .................................................................... 10-10

10.2.12

Checking the Short-Circuit Direction Determination: Direction of the Phase Current Stages .................... 10-11

10.2.13

Short-Circuit Direction Determination: Checking the Direction of the Residual Current Stages ................ 10-11

10.2.14

Checking Protective Signaling ................................................................................................................... 10-12

10.2.15

Checking the Auto-Reclosing Function ...................................................................................................... 10-12

10.2.16

Checking the Motor Protection Function ....................................................................................................10-13

10.2.17

Checking the Thermal Overload Protection Function .................................................................................10-13

10.2.18

Checking the Time-Voltage Protection Function ........................................................................................ 10-14

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

9

P139

Table of Contents

10.2.19

Checking the Steady-State-Power Ground Fault Direction Detection ........................................................ 10-15

10.2.20

Ancillary Circuit for Systems with Ground Fault Compensation .................................................................10-15

10.2.21

Ancillary Circuit for Isolated Neutral-Point Systems ...................................................................................10-18

10.2.22

Checking the Transient Ground Fault Direction Determination ................................................................. 10-20

10.2.23

Checking Control Functions ....................................................................................................................... 10-20

10.2.24

Completing Commissioning ....................................................................................................................... 10-21

11

TROUBLESHOOTING ..........................................................................................11-1

12

MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1

Maintenance Procedures in the Power Supply Area .................................................. 12-2

12.2

Routine Functional Testing ....................................................................................... 12-3

12.3

Analog Input Circuits .................................................................................................12-4

12.4

Binary Opto Inputs .................................................................................................... 12-5

12.5

Binary Outputs .......................................................................................................... 12-6

12.6

Serial Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 12-7

13

STORAGE .......................................................................................................... 13-1

14

ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ..................................................................... 14-1

15

ORDER INFORMATION ....................................................................................... 15-1

A1

FUNCTION GROUPS ...........................................................................................A1-1

A2

INTERNAL SIGNALS ........................................................................................... A2-1

A3

GLOSSARY ........................................................................................................ A3-1
Modules ...................................................................................................................................... A3-1
Symbols ...................................................................................................................................... A3-1
Examples of Signal Names ......................................................................................................... A3-7
Symbols Used ............................................................................................................................. A3-8

A4

TELECONTROL INTERFACES ..............................................................................A4-1
A4.1

Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)
.................................................................................................................................. A4-1

A4.1.1

Interoperability ............................................................................................................................................A4-1

A4.2

Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103 ........................................................ A4-9

A4.2.1

Interoperability ............................................................................................................................................A4-9

A5

KEY TO THE LIST OF BAY TYPES ........................................................................A5-1

A6

LIST OF BAY TYPES ........................................................................................... A6-1

10

A6.1

Bay type No. 2 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ............................................... A6-1

A6.2

Bay type No. 3 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ............................................... A6-2

A6.3

Bay type No. 546 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar, direct motor control .................A6-3

A6.4

Bay type No. 4 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ............................................... A6-4

A6.5

Bay type No. 5 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ............................................... A6-5

A6.6

Bay type No. 6 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ............................................... A6-6

A6.7

Bay type No. 523 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ........................................... A6-7

A6.8

Bay type No. 549 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar, direct motor control .................A6-8
P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

Table of Contents

P139

A6.9

Bay type No. 244 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ........................................... A6-9

A6.10

Bay type No. 544 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ......................................... A6-10

A6.11

Bay type No. 567 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ......................................... A6-11

A6.12

Bay type No. 521 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ......................................... A6-12

A6.13

Bay type No. 519 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ......................................... A6-13

A6.14

Bay type No. 7 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar .......................................A6-14

A6.15

Bay type No. 8 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar .......................................A6-15

A6.16

Bay type No. 9 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar .......................................A6-16

A6.17

Bay type No. 10 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar .....................................A6-17

A6.18

Bay type No. 11 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar .....................................A6-18

A6.19

Bay type No. 12 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar ....................... A6-19

A6.20

Bay type No. 13 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar ....................... A6-20

A6.21

Bay type No. 14 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar ....................... A6-21

A6.22

Bay type No. 15 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar ....................... A6-22

A6.23

Bay type No. 16 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar ....................... A6-23

A6.24

Bay type No. 17 Feeder bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar ...................................A6-24

A6.25

Bay type No. 504 Feeder bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar .................................A6-25

A6.26

Bay type No. 541 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ......................................... A6-26

A6.27

Bay type No. 18 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar, direct motor control .................A6-27

A6.28

Bay type No. 19 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ........................................... A6-28

A6.29

Bay type No. 20 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ........................................... A6-29

A6.30

Bay type No. 21 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ........................................... A6-30

A6.31

Bay type No. 557 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ......................................... A6-31

A6.32

Bay type No. 22 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar, direct motor control .................A6-32

A6.33

Bay type No. 23 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ........................................... A6-33

A6.34

Bay type No. 24 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ........................................... A6-34

A6.35

Bay type No. 25 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ........................................... A6-35

A6.36

Bay type No. 508 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ......................................... A6-36

A6.37

Bay type No. 26 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar .....................................A6-37

A6.38

Bay type No. 27 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar, direct motor control .......... A6-38

A6.39

Bay type No. 28 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar .....................................A6-39

A6.40

Bay type No. 29 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar .....................................A6-40

A6.41

Bay type No. 30 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar, direct motor control .......... A6-41

A6.42

Bay type No. 31 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar .....................................A6-42

A6.43

Bay type No. 32 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar .....................................A6-43

A6.44

Bay type No. 33 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar .....................................A6-44

A6.45

Bay type No. 34 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar ....................... A6-45

A6.46

Bay type No. 35 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar, direct motor control
................................................................................................................................ A6-46

A6.47

Bay type No. 36 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar ....................... A6-47

A6.48

Bay type No. 37 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar ....................... A6-48

A6.49

Bay type No. 38 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar, direct motor control
................................................................................................................................ A6-49

A6.50

Bay type No. 39 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar ....................... A6-50

A6.51

Bay type No. 40 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar ....................... A6-51

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

11

P139

12

Table of Contents

A6.52

Bay type No. 41 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar ....................... A6-52

A6.53

Bay type No. 503 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar ..................... A6-53

A6.54

Bay type No. 507 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar ..................... A6-54

A6.55

Bay type No. 220 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar, direct motor control ...............A6-55

A6.56

Bay type No. 42 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar, direct motor control .................A6-56

A6.57

Bay type No. 43 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ........................................... A6-57

A6.58

Bay type No. 221 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ......................................... A6-58

A6.59

Bay type No. 44 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ........................................... A6-59

A6.60

Bay type No. 45 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar, direct motor control ............... A6-60

A6.61

Bay type No. 46 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......................................... A6-61

A6.62

Bay type No. 47 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......................................... A6-62

A6.63

Bay type No. 48 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......................................... A6-63

A6.64

Bay type No. 49 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar, direct motor control ............... A6-64

A6.65

Bay type No. 50 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......................................... A6-66

A6.66

Bay type No. 51 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......................................... A6-67

A6.67

Bay type No. 52 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......................................... A6-68

A6.68

Bay type No. 53 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......................................... A6-69

A6.69

Bay type No. 526 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar ........................................ A6-70

A6.70

Bay type No. 54 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar, direct motor control .........A6-71

A6.71

Bay type No. 55 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ....................................A6-72

A6.72

Bay type No. 56 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ....................................A6-73

A6.73

Bay type No. 57 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ....................................A6-74

A6.74

Bay type No. 58 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar, direct motor control .........A6-75

A6.75

Bay type No. 59 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ....................................A6-77

A6.76

Bay type No. 60 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ....................................A6-78

A6.77

Bay type No. 61 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ....................................A6-79

A6.78

Bay type No. 62 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ....................................A6-80

A6.79

Bay type No. 63 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar, direct motor control
................................................................................................................................ A6-81

A6.80

Bay type No. 64 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar ...................... A6-82

A6.81

Bay type No. 65 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar ...................... A6-83

A6.82

Bay type No. 66 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar ...................... A6-84

A6.83

Bay type No. 67 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar, direct motor control
................................................................................................................................ A6-85

A6.84

Bay type No. 68 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar ...................... A6-87

A6.85

Bay type No. 69 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar ...................... A6-88

A6.86

Bay type No. 70 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar ...................... A6-89

A6.87

Bay type No. 71 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar ...................... A6-90

A6.88

Bay type No. 72 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......................................... A6-91

A6.89

Bay type No. 73 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......................................... A6-92

A6.90

Bay type No. 74 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......................................... A6-93

A6.91

Bay type No. 75 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......................................... A6-95

A6.92

Bay type No. 76 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......................................... A6-96

A6.93

Bay type No. 77 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......................................... A6-97

A6.94

Bay type No. 78 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......................................... A6-99
P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

Table of Contents

P139

A6.95

Bay type No. 79 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ..................................A6-101

A6.96

Bay type No. 80 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ..................................A6-102

A6.97

Bay type No. 81 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ..................................A6-103

A6.98

Bay type No. 82 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ..................................A6-105

A6.99

Bay type No. 83 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ..................................A6-106

A6.100

Bay type No. 84 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ..................................A6-107

A6.101

Bay type No. 85 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ..................................A6-109

A6.102

Bay type No. 86 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar, direct motor control ............. A6-111

A6.103

Bay type No. 87 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar ........................................ A6-112

A6.104

Bay type No. 88 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar ........................................ A6-113

A6.105

Bay type No. 89 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar, direct motor control ............. A6-114

A6.106

Bay type No. 90 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar ........................................ A6-115

A6.107

Bay type No. 91 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar ........................................ A6-116

A6.108

Bay type No. 92 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar ........................................ A6-117

A6.109

Bay type No. 93 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar, direct motor control ............. A6-118

A6.110

Bay type No. 94 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar ........................................ A6-119

A6.111

Bay type No. 95 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar ........................................ A6-120

A6.112

Bay type No. 96 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar, direct motor control ............. A6-121

A6.113

Bay type No. 97 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar ........................................ A6-123

A6.114

Bay type No. 98 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar ........................................ A6-124

A6.115

Bay type No. 99 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar ........................................ A6-125

A6.116

Bay type No. 100 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar, direct motor control .....A6-126

A6.117

Bay type No. 101 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ................................A6-127

A6.118

Bay type No. 102 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ................................A6-128

A6.119

Bay type No. 103 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar, direct motor control .....A6-129

A6.120

Bay type No. 104 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ................................A6-130

A6.121

Bay type No. 105 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ................................A6-131

A6.122

Bay type No. 106 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ................................A6-132

A6.123

Bay type No. 107 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar, direct motor control .....A6-133

A6.124

Bay type No. 108 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ................................A6-134

A6.125

Bay type No. 109 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ................................A6-135

A6.126

Bay type No. 110 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar, direct motor control .....A6-136

A6.127

Bay type No. 111 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ................................A6-138

A6.128

Bay type No. 112 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ................................A6-139

A6.129

Bay type No. 113 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ................................A6-140

A6.130

Bay type No. 114 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar, direct motor
control .....................................................................................................................A6-141

A6.131

Bay type No. 115 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar .................. A6-142

A6.132

Bay type No. 116 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar .................. A6-143

A6.133

Bay type No. 117 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar, direct motor
control .....................................................................................................................A6-144

A6.134

Bay type No. 118 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar .................. A6-145

A6.135

Bay type No. 119 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar .................. A6-146

A6.136

Bay type No. 120 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar .................. A6-147

A6.137

Bay type No. 222 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar, direct motor control ........... A6-148

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

13

144 Bay type No......A6-169 A6..................... single busbar ...170 Bay type No......................... single busbar .........A6-165 A6............. 124 Feeder bay with circuit breaker....173 Bay type No... A6-195 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 ............ 122 Feeder bay with circuit breaker........... 223 Feeder bay with circuit breaker.. single busbar ......... single busbar ........... 135 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.......145 Bay type No....................160 Bay type No.......161 Bay type No........... A6-179 A6............... A6-163 A6..141 Bay type No...........143 Bay type No..... single busbar . A6-149 A6...... 141 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker................A6-177 A6.. 149 Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector...159 Bay type No.177 Bay type No. 142 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker...... A6-152 A6.......166 Bay type No... single busbar ....... 564 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.....A6-182 A6..........................A6-183 A6. double busbar . direct motor control ...............148 Bay type No......................142 Bay type No..... 558 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker...............167 Bay type No...... 127 Feeder bay with circuit breaker..........171 Bay type No........164 Bay type No...... 147 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.. direct motor control .. direct motor control . 552 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker..A6-191 A6. 140 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker............ double busbar ..........A6-188 A6.............. 137 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker...... 146 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker. A6-193 A6.. single busbar .................. A6-194 A6..... 148 Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector.................................139 Bay type No............................................162 Bay type No..... single busbar ..... 224 Feeder bay with circuit breaker............153 Bay type No............... A6-162 A6...........A6-172 A6........... 545 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.......... single busbar .... single busbar...................... 133 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker. double busbar.................... single busbar ...... A6-173 A6.... 543 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker...........................A6-171 A6............. double busbar.P139 14 Table of Contents A6..158 Bay type No... 548 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker....A6-180 A6............... A6-178 A6.......152 Bay type No... single busbar....................... A6-154 A6............. 143 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker......... 125 Feeder bay with circuit breaker................... A6-157 A6. 553 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker....................A6-189 A6............176 Bay type No.A6-166 A6........154 Bay type No.... single busbar ....................................................... double busbar ................... single busbar ... double busbar ........A6-190 A6....150 Bay type No....A6-170 A6.......163 Bay type No....... 517 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker. single busbar ...................................... double busbar ...... double busbar .................... single busbar ................................... 134 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker. 126 Feeder bay with circuit breaker.... A6-185 A6......A6-168 A6........ single busbar ..............149 Bay type No....151 Bay type No............. 139 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.......147 Bay type No.. double busbar ....156 Bay type No............ single busbar ........ single busbar ............ direct motor control ... direct motor control ............................ 144 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.............................. 225 Feeder bay with circuit breaker.........140 Bay type No......................A6-181 A6... single busbar..... 145 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.... double busbar...A6-174 A6............ single busbar . single busbar ..... 542 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker............... A6-156 A6.A6-175 A6..........A6-184 A6............................. double busbar ............. 547 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker..............................A6-167 A6............................................169 Bay type No............................. single busbar ... single busbar ... 150 Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector............... A6-186 A6...157 Bay type No............... direct motor control .................................138 Bay type No.................. direct motor control ...................168 Bay type No... A6-155 A6....146 Bay type No. single busbar... single busbar ............174 Bay type No.. A6-160 A6.... A6-158 A6.... direct motor control ....... A6-150 A6.. single busbar ....... 528 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker......... single busbar ....172 Bay type No............ 123 Feeder bay with circuit breaker..175 Bay type No...........A6-176 A6. single busbar............. 136 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker..165 Bay type No........... 121 Feeder bay with circuit breaker.......... 128 Feeder bay with circuit breaker........155 Bay type No........................... 138 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.............

....... 514 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.....................................A6-240 A6.................... single busbar .............................................192 Bay type No........ direct motor control ....................A6-216 A6.................... double busbar ......A6-210 A6...........193 Bay type No.. double busbar ...... A6-232 A6....189 Bay type No.......179 Bay type No................ 156 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker......... 227 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker....................... 153 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker............... double busbar .......A6-215 A6....... 161 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.. double busbar ............... 243 Bus sectionalizer bay with other switchgear unit.....209 Bay type No........A6-237 A6.212 Bay type No................................................................ 168 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker........ double busbar ....... direct motor control ....... double busbar...............................A6-238 A6..197 Bay type No.......................................... 162 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.... single busbar . A6-222 A6........................ 228 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.............191 Bay type No......... 158 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.. direct motor control ....................A6-236 A6........... A6-226 A6.....195 Bay type No...202 Bay type No..... A6-230 A6.......182 Bay type No............. double busbar ..................................................... double busbar ...... double busbar..... 554 Bus sectionalizer bay with other switchgear unit............ 165 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.............................. 166 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker..........A6-209 A6.................205 Bay type No................................. 170 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker................. double busbar.......... single busbar......................... A6-242 A6....... double busbar ........187 Bay type No................... 505 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker........198 Bay type No.A6-220 A6...... 151 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker......... direct motor control .... 513 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.................... 242 Bus sectionalizer bay with other switchgear unit................................................................ double busbar ............................................ double busbar .......188 Bay type No.................................. direct motor control .............. 555 Bus sectionalizer bay with other switchgear unit.. 226 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker................. direct motor control ............................A6-201 A6..................180 Bay type No..... double busbar .....190 Bay type No.......... single busbar...................A6-212 A6............ double busbar ........... double busbar... 231 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker........ double busbar..A6-217 A6.......181 Bay type No.... direct motor ................ direct motor control ..................................................................................................................178 Bay type No.......... double busbar............... 159 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker......... double busbar............... A6-243 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 15 ............................................ 163 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker..................................183 Bay type No......................................... direct motor control ........... direct motor control ..................... 197 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker.........A6-208 A6..........A6-224 control A6................. 152 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker. A6-206 A6... 230 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker............. 229 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.................207 Bay type No.....199 Bay type No.... double busbar ...................... direct motor ... 511 Bus sectionalizer bay with other switchgear unit....................206 Bay type No............ double busbar............. 167 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker...........196 Bay type No.....................208 Bay type No.184 Bay type No.....211 Bay type No...186 Bay type No...................... A6-204 A6............... double busbar ........A6-223 A6..... 157 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.....A6-211 A6....... A6-228 A6....A6-221 control A6..204 Bay type No.A6-202 A6..200 Bay type No.......................... 160 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker..............210 Bay type No............ double busbar............. double busbar ............................. single busbar ... A6-196 A6......................... direct motor control ...... double busbar......................... direct motor control .......194 Bay type No.................................... 155 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker.. 169 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker................ double busbar ......................201 Bay type No.....................A6-218 A6.........A6-234 A6......A6-214 A6.......... 154 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker....... A6-198 A6........ 164 Bus sectionalizer bay with other switchgear unit.....203 Bay type No................A6-200 A6....... double busbar .... direct motor control .....................Table of Contents P139 A6................185 Bay type No...................... double busbar.................................A6-225 A6...............A6-235 A6......... double busbar ........ double busbar...........................

....252 Bay type No....251 Bay type No.....246 Bay type No.....214 Bay type No.240 Bay type No...... direct motor control .225 Bay type No.... double busbar...... 219 Bus coupler and sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker....... single busbar.... direct motor control ...232 Bay type No... single busbar ....218 Bay type No............231 Bay type No. 203 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker.. A6-289 A6..... A6-290 A6.... 202 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker... direct motor . A6-262 A6.... double busbar........ 177 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit.. direct motor control ... A6-253 A6.....249 Bay type No...... single busbar ................. A6-245 A6...... double busbar.. double busbar .....216 Bay type No.. A6-294 A6....220 Bay type No...... double busbar .. A6-247 A6........... 172 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit..243 Bay type No.......... double busbar.238 Bay type No.. A6-266 A6......... 208 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker..................236 Bay type No... 212 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker..... A6-258 A6....... 205 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker.........237 Bay type No. direct motor control ........ double busbar .. 232 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit.. 198 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker.... double busbar ........... 240 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker..........221 Bay type No............. A6-255 A6.. direct motor control .. A6-260 A6....245 Bay type No... 237 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker.. 565 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker....... A6-276 A6............... double busbar ............. double busbar ........... A6-259 A6........ A6-295 A6....227 Bay type No.. 540 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit.........224 Bay type No........223 Bay type No.................. A6-288 A6............... direct motor control .... A6-272 A6. double busbar . A6-270 A6........... 174 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit...A6-297 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 ................... A6-257 A6.......... 506 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit.... single busbar....... 210 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker........... double busbar .............. 216 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker.......... 200 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker............... double busbar... double busbar................228 Bay type No.242 Bay type No.253 Bay type No.................................... 245 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker..230 Bay type No. 238 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker.... A6-291 A6.... A6-292 A6. A6-273 A6........ single busbar ............ 173 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit... double busbar ....... double busbar .. double busbar ....... double busbar . double busbar .. 214 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker... 213 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker.219 Bay type No................ A6-293 A6....244 Bay type No......................... 207 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker....229 Bay type No......... double busbar ..... 218 Bus coupler and sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker..217 Bay type No.. A6-263 A6........... direct motor control .... A6-278 A6........... A6-284 A6..... 236 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker............. A6-282 A6... 206 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker.......................... 204 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker. 556 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker......... 239 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker.... A6-252 A6........213 Bay type No..................... direct motor control ... 176 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit. 175 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit. A6-265 A6.. A6-250 A6.................... double busbar. 178 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit... A6-267 A6....254 Bay type No...........250 Bay type No......... A6-274 A6.. single busbar ............... direct motor control .................... double busbar .... A6-256 A6.....255 16 Bay type No.....247 Bay type No....... double busbar ............... double busbar ........... 215 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker.... single busbar ...................... A6-261 A6... A6-287 A6........235 Bay type No........ double busbar ..... double busbar. double busbar .. 241 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker............................. single busbar ... A6-249 A6..................... direct motor control .................215 Bay type No....... single busbar .. double busbar .222 Bay type No.. double busbar ...... single busbar ...... double busbar .....226 Bay type No.............................. A6-281 A6........... A6-285 A6.241 Bay type No......... double busbar..248 Bay type No......239 Bay type No...... double busbar ... 199 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker.. single busbar.... A6-251 A6......... direct motor control ..233 Bay type No.. 201 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker............ 209 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker... 171 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit.........A6-296 control A6...... 563 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker................................. A6-280 A6. 211 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker.....P139 Table of Contents A6... A6-246 A6.... 217 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker.......234 Bay type No........... A6-269 A6..

188 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit............ double busbar..256 Bay type No..........................262 Bay type No............. A6-314 A6..... 234 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit.............. direct motor control ........276 Bay type No.............. A6-330 A6.......... 131 Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit............ double busbar.................261 Bay type No....... 1 Other bay type with other switchgear unit...........272 Bay type No... A6-329 A6......... without busbar ..................... A6-328 A6........ A6-299 A6...........257 Bay type No.......... 560 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit........................................................ single busbar ..... double busbar ..277 Bay type No...................... double busbar ...... direct motor .......... direct motor control ..279 Bay type No....275 Bay type No.............. double busbar .... A6-302 A6.291 Bay type No...... double busbar...... 183 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit... double busbar..... 193 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit... 196 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit....... A6-306 A6.... single busbar ....288 Bay type No......A6-315 A6....Table of Contents P139 A6..286 Bay type No... A6-304 A6.. 129 Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit.................... A6-307 A6........ A6-310 A6.............A6-319 control A6...........266 Bay type No...................................A6-318 A6. 192 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit...........264 Bay type No...... A6-333 A6. A7-1 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 17 .................. A6-313 A6.... 559 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit.................... 181 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit. A6-301 A6............................ double busbar ... 191 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit................A6-325 A6......... double busbar ....... A6-317 A6.. A6-309 A6....... 186 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit........A6-316 control A6.......... 190 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit................... single busbar ..... 189 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit.278 A6..... double busbar .................................. A6-298 A6........ 180 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit...............263 Bay type No..... double busbar..................................... 194 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit............................ 132 Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit..... without busbar ........ direct motor ......285 Bay type No.................... 185 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit.................................... A6-312 A6.......269 Bay type No.......................267 Bay type No............................259 Bay type No................... direct motor control ................................283 Bay type No.... 983 Other bay type with other switchgear unit. 184 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit....284 Bay type No... 187 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit...274 Bay type No........................273 Bay type No......290 Bay type No..........270 Bay type No......................268 Bay type No................... 980 Other bay type with other switchgear unit... double busbar .....282 Bay type No.. double busbar . double busbar .................................... double busbar .... A6-334 P139 VERSION HISTORY ..........258 Bay type No. without busbar ............. without busbar ........... double busbar ... double busbar ............... direct motor ..A6-321 control A7 A6........ direct motor control .. double busbar.289 Bay type No.............. double busbar ............................................A6-322 A6.................... double busbar ...... 510 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit....................... double busbar .. single busbar........................................ 195 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit......... direct motor control ......................................... double busbar ........... 530 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit.....................287 Bay type No.... 182 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit.280 Bay type No......A6-327 A6........................ double busbar ...... A6-303 A6........... 982 Other bay type with other switchgear unit............ 509 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit...... A6-326 A6........ A6-320 Bay type No.. double busbar ........ A6-324 A6. 179 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit......... A6-305 A6....................................................271 Bay type No... A6-311 A6.... direct motor control ............... 233 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit...................... 981 Other bay type with other switchgear unit.......281 Bay type No.. A6-300 A6.260 Bay type No.......... without busbar ................................................ A6-323 A6........ double busbar............... 529 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit.... A6-331 A6. double busbar.265 Bay type No........ double busbar ............ A6-308 A6....................... 235 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit....... 130 Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit...........

P139 18 Table of Contents P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

1-2: P139 in a 84 TE sized case. The protection functions available in the P139 provide selective short-circuit protection. 1-1: P139 in a 40 TE sized case. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 1-1 .P139 1 APPLICATION AND SCOPE 1. Fig. Fig.1 Overview The P139 time-overcurrent protection and control device is a one-box solution for protection and control.and highvoltage systems. ground fault protection. and overload protection in medium.

The P139 is equipped with a large number of protection and control functions. by the direct connection option for current and voltage transformers. The control functions are designed for the control of up to six electrically operated switchgear units equipped with plant status signaling and located in the bay of a medium-voltage substation (or a high-voltage station with basic topology). and by the comprehensive interlocking capabilities.P139 1 Application and Scope The systems can be operated as impedance-grounded. and versatile relay output contacts. These features give the user the means to adapt the P139 to the protection and control capacity required in a specific application. During operation. resonant-grounded. grounded-neutral or isolated-neutral systems. 1-2 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . The powerful programmable logic provided by the protection device also makes it possible to accommodate special applications. The P139 has almost 300 predefined Bay Types stored for selection and it is also possible to load user-defined bay templates. The relevant protection parameters can be stored in four independent parameter subsets in order to adapt the protection device to different operating and power system management conditions. transformers and motors. the user-friendly interface makes it easy to set the device parameters and allows safe operation of the substation by preventing nonpermissible switching operations. This simplifies the handling of switch bay protection and control technology from planning to commission. The number of external auxiliary devices required is largely minimized by the integration of binary signal inputs operating from any auxiliary voltage. The multitude of protection functions incorporated into the P139 enable the user to cover a wide range of applications in the protection of cable and line sections. These can be individually configured and cancelled.

phase selective w/o VTs with VTs ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ (includes negative-sequence overcurrent protection) 51 P/ Q/ ItpPhs. four stages./ N ItpEft./ DtpResRDIRx SCDD Short-circuit direction determination 50/ 27 PSOF1 SOTF Switch on to fault protection ✓ ✓ 85 PSCH1 PSIG Protective signaling ✓ ✓ 79 RREC1 ARC Auto-reclosing control (three-pole) ✓ ✓ 25 RSYN1 ASC Automatic synchronism check (✓) 67W/ YN PSDE1 GFDSS Ground fault direction determination using steadystate values or admittance evaluation ✓ PTEF1 TGFD Transient ground fault direction determination (✓) 37/ 48/ 49/ 49LR/ 50S/ 66 MotPMRI1 / MotPMSS1 / MotPTTR1 / ZMOT1 MP Motor protection ✓ ✓ 49 ThmPTTR1 THERM Thermal overload protection ✓ ✓ Coolant temperature measuring (using MEASI) (✓) (✓) Unbalance protection ✓ ✓ 46 Inverse-time overcurrent protection./ 47 P/ Q/ VtpNgs. IDMT2) 67 DtpPhs./ P<> PdpRealPDyPx Power directional protection ✓ 50/ 62 BF RBRFx CBF Circuit breaker failure protection ✓ ✓ XCBR1 CBM Circuit breaker supervision ✓ ✓ AlmGGIO1 MCMON Measuring-circuit monitoring ✓ ✓ 30/ 74 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 1-3 ./ DtpEft. phase selective (includes negative-sequence overcurrent protection) UbpNgsPTOCx I2> ✓ 27/ 59/ VtpPhs./ DtpNgsPTCOx DTOC Function Definite-time overcurrent protection./ N VtpPss.P139 1 Application and Scope Protection functions P139 ANSI IEC 61850 Function group 50/ 51 P/ Q/ N DtpPhs. one stage./ ItpNgsPTCOx (IDMT1./ VtpRefPTyVx V<> Time-Voltage Protection ✓ 81 FrqPTyFx f<> Frequency protection ✓ 32/ 37 PdpAct.

RS 422 / 485 or fiber optic (✓) CLK IRIGB Time synchronization IRIG-B (✓) COMM3 InterMiCOM protective interface (✓) IEC Communication interface Ethernet (✓) GOOSE IEC 61850 (✓) 16E 16E 1-4 GosGGIOx P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P139 1 Application and Scope Protection functions ANSI LGC IEC 61850 P139 Function group Function w/o VTs with VTs LIMIT Limit value monitoring ✓ ✓ PHAR1 MAIN Inrush stabilization ✓ ✓ PloGGIOx LOGIC / LOG_2 Programmable logic ✓ ✓ Control functions P139 ANSI IEC 61850 Function group Function 52 XCBRx / XSWIx / CSWIx DEV01 to DEV10 Control and monitoring of three or six switchgear units (✓) TPD1 to TPD4 Control and monitoring of up to 4 “Three Position Drives” (direct motor control) (✓) CtlGGIO2 CMD_1 Single-pole commands (✓) CtlGGIO1 SIG_1 Single-pole signals (✓) ILOCK Interlocking logic (✓) COUNT Binary counter ✓ LGC CntGGIO1 Communication functions ANSI IEC 61850 P139 Function group Function 16S COMM1. COMM2 2 communication interfaces serial.

Modbus.N IDMT2 67 P. or optionally up to 6. DNP3.Q.Q. Overload Ground Fault LIMIT 85 PSIG 49 37/48/49/50S/66 46 THERM MP I2> LOGIC 50BF CBF Metering LOG_2 CBM MCMON 25 ASC 79 ARC 67W/YN GFDSS Disturbance TGFD I V 27/59/47 V<> 81 f<> 32 P<> COUNT SIG_1 CMD_1 MEASI MEASO always available with VT inputs further options P139 Feeder Management and Bay Control Unit Fig. ✓ = Standard.N DTOC COMM2 51 P. -103.N IDMT1 InterMiCOM IEC Communications to SCADA / substation control / RTU / modem . two settable output values (✓) Miscellaneous functions ANSI P139 IEC 61850 Function group Function LLN0.SGCB PSS Parameter subset selection ✓ PTRCx / RDRE1 FT_RC Fault recording ✓ “w/o VTs” = P139 without voltage transformers (ordering option).. ILOCK Direct Motor Control of up to 4 Three Position Drives. DEV Vref TPD COMM1 51 P. For a list of all available function groups see the Appendix.. (✓) = Ordering option.N SCDD 50 SOTF SelfMonitoring IRIGB Recording and data acquisition. Courier resp.Q. 50/51 P. analog inputs and outputs ANSI IEC 61850 Function group Function Mmuxxx 26 RtdGGIO1 P139 MEASI IdcGGIO1 MEASO Measuring ✓ RTD input (✓) Measuring data input 20 mA. switchgear units. one settable input value (✓) Measuring data output 20 mA. via RS485 or fiber optics using IEC 60870-5-101. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 1-5 . 1-3: Functional diagram. via RJ45 or fiber optics using IEC 61850.P139 1 Application and Scope Measured value functions. “with VTs” = P139 with voltage transformers (ordering option). Control/Monitoring to 3.

In this way the protection and control functions can be included in or excluded from the configuration. thus simplifying the menu. Unused or cancelled function groups are hidden to the user. they are arranged on the branch “General Functions” of the menu tree. with just one model version.2 1 Application and Scope General Functions Functions listed in the tables above are self-contained function groups and can be individually configured or de-configured according to the specific application requirements. On the other hand simple and clear parameter settings can be made.P139 1. 1-6 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . This concept provides a large choice of functions and makes wide-ranging application of the protection device possible.

All further commands will be refused during control command execution. If a non-permissible status would result from the switching action then the issuing of such a switching command is refused and an alarm is issued. The contents of these counters are transmitted cyclically via the serial link.1 Application and Scope 1. with and without station interlocking. If not all binary outputs are required by the bay type then these vacant binary outputs can be freely utilized for other purposes.3 P139 Control Functions Switchgear contact positions are acquired by binary signal inputs. The interlocking conditions can be adapted to the actual bay and station topology. The counter values are stored so that they are not lost if the supply voltage should fail.g. When the P139 is included in a station control system the local interlocking can easily be integrated with the overall system interlocking. for each Bay Panel in the default setting. Each binary signal input for signals from switchgear and single-pole operations can have the debouncing and chatter suppression from eight groups assigned. Besides issuing switching commands binary outputs may also be triggered by persistent commands. If the bay and station topology are found to be valid the switching command is issued. For the acquisition of binary counters. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 1-7 . CB readiness). The interlocking logic is stored in form of bay interlocking. and it then monitors the operating time of the switchgear units. it will signal this information (e. If the protection device detects that a switchgear unit has failed. Output relays are available to control a maximum of 6 two-pole switchgear units. When the P139 is not included in a station control system then bay interlocking is applied without station interlocking. The P139 sends control signals only after it has checked the readiness and validity to carry out such commands. The double-command lockout feature is a fixed part of the integrated control logic. up to four binary inputs may be configured. for which the debouncing and chatter time can be individually set. Counting continues from the stored value as the initial value when the P139 restarts.g. Before a switching command is issued the interlocking logic on the P139 checks if this new switchgear status corresponds with the bay and station topology. Interlocking display and operation correspond to the programmable logic. Up to 40 operation signals can be acquired though binary signal inputs and they are processed according to their primary significance (e. by configuration to a LED indicator). that can signal and process a maximum of 10 two-pole contact positions.

4 1 Application and Scope Global Functions In addition to the listed features. 1-8 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . the P139 is equipped with the following global functions: ● Parameter subset selection ● System measurements to support the user during commissioning. and extensive self-monitoring.P139 1. the residual current as well as the three phase-to-ground voltages and the neutral-point displacement voltage). testing and operation ● Operating data recording (time-tagged event logging) ● Overload data acquisition ● Overload recording (time-tagged event logging) ● Ground fault data acquisition ● Ground fault recording (time-tagged event logging) ● Fault recording (time-tagged event logging together with fault value recording of the three phase currents.

5 P139 Design The P139 is modular in design. The plug-in modules are housed in a robust aluminum case and electrically interconnected via one analog p/c board and one digital p/c board. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 1-9 .1 Application and Scope 1.

and a limitation to lower nominal currents (10 mA. 1-10 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . The nominal voltage range of the binary signal inputs (opto-coupler) is 24 to 250 V DC. 1 on the analog module Y(4I)) are lead-compensated and balanced. The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring. The characteristics are defined by 3 adjustable interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA. Two selectable measured variables (cyclically updated measured operating data and stored measured fault data) can be output as a burden-independent direct current via the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. a selectable measured variable can be output in BCD-coded form by contacts. All output relays can be utilized for signaling and command purposes. The optional (up to 10) inputs for resistance thermometers (9 on the temperature p/c board. including 6 dedicated to control 3 switchgear units ● 10 binary signal inputs (opto-coupler) including 6 inputs dedicated to monitor 3 switchgear units Optionally available are: ● 4 or 5 voltage measuring inputs ● additional binary module X(6I 6O) to monitor and control 3 additional switchgear units ● additional binary module X(6O) or X(6I 3O) ● one or two binary modules X(24I) with additional binary signal inputs with user-configurable function assignment With the maximum number of binary signal inputs and output relays fitted.6 1 Application and Scope Inputs and Outputs The following inputs and outputs are available with the basic device: ● 4 current-measuring inputs ● 14 output relays. The nominal voltage ranges are 60 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. As an option there is a variant available for the lower nominal voltage range 24 V to 60 V DC. The nominal currents and nominal voltages of the standard measuring inputs can be set. As an option binary signal input modules with a higher operate threshold are available.P139 1. zero suppression defined by a setting. knee-point definition for fine scaling. for example) for slave-side open-circuit monitoring. 10 switchgear units can be controlled and 6 of these can be 2pole controlled by using pre-defined standard bay-types. for example). Where sufficient output relays are available. plus the option of linearizing the input variable via 20 adjustable interpolation points. The auxiliary voltage input for the power supply is also designed for an extended range. freely-configurable.

7 P139 Control and Display ● Local control panel with LC-display (16 lines of 21 characters each with a resolution of 128 x 128 pixels) ● 17 LED indicators. 12 with user-definable functional assignment ● PC interface ● Communication interfaces (optional) P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 1-11 .1 Application and Scope 1.

P139 1. IEC 870‑5‑101. A direct link to another MiCOM protection device can be set up by applying the optional InterMiCOM interface (COMM3). the P139 can be wired either to the substation control system or to a telecontrol system. there is an Ethernet interface for communication per IEC 61850 available instead of channel 1. 1-12 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .0. DNP 3.8 1 Application and Scope Information Interfaces Information is exchanged through the local control panel. MODBUS or Courier). This channel is optionally available with a switchable protocol (per IEC 60870‑5‑103. the PC interface. As an order option. Using the first channel of the communication interfaces (COMM1). or two optional communication interfaces (channel 1 and channel 2). communication protocol per IEC 60870‑5‑103 only) is designed for remote control. The second communication interface (COMM2. External clock synchronization can be accomplished via one of the communication protocols or by using the optional IRIG‑B input.

version -313 -420/421/422 -651. Declaration of Conformity The product designated “P139 Feeder Management and Bay Control” has been designed and manufactured in conformance with the European standards EN 60255‑26 and EN 60255‑27 and with the “EMC Directive” and the “Low Voltage Directive” issued by the Council of the European Community.P139 2 TECHNICAL DATA 2. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 2-1 .1 Conformity Notice Applicable to P139.

● Vertical ± 30°. (p. and the location and terminal connection diagrams (Section 5. 4-4)).1 General Device Data Design ● Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation. ● Flush-mounted case: ■ ■ ■ ● IP 50 for the case (excluding the rear connection area) IP 20 for the rear connection area. or ● Flush-mounted case for 19″ cabinets and for control panels. 11 kg Dimensions and Connections See dimensional drawings (Section 4. ring-terminal connection Surface-mounted case: ■ ■ IP 50 for the case IP 50 for the fully enclosed connection area with the supplied rubber grommets fitted Weight ● 40 TE case: Approx.2. (p. Installation Position Degree of Protection Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529. 2-2 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 7 kg ● 84 TE case: Approx.P139 2 Technical Data 2.7. 5-22)). ● IP 52 for the front panel.2. pin-terminal connection IP 10 for the rear connection area.2 General Data 2.

IRIG-B Interface (X11) ■ BNC plug Communication interface IEC 61850 ● Fiber (X7. X32) ■ F-SMA optical fiber connection per IEC 60874‑2 (for plastic fibers).2 to 2. Current measuring inputs (conventional inputs) ● Threaded terminal ends. X8) ■ optical fiber connection BFOC-ST® connector 2. type D-Sub. ● Pollution degree 3. (ST® is a registered trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors.) ● Fiber (X13) ■ ● SC connector per IEC 60874‑14‑4 (for glass fibers) Wire leads (X12) ■ RJ45 connector per ISO/IEC 8877. pin-type cable lugs: M3. (ST® is a registered trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors. or ■ optical fiber connection BFOC-ST® connector 2.5 per IEC 60874‑10‑1 (for glass fibers). 9-pin.5 mm². working voltage 250 V. X10 and X33) ■ ● RS232 (X34) (for COMM3 / InterMiCOM only) ■ ● M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections up to 1. 9-pin Communication interfaces COMM1 to COMM3 ● Fiber (X7.5 per IEC 60874‑10 (for glass fibers). ● overvoltage category III. Creepage Distances and Clearances ● Per EN 60255-27. Other inputs and outputs ● Threaded terminal ends. X8 and X31. or: ● Threaded terminal ends. ring-type cable lugs: M4. ring-terminal connection: M4. pin-type cable lugs: M5. self-centering with cage clamp to protect conductor cross-sections 0.P139 2 Technical Data Terminals PC interface (X6) ● EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector.) ● Wire leads (X9. type D-Sub. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 2-3 . impulse test voltage 5 kV.5 mm². or: ● Threaded terminal. EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector. self-centering with cage clamp to protect conductor cross-sections ≤ 4 mm².

1 Type Tests Type Tests All tests per EN 60255-26. ● Burst frequency: 5 kHz.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Interference Suppression Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22. Class A. severity levels 3 and 4.3. ● Common-mode test voltage: 2. severity level 3. ● Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns. 2. ● Source impedance: 200 Ω. ● Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sides. Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements Per EN 61000-4‑4 and IEC 60255‑22‑4. severity level 4.3 Tests 2. ● Burst duration:15 ms. ● Test duration: > 2 s.5 kV. 1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test Per EN 60255-22-1. Contact discharge ● Single discharges: > 10.3.1. ● Test voltage: 8 kV. Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge Per EN 60255-22-2 and IEC 60255-22-2.P139 2 Technical Data 2. frequency band 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V / m. 150 pF / 330 Ω. ● Source impedance: 50 Ω.0 kV. ● Amplitude: 2 kV / 1 kV or 4 kV / 2 kV. Class III. ● Single test at 900 MHz: AM 200 Hz / 100%. ● Impulse duration (50% value): 50 ns. Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy Per EN 61000‑4‑3 and ENV 50204. Class A: 2-4 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . ● Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80 %. Power Frequency Immunity Per IEC 60255‑22‑7. ● Holding time: > 5 s. ● Test field strength. ● Burst period: 300 ms. ● Test generator: 50 to 100 MΩ. ● Differential test voltage: 1.

2 12 %. Impulse Voltage Withstand Test Per EN 60255-27. To comply with this standard. Current/Voltage Surge Immunity Test Per EN 61000-4‑5 and EN 60255-22‑5. for 10 s. Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity Per EN 61000-4-8 or IEC 61000-4-8. ● Open-circuit voltage.3.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply inputs. for 10 s.47 μF. ● 2 kV AC. ● Short-circuit current.2 µs ● Time to half-value: 50 µs ● Peak value: 5 kV ● Source impedance: 500 Ω P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 2-5 . ● Source impedance: 12 / 42 Ω. 60 s Only direct voltage (2. The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test. ● Coupling capacitor 0. ● Coupling capacitor 0.1. it is suggested to set the parameter (010 220) IN P: F il ter to 6 [steps]. front time / time to half-value: 8 / 20 µs. ● Amplitude: 4 / 2 kV.1 μF.2 / 50 µs. Phase-to-ground ● RMS value 300 V. ● 2. ● Test voltage: 10 V. ● Test frequency: 50 Hz ● Test field strength: 30 A / m. ● Pulse frequency: > 5 / min. Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity Per EN 60255-11. severity level 3. severity level 4. front time / time to half-value: 1. ● Coupling resistance 220 Ω. Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields Per EN 61000-4-6 and EN 60255-22‑6. ● Coupling resistance 100 Ω.P139 2 Technical Data Phase-to-phase ● RMS value 150 V. Insulation Voltage Test Per EN 60255-27. insulation class 4. ● Front time: 1. Testing of circuits for power supply and asymmetrical or symmetrical lines.

3.P139 2. 1 g Shock Response and Withstand Test. Part 2. ● 2.4 21 days at 75% relative humidity and 30°C (86°F) with exposure to elevated concentrations of H2S.1. Mechanical Robustness 1 Applicable to the following case variants: ● Flush mounted case. +25°C … +55°C (77°F … 131°F) Corrosive Environment Tests Per IEC 60068-2-60: 1995. Cl2 and SO2. mixed gas flow test. and ● 60 to 150 Hz. cyclic (12 + 12 hours) 93 % relative humidity. Method (class) 3 Industrial corrosive environment/ poor environmental control. Frequency range in operation ● 10 to 60 Hz. 2-6 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . flush-mounting method 1 (without angle brackets and frame) Vibration Test Per EN 60255‑21-1 or IEC 60255‑21-1. test severity class 1: 15 g for 11 ms.5 g Frequency range during transport ● 10 to 150 Hz.3. 0. 0. Test Ke. test severity class 1: 5 g for 11 ms.3 2 Technical Data Environmental tests Temperature Stability Test Per IEC 60068-2-1 ● -25°C (-13°F) storage (96 hours) ● -40°C (-40°F) operation (96 hours) Per IEC 60068-2-2 ● +85°C (185°F) storage (96 hours) ● +85°C (185°F) operation (96 hours) Per IEC 60068-2-14 ● Change of temperature.035 mm. test severity class 1. NO2. 1°C / min rate of change Ambient Humidity Range Test Per IEC 60068-2-3 ● 56 days at ≤ 93% relative humidity and 40°C (104°F) Per IEC 60068-2-30 ● Damp heat. 5 cycles. Acceleration and pulse duration: ● Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation). Bump Test Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 60255-21-2. ● Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport).1.

Frequency range ● 2.P139 2 Technical Data Seismic Test Per EN 60255‑21‑3 or IEC 60255‑21‑3. test severity class 1: 10 g for 16 ms. test severity class 2: 10 g for 11 ms.5 mm. 3. test severity class 1: 15 g for 11 ms. 1. Seismic Test Per EN 60255‑21‑3 or IEC 60255‑21‑3. 20 / 10 m/s². Bump Test Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 60255-21-2.1. ● 2. 10 / 5 m/s². P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 2-7 . 3 x 1 cycle. 1 s Only direct voltage (2. Routine Tests All tests per EN 60255-1. The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test. test procedure A.5 5 to 8 Hz. 3 x 1 cycle. 0.2 kV AC. class 2.5 mm / 1. and ● 60 to 150 Hz. test severity class 2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply inputs. 7. Acceleration and pulse duration: ● Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation). 2 g Shock Response and Withstand Test.075 mm. test procedure A.3. Frequency range in operation ● 10 to 60 Hz. ● Shock bump tests are carried out to verify permanent shock (during transport). flush-mounting method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) ● Surface-mounted case Vibration Test Per EN 60255‑21-1 or IEC 60255‑21-1. 8 to 35 Hz.5 mm / 3.2 5 to 8 Hz. Mechanical Robustness 2 Applicable to the following case variants: ● Flush mounted case. class 1. Frequency range ● 2. Voltage Test Per EN 60255-27. ● Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport).0 g Frequency range during transport ● 10 to 150 Hz.3. 8 to 35 Hz.5 mm.

P139 2 Technical Data Additional Thermal Test ● 2-8 100% controlled thermal endurance test. inputs loaded. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

● Storage and transport: -25°C to +70°C [-13°F to +158°F]. Limit temperature range ● Operation: -25°C to +55°C [-13°F to +131°F]. ● Condensation not permitted. Ambient Humidity Range ● ≤ 75 % relative humidity (annual mean). P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 2-9 . ● 56 days at ≤ 95 % relative humidity and 40°C [104°F].P139 2 Technical Data 2.4 Environmental Conditions Temperatures Recommended temperature range ● -5°C to +55°C [+23°F to +131°F]. Solar Radiation Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.

5 Inputs and Outputs 2. Nominal surge current: 1250 A.3 VA at Vnom = 130 V AC. ● Load rating: ■ ■ continuous: 150 V AC for 10 s: 300 V AC Frequency 2-10 ● Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz and 60 Hz (adjustable).P139 2 Technical Data 2.1 Measuring Inputs Current Measuring Inputs ● Nominal current Inom: 1 and 5 A AC (adjustable). ● Load rating: ■ ■ ■ ● continuous: 20 A.5. ● Nominal consumption per phase: < 0. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . ● Frequency protection: 40 to 70 Hz. for 1 s: 500 A. for 10 s: 150 A.95 to 1. Voltage Measuring Inputs ● Nominal voltage Vnom: 50 to 130 V AC (adjustable).05 fnom. ● Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.1 VA at Inom. ● Operating range: 0.

nom: = 24 to 250 V DC): ■ Switching threshold in the range 14 V to 19 V. ● Special variant 90 V: Nominal supply voltage 127 V DC. Special variants with switching thresholds from 58 to 72 % of the nominal input voltage (i.5. Power consumption per input ● 18 V standard variant: VA = 19 to 110 V DC : 0. as these inputs operate with any voltage from 19 V. ● Special variant 73 V: Nominal supply voltage 110 V DC. The standard variant of binary signal inputs (opto couplers) is recommended in most applications. ● Special variant 155 V: Nominal supply voltage 250 V DC. The maximum voltage permitted for all binary signal inputs is 300V DC. definitively “low” for VA < 58 % of the nominal supply voltage.5 W ± 30 %. definitively “high” for VA > 72 % of the nominal supply voltage). Special versions with higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds are provided for applications where a higher switching threshold is expressly required.P139 2 Technical Data 2. ● Special variant 146 V: Nominal supply voltage 220 V DC. ● Special variants: VA > switching threshold: VA ·5 mA ± 30 %. VA > 110 V DC: VA ·5 mA ± 30 %. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 2-11 .e.2 Binary Signal Inputs Threshold pickup and drop-off points as per ordering option ● 18 V standard variant (VA.

4 2.5.000 to 0.1. ● Open-circuit monitoring: Θ > +215°C and Θ < -40°C (Θ > +419°F and Θ < -40°F). PT 100.8 mA ● Zero suppression: 0. mapping curve per IEC 75.nom = 20 mA) ● Maximum continuous input current permitted: 50 mA ● Maximum input voltage permitted: 17 V DC ● Input load: 100 Ω ● Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (adjustable) ● Overload monitoring: > 24. Resistance Thermometer Only PT 100 permitted for analog (I/O) module.20 IDC.3 2.P139 2. ● 3-wire configuration: max.200 IDC. 20 Ω per conductor.5.0°C (‑40°F to +419°F).6 2-12 ● Value range: ‑40.0°C to +215.5. Direct Current Output ● Output current: 0 to 20 mA ● Maximum permissible load: 500 Ω ● Maximum output voltage: 15 V P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .nom (IDC.nom (adjustable). ● Open and short-circuited input permitted.5.5 2 Technical Data IRIG‑B Interface ● Minimum / maximum input voltage level (peak-peak): 100 mVpp / 20 Vpp ● Input impedance: 33 kΩ at 1 kHz ● Electrical isolation: 2 kV Direct Current Input ● Input current: 0 to 26 mA ● Value range: 0.00 to 1. Ni 100 or Ni 120 permitted for temperature p/c board (the RTD module). 2.

30 A for 3 s ● Making capacity: 30 A ● Breaking capacity: ■ 7500 W resistive or 30 A at 250 V DC.2 ms ● Reset time: less than 8 ms ● Rated voltage: 250 V DC. 250 V AC.4. 2500 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms) or 10 A at 250 V DC.5. 250 V AC.5. ■ Maximum values: 30 A and 300 V DC. ● Continuous current: 5 A. Maximum values: 10 A and 300 V DC. applicable to DC circuits only. ● Breaking capacity: ■ ■ 0. All other modules ● Breaking capacity: ■ ■ 2.8 0.4.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms. ● Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms.5 s.5 s. ● Continuous current: 8 A. ● Short-duration current: 30 A for 0. ● Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms. X(6I 6H) with high-break contacts. ● Operating time: less than 5 ms ● Reset time: less than 5 ms BCD Measured Data Output Maximum numerical value that can be displayed: 399 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 2-13 . ● Short-duration current: 30 A for 0. 4 A at 230 V AC and cos φ = 0.P139 2 Technical Data 2. ● Operating time: less than 0.7 Output Relays Binary I/O Module X (6I 6O) For switchgear control. ● Operating time: less than 5 ms ● Reset time: less than 5 ms Binary I/O Modules X(4H). ● Rated voltage: 250 V DC ● Continuous current: 10 A ● Short-duration current: 250 A for 0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms. ● Rated voltage: 250 V DC.03 s. 4 A at 230 V AC and cos φ = 0.

1200 m Multipoint connection: max. a system reserve of 3 dB.6. ● Transmission rate: 300 or 57600 baud (adjustable). For communication interface 1. and typical fiber attenuation) 2-14 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .2 PC Interface ● 2. 2 kV isolation Wire Leads ● Distance to be bridged ■ ■ Point-to-point connection: max.5 dBm ● Optical sensitivity: min. depending on the module variant.6. Transmission rate: 300 to 115.3 17 LED indicators (12 permanently assigned. ● Per RS 485 or RS 422. 45 m (Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends. 5 freely configurable).1 Local Control Panel Input or output ● With 12 keys and an LC-display consisting of 16 lines and 21 columns (128 x 128 pixels). State and fault signals ● 2. 100 m Plastic Fiber Connection ● Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm ● Optical output: min. -20 dBm ● Optical input: max. -5 dBm ● Distance to be bridged: max.P139 2 Technical Data 2. Communication interface 3 permits end-end channel-aided digital communication schemes to be configured for real time protective signaling between two protection devices (InterMiCOM protective interface). -7. DNP 3.6 Interfaces 2. Channel 1 and 3 may either be equipped to connect wire leads or optical fibers and channel 2 is only available to connect wire leads. Communication interface 2 can only be operated with the interface protocol based on IEC 60870-5-103.200 baud (adjustable) Serial Communication Interface The communication modules can be provided with up to three communication channels.0. or Courier can be set. MODBUS.6. IEC 60870‑5‑101. ● Transmission rate: 600 or 19200 baud (adjustable). communication protocols based on IEC 870-5‑103. ● Transmission rate: 300 to 64000 baud (adjustable).

-24 dBm ● Optical input: max.5 dBm Optical input: max. 400 m (Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends. -19.5/125 ● Optical wavelength: typically 820 nm ● Optical output: min. −18.4 IEC Communication Interface Ethernet-based communications per IEC 61850: Wire Leads ● RJ45. −12 dBm P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 2-15 . -24 dBm ● Optical input: max.P139 2 Technical Data Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125 ● Optical wavelength: typically 820 nm ● Optical output: min. −15 dBm Optical sensitivity: min.400 m (Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends. a system reserve of 3 dB.8 dBm ● Optical sensitivity: min. 100 m Optical Fiber (100 Mbit/s) ● Optical wavelength: typically 1300 nm ● ST connector ● Glass fiber G50/125: ■ ■ ■ ● Optical output: min. -10 dBm ● Distance to be bridged: max. and typical fiber attenuation) Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125: ■ ■ ■ Optical output: min. −12 dBm Glass fiber G62.6. 1. and typical fiber attenuation) 2. a system reserve of 3 dB. -10 dBm ● Distance to be bridged: max. 1.85 dBm Optical sensitivity: min.5 kV isolation ● Transmission rate: 100 Mbit/s ● Distance to be bridged: max. -16 dBm ● Optical sensitivity: min. −32. −32.5 dBm Optical input: max.

−23.coded variable data (daily) P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . −14 dBm IRIG‑B Interface ● B122 format ● Amplitude modulated signal ● Carrier frequency: 1 kHz ● BCD. −31 dBm Optical input: max. −31 dBm Optical input: max. −20 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. −14 dBm Optical output: min.P139 2 Technical Data ● SC connector ● Glass fiber G50/125: ■ ■ ■ ● Glass fiber G62.5 2-16 Optical output: min.5 dBm Optical sensitivity: min.6.5/125: ■ ■ ■ 2.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 2-17 .P139 2 Technical Data 2.7 Information Output Counters. measured data. and indications: see chapter “Information and Control Functions”.

8. approx. 50 ms ● Reset time (measured variable from 1. 30 ms 1% to 10% (adjustable) Power Directional Protection ● Operate time including output relay (measured variable from nominal value to 1. Q>: 0.05 to 20 (adjustable) P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .8-fold operate value to nominal value): ■ ● 2-18 ≤ 45 ms.002 Vnom at Vnom = 100 V ● Base point release for residual currents: 0.2-fold operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.05 to 0. approx.8. 30 ms ● Resetting ratio for P>. approx.95 (adjustable) ● Resetting ratio for P<. approx.8.1 to 10 s (adjustable) Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection ● Operate time including output relay (measured variable from 0 to 2-fold operate value): ≤ 40 ms. approx. Q<: 1. 0.4 ● Minimum output pulse for trip command: 0. 30 ms ● Starting resetting ratio: approx.8 Settings – Typical Characteristic Data 2.2-fold operate value to nominal value or measured variable from 0.8fold operate value): ■ ● Reset time (measured variable from 1. 30 ms ● Reset time (measured variable from 2-fold operate value to 0): ≤ 40 ms.015 to 0.2-fold operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0. approx.5 ≤ 40 ms.8fold operate value): ≤ 60 ms.95 Short-Circuit Direction Determination ● Nominal acceptance angle for forward decision: ± 90° ● Resetting ratio forward/backward recognition: ≤ 7° ● Base point release for phase currents:0.8.01 Inom ● Base point release for neutral displacement voltage: 0.3 2.1 to 10 s (adjustable) ● Minimum output pulse for close command: 0.2 2.P139 2 Technical Data 2.8.6 Vnom/√3 (adjustable) Time-Voltage Protection ● Operate time including output relay (measured variable from nominal value to 1.8-fold operate value to nominal value): ≤ 40 ms.1 Inom ● Base point release for phase-to-phase voltages: 0.2-fold operate value to nominal value or measured variable from 0.1 Main Function 2. 30 ms Resetting ratio for V<>: ■ 2.

ambient temperature 20°C (68°F).5 % when I/Iref = 6 Unbalance Protection ● 2.9.7 Deviation: ± 10° Motor Protection and Thermal Overload Protection (Reaction Time) ● 2.8 ● V<>.1 Deviations of the Operate Values 2.9.1.1.9.1. Vmin< ● 2.3 Vnom) Frequency Protection Operate values f<> ● ± 30 mHz (f nom = 50 Hz) ● ± 40 mHz (f nom = 60 Hz) P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 2-19 .1 Definitions Reference Conditions ● Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom.1.9 Deviations 2. Deviation ● 2.9.9.2 Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.1.6 to 1.5 Deviation ± 7.4 Short-Circuit Direction Determination ● 2.3 Deviation: ± 3 % Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection Phase and residual current stages ● Deviation: ± 5 % Negative-sequence system stages ● 2.1.P139 2 Technical Data 2. Vneg>: ± 1% (in the range > 0.6 Deviation: ± 5 % Deviation: ± 5 % Time-Voltage Protection Operate values 2. Measuring-Circuit Monitoring Operate values Idiff>.9.9. total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %.4 Vnom) ● VNG>. and nominal auxiliary voltage VA.1.9.9. Vpos<>: ± 1% (in the range 0.nom.1.

11 Direct Current Input ● 2.nom.P139 2 Technical Data Operate values df/dt ● 2.1 Definitions Reference conditions ● Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom.1 Hz/s (f nom = 50 or 60 Hz) Power Directional Protection Operate values P<>.act>. and nominal auxiliary voltage VA. Deviation ● 2. total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %.9.13 Deviation: 1° Deviation: ± 2°C Analog Measured Data Output ● Deviation: ± 1 % Output residual ripple with max.reac>.1.9.9. load ● ±1% 2.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages 2.1.10 Deviation: ± 5 % Ground Fault Direction Determination Using Steady-State Values (GFDSS) Operate values VNG>. IN. Q<> ● 2.2 Definite-time stages ● 2.9 ± 0.2. IN.9. ambient temperature 20°C (68°F).5% + 10 to 20 ms P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .3 2-20 Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.12 Deviation: ± 1 % Resistance Thermometer ● 2.1.1.9.9. IN> ● Deviation: ± 3 % Sector angle ● 2.9.9.9.2.1. Deviation: ± 1% + 20 ms to 40 ms Inverse-time stages ● Deviation when I ≥ 2 Iref: ± 5% + 10 to 25 ms ● For “extremely inverse” IEC characteristics and for thermal overload characteristics: ± 7.2.

3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition 2.3.2 Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.nom.and negative-sequence systems ● Deviation: ± 2% Active and reactive power / active and reactive energy ● Deviation: ± 2% when cos φ = ± 0.5% Internally formed resultant current and negative-sequence system current ● Deviation: ± 2% Internally formed neutral-point displacement voltage and voltages of positive.9.7 ● Deviation: ± 5% when cos φ = ± 0. and nominal auxiliary voltage VA.P139 2 Technical Data 2.1 Definitions Reference conditions ● Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom. Deviation ● 2.9. Operating Data Measurement Measuring input currents ● Deviation: ± 1% Measuring input voltages ● Deviation: ± 0.3.3 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 2-21 . total harmonic distortion ≤ 2%. ambient temperature 20°C (68°F).9.

reactance.4 Deviation: ± 5% Internal Clock With free running internal clock ● Deviation: < 1 min/month With external synchronization (with a synchronization interval ≤ 1 min) ● Deviation: < 10 ms With synchronization via IRIG-B interface ● 2-22 ± 1 ms P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .3.3.9. and fault location ● 2.P139 2 Technical Data Load angle ● Deviation: ± 1° Frequency ● Deviation: ± 10 mHz Direct current of measured data input and output ● Deviation: ± 1% Temperature ● 2.9.3 Deviation: ± 2°C [approx. ± 4°F] Fault Data Short-circuit current and voltage ● Deviation: ± 3% Short-circuit impedance.

12 mArms ● at Inom = 5 A: 4.1 mArms or 1.5 mArms ● at Inom = 5 A: 30.3 ● at Inom = 1 A: 6.98 mArms or 0.P139 2 Technical Data 2.6 mArms Neutral Current Dynamic range ● 16 IN.10.4 ● at Inom = 1 A: 0.2 20 sampled values per period Phase Currents System Dynamic range ● 100 Inom or 25 Inom Amplitude resolution 2.10 Resolution of the Fault Data Acquisition 2.2 mVrms P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 2-23 .5 mArms or 7.nom or 2 IN.10.10.61 mArms Phase-to-Ground Voltages and Neutral-Point Displacement Voltage Dynamic range ● 150 V Amplitude resolution ● 9.1 Time Resolution ● 2.10.nom Amplitude resolution 2.9 mArms or 0.

Monitoring Signal Memory Scope for signals ● All signals relevant for self-monitoring from a total of 1024 different logic state signals. Depth for signals ● 200 entries per ground fault event. Depth for signals ● 200 entries per overload event. from a total of 1024 different logic state signals.P139 2 Technical Data 2.11 Recording Functions 2. Ground Fault Memory Number ● The 8 most recent ground fault events Scope for signals ● All signals relevant for a ground fault event from a total of 1024 different logic state signals. Fault Memory Number ● The 8 most recent faults. ● Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .1 Organization of the Recording Memories Operating Data Memory Scope for signals ● All signals relating to normal operation. Overload Memory Number ● The 8 most recent overload events Scope for signals ● All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of 1024 different logic state signals. Scope for signals and fault values 2-24 ● All fault-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different logic state signals. Depth for signals ● Up to 30 signals. Depth for signals ● The 1000 most recent signals.11.

(p. number of cycles per fault can be set by user. 820 periods in total for all faults.7 s (for fnom = 60 Hz).nom) P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 2-25 . Resolution of the Recorded Data ● As per Section 2.10. that is 16.4 s (for fnom = 50 Hz) or 13.P139 2 Technical Data Depth for signals and fault values ● 200 entries per fault event ● max. with maximum current dynamic ranges (100 Inom / 16 IN. 2-23).

P139 2. relays de-energized/energized): approx.1 W 84 TE case.12 2 Technical Data Power Supply Nominal auxiliary voltage VA. Operating range for alternating voltage ● 0. relays de-energized/energized: approx.9 to 1.25 ms Stored energy time 2-26 ● ≥ 50 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 220 V DC (upper range supply) ● ≥ 50 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 60 V DC (lower range supply) P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .6 W / 34.nom. 14.5 W / 42.1 VA.1 VA.nom ● 24 to 60 V DC or 60 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC (ordering option). Operating range for direct voltage ● 0.8 to 1.nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA.3 W Start-up peak current ● < 3 A for duration of 0. Nominal burden ● … where VA = 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration ■ ■ 40 TE case. 12.nom.

1 Symbols The following symbols are used in accordance with IEC 60044‑1 and IEC 60044‑6 standards: P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 2-27 .13.P139 2 Technical Data 2.13 Current Transformer Specifications 2.

) of the CT Vk Rated knee point voltage (e.P139 2 Technical Data Ipn Rated primary current (nominal primary current) of the CT Isn Rated secondary current (nominal secondary current) of the CT Ipsc Rated primary (symmetrical) short-circuit current Kssc Rated symmetrical short-circuit current factor: K ssc = I psc I pn Iref Reference current of IDMT protection element Rbn Rated resistive burden (secondary connected) of the CT Pbn Equivalent power over the rated resistive burden of the CT for rated secondary current: 2 Pbn = Rbn · I sn Rb Actual resistive burden (secondary connected) of the CT Pb Equivalent power over the actual resistive burden of the CT for rated secondary current: 2 Pb = Rb · I sn Rct Secondary winding resistance of the CT Pct Equivalent power over the secondary winding resistance of the CT for secondary rated current: 2 Pct = Rct · I sn Vsal Secondary accuracy limiting voltage (e.f.m.) of the CT nn Rated accuracy limit factor of the CT nb Actual accuracy limit factor of the CT: nb = nn · Rct + Rbn Rct + Rb = nn · Pct + Pbn Pct + Pb Rl One-way lead resistance from CT to relay Rrel Resistive burden of relay’s CT input Tp Primary time constant (primary system time constant) ω (System) angular frequency Xp/Rp Primary impedance ratio (system impedance ratio): Xp Rp Kd = ω · Tp Dimensioning factor for the CT Kemp Relay specific. empirically determined dimensioning factor for the CT 2-28 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .m.f.

as follows: nn ≥ K d · K ssc · Rct + Rb Rct + Rbn = K d · K ssc · Pct + Pb Pct + Pbn The relation between both methods is given as follows: V sal = nn · ( Pbn I sn + I sn · Rct ) The actual secondary connected burden Rb is given as follows: ● For phase-to-ground faults: Rb = 2 · Rl + Rrel ● For phase-to-phase faults: Rb = Rl + Rrel The wire lead burden is calculated as: Rl = ρ ⋅ ● l A ρ = specific conductor resistance (e.P139 2 Technical Data 2.3. 2.2 General Equations The current transformer can be dimensioned ● either for the minimum required secondary accuracy limiting voltage acc. it is sufficient to consider an empirically determined dimensioning factor Kd=Kemp such that the appropriate operation of the protection function is ensured under the given conditions. to IEC 60044‑1.3. It is not possible to give a general relation between Vk and Vsal. Theoretically. respectively. but for standard core material the following relations applies: ● VK≈0. as outlined in the following.3.g. the accuracy limit factor should be at least as high as the value of the setting current used in order to ensure fast relay operation.13. and ● VK≈0. at 75°C) ● l = wire length ● A = wire cross section The MiCOM Px3x input CT burden Rrel is less than 20 mΩ. the specifications of the current transformer could be calculated to avoid saturation by inserting its maximum value. As per IEC 60044-1 the rated CT accuracy limit factor nn (e.13.3. class 5P20 15VA) describes the highest current magnitude up to which the CT will be within the P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 2-29 . Usually this relay burden can be neglected. 2.75⋅Vsal for class 10P CTs. instead of the required overdimensioning factor Kd: K d = K max ≈ 1 + Xp Rp = 1 + ω · Tp However. 2. The rated knee point voltage Vk according to IEC 60044‑1.4: V sal ≥ K d · K ssc · I sn · (Rct + Rb) ● or for the minimum required rated accuracy limit factor acc.1⋅10-8 Ω m.021 Ω mm²/m = 2. This factor depends on application and relay type.12 is lower than the secondary accuracy limiting voltage Vsal according to IEC 60044‑1. Instead. 2. independent of the set nominal current (1A or 5A).3 Overcurrent Protection When relays are set to operate at high set thresholds (say more than 5 times the nominal current).3.g. to IEC 60044‑1. this is not necessary. for copper 0.4. 2.85⋅Vsal for class 5P CTs.

When relays are set to operate at low set thresholds (say 1 to 2 times nominal current). IN>): ● Kd=Kemp=0. 20) With resulting rated CT accuracy limit factor nn: nn ≥ nb · Rct + Rb Rct + Rbn Alternatively.P139 2 Technical Data specified accuracy under defined conditions (e.g. I>.0 for inverse time earth fault overcurrent (IDMT. the required CT knee point voltage Vk as per British Standard BS 3938 can be calculated as follows: Vk ≥ Kd⋅Kssc⋅Isn⋅(Rct+Rb) ● With Kd=Kemp=0.P) ● Kd=Kemp=1. With inverse time overcurrent protection a steady state fault current of up to 20 times the reference current (Iref) should not saturate the CT. For P13x overcurrent protection application the actual accuracy limit factor nb as per IEC 60044-1 should be chosen as follows: ● DTOC: nb = maximum((I>/In). Iref. for class 5P20 15VA the total error must be smaller than 5% at 20 times nominal current at nominal burden of 15 VA). This delay should always be considered to be as long as the primary time constant.N) It is recommended to use at least CT’s of accuracy class 10P (or equivalent). The actual accuracy limit factor nb differs in practice from the rated factor nn as detailed in section 1.5 for definite time phase and earth fault overcurrent (DTOC. Due to transient saturation the operation time gets prolonged. the saturation of the CT needs not to be considered.5 for inverse time phase overcurrent (IDMT. 2-30 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 20) ● IDMT: nb = maximum((Iref/In). Iref.

Y. Analog data is transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus module B to the processor module P. is part of the MiCOM P30 family of devices. The processor handles the processing of digitized analog variables and of binary signals. generates the protective trip and signals. The external auxiliary voltage is applied to the power supply module V. External analog quantities and binary quantities – electrically isolated – are converted to the internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T. The processor module also handles overall device communication. module Communication interface(s) PC interface Signals Commands Commands Auxiliary voltage Signals D5Z5201C Fig. a numerical device. The device types included in this family are built from identical uniform hardware modules.P139 3 OPERATION 3. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-1 . The optional binary I/O modules X are equipped with optical couplers for binary signal input as well as output relays for the output of signals and commands or combinations of these. which supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required internally. The optional transient ground fault module N evaluates the measured variables according to the transient ground fault evaluation scheme. including multiplexers and analog/digital converters. and transfers them to the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. EDIT MODE A A A μP Processor module Analog module Digital busbus module Voltages Currents Y Binary I/O module X V Signals Commands Signals Commands Signals Commands Measured data Power supply module Analog bus module Transformer module T HEALTHY P μC Analog I/O module B TRIP ALARM OUT OF SERVICE Analog I/O module N Local control module L Protection interface InterMiCOM Communic. 3-1: Basic hardware structure. and X.1 Modular Structure The P139. The analog data conditioned by the analog I/O module Y is transferred to the processor module P via the digital bus module. The figure below shows the basic hardware structure of the P139. The processor module contains all the elements necessary for the conversion of measured analog variables.

P139 3 Operation The optional communication modules provide one or two serial communication interfaces for the integration of the protection and control unit into a substation control system and for remote access respectively a protection communication interface for the transfer of digital information between two protection devices. 3-2 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . It encompasses all control and display elements as well as a PC interface for running the operating program S1. The local control module L is located behind the front panel and connected to the processor module via a ribbon cable.

Thus the P139 provides the measured data relevant for the prevailing conditions.P139 3 Operation 3. This branch carries all settings. Different Panels are automatically displayed for specific system operating conditions. the so-called “DataModelExplorer”. various controls are grouped here. memories and displays. The “Addresses” document (being part of the “DataModelExplorer”) is complete in the sense that it contains all settings.2 Operator-Machine Communication The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between the user and the P139: ● Integrated user interface (LOC: local control panel) ● PC interface ● Communication interface All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are arranged within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is uniform throughout the device family. including the identification data of the P139. the start/end signals during a fault. All information in this group is therefore stored. “Events” Branch The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. the configuration parameters for adapting the P139 interfaces to the system. The configuration of the local control panel also permits the installation of Measured Value “Panels” on the LCD display. Priority increases from normal operation to operation under overload conditions and finally to operation following a short circuit in the system. “Operation” Branch This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured operating data and binary signal states. All settings and signals of the P139 are documented in a separate collection of documents. Display of Settings and Signals Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses. and the function parameters for adapting the device functions to the process. which means that the values will be preserved even if the power supply fails. In particular. in accordance with the user’s choice. This information is updated periodically and consequently is not stored. The main branches are: “Parameters” Branch All settings are contained in this branch. the measured fault data. All values in this group are stored in non-volatile memory. In addition. for example those for resetting counters. and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can be read out when required. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-3 . signals and measured variables that are relevant for the user of the P139.

) it will be cancelled after the time period. In addition the P139 offers Measured Value Panels.3 3 Operation Configuration of the Bay Panel and of the Measured Value Panels. which display the measured values relevant at a given time. A Bay Panel usually consists of one Bay Panel image as a standard but after applying the bay editor from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1 and having loaded a customized Bay Panel it can be sub-divided into up to eight pages. When the text display has been fitted the Bay Panel will display switching state signals from external devices (closed. the Fault Panel remains active until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset.P139 3. If the Operation Panel is activated as an event occurs. defined by setting LOC: Holdtime for Panels has elapsed and the Bay Panel will be called up. the display will automatically switch to the Operation Panel at the end of the event. In the event of overload or ground fault events. change e nabl. the display switches to the appropriate Event Panel – provided that measured values have been selected for the Event Panels. In the event of a fault. 3-4 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . open. intermediate position) and the active control site (local or remote). During normal power system operation. the Bay Panel or – if activated – the Operation Panel is displayed. If the change enabling command has been issued (LOC: Param. The graphic display also permits the display of the Event Panel and the configurable Signal Panel. Selection of the Control Point (Function Group LOC) When the graphic display has been fitted then the layout of a bay with its switchgear units will be shown on the Bay Panel.

If the required bay type is not included in the standard selection. bus sect. the user can contact the manufacturer of the P139 to request the definition of a customized bay type to download into the P139. The activation of the Bay Panel display is described in Chapter 6.3. The display of the control point (local or remote control) and interlocking can also be disabled. (p. Each external device represented in the Bay Panel is identified by an external device designation (see Section 3. The user can choose between two character sets to represent switch gear on the bay panel.2. The display of external device designations can also be disabled.) has elapsed. The user can also define the designations for busbars and busbar sections (see descriptions of parameters LOC: De si gnati on bus bar 1 or L OC: D esignat. The P139 offers a selection from pre-defined bay types. (p. 3-2: Example of a Bay Panel (with graphic display).) or the return time for selection (L OC: Re turn time se lect . in the “Settings” chapter). The character sets are described in Section 6.10.1.P139 3 Operation 3. respectively. 3-387)). (p.42.1. 6-13).1. With the graphic display fitted the Bay Panel displays the up-to-date status of the selected bay as a single (phase) diagram. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-5 . 6-1).1 Bay Panel Fig. The switchgear unit to be controlled needs to be selected first. By applying the bay editor from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1 the user can also define new bay types. The selection is cancelled if the return time for illumination (L OC: R etu rn time illumin.

3-6 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . [ 221 030 ] LOC: Designat. interl. [ 210 000 ] LOC: Displ. bar display V [ 221 045 ] LOC: Designation busbar 3 [ 221 043 ] LOC: Display bar scale [ 221 046 ] LOC: Designat.1 [ 221 035 ] LOC: Return time select. bar displ.select. asg. trg 305 551 19Z5003A Fig. [ 003 023 ] BB1 Q0 LOC: Return t. stat. dev. [ 221 071 ] LOC: Bar display type [ 221 039 ] LOC: Designation busbar 1 [ 221 033 ] LOC: Scal. ext.desig [ 221 032 ] LOC: Fct.2 [ 221 036 ] LOC: Return time illumin.P139 3 Operation LOC: Character set [ 221 038 ] DEV01: Designat. bus sect. [ 221 041 ] LOC: Display L/R [ 221 070 ] LOC: Fct. num.asg. 3-3: Bay panel. ext. displ.dev. bus sect. bar display I [ 221 044 ] LOC: Designation busbar 2 [ 221 034 ] LOC: Scal. [ 221 042 ] LOC: Displ.

1 Measured Values Display The measured values that will be displayed on the Bay Panel can first be selected separately for the numerical and the bar chart display by an “m out of n” parameter. Furthermore the respective subsequent measured value is displayed when the hold-time period set for L OC: H old-t. However. the orientation of the bar and the scaling can be selected (the latter separately for the current and voltage data).di spl has elapsed.1.dis pl is Blocked.3. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-7 .P139 3 Operation 3.3. me as. For the bar chart display.v. In such cases.2 Hold-Time Measured Values Display With the Bay Panel display the next or the previous configured measured value may be selected by pressing the keys “cursor down” or “cursor up”. The standard default for LOC: Hol d-t. 3.v.1. not all measured values that can be displayed in numerical form can also be displayed in bar chart form. a dummy or placeholder must be included in the selection list for the bar chart display at the same point at which a measured value that cannot be displayed in bar chart form appears in the selection list for numerical measured values. Measured values to be displayed in bar chart form must also be selected for display as numerical measured values. me as. in this case the automatic change over feature to the subsequent measured value is not available. Display of the scaling can be disabled.

3.Panel [ 221 078 ] ≥1 & c Selection 1) LOC: Chg.Sig.Panel [ 221 075 ] 0: Without signalling LOC: Autom. return time LOC: Hold-time for Panels [ 031 075 ] LOC: Hold-time for Panels LOC: Aut.Panel flash. which may become necessary is selected by setting LOC : I ndi cat.Sign.P ane l. LOC: Fct.P ane lit is possible to differentiate between the states “signal active/available” and “signal inactive/not available” shown on the Signal Panel. From all physical and logical binary states that the P139 has available up to 28 signals can be selected for display on the Signal Panel by an “m out of n” parameter.Panel stat. If automatic switching to the Signal Panel is configured at LOC: A u t.Panel [ 221 074 ] 0 1: Flashing box 1 2: Flashing rows 2 LOC: Sign. 3-4: Signal Panel.Panel [ 221 073 ] LOC: Indicat.ind. Panel 1) 1) LOC: Chg. When more signals are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate. This occurs without influencing the Event Panel. The type of signaling and the clearing. [ 221 076 ] Sig. With the parameterL OC: Stat.Sig.Sign.i nd.activ.Sign.Sign.P139 3 Operation 3. which is additionally available. 3-8 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . then the display will switch to the next set of signals at intervals defined by the setting for LOC: H old-time f or Panels or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed. return time [ 003 014 ] LOC: Stat. [ 221 077 ] Keys.activ.Panel then the Signal Panel is automatically selected when there is a change of state for a signal configured in the panel.Si gn . Sign.caus. Signal Panel [ 221 072 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 m out of n Signal 3 Signal n Selected signals LOC: Autom.2 Signal Panel The Signal Panel is displayed when it is selected and when at least one signal has been configured. This is shown by the “clear to black” square alone and the simultaneous change over from “normal” display to “highlighting” of text in the lines. local control 44Z5209A Fig.Sign.

USER [ 003 006 ] 1: execute FT_RC: Reset record. LOC: Fct. in progress [ 035 003 ] ≥1 Operation Panel GF_RC: Record. The user can select which of the measured operating values will be displayed on the Operation Panel by means of an “m out of n” parameter. return time [ 003 014 ] LOC: Autom. 3-5: Operation Panel.P139 3 Operation 3. When more measured operating values are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate. Operation Panel [ 053 007 ] Measured value 1 m out of n Measured value 2 Measured value 3 Measured value N Selected meas. in progress [ 035 000 ] S1 1 ≥1 LOC: Autom. provided that at least one measured value has been configured. val. then the display will either switch to the next set of measured operating values at intervals defined by the setting for LOC: Hold-time for Pa nels or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.3. FT_RC: Record. EXT [ 005 243 ] MAIN: Reset LED 306 020 50Z01CXA Fig.3 Operation Panel The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed. in progress [ 035 005 ] MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute ≥1 MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] FT_RC: Reset record. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-9 . return time LOC: Hold-time for Panels [ 031 075 ] LOC: Hold-time for Panels C R1 OL_RC: Record.

P139 3.3. When more measured fault values are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate. then the display will either switch to the next set of measured fault values at intervals defined by the setting for LOC : Hold-time for P ane ls or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed. provided that at least one measured value has been configured. Fault Panel [ 053 003 ] Measured value 1 m out of n Measured value 2 Measured value 3 Measured value N Selected meas. val. LOC: Fct. EXT [ 005 243 ] MAIN: Reset LED 306 020 50Z01EJA Fig. The Fault Panel remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are cleared.4 3 Operation Fault Panel The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault. LOC: Hold-time for Panels [ 031 075 ] R MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute ≥1 Fault Panel MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] FT_RC: Reset record. 3-6: Fault panel. 3-10 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault Panel by setting an “m out of n” parameter. USER [ 003 006 ] 1: execute FT_RC: Reset record.

When more measured fault values are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate. USER [ 100 000 ] 1: execute GF_RC: Reset record. values LOC: Hold-time for Panels [ 031 075 ] R MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute ≥1 Ground Fault Panel MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] GF_RC: Reset record.P139 3 Operation 3.Fault Panel [ 053 004 ] Measured value 1 m out of n Measured value 2 Measured value 3 Measured value n Select. The Ground Fault Panel remains on display until the ground fault ends. unless a fault occurs. The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Ground Fault Panel by setting an “m out of n” parameter. LOC: Fct. EXT [ 005 242 ] MAIN: Reset LED 306 020 50Z0139B Fig. 3-7: Ground Fault Panel. In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-11 .5 Ground Fault Panel The Ground Fault Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault.3. provided that at least one measured value has been configured. Grd. meas. then the display will either switch to the next set of measured fault values at intervals defined by the setting for LOC: H old-time for Pan els or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.

3-8: Overload Panel. values LOC: Hold-time for Panels [ 031 075 ] R MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute ≥1 Overload Panel MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] OL_RC: Reset record.6 3 Operation Overload Panel The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when there is an overload. 3-12 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . Overload Panel [ 053 005 ] Measured value 1 m out of n Measured value 2 Measured value 3 Measured value n Select. then the display will either switch to the next set of measured fault values at intervals defined by the setting for L OC : Hold -ti me f or P ane ls or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed. The Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends. USER [ 100 003 ] 1: execute OL_RC: Reset record.P139 3. provided that at least one measured value has been configured. EXT [ 005 241 ] MAIN: Reset LED 306 020 50Z0140A Fig. unless a fault occurs. When more measured fault values are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate.3. LOC: Fct. meas. In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel. The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload Panel by setting a “m out of n” parameter.

Switching between local and remote control is achieved by using either the L/R key on the local control panel (with the graphic display fitted).).3 Local 1 Remote 2 Remote & Local 3 & & & LOC: Rem.8 Configurable Clear Key The P139 has a Clear key – –.active [ 221 004 ] LOC: Loc. asg.block. This setting for L OC: Fct. L /R key s w. as sign. If only remote control is enabled then there will be a local access blocking. L /R key determines whether the switching using either the L/R key or the key switch is between local and remote control (L↔R) or between local+remote and local control (R&L↔L).block. LOC: Fct. [ 221 008 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 m out of n Signal 3 Signal n Without function Selected signal 1) Keys. an appropriately configured function key (with the text display fitted) or an external key switch.20. 3-9: Selection of the control point. The position of this external key switch is checked by an appropriately configured binary signal input (configuration at MAIN: I np.3. to which one or more reset functions can be assigned by selecting the required functions at L OC : Fct.P139 3 Operation 3. If the binary signal input is configured to L/R key switch then the L/R key on the local control panel is without function when the graphic display is fitted. Details on the functions' resetting features are given in Section 3.3.acc.11.asg. L/R key [ 225 208 ] 1 2 1: R <-> L 2: R & L <-> L 1) & & 1 & & 2. 3-123). (p. L/R key sw. If only local control is enabled then there will be a remote access blocking. re set key.7 Selection of the Control Point Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally.acc. local control 19Z5261C Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-13 . 3.active [ 221 005 ] LOC: Remote&local control 305 560 MAIN: Inp. assign.

The setting of communication interface 1 (COMM1) may be assigned to the physical communication channels 1 or 2 (see Section 3. If tests are run on the P139.22. then the settings of communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be active for communication channel 1. If the COMM1 settings have been assigned to communication channel 2. settings for two communication interfaces will be available. In this way the PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals accordingly (see Section 3.11. Setting and interrogation is possible through all the P139's interfaces. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data.4 3 Operation Serial Interfaces The P139 has a PC interface as a standard component. Communication module A is optional and can be provided with one or two communication channels – depending on the design version. 3-127)).P139 3. COMM2 becomes “dead”. COMM2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P139 if its PC interface has been de-activated.11. Communication between the P139 and the control station’s computer is through the communication module A. (p. 3-14 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . If the communication module A with two communication channels is installed. 3-126)). (p. It will only be enabled again when the “time-out” period for the PC interface has elapsed.21. the user is advised to activate the test mode.

3-10: PC interface settings. In order for data transfer between the P139 and the PC to function.block.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC) Communication between the P139 and a PC is through the PC interface./meas.sig. [ 003 189 ] PC: Transm. [ 003 086 ] PC: Delta P [ 003 059 ] 0 1 0: No PC: Delta f [ 003 057 ] PC: Delta meas. spontan. several settings must be made in the P139.v.P139 3 Operation 3.enab.cycl. sig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-15 . PC: Bay address [ 003 068 ] PC: Device address [ 003 069 ] PC: Baud rate [ 003 081 ] PC: Parity bit [ 003 181 ] PC: Spontan. ext. disabled [ 038 046 ] PC: Time-out [ 003 188 ] PC: Command blocking [ 003 182 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes PC interface MAIN: Test mode [ 037 071 ] 19Z80ECA Fig.ILS tel [ 003 155 ] 1: Yes PC: Delta t [ 003 058 ] MAIN: Prot.dat [ 003 084 ] PC: Cycl. enable [ 003 187 ] PC: Select.4.val. There is support software available as an accessory for P139 control. [ 003 185 ] PC: Delta V [ 003 055 ] PC: Delta I [ 003 056 ] PC: Sig. data ILS tel.

several settings must be made in the P139. “Protection communication companion standard 1. "Transmission protocols . a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary signal input. compatibility level 2”.Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment. February 1995 edition) with additions covering control and monitoring ● IEC 870‑5‑101. 1997-12 (corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI Recommendation. 3-16 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . The following user-selected interface protocols are available for use with the P139: ● IEC 60870‑5‑103.0 ● COURIER In order for data transfer to function properly. Communication interface 1 can be blocked through a binary signal input.4. "Telecontrol equipment and systems ‑ Part 5: Transmission protocols ‑ Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks." first edition 1995‑11 ● ILS‑C.2 3 Operation Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1) There are several different interface protocols available at the communication interface 1.P139 3. internal protocol of Schneider Electric ● MODBUS ● DNP 3. first edition. In addition.

-101 enable [ 003 216 ] 0 Selected protocol COMM1: Selected protocol 304 415 1 0: No 1: Yes COMM1: Addit. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-17 . USER [ 003 172 ] 0 1 COMM1: Command blocking [ 003 174 ] 0: No COMM1: Command block. 3-11: Communication interface 1. EXT [ 003 173 ] 1: Yes COMM1: Basic IEC870-5enable [ 003 215 ] COMM1: Communicat.P139 3 Operation COMM1: Command block. ILS enable [ 003 217 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes COMM1: MODBUS enable [ 003 220 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes COMM1: DNP3 enable [ 003 231 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes COMM1: COURIER enable [ 103 040 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes 64Z51FEA Fig. protocol [ 003 167 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes COMM1: Addit. selecting the interface protocol.

P139 3 Operation COMM1: -103 prot. [ 003 178 ] [ 003 179 ] COMM1: Line idle state COMM1: Transm. sig. settings for the IEC 60870‑5-103 interface protocol./meas.dat [ 003 165 ] [ 003 074 ] COMM1: Baud rate COMM1: Cycl.block. disabled [ 038 046 ] 12Z62FFA Fig. address COMM1: Delta f [ 003 072 ] [ 003 052 ] COMM1: Test monitor on COMM1: Delta meas./meas. general scan [ 003 177 ] [ 003 077 ] COMM1: Selected protocol 304 415 COMM1: IEC 870-5-103 [ 003 219 ] COMM1: General enable USER [ 003 170 ] 1: Yes COMM1: Command blocking [ 003 174 ] MAIN: Test mode [ 037 071 ] COMM1: Communication error Communic. ext. data ILS tel.enab.val. interface 304 422 COMM1: Sig. spontan.block. block EXT [ 037 074 ] MAIN: Prot. variant COMM1: Select.v.USER [ 003 076 ] 0 1 0: No COMM1: Sig. 3-18 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .ILS tel [ 003 166 ] [ 003 150 ] COMM1: Name of manufacturer COMM1: Delta t [ 003 161 ] [ 003 053 ] COMM1: Octet address ASDU COMM1: Delta t (energy) [ 003 073 ] [ 003 151 ] COMM1: Spontan. 1: Yes [ 037 075 ] COMM1: Sig. time polling COMM1: Delta P [ 003 202 ] [ 003 054 ] COMM1: Octet comm./meas. 3-12: Communication interface 1.cycl. [ 003 071 ] [ 003 175 ] COMM1: Parity bit COMM1: Delta V [ 003 171 ] [ 003 050 ] COMM1: Dead time monitoring COMM1: Delta I [ 003 176 ] [ 003 051 ] COMM1: Mon. enable COMM1: Contin.sig.

/meas.enab.obj. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-19 . address [ 003 072 ] COMM1: Cause transm.P139 3 Operation COMM1: Selected protocol 304 415 COMM1: IEC 870-5-101 [ 003 218 ] COMM1: Line idle state [ 003 165 ] COMM1: Delta t [ 003 053 ] COMM1: Baud rate [ 003 071 ] COMM1: Delta t (energy) [ 003 151 ] COMM1: Parity bit [ 003 171 ] COMM1: Contin. [ 003 197 ] COMM1: Select.sig. [ 003 190 ] COMM1: Delta V [ 003 050 ] COMM1: ASDU2 conversion [ 003 191 ] COMM1: Delta I [ 003 051 ] COMM1: Initializ.USER [ 003 076 ] 0 Comm. address length [ 003 201 ] COMM1: Mon.dat [ 003 074 ] COMM1: Time tag length [ 003 198 ] COMM1: Cycl. ext. time polling [ 003 202 ] COMM1: Octet 2 comm. addr.3 addr. general scan [ 003 077 ] COMM1: Dead time monitoring [ 003 176 ] COMM1: Comm. [ 003 200 ] COMM1: Octet comm. interface 1 0: No 1: Yes COMM1: Communication error 304 422 COMM1: Sig. [ 037 075 ] COMM1: Sig. disabled [ 038 046 ] 19Z51FGA Fig.v. [ 003 175 ] COMM1: ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv. inf. sig.<->funct.obj. spontan. ASDU [ 003 194 ] COMM1: Octet address ASDU [ 003 073 ] COMM1: Addr.val./meas. settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol. [ 003 196 ] COMM1: Spontan.No.ILS tel [ 003 150 ] COMM1: Time-out interval [ 003 228 ] COMM1: General enable USER [ 003 170 ] 1: Yes COMM1: Command blocking [ 003 174 ] MAIN: Test mode [ 037 071 ] COMM1: Sig. data ILS tel. signal [ 003 199 ] COMM1: Delta P [ 003 054 ] COMM1: Balanced operation [ 003 226 ] COMM1: Delta f [ 003 052 ] COMM1: Direction bit [ 003 227 ] COMM1: Delta meas. enable [ 003 177 ] COMM1: Oct.block.type [ 003 195 ] COMM1: Transm.cycl. [ 003 179 ] COMM1: Inf./meas.block.length inf. length [ 003 192 ] COMM1: Test monitor on [ 003 166 ] COMM1: Address length ASDU [ 003 193 ] COMM1: Name of manufacturer [ 003 161 ] COMM1: Octet 2 addr. block EXT [ 037 074 ] MAIN: Prot. 3-13: Communication interface 1.

/meas. time polling [ 003 202 ] COMM1: Delta P [ 003 054 ] COMM1: Octet comm. interface COMM1: Communication error 304 422 MAIN: Test mode [ 037 071 ] COMM1: Sig.USER [ 003 076 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes COMM1: Sig. spontan. address [ 003 072 ] COMM1: Delta f [ 003 052 ] COMM1: Test monitor on [ 003 166 ] COMM1: Delta meas. data ILS tel.ILS [ 003 221 ] COMM1: General enable USER [ 003 170 ] 1: Yes COMM1: Command blocking [ 003 174 ] Comm. [ 003 175 ] COMM1: Parity bit [ 003 171 ] COMM1: Delta V [ 003 050 ] COMM1: Dead time monitoring [ 003 176 ] COMM1: Delta I [ 003 051 ] COMM1: Mon.v. sig. disabled [ 038 046 ] 19Z51FHA Fig.block.P139 3 Operation COMM1: Line idle state [ 003 165 ] COMM1: Transm.val. general scan [ 003 077 ] COMM1: Select. [ 003 179 ] COMM1: Selected protocol 304 415 COMM1: IEC 870-5. settings for the ILS-C interface protocol.enab. block EXT [ 037 074 ] MAIN: Prot.ILS tel [ 003 150 ] COMM1: Name of manufacturer [ 003 161 ] COMM1: Delta t [ 003 053 ] COMM1: Octet address ASDU [ 003 073 ] COMM1: Delta t (energy) [ 003 151 ] COMM1: Spontan./meas.sig.block.dat [ 003 074 ] COMM1: Baud rate [ 003 071 ] COMM1: Cycl. 3-20 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 ./meas.cycl. 3-14: Communication interface 1. ext. [ 037 075 ] COMM1: Sig. enable [ 003 177 ] COMM1: Contin.

asg.asg.asg. [ 003 249 ] COMM1: Selected protocol 304 415 COMM1: MODBUS [ 003 223 ] COMM1: General enable USER [ 003 170 ] 1: Yes Commun. selec. [ 003 212 ] COMM1: Dead time monitoring [ 003 176 ] COMM1: Reg. param. 3-15: Communication interface 1. settings for the MODBUS protocol.asg. selec.val. [ 003 213 ] COMM1: Mon. address [ 003 072 ] COMM1: Autom. [ 003 211 ] COMM1: Parity bit [ 003 171 ] COMM1: Reg. m. cmds [ 003 210 ] COMM1: Baud rate [ 003 071 ] COMM1: Reg. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-21 . time polling [ 003 202 ] COMM1: Delta t (MODBUS) [ 003 152 ] COMM1: Octet comm.event confirm.P139 3 Operation COMM1: MODBUS prot. variant [ 003 214 ] COMM1: Test monitor on [ 003 166 ] COMM1: Line idle state [ 003 165 ] COMM1: Reg. sel. sel. interface COMM1: Command blocking [ 003 174 ] COMM1: Communication error 304 422 MAIN: Test mode [ 037 071 ] 19Z50FJB Fig. sig.

time polling [ 003 202 ] COMM1: Ind.0 protocol.P139 COMM1: Selected protocol 3 Operation COMM1: Line idle state [ 003 165 ] COMM1: Link Confirm. address [ 003 072 ] COMM1: Ind. count. Need Time Del. Mode [ 003 243 ] COMM1: Delta t (DNP3) [ 003 248 ] 304 415 COMM1: DNP3 [ 003 230 ] COMM1: General enable USER [ 003 170 ] 1: Yes COMM1: Command blocking [ 003 174 ] MAIN: Test mode [ 037 071 ] Commun. inputs [ 003 232 ] COMM1: Octet comm. 3-16: Communication interface 1. bin.Confirm. settings for the DNP 3. bin./cl./cl. Retries [ 003 245 ] COMM1: Parity bit [ 003 171 ] COMM1: Appl.Timeout [ 003 244 ] COMM1: Baud rate [ 003 071 ] COMM1: Link Max.outputs [ 003 233 ] COMM1: Oct.v. 3-22 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . [ 003 235 ] COMM1: Phys. bin. Charact.DNP3 [ 003 240 ] COMM1: Ind./cl./cl. (DNP3) [ 003 250 ] COMM1: Link Confirm. [ 003 247 ] COMM1: Mon. Delay [ 003 241 ] COMM1: Ind. [ 003 234 ] COMM1: Test monitor on [ 003 166 ] COMM1: Ind. Char.2 comm./cl.addr.Timeout [ 003 246 ] COMM1: Dead time monitoring [ 003 176 ] COMM1: Appl. Timeout [ 003 242 ] COMM1: Delta meas. analog inp. interface COMM1: Communication error 304 422 19Z50AZA Fig. analog outp [ 003 236 ] COMM1: Phys.

val. selection [ 103 044 ] COMM1: Mon. settings for the COURIER protocol. time polling [ 003 202 ] COMM1: Parameter selection [ 103 045 ] COMM1: Octet comm. address [ 003 072 ] COMM1: Delta t (COURIER) [ 103 046 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes COMM1: Command blocking [ 003 174 ] MAIN: Test mode [ 037 071 ] Commun. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-23 . interface COMM1: Communication error 304 422 19Z51BAA Fig. 3-17: Communication interface 1.P139 3 Operation COMM1: Selected protocol 304 415 COMM1: COURIER [ 103 041 ] COMM1: General enable USER [ 003 170 ] COMM1: Line idle state [ 003 165 ] COMM1: Test monitor on [ 003 166 ] COMM1: Baud rate [ 003 071 ] COMM1: Command selection [ 103 042 ] COMM1: Parity bit [ 003 171 ] COMM1: Signal selection [ 103 043 ] COMM1: Dead time monitoring [ 003 176 ] COMM1: Meas.

. or ILS-C it is possible to select a signal for test purposes.sig.--. de v.sig. The following parameters are available: ● (221 105) CO MM1: Sel.start [ 003 184 ] COMM1: Spontan. pos . Selection possibilities: ■ ■ ■ ■ 3-24 don't execute execute open execute close execute intermed.] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute 48Z50FKA Fig.2.1 3 Operation COMM1 – Checking Spontaneous Signals For interface protocols based on IEC 60870‑5‑103.tes t Selection possibilities: ■ ■ ● Not assigned DEV01 .4. start [ --.sig.test [ 003 180 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 Signal n Selected signals COMM1: Test spont. COMM1: Sel.] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute COMM1: Test spont.2.P139 3. The transmission of this signal to the control station as ‘sig.2 Checking Switchgear Contact Positions and Signals When checking during test operations with the interface protocols based on IEC 60870‑5‑103 it is possible to trigger signals (SIG) and contact positions (DEV) from the control part.4. 3. DEV10 (221 106) C OMM1: Te st pos it ion de v. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .. end [ 003 186 ] COMM1: Spontan. sig.spontan. IEC 870‑5‑101. end‘ can then be triggered using setting parameters. end [ --.--. sig. 3-18: COMM1 – Checking spontaneous signals. start‘ or ‘sig.

several settings must be made in the P139. enable [ 103 177 ] COMM2: Select./meas. COMM2: General enable USER [ 103 170 ] [ 103 179 ] 0 1 0: No COMM2: Transm. address [ 103 072 ] COMM2: Name of manufacturer [ 103 161] COMM2: Octet address ASDU [ 103 073 ] COMM2: Spontan. spontan.v. In order for data transfer to function properly. time polling [ 103 202 ] COMM2: Octet comm. ext. USER [ 103 172 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes Commun.3 Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2) Communication interface 2 supports the IEC 60870‑5‑103 interface protocol.dat [ 103 074 ] COMM2: Cycl.4.ILS tel 1: Yes [ 103 150 ] COMM2: Delta t MAIN: Prot. disabled [ 103 053 ] [ 038 046 ] COMM2: Command block.cycl. [ 103 175 ] 1: Yes COMM2: Delta V [ 103 050 ] COMM2: Delta I [ 103 051 ] COMM2: Sig.enab. COMM2: Line idle state [ 103 165 ] COMM2: Baud rate [ 103 071 ] COMM2: Parity bit [ 103 171 ] COMM2: Dead time monitoring [ 103 176 ] COMM2: Mon.sig.block. data ILS tel. interface MAIN: Test mode [ 037 071 ] 40Z5070A Fig.USER [ 103 076 ] COMM2: Delta P [ 103 054 ] 0 COMM2: Delta f 1 [ 103 052 ] 0: No COMM2: Delta meas. sig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-25 . 3-19: Settings for communication interface 2.P139 3 Operation 3.

test [ 103 180 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 Signal n Selected signals COMM2: Test spont.sig.4.] 1 0: don't execute 1: execute COMM2: Test spont. end‘ can then be triggered via the local control panel.spontan.1 3 Operation COMM2 – Checking Spontaneous Signals It is possible to select a signal for test purposes.3. sig.--. The transmission of this signal to the control station as ‘sig. 3-26 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .--. start‘ or ‘sig. start [ --.P139 3. sig. end [ --. 3-20: COMM2 – Checking spontaneous signals. COMM2: Sel.start [ 103 184 ] 0 COMM2: Spontan.] 1 0: don't execute 1: execute 48Z50FLA Fig.sig. end [ 103 186 ] 0 COMM2: Spontan.sig.

rec. For each receive signal. communication interface 3 is designed as a protection signaling interface that will transmit real time signals (InterMiCOM protection signaling interface). Whereas communication interfaces 1 and 2 are designed as information interfaces to connect to data acquisition subsystems and for remote access.4. 1. any other internal or external binary signals may also be transmitted. thus defining the required checks for accepting the received binary signal.2 km) Use of external transmission equipment: ● FO module (e.4. sen d 1.4.g.4. For the send signals C OMM3: Fct . m ode re ce ive 1. 1. 1.4.) become visible. In addition a specifically selected telegram P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-27 . TD‑32 DC / Westermo up to max. 10 km) ● Voice frequency modem (e. Sending and receiving addresses COMM3 : S ource addre s s and COMM3: Re ce i vin g addres s can be set to different values.4 Telegram Configuration The communication baud rate is settable (C OMM3 : Baud rate) to adapt to the transmission channel requirements. an individual operating mode can be set COMM3 : O pe r. To transmit data the following physical media are available: Direct link without use of external supplementary equipment: ● Glass fiber (e.4 Communication Interface 3 (Function Group COMM3) 3. via 2 x G62.5 mm up to max.4. assign m. …) any signal from the selection table of the binary inputs (INP) can be chosen. 3.5/125 up to max. This setting parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication module is fitted.g. After activation of COMM3.4.3 Asynchronous data interface of primary multiplexing equipment Configuration and Enabling In order to use InterMiCOM. the communication interface COMM3 has to be configured using the parameter COMM3 : Fun cti on grou p COMM3.4. …) any signal from the selection table of the binary outputs (OUTP) can be chosen. binary state signals etc. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting COMM3: General enable USER. …). For the receive signals (COMM3: Fct.g. PZ 511 via twisted pair 2x2x0. thus avoiding that the P139 communicates with itself. all addresses associated to this function group (setting parameters. 3. as sign m. 8/14/20 km) ● Universal modem (e. 20 km) Digital network: ● 3. full-duplex communication interface.g. OZD 485 BFOC‑1300 / Hirschmann up to max. Its main application is to transmit signals from protective signaling (function group PSIG).1 Application Communication interface 3 is designed to establish a digital communication link between two MiCOM devices over which up to 8 binary protection signals may be transmitted.4.P139 3 Operation 3.4 km) ● Twisted pair (RS 422 up to max. In addition.2 Physical Medium COMM3 is provided as an asynchronous. The InterMiCOM protection signaling interface provides independent transmission of eight binary signals in each direction.

By selection of a binary signal and by setting its operating mode appropriately. (p. Recommended setting: Select binary signal from group 1 to 4 and set operating mode Blocking. 3-28 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 3-29)). Implication: No spurious pickup in the presence of channel noise. Implication: Fast peer-to-peer signal transfer. 3-21. Blocking teleprotection scheme: Preference: Speed. “Security” and “Dependability” for each signal: ● Binary signals 1 to 4: Operating mode settable to Blocking or Direct intertrip ● Binary signals 5 to 8: Operating mode settable to Permissive or Direct intertrip EN 60834‑1 classifies 3 categories of command based teleprotection schemes according to their specific requirements (see Fig. Recommended setting: Select binary signal from groups 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 and set operating mode Direct intertrip. Permissive teleprotection scheme: Preference: Dependability. The signal encoding along with the set operating mode for the telegram check defines the actual balance of “Speed”. these requirements can be fulfilled as follows: Direct transfer trip or intertripping: Preference: Security. Recommended setting: Select binary signal from group 5 to 8 and set operating mode Permissive.P139 3 Operation structure subdivides the 8 binary signals into two groups. Implication: Maximizes probability of signal transmission in the presence of channel noise.

Timer stage COMM3 : Time -ou t link fail .lin k fail.COMM3 are issued. signals COMM3: Comm. 3-21: Comparison of speed. As the main application for this protective signaling the fault signal may be mapped to the corresponding input signal in function group PSIG with the COMM3: Si g.4. is used to determine a persistent failure of the data transmission channel.f ault setting.asg. comm. CO MM3: D efault v alue rec. link fai l ur e and SFMON: Comm. …. signals COMM3: C ommu nicati ons fau lt and SFMON: Commun ic. The wide setting range allows adaptation to the actual channel transmission times and above all this is needed for time-critical schemes such as the blocking scheme.4. 8).fau lt COMM3 are issued and the received signals are automatically set to their user-defined default values (COMM3: De fault value rec. After the timer has elapsed.5 Communication Monitoring Timer stage C OMM3 : Time -out comm. After the timer has elapsed. 3. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-29 .f aul t is used for monitoring the transmission channel (this timer is re-triggered with each complete and correct received telegram). 1.P139 3 Operation Speed Blocking Permissive slow low high Security Direct Intertrip high Dependability 47Z1030A Fig. security and dependability offered by the three operating modes..

P139 3 Operation Message received Character frame & Source address check Blocking signals accepted Telegram receive check Permissive signals accepted Telegram CRC check Direct Trip signals accepted (Re)start of the monitoring timer stages COMM3: Time-out comm. 3-22: Message processing and communication monitoring.fault [ 120 033 ] 1 COMM3: Communications fault [ 120 043 ] COMM3: Time-out link fail. link failure [ 120 044 ] 47Z1031B Fig. 3-30 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . [ 120 035 ] 1 COMM3: Comm.

based on a total of the last 1000 received messages. and the overall maximum ratio can be read from COMM 3: N o. For this test only.u. The 7 remaining binary signals are not affected by this test procedure and remain to be sent with their actual values.4. this value is not used for regular end-to-end communication. 3.N o..P139 3 Operation 3.4.tlg. In addition. tel e gram errors). the test mode is reset automatically and the actual values of all 8 signals are transmitted again.. err. After setting the bit pattern wanted (as an equivalent decimal number at COMM3: Loop b ack send) the test can be triggered via COMM3: L oop back test. in case of problems with the InterMiCOM protection signaling interface. the loopback test can be used to verify or to exclude a defective device. using the set source address). The test result can be checked as long as the hold-time is running by reading the measured operating data C OMM3 : L oop back res u lt and C OMM3: L oop back receiv e.4. The result is provided as an updating measurand COMM3: No. will be issued. InterMiCOM updates the ratio of incorrectly received messages. All corrupted telegrams are counted (C OMM3: No.t el.er r.t . with x = 1 to 8). After the hold time has expired. After triggering the test by COMM3: Send signal. er rors is exceeded the corresponding signals C OMM3 : L im. te st. If the set threshold C OMM3 : Limi t te le gr. err ors p. InterMiCOM provides 2 test facilities for commissioning of the protection interface.e rr. a received signal can be checked at the receiving device. Thus. The transmission channel including the receiving device can be checked manually by setting individual binary signals (COMM3: Se nd s ignal for t est) to userdefined test values (C OMM3: Log.e xcee d.s t or ed. This counter as well as the stored maximum ratio of corrupted messages can be reset via COMM 3: R set . For a loop-back test.g.max.e xcee d.err. the loopback test is terminated and InterMiCOM reverts to the normal sending mode (e.g. the send output is directly linked back to the receive input.e rr. As soon as the hold-time has expired.te l. and SFMON: Lim. USER (as well as via the binary signal COMM 3: R ese t No. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-31 .. the preset binary signal is sent with the preset value for the set hold time COMM3: H old ti me f or t est. by reading the physical state signal.7 Commissioning Tools The actual values of send and receive signals can be read from the P139 as physical state signals (COMM3: State s e nd 1 and C OMM3 : St ate re ce ive 1. During the hold time.tlg. tel. s tate f or te st).6 Supervision of Communication Link Quality After a syntax check of each received message. e. sending the actual values of the configured send signals.E XT). This bit pattern is sent for the duration of the hold time set at COMM3: Hol d t ime f or te s t.4. . the source address is set to '0'.

which lists all visible functions. etc.4. 3. manufactured by the same company or different companies. GOOSE and GSSE) The IEC 61850 communication protocol is implemented by these function groups and the Ethernet module.1 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international standard. ● PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents: ■ ■ ■ 3-32 PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available services. properties and services. to exchange data for combined operation.1.5 3 Operation Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Groups IEC. available from the P139. This includes the capability of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED). This makes possible an automated creation of process variables. 3. For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device a data model. This communication standard IEC 61850 has now created an open and common basis for communication from the process control level down to the network control level. In order to facilitate engineering at the process control level a standardized description file of the device.4. Such a data model.P139 3. based on XML. commands.) used by the P139 with the device data model as per IEC 61850. This file can be imported and processed further by the relevant configuration program used by the process control device. measured values and commands. MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available object types. is created with the help of the data model.5. Function group IEC is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1 (hardware ordering option!).4. is used as a basis for an exchange of data between the devices and all process control installations interested in such information. for the exchange of signals. that are to be imported into the configuration tool “IED Configurator” or into a system configurator. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .5. Available is the following documentation providing the description of the IEC 61850 data model which is used with the P139: ● ICD file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language) with a description of data. The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. substations and signal images.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC) The P139 offers as an ordering option a communication protocol according to the Ethernet based IEC 61850 protocol. data. is created. specifically created for each device. measuring values. ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of parameter addresses (signals.

The RJ45 connector supports 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s. This command may also be issued from the IED Configurator.3 Configuration and Enabling The IEC function group can be included in the configuration by setting the parameter I EC : Fun ction group IE C. This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the P139. Therefore the Ethernet-based communication protocol IEC 61850 is available only as an alternative to function group COMM1.5. 3.4. The other memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for parameters from the IED Configurator and the operating system. The inactive communication parameters are activated by executing the command IE C: Switch Config. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting COMM3 : Ge ne ral enab le USER. The P139 features two memory "banks" one of which includes the active setting parameters. The setting parameters from the IEC function group as well as the related function groups GOOSE and GSSE are not automatically active in the P139. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-33 .P139 3 Operation 3. They cannot be modified from the local control panel (HMI) or with the operating program. Specific projectrelated extensions of the IEC 61850 parameters from the IED Configurator are loaded into the P139 by downloading a .1.5.4.1. The P139 may be equipped with the optional Ethernet module only as an alternative to the standard optional communication module. Setting parameters identified by “[ I C ] :…” in the IEC function group are set with the “IED Configurator”. After having included the parameter IEC: Functi on group IEC in the configuration the parameter IEC : Gen eral en abl e USER and the parameters for internal clock tracking are visible and freely configurable.2 Ethernet Module The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection which of the two interfaces is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the parameter [ IC]: Me di a. There are two ordering variants available for the fiber-optic interface: the ST connector and the SC connector both for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm (a third variant ST connector for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm is pending).MCL file. The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RS485 interface for remote access with the MiCOM S1 support software (function group COMM2). Bank.

iid .P139 3 Operation System configurator PACiS SCE . 3-34 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .mcl .x3v Operating program 19Z7001B Fig.icd IED Configurator IED Configurator S&R 103 . 3-23: Configuration according to IEC 61850-6.scd .

Instead. A “server” is always that device which provides information to other devices.5. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-35 . synchronization per IEC 61850 is automatically active but only if this communication protocol is applied. IEC 61870‑7‑2). A client may log on to this server in order to receive information.4. Here the P139 functions as an SNTP client. by selecting COMM1/IEC.1. The second server is only reverted to if no signal is received from the first server. as defined in the “Abstract Communication Service Interface” (ACSI. with spontaneous or cyclic information. In this case.4. Two SNTP servers may be set. server or client functionalities. When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization. and in the second operating mode the P139 requests a device-specific time signal during a settable cycle.5 Clock Synchronization With IEC 61850 clock synchronization is effected via the SNTP protocol.1.5. For clock synchronization one can choose between the operating modes Anycast from SNTP Server or Request from Server. for instance “reports”. 3. With the first operating mode synchronization occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all devices in the network. are assigned to the devices.4 Client Log-on Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system. 3. defined as standard for Ethernet. 3-24: Saving configuration parameters. which is set at the MAIN function then. clock synchronization is preferably performed by the first server. linked into the network. as is common with other protocols.P139 3 Operation IEC 61850 parameters separate from protection device parameters! IED Control PC Processor module Operating program Device parameters Parameter switch Parameter download Ethernet module IED Configurator Parameter upload IEC 61850 parameter IEC 61850 parameter Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank switching to enable the device parameters New approach to IED parameter management 19Z7002B Fig. In its function as server the P139 can supply up to 16 clients.

4.ST. A dataset is a list to transmit certain data objects.6 3 Operation Generating Datasets. 3. Whereas with unbuffered reporting pieces of information may be lost during a communications failure. 4 clients. 3-41)) datasets are used mainly for reporting. 3-42)) is limited to 1500 bytes.8 Single Commands Single commands (e. short command.5. long command.1. The P139 provides up to sixteen unbuffered reports and eight buffered reports independent of the number of clients logged-on. Data objects provided by the P139 are available for selection with a structure as specified by IEC 61850.1. The operating mode Direct control with normal security is provided for single commands.P139 3. the buffered report control blocks support a buffered transmission which is required for the uninterrupted writing of events.1. Reporting The specific project related feature of the P139’s communications behavior is determined by the configuration of datasets. A piece of information must be included in a dataset so as to be transmitted as a signal.12. A client is then able to activate the wanted report for himself and to set the transmission behavior to his requirements. the same dataset may be referenced in various reports or even in GOOSEs. 8 clients. (p. the other attributes are not set. Saving datasets at System\LLN0 is compulsory.4. One unbuffered report can be allocated to max. (p. The knowledge of dataset content is imperative for decoding and evaluating received signals.g. Within the quality descriptor for each piece of information the invalid bit and the test bit are served according to the P139’s state. The system concept with intended clients must be taken into account when datasets are assigned to the reports.4. reports and high priority transmission methods.4. persistent command) are configured with the operating program.ST.ind1 to SigGGIO1. Management is arranged into sixteen Unbuffered Report Control Blocks (urcbA to urcbP) and eight Buffered Report Control Blocks (brcbA to brcbH).7 Transmitting Modeled Signals Not Provided by the IEC 61850 Data Model In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional number of up to 16 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the P139 to be transmitted via reporting. Any number of datasets may be created with the IED Configurator.5. But only one command at a time is carried out.5. The data object indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the sequence given for the ‘m out of n’ selection for the state signals.4. Assigning datasets is not limited. 3. Next to their use with high priority transmission methods (see Section 3.1.5. Each client can log-on to any number of available reports. A selection of state signals (shuttling to communications) is made by setting I EC: SigGGI O1 selection. The P139 can serve up to sixteen clients. A pre-defined dataset may be assigned to each report which will then determine which data object will be transmitted with the relevant report.5. Configuration files possess a listing of all datasets with a description of all data objects included. merely the maximum size of a dataset to be transmitted by GOOSE (see Section 3. Reports are not received by the P139.ind16 may then be included in the datasets just as the other data objects. The selection of data objects and the resulting length of the dataset is determined by the application. and one buffered report can be allocated to max.2. Sending commands to the P139 can be carried out from all clients that have previously logged-on to the P139. 3-36 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . The indexes SigGGIO1.

5. Only one control command is executed at a time.9 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units Configuration of control of switchgear devices for the IEC 61850 is only possible with a special configuration software.4. further control requests issued by other clients during the execution of such a command are rejected. 3. For further details see description of function group GOOSE. Control of switchgear units can be carried out from all clients that have previously logged on to the P139. The range of values of the Originator Category. The switchgear device’s contact positions are signaled to the clients with the reports. Control requests issued by other clients are rejected. the IED Configurator.e. Because of this selection the switchgear unit is reserved for the client.5.) ● Originator Category: This is the originator of the command according to a list of standardized categories.4. If after a selection no control command is issued by the client the P139 resets this selection after a settable timeout period [IC ]: sboTimeout (default: 2 minutes) has elapsed. The following operating modes [I C ]: ctlMode l are available to control external devices by clients and they can be individually set for each switchgear device: ● Status only ● Direct control with enhanced security ● SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security When set to the operating mode Select before operate the switchgear unit is selected by the client before the control command is issued. is supported. as listed in the following table. If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at a time is being processed system wide ("uniqueness") then interlocking of secondary devices among themselves is setup with GOOSE.P139 3 Operation 3. (If unknown. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-37 . This kind of data consists of two information items: ● Originator Identification: This is text describing the originator of the switch command. then an empty text string is sent. i.1.1.10 Originator Category The Originator is an information type defined by IEC 61850. which is sent with switch commands and position signals of switchgear units.

asg. e l. regardless whether originating from an internal function of the P139. using the setting ● (221 061) MA IN: El e ctrical con trol = Remote and any of the following input signals: 8 process Spontaneous Process Event ● DEV xx: Inp. The internal commands are as follows: ● (035 071) MA IN : Ge n. cl ose cmd. ctr. tri p cm d.asg.e l . EXT ● (041 022) MAIN: Man. ctr.open ● DEVxx: In p. A trip or close command which is generated by a protection function.open ● DEV xx: In p. 4 automatic-station See note [1]. 6 bay-control Local EXT Control The control command is sent via binary input (see note [2]) by an operator at an external local control panel. The control command is sent by an operator at station level.asg.e l . using the setting ● (221 061) MA IN: El ectri cal contr ol = Local and any of the following input signals: 7 remote-control Remote EXT Control ● DEV xx: Inp.cl ose . The control command is sent by an automatic function at network level. 3 station-control See note [1].P139 3 Operation Originator category Originator Identification Use Case / Comment 1 remote-control See note [1] (at the end of this table). el. 2 automatic-remote See note [1].asg. EXT (See also note [2].) 3-38 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . from external devices or a manual command.ctrl . The control command is sent via binary input (see note [2]) by an operator at an external local control panel.cl ose . 5 bay-control Local HMI Control The control command is generated at the local HMI of the P139. The control command is sent by an automatic function at station level.ct rl . Usually this is a circuit breaker trip or a close command from the ARC function. trip comm an d ● (037 009) MA IN : C lose comman d Examples of external signals that can be assigned to these two commands: ● (037 019) MA IN: Parall e l trip E XT ● (037 018) MAI N: Man . The control command is sent by an operator at network level.

see table row No. In all MiCOM Px3x devices. [2]: External binary signals can be received via various interfaces: ● Opto-coupler inputs ● InterMiCOM protection communication ● GOOSE or GSSE substation communication ● Assignment of LOGIC outputs The P139 does never send the Originator Category “automatic-bay”. Possible causes: ● Loss of the auxiliary supply voltage of the P139 ● Commissioning activities ● Operation of self-monitoring of the P139 The P139 is in test mode.) 10 process 11 maintenance IED Restart Test Mode Operation Power-up or restart of the P139. this usually results in an intermediate position 00 or 11 of the switchgear device.) [1]: The P139 copies the Originator Identification from the command request into the information report. Possible causes: ● A manual switch command ● The operation of another protection and control device Further possible causes: ● Loss of supply voltage of electrical input signals ● Faulty wiring ● Faulty switchgear device (However. and therefore it is treated as process. 8 above.P139 3 Operation 9 Originator category Originator Identification Use Case / Comment process Spontaneous Process Event There is a spontaneous position change of the switchgear device. The test mode can be activated either by setting parameter ● (003 012) MA IN: Test mode USER or by the binary signal ● (037 070) MAIN: Test mode EXT (See also note [2]. Automatic Reclose is implemented as part of the protection functionality. intentionally or spontaneously. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-39 .

2 Network HMI Gateway Trip/close by external protection or control UC 7 UC 3. 7 UC 5 UC 8 t I Binary signal Communication link Internal interface 12Z7312A_EN Fig. The “UC” numbers refer to Originator Categories in the table above. 3-40 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P139 3 Operation UC 7 UC 1.4 UC 10. 11 UC 9 Circuit breaker Station HMI UC 6. 3-25: Use cases in the network context.

Such transmission is accomplished over the same hardware for the network. Transmission is carried out by an Ethernet Standard Protocol. 3.4. The standard IEC 61850 provides two modes for high priority transmission of information: the GSSE and the GOOSE. Applications.4.1. Fault transmission can be cancelled from the configuration.13 Communication with the MiCOM S1 Support Software via the Ethernet Interface Direct access by the MiCOM S1 support software via the Ethernet interface on the P139 may occur through the “tunneling principle”. but this is only supported by the associated MiCOM S1 support software (specific manufacturer solution). P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-41 .4. Furthermore messages in such a particular form can be received by all participants in the relevant sub-network. 3.12 High Priority Transmission of Information Whereas normal server-client services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level the high priority transmission of information is carried out directly at Ethernet level. The GOOSE enables transmission of all data formats available in the data model. The GSSE (also named UCA2-GOOSE ) is used to transmit binary information with a simple configuration by 'bit pairs'. and it is compatible with UCA2. The P139 supports receipt and evaluation of GOOSE including binary information and two-pole contact position signals from external devices.P139 3 Operation 3. which is used for server-client communication. integer values.1. independent of their server or client function. transfer trip or decentralized substation interlock.5. They are deployed in instances where high speed transmission of information is wanted between two or more devices.1. two-pole contact position signals or analog measured values. such as binary information. COMTRADE fault files in the P139 are transmitted uniformly either as ASCII or binary formatted files.5.11 Fault Transmission Including fault transmission for the IEC 61850 in the configuration is only possible with the IED Configurator. Transmission of fault files is supported per “File Transfer”. for example. are reverse interlocking. Available are all the familiar functions offered by the MiCOM S1 support software such as reading/writing of setting parameters or retrieving stored data.5.

Further setting parameters from function group GOOSE are set with the IED Configurator.P139 3. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting GO OSE: General enab le USER. GOOSE Messages are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. GOOSE features high-speed and secure transmission of information for reverse interlocking. the P139 provides the function group GOOSE as defined in the standard IEC 61850. blocking. enabling. trip commands.4. contact position signals and other signals. but they cannot be modified from the local control panel (MMI) or with the operating program.2. 3. After having configured the GOOSE all parameters associated to this function group are then visible and ready to be configured.5. 3-42 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .2 3 Operation Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE) For high priority exchange of information between individual devices (IEDs) in a local network.4.1 Configuration and Enabling Function group GOOSE can be configured by setting the parameter GOOSE: Functi on group GOOSE This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the P139.5. decentralized substation interlock. GOOSE messages therefore remain in the local network to which the P139 is connected.

stVal Fixed assignment S1 Studio Ext.ass ig. .. Selection of binary state signals (shuttling to communications) is made by setting GO OSE: Outp ut 1 fct.ind1 to GosGGIO2.4. 32 IED Configurator IED Configurator System/LLN0/Dataset x System/GosGGIO1 Pos1.stVal ..ind32 may then be included in the datasets just as the other data objects. 08 MCL IED Configurator System/DevGosGGIO3 Pos1. Pos32... When defining the datasets for GOOSE it is advised to select the individual data attributes and not the overlapping data objects.Dev 1 … 32 19Z7003A Fig.5.2. The maximum size of a dataset to be sent by GOOSE is limited to 1500 bytes.ST.. 3-26: GOOSE configuration... 3.stVal . as it is also possible with reporting....ST.. Output 32).ST.. 32 GOOSE: Output 1 . 32 System/GosGGIO2. The indexes GosGGIO2.2 Sending GOOSE The GOOSE can send up to eight different GOOSE messages which are managed in eight GOOSE Control Blocks (gcb01 to gcb08). Information content depends on the respective dataset assigned to GOOSE. When a state change occurs with a selected state signal or a measured value changes which is greater than the dead band set for the relevant data point then the complete GOOSE is sent...stVal IED Configurator System/LLN0/gcb01 .P139 3 Operation » Device A IEC 61850 Mapping S1 Studio » Device B S1 Studio System/GosGGIO2 GOOSE: Input 1 . Pos32. In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional number of up to 32 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the P139 to be transmitted via GOOSE.ind1 . A control display is shown by the IED Configurator to check this limit. By this the amount of data is kept within a limit and decoding is guaranteed on the receiving end.. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-43 . (or Output 2.. The data object indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the function assignments for the GOOSE outputs.

With the further setting of [ IC]: Data Obj I nde x / Type. A signal is rejected when one of the bits ([IC ]: Invalidit y Qu ality bits. by setting [IC ]: Mu lt icast MA C Addres s. see displayed bar with bit state) is received as a set bit.IID. The IED Configurator will support the import of . Contact position signals received from external devices (LN: DevGosGGIO3) are listed in the selection table for interlocking equations of the function group ILOCK.2. the signals received will automatically be set to their respective default value [IC]: De fault I npu t Val ue. (or Input 2. [I C]: VLA N I dent ifie r (h ex). Further characteristics are [ IC ]: Datase t R ef e rence and [IC]: Config urat ion Revis ion.5.SCD and . which is to be tested. The following configuration (shuttling to the device functions) of the logic state signals received from the logic node GosGGIO1 (GOOSE: Input 1 fct. 3. which are available to design a decentralized substation interlock. [IC] : A ppl ication ID (hex). In order to have unambiguous identification of a GOOSE sent. Should the data type of the selected data object provide quality information then this can be evaluated. the required information from the chosen GOOSE will be selected. The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the parameter [IC]: Minimum Cycle Time.assig. The identification features "VLAN identifier" and [IC] : Configuration Re vision that are also included in the GOOSE received will not be evaluated.3 Receiving GOOSE With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals as well as 32 two-pole contact position signals from external devices (Ext.MCL files when the "browse function" (virtual key) is applied. then GOOSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the maximum cycle time.P139 3 Operation time periods. Each GOOSE is given the state change index and the number of send repetitions.e. Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information. [IC]: Source Pat h.Devxx) can be received. because of a fault in communications). The cycles for the following send repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the parameter [IC ] : I ncreme nt. . [IC] : GOOSE Iden ti f ie r and [IC]: DataSet Refere nce. characteristics such as [IC ]: Mult icast MAC Addres s. …. [ IC]: Application ID (hex). which will contain the information wanted. For each state signal or contact position signal to be received a specific GOOSE message is to be selected. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition. These parameters characterizing the information may be taken either from device or project planning documentation of the sending device or from a configuration file which is conform to IEC 61850. Which of the possible state values will set the wanted security grade is dependent on the relevant application. Input 32)) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary signal inputs (opto‑coupler inputs). 3-44 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . Should no further state changes occur up to the time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed [ IC]: Maximum Cycle Time. If the duration of validity has elapsed without having received this GOOSE again (i.4. These parameters are usually described in a configuration file and are accepted from there during an import action. When activating [ IC]: Quality Obj Index the distance of the quality descriptor to the data object (if not preset) must be given as well as the quality criterion. [IC] : V LA N P r iority and [I C]: GOOSE I de nt if ie r must be entered in the IED Configurator settings. which corresponds to the GOOSE position index and the information structure of the sending device. The selection and acceptance of parameters from an existing project planning is distinguished by a simplified and very reliable data input.

OrdRun.4 Uniqueness of Control within a System If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at a time is being processed system wide (“uniqueness”) then interlocking of secondary devices among themselves is setup with GOOSE.ind1.5. 08 IED Configurator MCL System/OrdRunGGIO1 Ind1. 3-27: Uniqueness of Control. The P139 is capable to monitor the command status of up to 32 further devices. when it has received a control command.stVal IED Configurator System/LLN0/Dataset x IED Configurator System/LLN0/gcb01 .ind32.ST. In such a case all entries for this binary signal input are deleted.4..P139 3 Operation The virtual key "Unmap" may be used to remove the link of a binary signal input to an external data point. During a signaling receipt phase command effecting will be rejected.ST.stVal .stVal 19Z7004A Fig. The state information is reset and accordingly signaled after termination of the command sequence.2... 3. » Device A IED Configurator » Device B S1 Studio Control/LLN0.stVal are configured in a similar way to the other GOOSE inputs. This information – stored in a dataset – is distributed in the system by GOOSE and is therefore available to all other devices as an interlocking condition.stVal to OrdRunGGIO1. With the IED Configurator OrdRunGGIO1. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-45 . A shuttling to the interlocking equations is not necessary as their consideration within command checking is automatically enabled when the first binary signal input is configured.stVal.OrdRun.. Ind32. The P139 sets the status information Control/LLN0.

If the 3-46 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . ….3 Receiving GSSE With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received.4. This command may also be issued from the IED Configurator.assig. Each selected state signal is to be assigned to a bit pair in GSSE (GSS E: Out pu t 1 b it pa ir (or Output 2. GSSE: Input 1 bit pair).0-GOOSE) as defined in the IEC 61850 standard.MCL file. 3. binary state signals etc.g.. GSSE features high-speed and secure transmission of logic binary state signals such as reverse interlocking. …. the P139 provides.3. cycl e).5. cycle. Input 32) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs). the GSSE message.P139 3. GOOSE and GSSE in the P139 are not automatically activated.1 Configuration and Enabling Function Group GSSE can be configured by setting the parameter GSSE: Functi on grou p GSSE.2 Sending GSSE With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. or Input 2. blocking. Should no further state changes occur up to the time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed (GSSE: Max.4. Specific project-related extensions of the IEC 61850 parameters from the IED Configurator are loaded into the P139 by downloading a . as an additional functionality. The P139 features two memory “banks” one of which includes the active setting parameters.3. GSSE: In put 1 IE D name). Selection of binary state signals is made by setting GSSE: Out put 1 fct. Output 32)).4.) become visible. 3. Each GSSE includes time information on the validity duration of its information. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the P139. The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the parameter GSSE: Min. the IED name is used which was set in function group IEC. which will include the required information. The setting parameters for function groups IEC. The cycles for the following send repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the parameter GSSE: Increment. ….5.assig. all data points associated with this function group (setting parameters. trip commands. (or Output 2.5. GSSE is automatically sent with each state change of a selected state signal.3 3 Operation Generic Substation State Event (Function Group GSSE) For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic devices) in a local network. In order to have unambiguous identification of a GSSE sent. Selection of information wanted from the selected GSSE will occur by setting the bit pair (e. Configuration of the logic binary state signals received (GOOSE: Input 1 fct. For each state signal to be received. The inactive communication parameters are activated by executing the command IEC : Switch Con fig. The other memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for parameters from the IED Configurator and the operating system.5. 3. the GSSE function group (UCA2. Ban k.3. cycle time.4. After configuration of GSSE. enabling and other signals. Output 32). must be selected by setting the IED name (e. which will transmit this state signal. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GSSE repetition. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting GSSE : Ge ne ral e nable USER.g. then GSSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the max.

GSSE: In put 1 default).P139 3 Operation validity duration has elapsed without this GSSE being received again (i.e. The various settings. measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are described in chapters 7 and 8. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-47 . because of a communications fault). the signals received will automatically be set to their respective default value (e.g.

It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on the day only (day of the current year). the P139 calculates the current date (DD.MM. If the P139 does not receive a correct signal in the long run. a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available. the internal clock of the P139 can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional IRIG-B interface. Implausible signals are rejected by the P139. 3-48 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . the P139 checks the received signal for plausibility.YY).P139 3. IRIGB: General enable USER [ 023 200 ] IRIGB: Enabled [ 023 201 ] IRIGB: Synchron. Using this information and the year set at the P139. 3-28: IRIG‑B interface. ready [ 023 202 ] 47Z02BAA Fig. Disabling and Enabling the IRIG-B Interface The IRIG‑B interface can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter. Synchronization Readiness If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal.5 3 Operation IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB) If. synchronization will not be ready any longer. for example.

In order to ensure that during normal operation the P139 will recognize an input signal.6 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP) The P139 has opto coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the substation. The number of sampling steps is set at parameter INP : Filt er. With the occurrence of a general starting this time period may have to be increased to 40 ms under unfavorable conditions. The display of the state of a binary signal input – "low" or "high" – is independent of the setting for the operating mode of the signal input. Configuring the Binary Inputs One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The user can specify whether the presence (Active "high" mode) or absence (Active "low" mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic ‘1’ signal. it must persist for at least 20 ms. it is assumed that the required functions (marked “EXT” in the address description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by configuration. Thus one function can be activated from several control points having different signal voltages. filt.P139 3 Operation 3.). The same function can be assigned to several signal inputs. With this function enabled a status change at the binary logic input is only signaled when the input signal remains at a steady signal level during a set number of sampling steps (sampling step size = period / 20). or Active "low". Filter Function An additional filter function may be enabled in order to suppress transient interference peaks at the logic signal inputs (operating modes Active "high". It should be noted that time-critical applications such as time synchronization commands should not be mapped to the binary signal inputs of the analog I/O module as these have an increased reaction time due to internal processing. In this technical manual. filt. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-49 . Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The functions that will be activated in the P139 by triggering these binary signal inputs are defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs.

3-29: Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs. assignm. U xxx [ XXX XXX ] Function 1 EXT Function 2 EXT Function 3 EXT Function n EXT Selected function & Activate function INP: Oper.P139 3 Operation INP: Fct. 3: Active "high". 3-50 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . filt. mode U xxx [ YYY XXX ] 0 1 2 3 0: Active "low" 1: Active "high" 2: Active "low". -Uxxx & Input signal & INP: Filter [ 010 220 ] & & & INP: State U xxx [ ZZZ ZZZ ] & 12Z6213A Fig. filt.

With this protection it is possible to set whether the PT 100 resistance thermometer. Disabling or Enabling the Measured Data Input Function The Measured Data Input function can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters. In addition. The measured temperatures are also displayed as measured operating values and monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to determine whether they exceed or fall below set thresholds (see Section 3. (p.40. Ni 100 or Ni 120 resistance thermometers. 3-365)). the temperature p/c board (also called the RTD module). the 20 mA analog input or – if configured – one of the temperature sensors T1 to T9 is to be used for the thermal replica (see Section 3. The other input is designed for connection of a PT 100 resistance thermometer. 3-30: Disabling or enabling the measured data input function. it is monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to detect whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds (see Section 3. When the P139 is equipped with the analog (I/O) module Y it has two analog inputs available for measured data input. (p. The temperature p/c board (the RTD module) mounted in the P139 has 9 analog inputs available to connect temperature sensors T1 to T9.P139 3 Operation 3. 3294)). 3-365)). The current that is conditioned for monitoring purposes (IDC. The input current IDC present at the analog (I/O) module Y is displayed as a measured operating value.40. These analog inputs are designed for connection of PT 100. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-51 . In addition to the analog (I/O) module Y with analog inputs and outputs there is now a second analog module obtainable.32. Direct current is fed to the P139 through the 20 mA analog input (input channel 1).lin) is also displayed as a measured operating value. MEASI: General enable USER [ 011 100 ] 0 1 MEASI: Enabled [ 035 008 ] 0: No 1: Yes S8Z52H1A Fig. All measured variables are also forwarded to the Thermal Overload Protection function. (p.7 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI) There is a second optional analog module available for the P139.

5 0.1 Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA that is directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured – the temperature. When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a rising/rising or falling/falling curve sense is allowed (no peak or vee-shapes). 3-52)).45 0. provided that the measured data input is set accordingly.8 0. called “interpolation points”.5 0.6 I DC / I DC.nom 1.7. the user specifies which input current IDC will correspond to the current that is monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function.2 0.lin1 0 0 0.3 0. IDC.lin.7 0. I DC. IDC.) The resulting points. (These two setting parameters refer to value pair number 1.nom I DC20 19Z5266A_EN Fig. In order to implement a simple characteristic. i. 3-31: Example of the conversion of 4 to 10 mA input current to 0 to 20 mA monitored current.1 0.3 0. If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the measured quantity only in certain ranges. Furthermore.2 I DC1 0. for certain applications it may be necessary to limit the range being monitored or to monitor certain parts of the range with a higher or lower sensitivity. If the setting differs. linearization can be arranged.25 0.4 0.2 1.6 0. for example. setting parameters for value pairs 2 to 20 are available.e.lin20 1 0. 3-31.35 0.P139 3 Operation 3. By setting the value pair MEA SI: IDC 1 and MEASI: IDC. the signal SFMON: In vali d scal in g IDC will be generated.lin / I DC. are connected by straight lines in an IDC‑IDC.1 I DC. Up to 20 interpolation points are available to implement a complex characteristic. which are also used as limiting values (see Fig.9 0.1 I DC.lin diagram.lin. too.lin 1.4 0. it is sufficient to specify two interpolation points. 3-52 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . (p.

nom Enable IDC p.lin / IDC.3 IDC.1 1.nom is shown as a broken line).2 IDC1 0.7 0.2 IDC / IDC.8 Interpolation points IDC.4 0.4 IDC. D5Z52KEC_EN Fig.7 0.lin2 0.lin20 0.P139 3 Operation IDC.lin3 0. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-53 .2 IDC.1 0 0 0.1 IDC.lin1 0.6 IDC.6 IDC2 IDC3 0. 3-32: Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.1 0.9 IDC4 1 IDC20 1.lin4 0.nom 0.u.3 0.

[ 004 136 ] MEASI: Current IDC p. Beyond the linearization described above.u.lin 18 [ 037 185 ] MEASI: IDC 5 [ 037 158 ] MEASI: IDC 12 [ 037 172 ] MEASI: IDC 19 [ 037 186 ] MEASI: IDC. 20mA inp.lin 10 [ 037 169 ] MEASI: IDC.lin 12 [ 037 173 ] MEASI: IDC. [ 037 190 ] MEASI: IDC.lin 9 [ 037 167 ] MEASI: IDC.lin 16 [ 037 181 ] MEASI: IDC 3 [ 037 154 ] MEASI: IDC 10 [ 037 168 ] MEASI: IDC 17 [ 037 182 ] MEASI: IDC. Thereby negative values.lin 2 [ 037 153 ] MEASI: IDC.lin 20 [ 037 189 ] MEASI: IDC 7 [ 037 162 ] MEASI: IDC 14 [ 037 176 ] MEASI: Enable IDC p. 3-54 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P139 3 Operation MEASI: IDC 1 [ 037 150 ] MEASI: IDC 8 [ 037 164 ] MEASI: IDC 15 [ 037 178 ] MEASI: IDC. the user has the option of scaling the linearized values. can be displayed as well and are available for further processing by protection functions.lin 4 [ 037 157 ] MEASI: IDC. [ 004 135 ] MEASI: Current IDC [ 004 134 ] S8Z52H2A Fig. IDC.lin.lin 7 [ 037 163 ] MEASI: IDC.lin 13 [ 037 175 ] MEASI: IDC. p.lin 3 [ 037 155 ] MEASI: IDC.lin 15 [037 179 ] MEASI: IDC 2 [ 037 152 ] MEASI: IDC 9 [ 037 166 ] MEASI: IDC 16 [ 037 180 ] MEASI: IDC. 20mA inp.lin 1 [037 151 ] MEASI: IDC. for example.lin 5 [ 037 159 ] MEASI: IDC.lin 6 [ 037 161 ] MEASI: IDC.lin 14 [ 037 177 ] MEASI: IDC< open circuit [ 037 191 ] MEASI: Enabled [ 035 008 ] SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC [ 093 116 ] MEASI: Overload 20mA input [ 040 191 ] Input channel 1(I-1) SFMON: Overload 20 mA input [ 098 025 ] MEASI: Open circ.u.lin 19 [ 037 187 ] MEASI: IDC 6 [ 037 160 ] MEASI: IDC 13 [ 037 174 ] MEASI: IDC 20 [ 037 188 ] MEASI: IDC. [ 040 192 ] SFMON: Open circ.lin 8 [037 165 ] MEASI: IDC.u.lin 17 [ 037 183 ] MEASI: IDC 4 [ 037 156 ] MEASI: IDC 11 [ 037 170 ] MEASI: IDC 18 [ 037 184 ] MEASI: IDC. [ 098 026 ] MEASI: Curr.lin 11 [ 037 171 ] MEASI: IDC. 3-33: Analog direct current input.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-55 .1.7.8 mA. IDC.lin.lin20 [ 037 193 ] MEASI: Curr. 3-294)).1. The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA analog input against overloading.2 Open-Circuit and Overload Monitoring The P139 is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function.u. If current IDC falls below the set threshold MEA SI: ID C < open cir cuit.lin1 [ 037 192 ] MEASI: Scaled val. and the current IDC. u. If the direct current does not exceed the set threshold. 3. IDC. T). If it exceeds the set threshold of 24. p.1. 3. the per-unit input current IDC p. 3-34: Scaling of the linearized measured value. 3.2 Connecting a Resistance Thermometer to the “PT 100 Analog Input” on the Analog (I/O) Module Y This analog input on the analog (I/O) module Y is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer. (p.IDC.7.P139 3 Operation MEASI: Scaled val. and as the maximum value since the last reset. [ 004 136 ] MEASI: Scaled value IDC. then no further calibration is required. If the PT 100 resistance thermometer is connected using the 3-wire method.lin will be displayed as having a value of “0”. the signal MEA SI: Open ci rc. is to be used as a backup sensor (see Section 3. The mapping curve R = f(T) of PT 100 resistance thermometers is defined in standard IEC 751. connected to the temperature p/c board (the RTD module).1 Zero Suppression Zero suppression is defined by setting MEA SI: En able ID C p. the signal M EASI : O ve rload 20mA in put is issued.32.lin [ 004 180 ] Q9Z5029A Fig. 3.3 Backup Sensors The open circuit signal on the 20 mA analog input from the function group MEASI is forwarded to the Thermal Overload Protection function. Here it is possible to set whether the resistance thermometer connected to the PT 100 input or – if configured – one of the temperature sensors T1 to T9. a normalized value (temperature norm.u.7. 20mA inp.7. is issued. The result of a temperature measurement can be read out as a direct measurand (temperature T).

the signal M EASI : O pe n circ. (p.) is issued. T9. 3-56 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .7. the signal MEASI : Open circ. which is set under MEASI: Ty pe of TempSe nsors The result of a temperature measurement can be read out as a direct measurand (temperature Tx). In the Limit Value Monitoring function the limit values assigned to the faulty PT 100 are blocked.7.7. These analog inputs are designed for connection of PT 100.2.3 Connecting Temperature Sensors to the Temperature P/C Board (the RTD Module) The temperature p/c board (the RTD module) mounted in the P139 has 9 analog inputs available to connect temperature sensors T1 to T9. T1 (or T2.32. In the Thermal Overload Protection it is possible to set whether the 20 mA input or – if configured – one of the temperature sensors T1 to T9. a normalized value (temperature norm. Open-Circuit Monitoring If one of the measuring circuits is open due to a broken wire. 3-35: Temperature measurement using a PT 100 resistance thermometer connected to the analog (I/O) module. All nine temperature sensors must be of the same type. then no further calibration is required. PT100 [ 040 190 ] Measur. resp. 3. 3. Tx) and as the maximum value since the last reset (temperature Tx max). input PT100 SFMON: PT100 open circuit [ 098 024 ] MEASI: Temperature T [ 004 133 ] MEASI: Temperature p.2.u. Ni 100 or Ni 120 resistance thermometers. If the PT 100 resistance thermometer is connected using the 3-wire method.1 Open-Circuit Monitoring If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire.P139 3 Operation MEASI: Enabled [ 035 008 ] MEASI: Open circ. T [ 004 221 ] MEASI: Temperature Tmax [ 004 233 ] 19Z5262A Fig. 3-294)). 3. is to be used as a backup (see Section 3.2 Backup Sensors The open circuit signal on the PT 100 analog input from the function group MEASI is forwarded to the functions Thermal Overload Protection and Limit Value Monitoring. P T10 0 is issued. connected to the temperature p/c board (the RTD module). ….

[ 098 029 ] MEASI: Temperature T1 [ 004 224 ] MEASI: Temperature p. issued by function group MEASI. input T1 SFMON: T1 open circ. are forwarded to the Limit Value Monitoring function. T1 [ 040 193 ] Measur. the open circuit signals from the temperature sensors. T9 If ME ASI: BackupTe mpSe ns or P Sx is set to None the Limit Value Monitoring function will operate without backup sensors. under the assumption that M EASI : Back upTempSen s or P Sx is set to Group 1 .P139 3 Operation MEASI: Enabled [ 035 008 ] MEASI: Open circ. If the backup temperature sensor from group 2 also fails it will be replaced by the corresponding sensor from group 3. The same applies to sensors T2 to T9. 3-36: Temperature measurement with temperature sensor T1 connected to the temperature p/c board. issued by the function group MEASI. Should the main temperature sensor (that has been set in the Thermal Overload Protection) fail. T6 Group 3: T7. it is possible to select in whether the 20 mA input or – if configured – one of the temperature sensors T1 to T9.32.2. are forwarded to the Thermal Overload Protection function.u. 3-294)). (p. T5. T3 Group 2: T4. In addition to this. For this purpose the temperature sensors connected to the temperature p/c board (RTD board) are divided into three groups: Group 1: T1. the defective temperature sensor from group 1 is replaced by the corresponding sensor from group 2. connected to the temperature p/c board (the RTD module). T2. Backup Sensors The open circuit signals from temperature sensors. T8. T1 [ 004 081 ] MEASI: Temperature T1 max. The selection of such backup sensors for the Limit Value Monitoring function is made in the function group MEASI. If ME AS I: BackupTempSe nsor PSx is set to Group 1 . [ 004 234 ] 19Z5263A Fig. The association of backup temperature sensors is listed below: P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-57 . is to be used as a backup sensor (see Section 3.2/3.

with the setting Group 1 . Should temperature sensor T4 also fail it will be replaced by T7. Application Example A motor protection application is shown in the figure below with temperature sensors T1 to T9 connected to the temperature p/c board (RTD module) and a “PT 100” resistance thermometer connected to the analog (I/O) module Y.P139 3 Operation Main sensor Backup sensor from group 2.2 or Group 1 .2/3 T1 T4 T7 T2 T5 T8 T3 T6 T9 Should temperature sensor T1 fail. 3-365)). with setting: Backup sensor from group 3.40. Sensor RTD RTD RTD Rotor Bearing Bearing Stator 19Z5236 Fig. with setting: Group 1 . 3-37: Temperature measurements on a motor to be used with the Limit Value Monitoring function (LIMIT) and the Thermal Overload protection (THERM). 3-58 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . RTD Phase B C Ambient temperature/ Coolant temperature RTD Stator RTD RTD RTD RTD Backup Temp. For further details refer to section with the description of the “Limit Value Monitoring” (Section 3. it will be replaced by T4. (p. Sensor RTD A RTD RTD RTD RTD Main Temp.2/3 Group 1 .2/3.

latching can be disabled. and Blocking of the Output Relays (Function Group OUTP) The P139 has output relays for the output of binary signals. Operating Mode of the Output Relays The user can set an operating mode for each output relay that determines whether the output relay operates in a normally open arrangement (NO) or normally closed arrangement (NC) and whether it operates in latching mode. The binary signal assignment is freely configurable by the user. Depending on the selected operating mode. Operating Mode. Blocking the Output Relays The P139 offers the option of blocking all output relays via setting parameters or by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.8 Configuration. The output relays are likewise blocked if the P139 is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs or if self-monitoring detects a hardware fault. signalized by the onset of a general starting. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-59 . The same binary signal can be assigned to several output relays by configuration. Configuration of the Output Relays One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. Any output relay configured for MAI N: Blocked/faul ty will not be included in the blocking signals.P139 3 Operation 3. or of a new system disturbance. either manually using a setting parameter or by an appropriately configured binary signal input at the start of a new fault.

USER [ 021 009 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1 100 ms 1: execute OUTP: Reset latch. relays blocked [ 021 015 ] ≥1 0: No OUTP: Block outp. and blocking the output relays. 3-60 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . Triggering persists for the duration of the set hold time. disabled [ 038 046 ] SFMON: Hardware fault 304 950 OUTP: Oper.dist) & ≥1 5: NE updating & 6: NE manual reset & OUTP: Fct.P139 3 Operation OUTP: Outp. 3-38: Configuration. mode K xxx [ xxx xxx ] 1 ≥1 2 3 -K xxx 4 ≥1 5 6 ≥1 1: ES updating 2: ES manual reset ≥1 3: ES reset (fault) 4: ES reset (syst. Testing the Output Relays For testing purposes. the user can select an output relay and trigger it via setting parameters. EXT [ 040 014 ] 1: Yes ≥1 MAIN: Prot.block USER [ 021 014 ] 0 1 OUTP: Outp. ext. EXT [ 040 015 ] 19Z8041A Fig. runn OUTP: Latching reset 1 & [ 040 088 ] [ 035 004 ] MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] OUTP: Reset latch.rel. Therefore the P139 must be switched to “off-line”.assignment K xxx & [ yyy xxx ] Signal Signal Signal Signal 1 2 3 n OUTP: State K 301 [ zzz zzz ] & ≥1 S1 1 R1 m out of n ≥1 Selected signal & ≥1 & MAIN: General starting [ 040 000 ] FT_RC: System disturb.rel. setting the operating mode.

3-39: Testing the output relays. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-61 .test [ 003 042 ] OUTP: Fct.assignment K xx2 [ BBB BBB ] OUTP: Fct.assignment K xxx [ ZZZ ZZZ ] MAIN: Device on-line [ 003 030 ] 0: No (= off) Selected relay OUTP: Relay test [ 003 043 ] OUTP: Hold-time for test [ 003 044 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute Q6Z0139B Fig.P139 3 Operation OUTP: Relay assign.assignment K xx3 [ CCC CCC ] -K xxx OUTP: Fct.assignment K xx1 [ AAA AAA ] OUTP: Fct. f.

9 3 Operation Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO) Measurands made available by the P139 can be provided in BCD (binary coded decimal) form through output relays or in analog form as direct current output. 3.2 Enabling Measured Data Output The measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input. en abl ed E XT has not been configured to a binary signal input. If the function ME ASO: Ou tp. 3-62 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . U xxx [ xxx xxx ] U x1 U x2 U x3 U xx Address 036 085 MEASO: Outp. assignm. BCD output is always possible. 3-40: Disabling or enabling the measured data output function. whether the P139 is equipped with analog module Y or not.9. Output as direct current can only occur if the P139 is equipped with analog module Y. enabled EXT [ 036 085 ] MEASO: Enable 304 600 S8Z52H5A Fig.P139 3. INP: Fct. MEASI: General enable USER [ 011 100 ] 0 1 MEASI: Enabled [ 035 008 ] 0: No 1: Yes S8Z52H1A Fig. e nable d EXT has been configured.9. 3. provided that the function MEASO: Outp.9. then the measured data output is always enabled.1 Disabling or Enabling the Measured Data Output Function The Measured Data Output function can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters.1. 3-41: Enabling measured data output.1.1 General Settings 3.

1. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-63 .9.outp. 304 601 MAIN: Reset indicat. 3-42: Resetting the measured data output function.3 Resetting the Measured Data Output Function BCD or analog output of measurands is terminated for the duration of the hold time if one of the following conditions is met: ● The measured data output function is reset from the integral local control panel or through an appropriately configured binary signal input. Scaling of analog output is also suited for directional-signed output of some fault measurands. in particular fault location in percent. ● There is a general reset. EXT [ 065 001 ] 47Z13H6A Fig. ● LED indicators reset MEASO: Reset output USER [ 037 116 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute MEASO: Reset output EXT [ 036 087 ] MEASO: Output reset [ 037 117 ] MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MEASO: Reset meas. 3. USER [ 021 010 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: Reset indicat.4 Scaling Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the P139 inherent setting range.val.9.P139 3 Operation 3.1.

9. val ue The BCD display range should be set so that the value 399 is never exceeded.max) and the associated BCD display range (BCD. 3..RL2.2 3 Operation BCD Measured Data Output The user can select a measurand for output in BCD form by assigning output relays.min .. Mx. 1 Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected measurand (variable Mx). If the hold time has been set to blocked.under “minimum” and “maximum”. val.. 3. If this should occur or if the measurand is outside the acceptable measuring range.9. (Mx. then the value for "Overflow" (all relays triggered) is transmitted. value ● MEA SO: BC D-Out max.scal.RL1 and Mx.RL2 are listed in the operating program S&R-103 . The selected measurand is available in BCD-coded form for the duration of the set hold time MEA SO: Hold t ime output BCD..9. If the selected variable was not measured.RL1 .2.P139 3.RL1 and Mx..1 Output of Measured Event Values If the measured event value is updated during the hold time.. Measurands Range Measurands of the variable Mx Mx. After the hold time has elapsed.. BCD ● MEASO: Scal ed m ax. val. This leads to an immediate availability at the output of the updated value.RL2 Associated scaled measurands 0 . ● MEA SO: Scale d min . BCD.2..PC Access Software MiCOM S1 .3 Scaling of BCD Output In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range (Mx.) 3-64 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 3. then there is no output of a measurand value. the measurand output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. the measured operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.min .2.max) in scaled form (as Mx.scal.. Mx.max) have to be set. the current value is saved and the hold time is re-started.min . The complete range of values is defined by their end values Mx. Mx.9.2 Output of Measured Operating Values The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time. BCD ● ME ASO: BC D-Out m in ..

813 = 520/640 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-65 . value (BCD value not valid) Mx.. BCD-Out max.500 = 320/640 0.max..9..min Measurands Mx: BCD-Out max. "Scaled max. Scaled measurands to be output Mx.scal.RL1) / (Mx..00% .... percent Associated scaled measurands 0 .00%.RL1) / (Mx.min = (Mx..Mx.Mx.max = Mx = Mx..RL1 or Mx > Mx.RL2 Measurands Mx: BCD-Out max.00% to +320...scal. value (Overflow) Mx < Mx.. Mx..min .max = (Mx. BCD" Measurands BCD display values Measurands in the range "Measurands to BCD-Out min. BCD" .max with: Mx.min .max ..RL1 Designation of the set values in the data model "Scaled min.Mx.RL1 = Mx = Mx..5 .813 with: 0. Measurands Range Fault measurand: -320. value be output" (Valid BCD value) Measurands: BCD-Out min. value .RL2 3.RL2 .scal.2.Mx. 1 Measurands to be output Range Measurands to be output 0% . Mx. The PU fault location is given in the range from 0% to 200%. val. val.00% FT_DA:Fault locat.P139 3 Operation Measurands to be output Range Measurands to be output Mx. 0. +320. 200% Scaled measurands to be output 0.min.4 Example for Scaling of BCD Output The value range for the fault measurand is set from –320.scal. value (BCD value not valid) Mx.RL1 Mx.RL2 . ..

00 s 037 140 ME ASO : Scal ed m in . percent [004 027] [037 050] 200 0 -320% 0% 200% 320% FT_DA: Fault locat.500 037 141 M EASO : Scale d m ax. BC D FT_DA: Fau lt locat. BCD value FT_DA: Fault locat. percent [004 027] 47Z1040A Fig. percent MEASO: Valid BCD value [004 027] FT_DA: Fault locat.P139 3 Operation Measurands BCD display values Measurands in the range "Measurands to be output" 0 . pe rcent 010 010 MEASO : Hold time output BCD 1. assi gnm. va lue 200 The following figure displays the values output as a function of the fault location.. valu e 0 037 143 MEASO : BC D-Out m ax. BCD 0.. BCD 0. val . parameters/ Address Description Current value 056 020 MEASO : F unction group MEASO With 031 074 MEASO : Ge ne ral en able USE R Yes 053 002 ME ASO : F ct.813 037 142 MEASO : BC D-Out m in . 200 In this example the following P139 settings are selected: /Parameter/Config. 3-66 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . The BCD value and the signal MEASO: Vali d BCD value = Yes are only issued in the value range 0% to 200%. val. 3-43: Example of BCD output of fault location.

MEASO: Valid BCD value Value not measured [ 037 050 ] Selected meas. value ≥ 399 Measured value 1 Measured value 2 Measured value 3 c1 Measured value n c2 Scaling of the BCD output Selected meas. event value being updated Selected meas. . Overflow MEASO: Fct. BCD 037 140 037 120 MEASO: Scaled max. BCD 037 141 x: 2 037 121 MEASO: BCD-Out min. 1 ++ 2 1. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-67 . val. oper. val. value MEASO: 100-dig. . bit 0 (BCD) [ 037 059 ] Selected meas..val. value 037 142 x: 3 037 122 MEASO: BCD-Out max. BCD [ 053 002 ] Meas. 3-44: BCD measured data output. assignm. val. MEASO: 10-digit bit 2 (BCD) [ 037 057 ] 304 601 MEASO: 10-digit bit 3 (BCD) [ 037 058 ] MEASO: 100-dig. Overflow behavior is displayed in BCD example (see previous figure).outp. 100 % ++ Scaling of the BCD output Address MEASO: Scaled min. value 037 143 MEASO: Output value x x: 1 19Z5264A Fig.. bit 1 (BCD) [ 037 060 ] Selected Meas.2 MEASO: Output value x [ * ] 0 . val.P139 3 Operation MEASO: Hold time output BCD [ 010 010 ] MEASO: Enabled [ 037 102 ] MEASO: 1-digit bit 0 (BCD) [ 037 051 ] MEASO: 1-digit bit 1 (BCD) [ 037 052 ] Setting blocked MEASO: 1-digit bit 2 (BCD) [ 037 053 ] MEASO: Enable MEASO: 1-digit bit 3 (BCD) [ 037 054 ] 304 600 MEASO: 10-digit bit 0 (BCD) [ 037 055 ] MEASO: 10-digit bit 1 (BCD) [ 037 056 ] MEASO: Reset meas. val.

372).3.9.2 Output of Measured Operating Values The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time. This leads to an immediate availability at the output of the updated value. the measurand output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started.9. ● MEASO: Scal ed max. 5-22)). 3. 3. ● MEASO : Scal ed k ne e val. the current value is saved and the hold time is re-started. Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected measurand (variable Mx). Section 5. The selected measurand is output as direct current for the duration of the set hold time MEA SO: Ho ld ti me ou tpu t A -1. 3-45.min . Three interpolation points per channel can be defined for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a measuring instrument. (p.max). If the selected variable was not measured. the measured operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset. resp. The complete range of values is defined by their end 3-68 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .1 Output of Measured Event Values If the measured event value is updated during the hold time. If the hold time has been set to blocked.2. with: ● Mx. A. The direct current that is output is displayed as a measured operating value.3.max: maximum value to be output This measurand range to be output is defined by setting the following parameters: ● MEA SO: S cale d min . then there is no output of a measurand value. Mx. In this way the user can obtain an analog output characteristic similar to the characteristic shown in Fig. 3.3. A-1 or ME ASO: Scaled max.3 Configuration of Output Relays Assigned to the Output Channels The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the output relays assigned to the output channels are configured for MEA SO: Value A-1 outp ut. Mx. val..9.5 Measurand Range to be Output The measurand range to be output is (Mx.9. resp.knee .9.3 3 Operation Analog Measured Data Output Analog output of measured data is two-channel.3.9...2. A -2.. resp. val.min: minimum value to be output ● Mx.3.P139 3. 3. 3. The user can select two of the measurands available in the P139 for output in the form of load-independent direct current. val . val. A.knee: Knee-point value for the measurand range to be output ● Mx. One additional value for the knee point must also be defined. After the hold time has elapsed.7. (p.4 Scaling the Analog Display In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range in scaled form and the associated display range have to be set. since the output channels would otherwise remain short-circuited (see the terminal connection diagrams. A-1 or ME ASO: Scaled min. A -1 or MEASO: Scaled knee val.

RL1 = Mx = Mx..RL1) Mx.scal... "Scaled max. ● ME AS O: An Out kne e point A -1 or MEA SO : AnOut knee point A -2.RL2 Mx.scal.RL2 Mx.RL1 or Mx > Mx." (Value A-x valid) Measurands: "AnOut min.scal..max = Mx = Mx.RL1) / (Mx.... Mx. A -1 or MEASO: AnOut min.min Measurands Mx: "AnOut max.RL1) / (Mx. val. Mx..Mx.knee . val.min . value Ax" .." (Value A-x not valid) Mx.RL1 Designation of the set values in the data model "Scal. .RL1 .knee .3...scal. A-x" .) Measurands Range Measurands of the variable Mx Mx.. val .RL2. resp. ● MEA SO: A nOu t max.max output with: Mx.RL1 and Mx.RL2 Measurands Mx: "AnOut max. A-1 or ME ASO: AnOut max. val.. Mx." (Value A-x not valid) Mx.scal.min . val.. val. Mx.max = (Mx.. (Mx.RL1 Mx. knee-point Ax" . "AnOut max.knee .. val. .max . 1 Measurands to be output Range Measurands with knee-point to be output Mx. min.min . .knee = (Mx.9.. resp. val.max Scaled measurands with a scaled knee-point to be Mx.. A-2.. "AnOut knee point A-x" . val..min = (Mx.scal. A-2. Mx.RL2 are listed in the operating program S&R-103 – PC Access Software MiCOM S1 – under “minimum” and “maximum”. Measurands Analog display values Measurands in the range "Measurands to be output" "AnOut min...RL2 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-69 . resp.P139 3 Operation values Mx... "Scal.Mx.Mx..6 Associated Display Range The associated display range is defined by setting the following parameters: ● ME ASO: A nOu t min ..RL1) / (Mx. val.RL1 and Mx." (Overflow) Mx < Mx.RL2 Associated scaled measurands 0 . Ax" 3.RL2 Mx.

067 .1 Vnom .0 V ) = 0..10 V.9.scal. The knee-point of the characteristic is 0.max = (100 V .0 V ) = 0..02 ..P139 3...7 3 Operation Example for Scaling of Analog Display Ranges Voltage A-B is selected as the measurand to be transmitted by channel A-1..scal.0 V ) = 0.67 with: Mx... The range to be transmitted is from 0. 0... The measuring range is from 0 to 1...min = (2 V ..5 Vnom with Vnom = 100 V..067 Mx.3.0 V ) / (150 V . 1 Vnom In this example the following P139 settings are selected in the menu branch Parameter/Config. 0. Measurands Range Measurands of the variable Mx 0 V .67 Measurands Analog display values Measurands in the range "Measurands to be output" 4 mA .1 Vnom with an associated display of 16 mA. 150 V Associated scaled measurands 0 .knee = (10 V .scal..02 to 1 Vnom with the associated display range from 4 mA to 18 mA.013 . parameters: 3-70 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 ... 16 mA . 18 mA 0.. 100 V Associated scaled measurands 0. 1 Measurands to be output Range Measurands with knee-point to be output 2 V ...013 Mx. 0.0 V ) / (150 V .0 V ) / (150 V .

the user can specify the output current that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set minimum measured value to be transmitted. A -1 0.667 (corresponds with 1. val. val. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-71 . A-1 0. A-1 18 mA By setting MEASO: A nOut m in . When entering this setting the user must keep in mind that only a rising/rising or falling/falling curve sense is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not allowed). val .l i n e).02 Vnom) 037 105 MEASO : S cale d k ne e val. will only occur after the P139 is switched on-line again (with the setting M A I N : D e v i c e o n .00 s 037 104 MEASO : Sca le d m in . A -1 0.10 Vnom) 037 106 ME ASO : S caled m ax . A -1 MAIN: Volta ge A -B p. va l.u. A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the P139. The setting at MEASO: AnO ut max .067 (corresponds with 0. if the setting was properly entered. A -1 4 mA 037 108 ME ASO : AnOut knee poi nt A -1 16 mA 037 109 MEASO : AnOut max. assignm. A-1 defines the output current that is output for the maximum measured value to be transmitted. val. the signal SFMON: In val i d s caling A -1 will be issued.00 Vnom) 037 107 ME ASO : A nOu t mi n. By defining the knee-point. A-1.013 (corresponds with 0. the user can obtain two characteristic curve sections with different slopes. 010 114 M EASO : Hol d t ime output A -1 1. If the setting was not properly entered. val.P139 3 Operation Address Description Current value 056 020 MEASO : F uncti on group MEA SO With 031 074 MEASO : Ge ne ral ena bl e USER Yes 053 000 MEASO : F ct.

5 1. also possible is directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data Output).4 1.0 Vnom Mx.3 1.667 1.013 0. output value Knee point 16 output value 14 12 10 8 6 4 Min. output value 2 0 0 0.P139 3 Operation Ia / mA 20 18 Max. 3-72 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . In this example the range starting value is = 0.scal 19Z5265A Fig.1 0.02 0.2 1. 3-45: Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output .067 1 0.

Value not measured Selected meas. val. 3-46: Analog measured data output.val. val. val. val. . oper. value MEASO: Current A-1 [ 005 100 ] Selected meas. A-1 [ 037 106 ] MEASO: AnOut min.] MEASO: Reset meas. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-73 . event value being updated c K x1 K x2 K x3 K xx MEASO: Value A-1 output [ 037 118 ] MEASO: Fct. assignm.assignment K xxx [ xxx xxx ] Selected Meas. . A-1 [ 053 000 ] Measured value 1 MEASO: Scaled min.outp. . A-1 [ 037 107 ] MEASO: AnOut knee point A-1 [ 037 108 ] MEASO: AnOut max. 100 % Value < AnOut range MEASO: Output value x Address AnOut value X: 1 037 120 037 121 X: 3 037 122 c1 c2 c3 1 2 AnOut min. 3 AnOut max. R 304 601 Selected meas.1 (A-1) [ --- --. val. ch. A-1 [ 037 104 ] MEASO: Scaled knee val. value X: 2 MEASO: Value A-1 valid [ 069 014 ] and in scaled range 3 1 . A-1 [ 037 109 ] Measured value 2 Measured value 3 Measured value n SFMON: Invalid scaling A-1 [ 093 114 ] Selected meas. value OUTP: Fct. Overflow S8Z52H8B Fig. A-1 [ 037 105 ] c MEASO: Scaled max. Value measured Selected meas. outp. Value in AnOut range MEASO: Output value x [ * ] Value in AnOut range but above scaled range 0 . val.P139 3 Operation MEASO: Value A-1 output [ 037 118 ] MEASO: Hold time output A-1 [ 010 114 ] MEASO: Enabled [ 037 102 ] R c Setting(s) blocked MEASO: Enable 304 600 An. . val. val.

.P139 3.9. 100%.. ● MEASO : Out put val ue 1 ● MEASO: Out put value 1 ● ME AS O: Out put val ue 1 These “external” measured values are output by the P139 either in BCD data form or as load-independent direct current. 3-74 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .4 3 Operation Output of “External” Measured Data Measured data from external devices. provided that the BCD measured data output function or the channels of the analog measured data output function are configured accordingly. which must be scaled to 0 . can be written to the following parameters of the P139 via the communications interface.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-75 . (p. Only when the P139 is in this mode. trip s ign al. 3. but the configuration may be modified. These freely configurable LEDs will emit either red or green or amber light (amber is made up of red and green light and may not be configured independently). Four of the LED indicators are permanently assigned to fixed functions. LED indicator Label Configuration H 1 (green) HEALTHY Not configurable. The same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators (or colors). H 17 (red) EDIT MODE Not configurable. H 1 indicates the operational readiness of the P139 (supply voltage is present).1 Configuring the LED Indicators One binary signal can be assigned to each of the red and green LED color indications. H 3 (amber) ALARM Permanently configured with function SFMON: Warning (L ED). if required. can parameter settings be changed by pressing the “Up” and “Down” keys. (See Section 6.10 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED) The P139 has 17 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals.P139 3 Operation 3. H 17 indicates the input (edit) mode.10. 6-2)) H 2 (amber) OUT OF SERVICE Permanently configured with function MA IN: B locked/ fault y. H 5 to H 16 ― For each of these LED indicators both colors (red & green) may be configured freely and independently. H 4 (red) TRIP With the P139 this LED indicator is customarily configured with function MAIN: Ge n.10. The other LED indicators are freely configurable.2.2 Layout of the LED indicators The following figure illustrates the layout of LED indicators situated on the local control panel. H 4 (green) ― Function assignment to this green LED indicator is freely configurable. 3.

which are built from combinations of the following components: continuous (i.10.11. Latching is disabled. (p. 3-47: Layout of the LED indicators. This setting will determine whether the LED indicator will operate either in energize-on-signal (ES) or normally-energized (NE) mode. 3.P139 H4 H3 H2 H1 H17 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16 3 Operation TRIP ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY EDIT MODE Fig. signalized by the onset of a general starting or of a new system disturbance. not flashing) flashing updating latching with manual reset energize-on-signal (ES) ES updating ES manual reset normally-energized (NE) NE updating NE manual reset energize-on-signal (ES) ES updating bl ES manual reset bl normally-energized (NE) NE updating bl NE manual reset bl In addition to these there are the following 4 operating modes: 3-76 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .3 Operating Mode of the LED Indicators For each of the freely configurable LED indicators.e. whether it will be flashing and whether it will be in latching mode. the operating mode can be selected separately. depending on the selected operating mode: ● either manually via setting parameters or by an appropriately configured binary signal input (see Section 3. Therefore there are eight operating modes available.20. 3-123)) ● or at the onset of a new fault.

then it is possible that one of these two signals becomes inactive and active again whilst the other signal stays active all the time. and these two signals both become active then the LED flashes in amber color.e. If both colors (red and green) have been configured to different signals. The LED assumes the color that has been assigned via setting parameter. ● If later. even if one of the two signals is no longer active. after the LED has gone out. This mode has the following flashing behavior: ● The LED starts flashing with the first starting of the signal that has been assigned to it. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-77 . ● If all the configured signals are no longer active at the time of the LED reset. ● If an LED reset is executed and the configured signal is still active the LED changes to continuous light. any of the configured signals becomes active again then the LED starts flashing again (in the assigned color). Therefore general caution is recommended whenever two different signals are configured to an LED with this operating mode.dst) bl Finally. an LED can be set to the mode “ES Alarm Unit” (ES Alarmunit). If both colors have been configured and the LED shines continuously in amber color.P139 3 Operation energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new fault energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new system disturbance continuous (i. In this case the LED starts flashing again with the starting of that signal. not flashing) ES reset (fault) ES reset (syst. or become inactive at a later time. But since the LED permanently keeps the amber color it is no longer possible to tell the two signals from each other.dist) flashing ES reset (fault) bl ES rst (syst. as the 13th operating mode. Important: If the LED was flashing in amber color then this color is kept. the LED goes out.

Hxx red [ yyy yyy ] & Signal Signal Signal Signal 1 2 3 n & & m out of n Selected signals & S1 1 & R1 & MAIN: General starting [ 040 000 ] FT_RC: System disturb.dist) 5: NE updating 6: NE manual reset 7: ES updating bl 8: ES manual reset bl 9: ES reset (fault) bl 10: ES rst (syst. showing the example of the “red” LED color.dst) bl 11: NE updating bl 12: NE manual reset bl 13: ES Alarmunit !G! -Hxx (red) & LED: State Hxx red [ zzz zzz ] & LED: Fct. 3-48: Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators.P139 3 Operation LED: Oper. runn [ 035 004 ] & & MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: Reset LED 306 020 19Z8100A Fig. 3-78 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . mode H xx [ xxx xxx ] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ≥1 1: ES updating 2: ES manual reset 3: ES reset (fault) 4: ES reset (syst.assig.

If the P139 is to operate with the GFDSS function (ground fault direction determination using steady-state values). 3-49. By this setting the phase of the digitized currents is rotated by 180°. 3-80) shows the standard connection. Air-gap transformers are used in the phase current path to suppress low frequency (DC decays and offsets) signal components.P139 3 Operation 3. (p. Fig. Settings that do not refer to nominal quantities are converted by the P139 to nominal quantities. The analog quantities are digitized and are thus available for further processing.1 Conditioning of the Measured Variables The secondary phase currents of the system transformers are fed to the P139.2. When the P139 is equipped with the temperature p/c board (RTD module for PT 100. current transformer T4 needs to be connected to a current transformer in Holmgreen connection (dashed lines in Fig. (p.7. can be connected to the RTD module as described in Section 3. 3-55). Ni 100 or Ni 120) further resistance thermometers. (p. The user must therefore set the secondary nominal currents and voltages of the system transformers. in addition to the PT 100 resistance thermometer connected to the analog module (I/O).11 Main Functions of the P139 (Function Group MAIN) 3. 3-49. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-79 . The measured variables are – electrically isolated – converted to normalized electronics levels. 3-80) ) or to a core balance current transformer.11. There is the option of connecting up to five voltage transformers. The connection direction of the measuring circuits on the P139 must also be set.

circ. meas. sec. IP [ 010 004 ] IA IB IC IN MAIN: Inom device [ 010 003 ] X X∙Y I̲A X X∙Y I̲B X X∙Y I̲C 1: Standard (Y = 1) 2: Opposite (Y = -1) MAIN: Conn.T. 3-80 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . [ 031 052 ] 1U V̲ref 2U MAIN: Conn. 3-49: Connecting the P139 measuring circuits (when the P139 is equipped with the RTD module.nom V. circ.T. see references in previous text). [ 010 028 ] n e V̲N-G n U e MAIN: Vnom V. [ 010 009 ] V̲A-G V V̲B-G W V̲C-G N 19Z6402A Fig. meas. sec.nom device [ 010 026 ] I̲N X∙Y 1: Standard (Y = 1) 2: Opposite (Y = -1) MAIN: VNG. sec.T.P139 3 Operation A B C MAIN: Vref. IN [ 010 019 ] X MAIN: IN.nom V.

Because of the phase reversal function the P139 can maintain proper operation of all protection functions even if phase reversal is carried out within the protected zone. COMMx) or via appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The following setting parameters are available for phase reversal: Parameter Value MAIN: Phase re v ersal I PSx ● No swap ● PS1: (010 200) ● A-B swapped ● PS2: (010 201) ● B-C swapped ● PS3: (010 202) ● C-A swapped ● PS4: (010 203) By applying the parameter subsets a phase reversal can be activated. (The measured values stored in the respective measured value memories are exchanged by each other. through one of the interfaces (LOC. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-81 .2 Phase Reversal Function The phase reversal function is used to protect machines driven by motors with left-/right-hand rotation control by phase reversal with paralleled circuit breakers (one CB with phase reversal). The phase sequence for the current.P139 3 Operation 3.11. PC. Following directly to the analog to digital conversion the connection between the physical transformer module and the internal numerical signal for the setting is exchanged respectively.) In this way further processing of measured values will remain unchanged and the implementation of protection functions will continue to be unaffected. Dependent on the operating mode the current can therefore be measured in reverse to the voltage. given by the active parameter subset with the setting for MAI N: Ph ase re vers al I P Sx may be reversed by triggering a binary signal input configured at MAI N: Ph as e re versal I EXT. Here the voltage is measured on the busbar side and the current down-stream between CB and motor. without any problems.

The following measured variables are displayed: ● Phase currents for all three phases ● Delayed and stored phase currents for all three phases – demand values for the three phases ● Minimum and maximum phase current ● Delayed and stored maximum phase current – maximum demand values ● Residual current measured by the P139 at the T 4 transformer. set lower thresholds need to be exceeded. to avoid fluctuating small values from noise. and calculated resultant current ● Calculated unfiltered resultant current ● Phase-to-ground voltages ● Sum of the three phase-to-ground voltages and neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P139 at the T 90 transformer ● Reference voltage measured by the P139 at the T 15 transformer ● Phase-to-phase voltages ● Minimum and maximum phase-to-phase voltage and minimum and maximum phase-to-ground voltage ● Positive-sequence current and negative-sequence current (in units of Inom).11.3 3 Operation Operating Data Measurement The P139 has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents and voltages measured as well as quantities derived from these measured values. If these lower thresholds are not exceeded. 3-82 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . Updating is interrupted if the self-monitoring function detects a hardware fault. taking into account the set phase sequence ● Positive-sequence voltage and negative-sequence voltage (in units of Vnom) ● Active. For the display of measured values.P139 3. the value Not measured is displayed. reactive and apparent power ● Active power factor ● Active and reactive energy output and input ● Load angle φ in all three phases ● Angle between measured residual current and measured neutral-point displacement voltage ● Phase relation between measured neutral current and calculated residual current (binary indication of equal or reverse phase) ● System frequency The measured data are updated at 1 s intervals.

Phase sequence A-B-C (clockwise rotating field) ● Negative-sequence current: ● I neg = 3 · | (I A + a 2 · I B + a · I C) | ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ Positive-sequence current: 1 1 I pos = 3 · | (I A + a · I B + a 2 · I C) | ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ Phase sequence A-C-B (anti-clockwise rotating field) ● Negative-sequence current: ● I neg = 3 · | (I A + a · I B + a 2 · I C) | ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ Positive-sequence current: ● I pos = 3 · | (I A + a 2 · I B + a · I C) | ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ Symbols used: 1 1 a = e2πj/3 = e j·120° ¯ a 2 = e4πj/3 = e j·240° ¯ P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-83 .P139 3 Operation 3. the primary nominal current of the system current transformer should be set in the P139.1 Measured Current Values The measured current values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the nominal quantities of the P139 and as primary quantities.3.11. To allow display in primary values.

u.P139 3 Operation MAIN: Meas. [ 005 055 ] 19Z6403A Fig.max p. 306 539 MAIN: Hardware fault c 306 540 I̲A c1 I̲B c2 I̲C c3 c4 c5 c6 + + + 1 MAIN: Current A p.phase current. 3-50: Measured operating data . [ 010 001 ] MAIN: Current A prim. IP [ 011 030 ] MAIN: General start.u. int. [ 006 040 ] MAIN: Current C prim.u. [ 005 056 ] COMP I̲max I̲min MAIN: Inom C. IP. value rel. [ 005 041 ] 2 MAIN: Current B p. [ 007 041 ] 4 MAIN: Current Σ(IP) p.u. [ 007 040 ] MAIN: Current Σ(IP) prim. [ 005 010 ] MAIN: Curr. part 1.min p. [ 005 051 ] 6 MAIN: Current IP.u. [ 005 050 ] MAIN: Curr. [ 005 011 ] 5 MAIN: Current IP. [ 005 040 ] MAIN: Current B prim. [ 006 041 ] 3 MAIN: Current C p.T.u. IP. 3-84 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . prim.min prim.max prim.

del [ 010 113 ] MAIN: IP.u. [ 006 232 ] MAIN: Current B p..st [ 005 034 ] 19Z6404A Fig. part 2: demand values (delayed and stored phase currents and maximum phase current). [ 006 225 ] MAIN: IP.max prim.max. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-85 . [ 005 051 ] R MAIN: Current A p. [ 006 234 ] MAIN: IP.demand stor..u.demand.maxp..demand stor..phase current.demand [ 006 226 ] MAIN: IB prim.u.demand stor. t. prim. [ 007 041 ] R MAIN: Current IP. EXT [ 005 211 ] MAIN: IB prim.u. [ 005 041 ] MAIN: IC p.u.max p. [ 006 041 ] R MAIN: IB p.demand [ 006 236 ] MAIN: IC p.st [ 005 035 ] MAIN: Inom C.u.st.demand [ 006 228 ] MAIN: IP.P139 3 Operation MAIN: IA p.max..demand stor..demand. [ 006 233 ] MAIN: Current C p.T..maxprim.demand [ 006 227 ] MAIN: IC prim.. 3-51: Measured operating data ..max.max p. [ 010 001 ] MAIN: IA prim. [ 006 223 ] 0 1 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute 0: don't execute 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: Reset IP.demand stor.u.USER [ 003 033 ] MAIN: IA prim.demand [ 006 237 ] MAIN: Settl.u.demand [ 005 037 ] R MAIN: IA p.u.demand [ 006 235 ] MAIN: IB p. IP.u.st.u. [ 006 224 ] MAIN: IC prim.demand stor.demand [ 005 036 ] MAIN: Reset IP.u.

(p. 3-53. The stored phase currents are implemented as for the stored maximum phase current.st.max. int. 3-53.T. then the highest value of the delayed maximum phase current remains stored. IN [ 011 031 ] MAIN: Hardware fault 306 540 I̲N MAIN: Current IN p. 3-52: Measured operating data .residual current. (p. 3-51.11. value rel.m ax. del.3. 387)).3. The display remains constant until the actual delayed maximum phase current exceeds the value of the stored maximum phase current (see middle curve in Fig. The stored maximum phase current to the actual value of the delayed maximum phase current is set at MA IN: Re se t I P. [ 004 043 ] S8Z5097A Fig.u.P139 MAIN: General start. 3-53. (p. [ 010 018 ] MAIN: Current IN prim. 3-87)). 3-87) and Fig. If the value of the delayed maximum phase current is declining.3. The delay for these six operating data values is set at MAIN: Se ttl. (p. t. after the set delay. However. 3.nom C. 3.max.11.3 Display of Demand Values – Stored Maximum Phase Current The stored maximum phase current follows the delayed maximum phase current. t.max is set at MA IN: Se ttl .2 Display of Demand Values – Delayed Maximum Phase Current The P139 offers the option of a delayed display of the maximum value of the three phase currents (thermal ammeter function). 306 539 3 Operation MAIN: Meas. respectively. 3-87)). [ 004 044 ] MAIN: IN.USER (see lower curve in Fig. IP. Fig. The time after which the delayed maximum phase current display will have reached 95 % of maximum phase current IP.4 Display of Demand Values – Delayed and Stored Values of the Three Phase Currents The P139 offers the option of a delayed display of the three phase currents. This functionality is equivalent to the display of the maximum value of the three phase currents (see description above.del as for the delayed maximum phase current.max (see upper curve in Fig.11. 385)). prim. the delayed phase current display will have reached 90 % (not 95 %) of IA . in this case. 3-86 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . The delayed maximum phase current display is an exponential function of the maximum phase current IP. IP . (p. 3-53. IB or IC . 3.

del [ 010 113 ] MAIN: Settl. IP.max p.maxp.u.max p.del [ 010 113 ] MAIN: Current IP.del [ 010 113 ] MAIN: Settl. IP.u.USER [ 003 033 ] MAIN: Reset IP.u.st [ 005 035 ] MAIN: Current IP. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-87 .max. 3-53: Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display – display of demand values.u. t. t...u.max.u.max. [ 005 051 ] MAIN: IP.del [ 010 113 ] MAIN: Settl.P139 3 Operation MAIN: Current IP. [ 005 051 ] MAIN: IP. IP.demand. t.demand.max.max p. EXT [ 005 211 ] 50Z0115A Fig.max.demand [ 005 037 ] MAIN: Settl.max. IP.max.st [ 005 035 ] MAIN: Reset IP. t. t.max p.del [ 010 113 ] MAIN: Settl.st. IP. IP.max.del [ 010 113 ] MAIN: Settl. [ 005 051 ] MAIN: IP.maxp. t..st.

To allow a display in primary values. 3-54: Determining the minimum and maximum phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages as well as the negative-sequence and positive-sequence voltages. 3-88 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .min V̲PG.min V̲PP.max V̲PP.5 Measured Voltage Values The measured voltage values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the nominal quantities of the P139 and as primary quantities. the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer needs to be set in the P139.max 2 V̲PP.min + + + Σ(VPG)/3 Σ(VPG)/3 + − V̲A-B + − V̲B-C + − V̲C-A MAIN: Phase sequence COMP [ 010 049 ] 1 1 2 V̲PP.max V̲PG.max V̲PG.B .B V̲neg V̲neg V̲pos V̲pos 47Z0106A Fig.C 2: A .P139 3 Operation 3.C . COMP V̲A-G V̲B-G V̲C-G V̲PG.min 1: A .11.3.

u. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-89 . [ 005 043 ] MAIN: Voltage B-G p.u. [ 005 045 ] MAIN: Voltage B-C p.min prim.u.u.min p.max p.u.u. [ 005 012 ] MAIN: Voltage A-B prim.max p. [ 008 042 ] MAIN: Volt. Σ(VPG)/√3 p. [ 005 042 ] MAIN: Voltage B-G prim. C 306 539 MAIN: Hardware fault 306 540 MAIN: Meas.u.u. VPP. [ 008 043 ] MAIN: Voltage VPG. [ 006 045 ] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MAIN: Voltage C-A p. 3-55: Measured operating data – phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages. [ 008 045 ] MAIN: Voltage VPP.T.u.max prim. [ 010 002 ] MAIN: Voltage A-G prim. VPG. [ 006 043 ] MAIN: Voltage C-G p.min C11 V̲neg C12 V̲pos C13 MAIN: Voltage A-G p. [ 005 013 ] MAIN: Voltage A-B p.u.max prim. [ 009 042 ] MAIN: Volt. value rel.min p.max C4 V̲PG. [ 009 017 ] MAIN: Voltage Vpos p. V [ 011 032 ] V̲A-G C1 V̲B-G C2 V̲C-G C3 V̲PG. [ 009 043 ] MAIN: Volt. [ 007 043 ] MAIN: Voltage VPG.u. int. [ 007 044 ] MAIN: Volt. [ 009 018 ] 8 9 10 11 12 13 MAIN: Vnom V. VPG.u.min prim [ 009 044 ] 12Z6204B Fig. [ 005 044 ] MAIN: Voltage B-C prim.min C5 Σ(VPG)/3 C6 V̲A-B C7 V̲B-C C8 V̲C-A C9 V̲PP. [ 006 042 ] MAIN: Voltage C-G prim. Σ(VPG)/3 prim.P139 3 Operation MAIN: General start.min prim [ 009 044 ] MAIN: Voltage VPP. [ 008 044 ] MAIN: Voltage VPP. [ 007 045 ] MAIN: Voltage VPP. [ 007 042 ] MAIN: Volt.max C10 V̲PP. [ 006 044 ] MAIN: Voltage C-A prim. prim. [ 009 045 ] MAIN: Voltage Vneg p.u.

3-57: Measured operating data – reference voltage. [ 004 042 ] MAIN: VNG. val. VNG [ 011 033 ] V̲N-G MAIN: Voltage VNG p. [ 010 027 ] MAIN: Voltage VNG prim. val.nom V. [ 010 100 ] MAIN: Voltage Vref prim. rel. MAIN: Meas.P139 3 Operation MAIN: General start.nom V. 306 539 MAIN: Hardware fault 306 018 MAIN: Meas. Vref [ 011 034 ] MAIN: Hardware fault 306 018 V̲ref MAIN: Voltage Vref p. 3-56: Measured operating data – neutral-point displacement voltage. prim.u. [ 004 041 ] 19Z5064A Fig. int. rel. prim. [ 005 047 ] MAIN: Vref. [ 005 046 ] 47Z0109A Fig.u. 3-90 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .T.T.

This setting parameter does not influence the remaining measured operating data.5 V.02·IN. It must be noted that inverting the sign will only affect the display of measured operating data. ● MA IN : Act iv e powe r P pri m. Q may be changed from Standard to Opposite if the user wishes to have the following measured operating data displayed with the opposite sign (see Fig. Active Power Factor.5 V. (p. ● MAI N: R eac. power Q p. 3-92)): ● MA IN : Act ive powe r P p. all protection functions will internally use non-inverted measured values. ● The active power factor will be calculated only if the apparent power value exceeds 5% of the nominal apparent power Snom.3. ● MAI N: R eac.1·Inom and if the phase-to-ground voltage exceeds 1.u. and Angle Calculation of these derived operating quantities is subject to the following conditions: ● Values for active and reactive power will always be calculated and displayed as these quantities are required for the subsequent energy measurement.11. Greater deviations in measurements may occur with low phase currents or a critical power factor value. ● Load angles will be displayed only if the respective phase current exceeds 0. ● The angle between the measured values for the residual current and the neutral-point displacement voltage will only be displayed if the residual current exceeds 0. The setting for MAI N: Meas .nom and the neutral-point displacement voltage exceeds 1. directi on P. power Q prim. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-91 . 3-58.u .P139 3 Operation 3.6 Measured Values for Power.

P139 3 Operation MAIN: Inom C. [ 005 076 ] MAIN: Angle phi N [ 004 072 ] & C + + + MAIN: Angle ΣVPG/IN p.05 Snom C MAIN: Active power factor [ 004 054 ] I̲A > 0. prim.u. [ 010 001 ] MAIN: Vnom V. [ 005 025 ] MAIN: Active power P p.025 Inom I̲B MAIN: Meas.025 Inom V̲A-G > 1. and angle.025 Inom I̲C > 0. power Q prim. power S p.02 INnom X · Y X X · Y X X · Y X X · Y 1: Standard (Y = 1) 2: Opposite (Y = -1) & V̲N-G X C > 1.T.5 V I̲N > 0. [ 010 002 ] MAIN: Appar.5 V V̲C-G > 1. prim. 3-92 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . [ 004 053 ] MAIN: Active power P prim. [ 005 072 ] MAIN: Angle ΣVPG vs. [ 005 026 ] S > 0. [ 004 051 ] MAIN: Reac.Q [ 006 096 ] > 0. power S prim.u.u. 3-58: Measured operating data – power.u [ 005 074 ] MAIN: Load angle phi B [ 004 056 ] & C MAIN: Load angle phi C p.u.5 V MAIN: Appar.5 V V̲B-G > 1.u. active power factor.u [ 005 073 ] MAIN: Load angle phi A [ 004 055 ] & C MAIN: Load angle phi B p. power Q p.T. direction P. [ 004 052 ] MAIN: Load angle phi A p.u [ 005 075 ] MAIN: Load angle phi C [ 004 057 ] & C MAIN: Angle phi N p. IN [ 005 009 ] MAIN: Hardware fault 306 018 19Z8003A Fig. [ 004 050 ] MAIN: Reac.

u.3. If the phase displacement between the two currents is ≤ 45°.65 Vnom in order for frequency to be determined. 3-60: Frequency measurement. 3-59: Phase relation between calculated and measured residual current. I̲A I̲B I̲C I̲N 1 1: Equal phase 2 MAIN: Phase rel. then the indication Equal phase is displayed. This voltage needs to exceed a minimum threshold of 0. int. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-93 . C 306 539 MAIN: Hardware fault >0.11.65⋅Vnom 306 018 V̲A-G + V̲B-G - MAIN: Frequency f p.11.IN vs ΣIP [ 004 073 ] 2: Reverse phase 47Z0112A Fig. 3. MAIN: General start..8 Frequency The P139 determines the frequency from the voltage VA-B. [ 004 070 ] C f MAIN: Frequency f [ 004 040 ] 12Z6209A Fig.7 Phase Relation IN The P139 checks if the phase relations of calculated residual current and measured residual current are coherent.3.P139 3 Operation 3.

which are needed for transmission via serial protocols (e. en .energy ou tp. active and reactive energy are determined every 100 ms (approximately).35 + (MAIN : Act .en.ou t (008 068) MAIN: R eact .en.out) · 655. prim (009 093) MA IN: No. pri m) = (MA IN: No. outp.energy in p.ov/ f l.reac.3.e n. Courier). In this way higher accuracy is achieved.e n. 16 bit values and overflow counters are provided.11.g. prim (005 063) MA IN: React.re ac.00 MWh Overflow counters for the 16 bit energy values Value range: 0 … 10000 (008 065) MAIN: Act . prim (009 092) MAI N: No. Measured energy values are presented as text parameters with a value range of about 0 … 6.en ergy outp.35 + current count For example: (MAIN : Act . en.overfl. pri m) 3-94 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .pri m (009 090) MA IN: No.9 3 Operation Active and Reactive Energy Output and Input The P139 determines the active and reactive energy output and input based on the primary active or reactive power.en. en ergy outp. DNP3. prim (005 061) MAI N: A ct. In addition.35 MWh Value range: 0 … 6553500. active and reactive energy are determined every 2 s (approximately).en ergy inp.act.5 TWh and a resolution of 10 kWh.ov/ fl .overfl.en . prim (005 064) MA IN: React. Energy values as 32 bit / text values Energy values as 16 bit values Value range: 0 … 655. inp. act. p rim (005 062) MAI N: A ct. out p. inp. prim (009 091) MA IN: No.out (008 066) MAIN: Act .in p The total energy is calculated as follows: Total energy = number of overflows · 655. There are two procedures available to determine active and reactive energy.P139 3.en ergy outp.overfl .inp (008 067) M AIN: React . Modbus.en.act. If procedure 1 is selected. If procedure 2 is selected.

en.out [ 009 092 ] MAIN: No.en.energy inp.en.overfl.prim [ 005 061 ] -∫P(t) dt MAIN: Act.en.ov/fl.reac.reac.v. 3-61: Determining the active and reactive energy output and input.v.ov/fl.act. [ 010 138 ] MAIN: Active power P prim.overfl.en.out [ 009 090 ] MAIN: No. prim [ 005 064 ] R R MAIN: Reac. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-95 . EXT [ 005 212 ] Overflow Transfer Overflow Transfer Overflow Transfer MAIN: No. mode energy cnt. inp.P139 3 Operation MAIN: Op. power Q prim. [ 004 050 ] ∫P(t) dt MAIN: Act.inp [ 009 093 ] 19Z8033A Fig.en. outp.USER [ 003 032 ] R 0 1 ≥1 R 0: don't execute 1: execute Overflow Transfer MAIN: Reset meas. en. prim [ 005 063 ] -∫Q(t) dt MAIN: React.energy outp.act. prim [ 005 062 ] ∫Q(t) dt MAIN: React.en.inp [ 009 091 ] MAIN: No. [ 004 052 ] MAIN: Reset meas.

3. external counters should be used to determine the energy output. Error of measurement: ● Approx. as shown (for the range 0° ≤ φ < 90°) in the following diagram. ● Increased system loading Fault The maximum phase-angle error of the P139 of 1° leads to greater errors in measurement when the phase angle increases. ● Fast load variations ● Phase angles below 70° (cos φ > 0. For phase angles φ with |cos φ| < 0. ±5% of the measured value for |cos φ| ≥ 0.3 ). or when the error of measurement resulting from the maximum phase-angle error is not acceptable.3.P139 3. ● Determination of the active and reactive energy every 100 ms (approximately). 3-62: Error of measurement in the determination of energy output resulting from the phase angle error of the P139.11. ±2% of the measured value for |cos φ| ≥ 0.7 ● Approx. 5% 2% 45° 70° Phase Angle S8Z0401B Fig.3 ). ● Reduced system loading ● Phase angles below 70° (cos φ > 0.10 Procedure 1 2 3 Operation Selection of the Procedure to Determine Energy Output Characteristics Applications ● Determination of the active and reactive energy every 2 s (approximately) ● Constant load and slow load variations (no significant load variations within 1 second).3 ● where the whole measuring range is −180° ≤ φ ≤ 180°. 3-96 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

By including the desired P139 functions in the configuration and canceling all other. it is also possible to disable protection via a function parameter or binary signal inputs. The P139 function to which a setting.2 Enabling or Disabling a Device Function Besides cancelling P139 functions from the configuration.1 Canceling a Device Function The following conditions must be met before a P139 function can be cancelled or removed: ● The P139 function must be disabled. both are at logic level = “1” – then the last plausible state remains stored in memory. If the protection is disabled via a binary signal input that is configured for M A I N : D i s a b l e p r o t e c t . ● None of the functions of the P139 function to be cancelled can be assigned to a binary input. E X T. ● None of the functions of the P139 function to be cancelled may be selected in a list parameter setting. If the above conditions are met.e.11. Parameters. the same setting is accessed and its value is changed to With. If. If the triggering signals of the binary signal inputs are implausible – i. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-97 . To re-include the “LIMIT” function in the P139 configuration. the user creates an individually configured device appropriate to the specific application.4 Configuring and Enabling the Device Functions The P139 can be adapted to the requirements of a specific high-voltage system by configuring the available function range. EXT and MAIN: E nabl e prot ect. When neither or only one of the two functions is configured. the setting of LI MI T: Function gr ou p L IMI T is set to Without. ● None of the signals of the P139 function can be assigned to a binary output or an LED indicator. E XT functions are both configured. the “LIMIT” function group is to be cancelled. In the following description of the P139 functions. Functions of general applicability such as operating data recording (OP_RC) or main functions (MAIN) cannot be cancelled. a signal. 3.4. Protection can only be disabled or enabled through binary signal inputs if the MAIN : D isab le protect. it is presumed that the corresponding P139 function is included in the configuration. for example.P139 3 Operation 3. 3.11. the condition is interpreted as “Protection externally enabled”.4. the signal M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y is not issued. signals and measured values of cancelled device functions are not displayed on the local control panel. proceed through the “Configuration” branch of the menu tree to access the setting relevant for the P139 function to be cancelled. or a measured value belongs is defined by the function group designation (example: “LIMIT”).11.

EXT [ 003 026 ] D5Z5004A Fig. EXT [ 003 027 ] MAIN: Prot. ext. If this enabling function has been activated. the residual current systems of the DTOC/IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled with parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. assignm.11. Enabling of the residual current systems of the DTOC/IDMT protection depends on the setting at MAIN: Sys t. Parameters and configured binary signal inputs have equal status. If only the M AI N: S yste m IN en abl e EXT function is assigned to a binary signal input. I N dis abl e EXT function has been assigned to a binary signal input. enabled [ 003 028 ] MAIN: Prot. 3-98 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . disabled [ 038 046 ] MAIN: Disable protect. U xxx [ 152 xxx ] U x1 U x2 U x3 U xx Address 003 027 Address 003 026 MAIN: Enable protect. If only the MAI N: Sys t.4. then a signal at this input will have no effect. 3-63: Enabling or disabling a device function. then the residual current systems of the DTOC/IDMT protection will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge.P139 3 Operation MAIN: Device on-line [ 003 030 ] 0 0: No (= off) 1 MAIN: Protection active 306 001 0: No (= off) 1: Yes (= on) INP: Fct.3 Enabling or Disabling the Residual Current Systems of the DTOC/IDMT Protection Disabling or enabling may be carried out with parameters or binary signal inputs. 3. ext.IN e nable d USER.

U xxx [ xxx xxx ] U x1 U x2 U x3 U xx Address 040 130 Address 040 131 MAIN: Syst. assignm.IN ext/user en.IN USER [ 003 141 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute 19Z5005A Fig.IN enabled USER [ 018 008 ] 0 1 0: No MAIN: System IN enabled [ 040 133 ] 1: Yes MAIN: System IN disabled [ 040 134 ] INP: Fct. IN USER [ 003 142 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute MAIN: Syst. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-99 .P139 3 Operation MAIN: Syst. [ 040 132 ] MAIN: System IN enable EXT [ 040 130 ] MAIN: Enable syst. IN disable EXT [ 040 131 ] MAIN: Disable syst. 3-64: Disabling or enabling the residual current systems of the DTOC/IDMT protection.

switching is effective as long as the binary signal input is being triggered.PSx set set set set 018 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 009 211 212 213 12Z6205A Fig.P139 3. As long as current flow criteria are met the monitoring function will continuously issue the phase selective signals MA IN: Cu rren t flow A. >0.05·Inom I̲A I̲B MAIN: Current flow A [ 010 223 ] MAIN: Current flow B [ 010 224 ] I̲C MAIN: Current flow C [ 010 225 ] 19Z8039A Fig.par. The sampled current values are continuously compared with the fixed threshold value 0.EXT [ 036 033 ] * ] MAIN: Dynam. MAIN: C ur rent flow C. 3-65: Activation of “Dynamic Parameters”.05·Inom.param. MAIN: Hld time dyn. 3. it is possible for the duration of the set hold time to switch over to other settings – the “dynamic parameters” – via an appropriately configured binary signal input. param.11. independent of the current flow monitoring performed by the CBF function.5 3 Operation Activation of “Dynamic Parameters” For several of the protection functions. 3-66: Current flow monitoring.par.6 Current Flow Monitoring The current flow is monitored continuously and pole-selectively. If the hold time is set to 0 s.11.PSx [ MAIN: Switch dyn. active [ 040 090 ] 1 t1 = 0 s & Parameter MAIN: Hld time dyn. 3-100 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . MAIN: Current flow B.

If this ratio exceeds the threshold that can be set with the parameter MA IN: Ru sh I(2 fn)/ I(fn)PS x.PSx set 1 017 098 019 001 set 2 001 091 019 002 set 3 001 092 019 003 set 4 001 093 019 004 12Z7306A Fig. The parameter MA IN: t l i ft rush r str. the selective starting will be blocked if an inrush current flow is detected.1 Inom & MAIN: Op. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-101 . For all selected overcurrent stages of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (DTOC) and of the InverseTime Overcurrent Protection (IDMT1 and IDMT2). 1 t & 1 t & [ 041 028 ] 1 t & [ 041 029 ] [ 041 027 ] I̲A & I̲B & MAIN: Rush restr. PSx MAIN: I>lift rush restrPSx set 1 017 097 017 095 set 2 001 088 001 085 set 3 001 089 001 086 set 4 001 090 001 087 fnom 2*fnom I(2⋅fn)/I(fn) fnom 2*fnom I(2⋅fn)/I(fn) Parameter MAIN: Rush I(2fn)/I(fn)PSx MAIN: t lift rush rstr. The inrush stabilization function detects an inrush current by evaluating the ratio of the second harmonic current component to the fundamental. 3-67: Inrush stabilization.7 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint) The inrush stabilization function detects high inrush current flows that occur when transformers or machines are switched on. B trig. rush restr. C trig. then the inrush stabilization operates.P139 3 Operation 3.PSx defines the maximum hold-time for the inrush stabilization. If the current is outside of this range then the inrush stabilization is blocked.1 Inom define the range in which the inrush stabilization operates. PSx [ * ] MAIN: Inrush stabil. A trig. I̲C >0. trigg 0 306 014 1 2 MAIN: Rush I(2fn)/I(fn)PSx 0: Without 1: Not phase-selective [ 2: Phase-selective fnom I(2⋅fn)/I(fn) 2*fnom * ] Parameter MAIN: Op. rush restr.PSx [ * ] 306 001 & MAIN: Rush restr. MAIN: Protection active & MAIN: I>lift rush restrPSx [ * ] C MAIN: t lift rush rstr. The current trigger MAI N: I >lif t ru s h res trP Sx and a fixed threshold of 0.11. MAIN: Rush restr.

Start.N> IDMT2: Starting Iref.P> 450 141 DTOC: Block.Iref. Ineg>> DTOC: Starting Ineg>> 450 154 036 146 DTOC: Block.Rush restr. Start. C trig.Start.Iref. Depending on the parameter MA IN: Funct.neg> 040 107 450 161 3 040 018 IDMT2: Starting Iref.N> 450 166 IDMT2: Bl. trigg 040 029 DTOC: Starting I>>> 306 014 3 3 3 450 149 040 077 DTOC: Block. IN>>> DTOC: Starting IN>>> 450 151 039 078 DTOC: Block.Start.PSx [ * ] m out of n DTOC: Starting I> 040 036 DTOC: Starting I>> MAIN: Inrush stabil.Rush restr.Start.Start. IDMT1 and IDMT2.PSx the starting of these function groups is blocked selectively.Start. Ineg> 036 145 450 153 DTOC: Block.Iref. 3-68: Selection of the stabilization criteria for the inrush stabilization. MAIN: Funct.N> 040 081 450 160 IDMT1: Starting Iref.Iref.Rush restr.Start.Start. [ 041 029 ] 450 152 035 031 DTOC: Starting Ineg> DTOC: Block.Start.P> Px 450 156 040 080 IDMT1: Starting Iref.Iref. B trig.neg> IDMT1: Bl.neg> 450 167 12Z7331A Fig.Start.1 Selection of Functions The inrush stabilization is designed with respect to function groups DTOC.Start. A trig.7. Start.Start.neg> 040 156 Parameter MAIN: Funct.PSx set 1 017 093 set 2 017 064 set 3 017 082 set 4 017 083 IDMT1: Bl.P139 3 Operation 3. I>> Px 450 145 039 075 MAIN: Rush restr. I> Px IDMT2: Bl. Ineg>>> DTOC: Starting Ineg>>> 036 147 IDMT1: Starting Iref.P> 450 155 3 IDMT1: Bl. Start. I>>> Px DTOC: Block.Iref.11. IN>>>> DTOC: Starting IN>>>> MAIN: Rush restr. [ 041 028 ] 450 137 DTOC: Block.P> Px 450 162 IDMT2: Bl. 3-102 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . IN>> DTOC: Starting IN>> 450 150 040 041 DTOC: Block. IN> DTOC: Starting IN> MAIN: Rush restr.Start. [ 041 027 ] DTOC: Block.N> 040 019 IDMT2: Starting Iref.

11.asg. switching operations can be prevented independent of the switching status at the time. block [ 221 029 ] Signal 3 Signal n Selected signal MAIN: Fct. The input signal from the function blocks starts a timer stage and after it has elapsed. Binary input signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression or output signals from the programmable logic function can be assigned to the function blocks 1 and 2 by setting a “1 out of n” parameter. by an external signal “CB drive not ready” or by the trip command from an external protection device. fct. fct. block.block. for example.block. the signal MA IN : F ct. delay fct. MAIN: Inp. 3-69: Function blocks. 1 acti ve is issued.1 [ 221 014 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 MAIN: Op. 1 active [ 221 015 ] MAIN: Fct. block.P139 3 Operation 3. block. 2 active [ 221 023 ] MAIN: Inp.asg.2 [ 221 022 ] Selected signal F0Z5016A Fig.8 Function Blocks By including function blocks in the bay interlock conditions. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-103 .

functions 306 022 MAIN: Blocking 1 EXT [ 040 060 ] MAIN: Fct.assign.P139 3. 3-104 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 2 [ 021 022 ] Function 1 m out of n Function 2 Function 3 Selected functions MAIN: Blck.1 sel. The functions defined by selection may be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.functions 306 023 MAIN: Blocking 2 EXT [ 040 061 ] D5Z50CLA Fig. 3-70: Multiple blocking.9 3 Operation Multiple Blocking Two multiple blocking conditions can be defined via “m out of n” parameters. MAIN: Fct. block.assign.11. 1 [ 021 021 ] Function 1 m out of n Function 2 Function 3 Selected functions MAIN: Blck.2 sel. block.

asg.) that represents the circuit breaker.P139 3 Operation 3. MAIN: Device on-line [ 003 030 ] 0: No (= off) MAIN: Device not ready [ 004 060 ] MAIN: Blocked/faulty [ 004 065 ] SFMON: Blocking 304 951 MAIN: Trip cmd. assign.11 Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Closed Signal Bay type selection defines the external device (DEV01 or DEV02 or . MAIN: Sig. CB closed [ 021 020 ] DEV01: Closed signal EXT [ 210 031 ] DEV02: Closed signal EXT [ 210 081 ] DEV10: Closed signal EXT [ 211 231 ] Selected signal MAIN: CB closed 3p EXT [ 036 051 ] MAIN: CB closed 3p EXT [ 036 051 ] 19Z5068A Fig.. Coupling between control and protection for the “Closed” position signal is made by the setting MA IN: Sig. 3. asg. As a result..11. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-105 . fault [ 021 031 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 m out of n Signal 3 Signal n Selected signals D5Z50EHA Fig. CB closed. the condition is signaled by continuous illumination of the amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a signal from an output relay configured MAI N: B lock ed/fault y. the CB status signal needs to be assigned to one binary signal input only if this coupling is implemented.11. 3-71: “Blocked/Faulty” signal.10 Blocked/Faulty If the protective functions are blocked. 3-72: Coupling between control and protection for the CB closed signal. In addition functions can be selected that will issue the MA IN: Blocked/fau lty signal by setting a “m out of n” parameter. blocked [ 021 013 ] MAIN: Fct.

3107)). 3-73. Fig. PSx = With) then the resulting signal MA IN: CB clos ed 3p will now be interrogated (instead of the input signal MAIN: CB cl ose d 3 p E XT previously interrogated).pos . 3-73. Simultaneous monitoring of all status signals is not feasible and should therefore not be undertaken.12 3 Operation Monitoring and Processing of CB Status Signals Extended CB Status Signals An extended monitoring of the circuit breaker (CB) status signals is available in the main function group. the echo signal (if enabled) is issued without additional delay. (p. It is possible to select whether the multiple signals “MAIN: C B closed 3p” / “MA IN: C B ope n 3p” or pole selective “Closed” status signals will be monitored. This makes a backward compatible operation possible (for example in an existing plant where only this signal has been wired).P139 3. status signals are also processed in these functions: ● ARC: Ready indication If the ARC should only be available when the circuit breaker has already been closed (setting at A RC: CB clos . For this the M AIN: CB ope n 3p signal is now used instead of the previously used inverted MA IN: CB clos ed 3p EXT input signal. 3-106 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . ● Both multiple signals MAIN: CB cl ose d 3p EXT and MA IN : C B op en 3 p EXT are present simultaneously. In order to suppress triggering during transient actions. ● MCMON: Release of voltage protection using CB status indication With the operating mode set to Vmin< w.enab the internally generated MAI N: CB cl ose d 3p signal is now used instead of the MA IN : CB close d 3 p EXT input signal.sig. 3-107) shows the logical processing of the various input signals.CB cont. The plausibility logic will be triggered should one of the following discrepancies be detected: ● A minimum of one 3‑pole monitoring signal and one 1‑pole monitoring signal are configured at the same time. CB contact is open) but at the same time there is a current flow exceeding 0. B or C)) present (i. If only the MAIN : C B cl ose d 3p E XT binary signal input has been configured then the MAIN : CB open 3p signal will also be issued (see Fig. Besides monitoring for signaling purposes.11. (p. the signal issued when a plausibility discrepancy is detected has a generally delayed pickup of 100 ms. ● PSIG: Un-delayed echo if CB is open If the CB is open. The plausibility logic has been modified accordingly to permit that the binary signal input only be configured at MA IN: CB clos ed 3p EXT.05·Inom in this conductor. ● There is no pole-selective status signal MA IN: CB closed A EXT (for A.e.

sig.P139 3 Operation & MAIN: CB open 3p EXT [ 031 028 ] & MAIN: CB open 3p [ 031 040 ] & & [ 031 028 ] configured & & MAIN: CB closed 3p EXT [ 036 051 ] MAIN: CB open >=1p [ 031 039 ] & MAIN: CB closed 3p [ 031 042 ] & MAIN: CB closed >= 1p [ 031 038 ] & & MAIN: CB closed A [ 031 035 ] & & MAIN: CB open A [ 031 032 ] & & MAIN: CB closed B [ 031 036 ] & & MAIN: CB open B [ 031 033 ] & & MAIN: CB closed C [ 031 037 ] & & MAIN: CB open C [ 031 034 ] & & & [ 036 051 ] configured MAIN: CB closed A EXT [ 031 029 ] [ 031 029 ] configured MAIN: CB closed B EXT [ 031 030 ] [ 031 030 ] configured MAIN: CB closed C EXT [ 031 031 ] [ 031 031 ] configured 10 100 ms 0 5 t MAIN: CB pos.05 Inom Plausibility check I̲A I̲B I̲C 45Z1101B Fig. implaus. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-107 . 3-73: Monitoring of CB status signals. [ 031 041 ] >0.

3-123)). with the setting of to . Moreover.11. This counter may be reset individually or together with other counters (see Section 3.P139 3. then the close command requires a close enable by the ASC function.20. The duration of the close command can be set.13 3 Operation Close Command The circuit breaker can be closed by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC). If the ARC function issues a close request while the ASC function is enabled.11. Close Command Counter The number of close commands are counted. by the automatic synchronism check (ASC). (p. The close command by parameters or a binary signal input is only executed if there is no trip command 1 present and no trip has been issued by a protection device operating in parallel. 3-108 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . the close command is not executed if there is a “CB closed” position signal present. by parameters or via an appropriately configured binary signal input.

[ 039 113 ] t 0: No 1: Yes MAIN: Man. cmd. close commands [ 009 055 ] R 1: execute 19Z80CKA Fig. close cmd.enabl. USER [ 018 033 ] & 0 1 0: don't execute MAIN: Man.cmd.c./tripc. enab. cl/tr.cl. EXT [ 005 210 ] 0: don't execute MAIN: No. cl.P139 3 Operation MAIN: Gen. EXT [ 041 022 ] ARC: (Re)close request [ 037 077 ] & ASC: Close enable [ 037 083 ] ASC: Enabled [ 018 024 ] MAIN: Close cmd.cUSER [ 003 007 ] 0 + 1 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: Rst.cl. man. close cmd. trip signal 1 [ 036 005 ] MAIN: Parallel trip EXT [ 037 019 ] MAIN: CB closed 3p EXT [ 036 051 ] [ 015 042 ] 0 1 MAIN: Man.cmd [ 003 105 ] [ 003 088 ] 0 1 1 MAIN: Man.cmd.EXT [ 041 023 ] MAIN: Man.pulse time [ 015 067 ] C & 1 t MAIN: Close command [ 037 009 ] & & ASC: Manual close request 305 000 & MAIN: Reset c.enabl.enablUSER MAIN: Rel. EXT [ 041 022 ] & MAIN: Man. 3-74: Close command.t.cl. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-109 . close cmd. close command [ 037 068 ] 1: execute 500ms MAIN: Man.

--. 2 stored [ 221 055 ] R1 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] OUTP: Reset latching 402 102 MAIN: Reset LED 306 020 12Z62FMA Fig. MAIN: Inp. mult. 2 [ --. sig. the stored signal will follow the updated signal.asg.sig. The programmable logic output to be interpreted as multiple signaling is defined by the configuration of the binary signal input assignment with the corresponding multiple signaling.] COMM1: Reset mult. sig. sig. 3-110 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .11.] MAIN: Mult.14 3 Operation Multiple Signaling The multiple signals 1 and 2 are formed by the programmable logic function using OR operators.--. 2 [ 221 052 ] S 11 R1 MAIN: Mult. 3-75: Multiple signaling. 1 stored [ 221 054 ] S 11 MAIN: Mult.P139 3. 1 [ 221 051 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 Signal n MAIN: Mult. 1 [ --.sig. mult. sig. sig. 2 active [ 221 053 ] Selected signal COMM1: Reset mult. If the multiple signaling is still present at the time of a reset. sig. 1 active [ 221 017 ] Selected signal MAIN: Inp. The stored signal is reset by the following actions: ● General reset ● Latching reset ● LED indicators reset ● A command received through the communication interface.asg. Both an updated and a stored signal are generated.

In addition.2 Vnom. the P139 determines the lowest phase-to-ground voltage and checks if the two other phase-to-ground voltages exceed the threshold of 0.P139 3 Operation 3. a ground fault signal is issued for the phase with the lowest phase-to-ground voltage. Ground fault signals generated either by ground fault direction determination using steady-state values (GFDSS) or transient ground fault direction determination (TGFD) are grouped together to form multiple signaling. 3-76: Phase-selective ground fault signaling.5. During a ground fault. the two higher phase-to-ground voltages must exceed the lowest phase-to-ground voltage by a factor of 1.5 V̲A-G > 1. If these conditions are met.11.15 Ground Fault Signaling If a ground fault has been detected by either the GFDSS function (ground fault direction determination by steady-state values) or the TGFD function (transient ground fault direction determination). MAIN: Ground fault [ 041 087 ] V̲A-G V̲B-G V̲min V̲C-G V̲min=V̲A-G V̲min=V̲B-G V̲min=V̲C-G MAIN: Ground fault A [ 041 054 ] MAIN: Ground fault B [ 041 055 ] MAIN: Ground fault C [ 041 056 ] > 0. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-111 .5 V̲C-G S8Z5081A Fig. the P139 analyzes the phase-to-ground voltages and identifies the phase on which the ground fault has occurred.5 V̲B-G > 1.2 Vnom > 1.

11. The starting signals are also blocked directly by the motor protection if the startup of a motor has been detected.16 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic 3. 3-112 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . While this timer stage is running. 3-77: Multiple Signaling of ground faults. fault forw. Blocking is suspended if a trip signal is present.) [ 009 038 ] TGFD: Ground fault [ 004 033 ] GFDSS: Direct. An adjustable timer stage is started by the phase-selective starting signals./BS [ 041 089 ] TGFD: Backward / BS [ 004 032 ] S8Z0182A Fig./adm.11.1 Phase-Selective Starting Signals Common phase-selective starting signals are formed from the internal phaseselective starting signals of definite-time overcurrent protection and of inversetime overcurrent protection. fault pow. backward/BS [ 009 036 ] MAIN: Gnd. [ 009 037 ] GFDSS: Ground fault (curr. the starting signals are blocked. The operate delays for the residual current and negative-sequence current stages of the DTOC and IDMT protection functions can be blocked for a singlepole or multi-pole starting (depending on the setting).16. forward/LS [ 009 035 ] MAIN: Gnd./LS [ 041 088 ] TGFD: Forward / LS [ 004 031 ] GFDSS: Direct. 3. fault backw.P139 3 Operation MAIN: Ground fault [ 041 087 ] GFDSS: Grd. the residual current starting signal and the negative-sequence starting signal.

306 513 306 514 306 515 MAIN: Starting G int. IN. DTOC: Starting Ineg>> [ 036 146 ] MAIN: Starting B int.sig.sig. the logic. Parameter MAIN: Suppr. ] 306 517 0 & 1 & 2 MAIN: Bl. also applies to IDMT2 with different numerical addresses.N> [ 040 081 ] IDMT1: Starting Iref.neg PSx [ * 306 516 MAIN: Starting Ineg int. (Only IDMT1 is shown. PSx MAIN: Bl. start 2: For multi-ph. PSx [ * ] 0 t DTOC: Starting A 305 458 & MAIN: Starting A [ 040 005 ] & MAIN: Starting B [ 040 006 ] & MAIN: Starting C [ 040 007 ] & MAIN: Starting GF [ 040 008 ] & MAIN: Starting Ineg [ 040 105 ] IDMT: Starting A 304 359 DTOC: Starting B 305 459 IDMT: Starting B 304 360 DTOC: Starting C 305 460 IDMT: Starting C 304 361 DTOC: Starting N 305 461 IDMT1: Starting Iref. 3-78: Phase-selective starting signals.IN. trip signal 1 [ 036 005 ] MAIN: Block start. DTOC: Starting Ineg>>> [ 036 147 ] MAIN: Starting C int.) P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-113 .P139 3 Operation MAIN: Gen.neg PSx set set set set 017 001 001 001 017 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 054 222 223 224 015 214 215 216 12Z6208A Fig. timer st.IN.st. however.tim.start. start.neg> [ 040 107 ] DTOC: Starting Ineg> [ 036 145 ] MAIN: Starting A int.neg 306 400 0: Without 1: For single-ph.start.st. signal & 306 512 MAIN: Gen. trip signal 2 [ 036 023 ] MP: Startup [ 040 119 ] MAIN: Suppr. MAIN: Bl.tim.

P139
3.11.16.2

3 Operation

General Starting
The general starting signal is formed from the starting signals of the DTOC and
IDMT protection functions. A setting governs whether the residual current stages
and the negative-sequence current stage will be involved in forming the general
starting signal. If the operate signal from one of the residual current stages and
the negative-sequence current stage does not cause a general starting (due to
the setting) then the associated operate delays will be blocked. As a result, a trip
command cannot be issued by residual current and negative-sequence current
stages.

MAIN:
Gen. start. mode PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
Gen. start. mode PSx
[ * ]
1: With start. IN, Ineg

0
1
0: W/o start. IN, Ineg
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute

1: With start. IN, Ineg
MAIN:
Start. I>,kIref,P>
306 521

MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]

MAIN:
No. general start.
[ 004 000 ]

+
R

DTOC:
Starting I>
[ 040 036 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,P>
[ 040 080 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>>
[ 040 029 ]

MAIN:
General starting
[ 040 000 ]

&

MAIN:
General start. int.
306 539

DTOC:
Starting I>>>
[ 039 075 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,N>
[ 040 081 ]

&

DTOC:
Starting IN>
[ 040 077 ]
DTOC:
Starting IN>>
[ 040 041 ]

&

MAIN:
tGS PSx
[ * ]

DTOC:
Starting IN>>>
[ 039 078 ]
DTOC:
Starting IN>>>>
[ 035 031 ]

MAIN:
tGS elapsed
[ 040 009 ]

IDMT1:
Starting Iref,neg>
[ 040 107 ]
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>
[ 036 145 ]
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>
[ 036 146 ]
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>>
[ 036 147 ]
MAIN:
Block start. signal
306 512

*

Parameter

MAIN:
Gen. start. mode PSx

MAIN:
tGS PSx

set
set
set
set

017
001
001
001

017
001
001
001

1
2
3
4

027
219
220
221

005
225
226
227

12Z6201A

Fig. 3-79: General starting. (Only IDMT1 is shown; the logic, however, also applies to IDMT2 with different numerical
addresses.)

3.11.16.3

Counter for General Starting Signals
The number of general starts is counted.

3.11.16.4

Multiple Signaling by the DTOC and IDMT Protection Functions
The trip signals generated by the DTOC and IDMT protection functions are
grouped together to form multiple signaling.

3-114

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

3 Operation

DTOC:
tI> elapsed
[ 040 010 ]

P139

MAIN:
Timer stage P elaps.
[ 040 031 ]

DTOC:
tI>> elapsed
[ 040 033 ]
DTOC:
tI>>> elapsed
[ 040 012 ]
IDMT1:
tIref,P> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
DTOC:
tIneg> elapsed
[ 036 148 ]

MAIN:
Timer st. Ineg elaps
[ 040 050 ]

DTOC:
tIneg>> elapsed
[ 036 149 ]
DTOC:
tIneg>>> elapsed
[ 036 150 ]
IDMT1:
tIref,neg> elapsed
[ 040 109 ]
DTOC:
tIN> elapsed
[ 040 013 ]

MAIN:
Timer stage N elaps.
[ 040 032 ]

DTOC:
tIN>> elapsed
[ 040 121 ]
DTOC:
tIN>>> elapsed
[ 039 079 ]
DTOC:
tIN>>>> elapsed
[ 035 040 ]
IDMT1:
tIref,N> elapsed
[ 040 083 ]
DTOC:
Trip signal tI>
[ 041 020 ]

MAIN:
TripSig. tI>/tIrefP>
[ 040 042 ]

IDMT1:
Trip signal tIref,P>
[ 040 084 ]
DTOC:
Trip signal tIneg>
[ 036 151 ]

MAIN:
TrSg.tIneg>/Iref,neg
[ 040 051 ]

IDMT1:
Trip sig. tIref,neg>
[ 040 108 ]
DTOC:
Trip signal tIN>
[ 041 021 ]

MAIN:
TripSig tIN>/tIrefN>
[ 040 043 ]

IDMT1:
Trip signal tIref,N>
[ 040 085 ]

12Z5122A

Fig. 3-80: Multiple signaling by the DTOC and IDMT protection functions. (Only IDMT1 is shown; the logic, however,
also applies to IDMT2 with different numerical addresses.)

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

3-115

P139
3.11.16.5

3 Operation

Trip Command
The P139 provides two trip commands. The functions required to issue a trip can
be selected by setting an “m out of n” parameter independently for each of the
two trip commands. The minimum trip command closure time may be set. The
trip signals are present only as long as the conditions for the signal are met.

MAIN:
Trip cmd.block. USER
[ 021 012 ]

0
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]

1
0: No
MAIN:
Trip cmd. block. EXT
[ 036 045 ]

1: Yes

MAIN:
Fct.assig.trip cmd.1
[ 021 001 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2

m out of n

Signal n
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]

Selected signals
MAIN:
Min.dur. trip cmd. 1
[ 021 003 ]

MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]

MAIN:
Latching trip cmd. 1
[ 021 023 ]

0
1
0: No
1: Yes

MAIN:
Fct.assig.trip cmd.2
[ 021 002 ]

Signal 1
Signal 2

m out of n

Signal n
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 2
[ 036 023 ]

Selected signals

MAIN:
Min.dur. trip cmd. 2
[ 021 004 ]

MAIN:
Latching trip cmd. 2
[ 021 024 ]

MAIN:
Gen. trip signal
[ 036 251 ]

MAIN:
Gen. trip command 2
[ 036 022 ]

0
1

MAIN:
Gen. trip command
[ 035 071 ]

0: No
ARC:
Trip signal
[ 039 099 ]

1: Yes

MAIN:
Rset.latch.trip USER
[ 021 005 ]

0
1
0: don't execute
MAIN:
Reset latch.trip EXT
[ 040 138 ]

MAIN:
Latch. trip c. reset
[ 040 139 ]

1: execute

19Z5007A

Fig. 3-81: Forming the trip commands.

3-116

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

P139

3 Operation

3.11.16.5.1

Latching of the Trip Commands
Each of the trip commands can be individually set to operate in the latching
mode (via M AI N: L atchin g tri p cmd. 1 or MAI N: L atch ing trip cmd. 2,
respectively).
The trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by parameter
(MAIN : R set.l at ch .tri p USER) or reset through an appropriately configured
binary signal input (MA IN: Re se t l atch.tri p EXT).
Latching is ineffective if a trip command has been issued by the ARC function.

3.11.16.5.2

Blocking of the Trip Commands
The trip commands can be blocked via parameters or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. This blocking is then effective for both trip
commands. The trip signals are not affected by this blocking. If the trip
commands are both blocked, it is indicated by the continuously illuminated
amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a signal from an
output relay configured to “Blocked/Faulty”.

MAIN:
Trip cmd.block. USER
[ 021 012 ]

0
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]

1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Trip cmd. block. EXT
[ 036 045 ]

47Z01AWA

Fig. 3-82: Blocking of the trip commands.

3.11.16.5.3

Counter of Trip Commands
The number of trip commands is counted. The counters can be reset either
individually or as a group.

MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]

+

MAIN:
No. gen.trip cmds. 1
[ 004 006 ]

R

MAIN:
Gen. trip command 2
[ 036 022 ]

+
R

MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]

MAIN:
No. gen.trip cmds. 2
[ 009 050 ]

0
1
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute

≥1

0: don't execute
1: execute

MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Rst.c.cl./tripc. EXT
[ 005 210 ]

12Z6190A

Fig. 3-83: Trip command counter.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

3-117

P139
3.11.16.6

3 Operation

Manual Trip Command
A manual trip command may be issued via a parameter or a binary signal input
configured accordingly, but it is not executed unless the manual trip is included
in the selection of possible functions to cause a trip.

MAIN:
Man. trip cmd. USER
[ 003 040 ]
0
1
0: don't execute

1
100 ms

MAIN:
Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ]

1: execute
MAIN:
Man. trip cmd. EXT
[ 037 018 ]

19Z5008A

Fig. 3-84: Manual trip command.

3-118

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

P139

3 Operation

3.11.17

CB Trip Signal
The signal MAIN : CB tri p in te rnal is issued if the following conditions are met
simultaneously:

The binary signal input configured for “tripping” is set to a logic value of
“1” or the selected trip command from the P139 is present.

At the binary signal input configured as “CB trip” a logic value of “1” is
present.

The CB trip signal from an external device can also be signaled. For this task, two
binary signal inputs need to be configured as “CB trip enable ext.” and as “CB
trip ext.”.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

3-119

P139

3 Operation

MAIN:
Inp.assign. tripping
[ 221 010 ]

Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3

Signal n
Selected signal

MAIN:
Prot.trip>CB tripped
[ 221 012 ]

MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]

0
1
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 2
[ 036 022 ]

2
3
0

3

0: Without function
1: Gen. trip command 1
2: Gen. trip command 2
3: Gen.trip command 1/2

MAIN:
Inp. asg. CB trip
[ 221 013 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]

DEV10:
Switch. device open
[ 211 236 ]
Selected signal

MAIN:
CB trip internal
[ 221 006 ]

MAIN:
Inp.asg.CB tr.en.ext
[ 221 050 ]

Selected signal

MAIN:
CB tripped
[ 221 016 ]

MAIN:
Inp.asg. CB trip ext
[ 221 024 ]

Selected signal
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]

19Z5069A

Fig. 3-85: CB trip signal.

3-120

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

P139

3 Operation

3.11.18

Communication Error
If a link to the control station cannot be established or if the link is interrupted,
the signal “Communication error” will be issued. This signal will also be issued if
communication module A is not fitted.

MAIN:
Communication error
[ 221 019 ]

COMM1:
Communication error
304 422

DVICE:
Module A not fitted
307 140

19Z5070A

Fig. 3-86: Communication Error.

3.11.19

Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization
The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory
and the event memories are date- and time-tagged. For correct tagging, the date
and time need to be set in the P139.
The time of different devices may be synchronized by a pulse given to an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The P139 evaluates the rising edge.
This will set the clock to the nearest full minute, rounding either up or down. If
several start/end signals occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is
evaluated.

MAIN:
Date
[ 003 090 ]
MAIN:
Time of day
[ 003 091 ]
MAIN:
Time switching
[ 003 095 ]

MAIN:
Min-pulse clock EXT
[ 060 060 ]
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021

Setting

MAIN:
Time switching

0: Standard time
1: Daylight saving time

Q6Z0152B

Fig. 3-87: Date/time setting and clock synchronization with minute pulses presented at a binary signal input.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

3-121

P139
3.11.19.1

3 Operation

Synchronization Source
The P139 provides numerous options to synchronize the internal clock:

Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM1/IEC
(full time)

Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM2/PC
(full time)

IRIG-B Signal (IRIGB; time of day only)

Minute pulse presented at a binary signal input (MAIN), see Fig. 3-87, (p. 3121) and previous paragraph

With older P139 versions these interfaces had equal ranking i.e. clock
synchronization was carried out regardless of which sub-function initiated
triggering. No conflicts have to be taken into account as long as synchronization
sources (communication master, IRIG‑B and minute pulse source) operate at the
same time of day. Should the synchronization sources operate with a different
time basis unwanted step changes in the internal clock may occur. On the other
hand a redundant time of day synchronization is often used so as to sustain time
synchronization via IRIG‑B interface even if and while the SCADA communication
is out of service.
With the current P139 versions a primary and a backup source for time of day
synchronization may now be set, where both provide the four options listed in
the above.
M AIN: Prim.Sou rce TimeSync
M AIN: Back up Source Ti me Sync
With this feature synchronization occurs continuously from the primary source as
long as time synchronization telegrams are received within a time-out period set
at MAIN: Time sync. time -ou t The backup source is required if after the set
time-out there is no synchronization through the primary source.
When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the P139 will
expect time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP2 after server SNTP 1
has become defective, before it will switch over to the backup source.
Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out
stage is blocked.

3-122

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

P139

3 Operation

3.11.20

Resetting Actions
Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in
several ways. The following types of resetting actions are possible:

Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given
that the LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display
of measured event data on the local control panel LCD whenever a new
event occurs. In this case only the displays on the local control panel LCD
are cleared but not the internal memories such as the fault memory.

Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the local
control panel LCD by pressing the “Clear” key
located on the local
control panel. By selecting the required function at L OC: Fct. reset ke y
further memories may be assigned which will then also be cleared when
the “Clear” key is pressed.

Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory)
via setting parameters. (For this example: Navigate to menu point
FT_R C: R ese t re cord. U SER and set to execute, see also the exact stepby-step description in Section 6.11.7, (p. 6-40).)

Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory)
through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example:
Assign parameter FT_RC: R es et re cord. EXT to the relevant binary
signal input e.g. INP: Fct. as s ignm. U 301 .)

Group resetting by setting parameters, by navigating to menu point
MAIN : Group re set 1 USER (or MA IN: Group rese t 2 USER) and
setting it to execute. For this the relevant memories (i.e. those to be reset)
must be assigned to parameter MA IN: Fct.assign. reset 1 (or
MAI N: Fct .ass ign . re se t 2, resp.)

Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
(That is assign parameter MA IN: Group r e set 1 EXT (or MA IN : Group
rese t 2 EXT) to the relevant binary signal input, e.g. INP : Fct. assignm.
U 301 after memories to be reset have been assigned to parameter
MAI N: Fct .assi gn . re se t 1 (or MAI N: Fct.assign. reset 2).

General resetting by setting parameters (menu point MAIN: General
rese t USER). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any
special configuration options.

General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
(MAI N: General re se t EXT is assigned to the relevant binary signal
input.) All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special
configuration options.

Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory
then they all have equal priority.
In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal
battery and substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

3-123

P139

3 Operation

MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
0
1: execute

1
0: don't execute
1: execute

MAIN:
Reset indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute

MAIN:
Reset LED

≥1

MAIN:
Reset indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]

306 020

12Z6115A

Fig. 3-88: General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel.

LOC:
Reset key active

≥1

&

310 024

OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]

LOC:
Fct. reset key
[ 005 251 ]

m out of n

OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[005 213]

MAIN:
Group reset 1 USER
[ * ]

MAIN:
Group reset 2 USER
[ * ]

0
1

MAIN:
Group reset 1 EXT
[

*

*

≥1

1

&

0: don't execute

0: don't execute

1: execute

1: execute

≥1

&

]

MAIN:
Group reset 2 EXT
[

0

]

MAIN:
Fct.assign. reset 1
[

*

]

m out of n

OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[005 213]

MAIN:
Fct.assign. reset 2
[

*

]

m out of n

OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[005 213]

12Z61RMB

Fig. 3-89: “CLEAR” key on the local control panel and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data
recording (e.g. as an example for the reset signal O P _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T.

A complete list of all resetting parameters that can be used in the way shown in
Fig. 3-89, (p. 3-124) can be obtained from the separately available
DataModelExplorer: Look up the setting parameter MAIN: F ct .assign. re set 1
in the file P139‑651_en_Addresses.pdf, and there follow the link to the referenced
config. table.

3-124

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

P139

3 Operation

3.11.20.1

Resetting Actions through Keys on the Local Control Panel
Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make
access especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by
configuring them to a configurable key.

One can include the relevant resetting action in the configuration of the
“READ” ( ) key (through LOC: Fct. re ad k ey).

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

3-125

P139
3.11.21

3 Operation

Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical
Communications Channels
Depending on the design version of the communications module A there are up
to two communications channels available (see Chapter “Technical Data”). These
physical communications channels may be assigned to communications
interfaces COMM1 and COMM2.
If communications interface COMM1 is assigned to communications channel 2,
then the settings of communications interface COMM2 are automatically
assigned to communications channel 1.
COMM2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P139 if its PC interface
has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data,
COMM2 becomes “dead”. It will only be enabled again when the "time-out"
period for the PC interface has elapsed.

MAIN:
Chann.assign.COMM1/2
[ 003 169 ]

1
2
1: COMM1->chann.1,(2-2)
2: COMM1->chann.2,(2-1)

"Logical"
Communic. interface
COMM1

Comm. interface
Channel 1

"Logical"
Communic. interface
COMM2

Comm. interface
Channel 2

45Z5171A

Fig. 3-90: Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication channels.

3-126

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

P139

3 Operation

3.11.22

Test Mode
If tests are run on the P139, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that
all incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be identified accordingly.

MAIN:
Test mode USER
[ 003 012 ]
0
1

MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]

0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Test mode EXT
[ 037 070 ]

D5Z50EBA

Fig. 3-91: Setting the test mode.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

3-127

P139

3.12

3 Operation

Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS)
With the P139, four independent parameter subsets may be pre-set. The user
may switch between parameter subsets during operation without interrupting the
protection function.

Selecting the Parameter Subset
The control path determining the active parameter subset (function setting or
binary signal input) may be selected via the function setting PSS: C ontrol via
USER or via the external signal P SS: Control vi a user EXT. Correspondingly,
the parameter subset is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function
setting PSS : Par am.s ubs .se l . USER or in accordance with external signals.
Which parameter subset is actually active at a particular time may be
determined by scanning the logic state signals PSS: Actual param . subset or
PSS: PS 1 a cti ve.
Selecting the Parameter Subset via Binary Inputs
If the binary signal inputs are to be used for parameter subset selection, then the
P139 first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured
for parameter subset selection. If this is not the case, then the parameter subset
selected via the function setting will be active. The P139 also checks whether the
signals present at the binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous parameter
subset selection. This is only true when only one binary signal input is set to a
logic level of “1”. If more than one signal input is set to a logic level of “1”, then
the parameter subset previously selected remains active. Should a dead interval
occur while switching between parameter subsets (this is the case if all binary
signal inputs have a logic level of “0”), then the stored hold time is started. While
this timer stage is running, the previously selected parameter subset remains
active. As soon as a signal input has a logic level of “1”, the associated
parameter subset becomes active. If, after the stored time has elapsed, there is
still no signal input with a logic level of “1”, the parameter subset selected via
the function parameter becomes active.
If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic level of “1” is present at any of
the binary signal inputs selected for the parameter subset selection, then the
parameter subset selected via the function parameter will become active once
the stored time has elapsed. The previous parameter subset remains active while
the stored hold timer stage is running.
Parameter subset selection may also occur during a starting condition. When
subset selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum inherent delay of
approximately 100 ms must be taken into account.
Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally
effective for all four parameter subsets.

3-128

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

P139

3 Operation

PSS:
Control via USER
[ 003 100 ]
0
1
0: No
PSS:
Control via user
[ 036 102 ]

1: Yes
PSS:
Control via user EXT
[ 036 101 ]

PSS:
Param.subs.sel. USER
[ 003 060 ]

INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]

1
2

U x1

3

U x2

4

U x3
U xx

1: Parameter subset 1
2: Parameter subset 2

Address

065 002

Address

065 003

3: Parameter subset 3

Address

065 004

4: Parameter subset 4

Address

065 005

1
2
3
4
1

4

PSS:
Actual param. subset
[ 003 062 ]
PSS:
PS 1 active
[ 036 090 ]

PSS:
Activate PS 1 EXT
[ 065 002 ]

PSS:
PS 2 active
[ 036 091 ]

PSS:
Activate PS 2 EXT
[ 065 003 ]

PSS:
PS 3 active
[ 036 092 ]

PSS:
Activate PS 3 EXT
[ 065 004 ]

PSS:
PS 4 active
[ 036 093 ]

PSS:
Activate PS 4 EXT
[ 065 005 ]

0
PSS:
Keep time
[ 003 063 ]

1

4

1
2
3
4
0

4

PSS:
Ext.sel.param.subset
[ 003 061 ]
PSS:
PS 1 activated ext.
[ 036 094 ]
PSS:
PS 2 activated ext.
[ 036 095 ]
PSS:
PS 3 activated ext.
[ 036 096 ]
PSS:
PS 4 activated ext.
[ 036 097 ]

D5Z5002A

Fig. 3-92: Activating the parameter subsets.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

3-129

P139

3.13

3 Operation

Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON)
Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P139 ensure that internal faults are
detected and do not lead to malfunctions. The selection of function assignments
to the alarm signal includes, among others, self-monitoring signals from the
communications monitor, measuring-circuit monitoring (V, Vref, I), open-circuit
monitoring (20 mA input, temperature sensors) and the logic outputs 30 to 32
and 30(t) to 32(t).

3.13.1

Tests During Start-up
After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to
verify full operability of the P139. If the P139 detects a fault in one of the tests,
then start-up is terminated. The display shows which test was running when
termination occurred. No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to
start up the P139 can only be initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then
on again.

3.13.2

Cyclic Tests
After start-up has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will
be run during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified
monitoring signal will be issued and stored in a non-volatile(NV) memory – the
monitoring signal memory – along with the assigned date and time (see
Section 3.15, (p. 3-134)).
The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the
minimum acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is
displayed, then the power supply module should be replaced within a month,
since otherwise there is the danger of data loss if the supply voltage should fail.
Section 12.1, (p. 12-2) gives further information on maintenance procedures.

3.13.3

Signal
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured
SFMON : War ning (rel ay). The output relay operates as long as an internal
fault is detected.

SFMON:
Fct. assign. warning
[ 021 030 ]

Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected monit. sig.

SFMON:
Hardware fault

SFMON:
Warning (LED)
[ 036 070 ]
SFMON:
Warning (relay)
[ 036 100 ]

304 950

Q6Z0154A

Fig. 3-93: Monitoring signals.

3-130

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

P139

3 Operation

3.13.4

Device Response
The response of the P139 is dependent on the type of monitoring signal. The
following responses are possible:

Signaling Only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a
signal is issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation
exists, for example, when internal data acquisition memories overflow.

Selective Blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective
functions, then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for
example, to the detection of a fault on the communication module or in the
area of the PC interface.

Warm Restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a
system restart – such as a fault in the hardware –, then a procedure called
a warm restart is automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any
start-up, the computer system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is
characterized by the fact that no stored data and, in particular, no setting
parameters are affected by the procedure. A warm restart can also be
triggered manually by control action. During a warm restart sequence the
protective functions and the communication through serial interfaces will
be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been
triggered by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions
remain blocked but communication through the serial interfaces will usually
be possible again.

Cold Restart
If a corrupted parameter subset is diagnosed during the checksum test,
which is part of the self-monitoring procedure, then a cold restart is carried
out. This is necessary because the P139 cannot identify which parameter in
the subset is corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be
reset to a defined state. This means that all the protection device settings
are also erased after a cold restart. In order to establish a safe initial state,
the default values have been selected so that the protective functions are
blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the cold restart and the
value indicating parameter loss are entered in the monitoring signal
memory.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

3-131

P139
3.13.5

3 Operation

Monitoring Signal Memory
Depending on the type of internal fault detected the P139 will respond by trying
to eliminate the problem with a warm restart. (See above; for further details read
also about P139 behavior with problems in Chapter 11, (p. 11-1).) Whether or
not this measure will suffice can only be determined if the monitoring signal has
not already been stored in the monitoring signal memory because of a previous
fault. If it was already stored and a second fault is detected then, depending on
the type of fault detected, the P139 will be blocked after the second warm
restart.
In order to better monitor this behavior the parameter at SFMON: Mon.sig.
re t ent ion is applied. This parameter may either be set to ‘Blocked’ or to a time
duration (in hours). (It is, however, discouraged to set it to 0, because in this
case, there would be no blocking at all, so that there would be the danger of
maloperation in case of a permanent failure.)
The default for this timer stage is Blocked, i.e. blocking of the protection device
with two identical faults occurs independently of the time elapsed since the first
fault monitoring signal was issued.
The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the
P139 if the monitoring signal memory had not been reset in the interim, for
example, because the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or reading-out
and clearing of the monitoring signal memory via the communication interfaces
was not enabled. To defuse this problem it is suggested to set the function
parameter to a specific time period so that blocking will only occur if the same
fault occurs again within this time period. Otherwise, the P139 will continue to
operate normally after a warm restart.

3.13.6

Monitoring Signal Memory Time Tag
The time when the device fault occurred last is recorded.

3-132

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

P139

3 Operation

3.14

Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC)
For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of
events, a non-volatile memory is provided (cyclic buffer). The “operationally
relevant” signals, each fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal
end, are entered in chronological order. The signals relevant for operation
include control actions such as function disabling and enabling and triggers for
testing and resetting. The start and end of system events that represent a
deviation from normal operation such as overloads, ground faults or short-circuits
are also recorded. The operating data memory can be cleared/reset.

Counter for Signals Relevant to System Operation
The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.

OP_RC:
Operat. data record.
[ 003 024 ]

Operating memory

MAIN:
Oper.-relev. signal
306 024

R

MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute

+

OP_RC:
No. oper. data sig.
[ 100 002 ]

R

MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 001 ]

0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute

12Z61CMA

Fig. 3-94: Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

3-133

P139

3.15

3 Operation

Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC)
The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in
the monitoring signal memory. The memory buffer allows for a maximum of
30 entries. If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory
clearance, the SFMON: O ve rf l ow MT_RC signal is entered as the last entry.
Monitoring signals prompted by a hardware fault in the unit are always entered
in the monitoring signal memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral
fault can be entered into the monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can
select this option by setting an “m out of n” parameter (see Section 3.13, (p. 3130)).
If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is
signaled by the red LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry
causes the LED to flash (on/off/on....).
The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action.
Entries in the monitoring signal memory are not cleared automatically, even if
the corresponding test in a new test cycle now shows the P139 to be healthy.
The contents of the monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control
panel or through the PC or communication interface. The time and date
information assigned to the individual entries can be read out through the PC or
communication interface or from the local control panel.

Monitoring Signal Counter
The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on
the monitoring signal counter (MT_RC : N o. mon it. signals).

MT_RC:
Mon. signal record.
[ 003 001 ]

MAIN:
Time tag
306 021

SFMON:
Hardware fault
304 950

Selected monit. sig.

MT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 008 ]

≥1
0
1

≥1

0: don't execute
MT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 240 ]

CT30

SFMON:
Overflow MT_RC
[ 090 012 ]
MT_RC:
No. monit. signals
[ 004 019 ]

1: execute

12Z6155A

Fig. 3-95: Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter.

3-134

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651

startup. EXT [ 005 241 ] OL_RC: Reset record.max r. in progress [ 035 003 ] + R OL_DA: Overload duration [ 004 102 ] ≥1 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] OL_RC: Reset record. the maximum startup current and heating during startup are determined and stored at the end of the startup period.taken f. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-135 .m. MP: Startup [ 040 119 ] OL_DA: T.1 Overload Duration In the event of an overload.s. the P139 determines the overload duration.2 Acquiring Measured Overload Data from the Motor Protection During a motor startup the measured values for the startup time. MP [ 005 098 ] MP: IP./Iref 304 740 OL_DA: Heat. 3. The overload duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the FT_R C: Record.MP [ 005 096 ] OL_DA: Start-up current. OL_RC: Record.start-up.MP [ 005 097 ] 19Z5280A Fig. 3-97: Measured overload values from the motor protection. USER [ 100 003 ] 1: execute 50Z0137A Fig.16.16.16 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA) 3.dur.P139 3 Operation 3. 3-96: Overload duration. in pr ogre ss signal.

in progress [ 035 003 ] C THERM: Status THERM replica [ 004 016 ] R THERM: I 305 202 R THERM: Object temperature [ 004 137 ] R THERM: Coolant temperature [ 004 149 ] R THERM: Pre-trip time left [ 004 139 ] OL_DA: Status THERM replica [ 004 147 ] OL_DA: Load current THERM [ 004 058 ] OL_DA: Object temp. They are stored at the end of an overload event.leftTHERM [ 004 148 ] R THERM: Temp.3 3 Operation Acquiring Measured Overload Data from the Thermal Overload Protection Measured overload values are derived from the thermal overload protection’s measured operating data.P139 3. EXT [ 005 241 ] OL_RC: Reset record. 3-136 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .16. USER [ 100 003 ] 1: execute 12Z6238A Fig. offset replica [ 004 109 ] OL_DA: Offset THERM replica [ 004 154 ] R MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute ≥1 MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] OL_RC: Reset record. THERM [ 004 035 ] OL_DA: Coolant temp. OL_RC: Record. 3-98: Measured overload values from the thermal overload protection. THERM [ 004 036 ] OL_DA: Pre-trip t.

overload [ 004 101 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] OL_RC: Reset record.17.1 Start of Overload Recording An overload exists – and consequently overload recording begins – if at least the signal THER M: St art in g k*Iref > is issued.3 Time Tagging The date of each overload event is stored. USER [ 100 003 ] 1: execute 52Z01C3A Fig. 3.17. The time information (relative to the onset of the overload) can be retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC or one of the communication interfaces. OL_RC: Record.P139 3 Operation 3. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-137 .17. in progress [ 035 003 ] THERM: Starting k*Iref> [ 041 108 ] + R MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] OL_RC: No. 3.17 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC) 3.2 Counting Overload Events Overload events are counted and identified by sequential numbers. EXT [ 005 241 ] OL_RC: Reset record. The overload start or end signals are likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to an overload event when the event begins can be read out from the overload memory on the local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. 3-99: Counting overload events.

EXT [ 005 241 ] 1 ≥1 0: don't execute 1: execute 12Z6117A Fig.4 3 Operation Overload Logging Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific event. 3-100: Overload memory.17. can be stored in the nonvolatile overload memories. in progress [ 035 003 ] C Signal 1 1 Signal 3 1 Signal n 1 + ≥1 1 Signal 2 OL_RC: Overl. mem. OL_RC: Record. then OL_RC: Ove rl. USER [ 100 003 ] OL_RC: Overload recording 1 1 033 020 2 033 021 3 033 022 4 033 023 5 033 024 6 033 025 7 033 026 8 033 027 0 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] OL_RC: Reset record. In addition to the signals. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single overload event. in progress [ 035 000 ] R OL_RC: Reset record. A total of eight overload events.P139 3. After eight overload events have been logged. each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals. unless memories have been cleared in the interim. 3-138 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . the measured overload data will also be entered in the overload memory. The overload logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or communication interfaces. mem. ove rflow will be entered as the last signal. overflow [ 035 007 ] CT200 R OL_RC: Overload recording 1 [ * ] 1 n Measured value 1 Measured value 2 Measured value 3 Measured value N MAIN: Time tag 306 021 & FT_RC: Record. the oldest overload log will be overwritten.

1 Duration of the ground fault with steady state value evaluation. the P139 acquires the following measured ground fault data: ● Duration of ground fault recording ● When ground fault direction determination using steady-state values (GFDSS) is enabled ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 3.18. in progress [ 035 005 ] + GF_DA: Ground flt.2 Duration of Ground Fault Recording The duration of ground fault recording is defined as the time between the start and end of the GF_RC: Re cord. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-139 . i n pr ogre ss signal. USER [ 100 000 ] 1: execute 50Z01DWA Fig. steady state power evaluation or admittance evaluation Neutral-point displacement voltage VNG with steady state value evaluation or admittance evaluation Residual current IN Active component of the residual current as determined by steady state power evaluation Reactive component of the residual current as determined by steady state power evaluation Filtered ground fault from steady state power evaluation Admittance. Resetting Measured Ground Fault Data on the local control panel.P139 3 Operation 3. duration [ 009 100 ] R MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute ≥1 MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] GF_RC: Reset record. 3-101: Duration of ground fault recording.18. conductance and susceptance with admittance evaluation. the values are not erased and can continue to be read out through the PC and communication interfaces. the measured ground After pressing the reset key fault data value is displayed as Not measured. GF_RC: Record. EXT [ 005 242 ] GF_RC: Reset record. 3. However.18 Ground Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group GF_DA) In the event of a ground fault.

3 Measured Ground Fault Data from Steady-State Value Evaluation 3.1 Ground Fault Duration The ground fault duration is defined as the time between operation and dropout of the GFDS S: VNG> P Sx trigger. 3-102: Measurement and storage of the ground fault duration from steady state power evaluation.P139 3 Operation 3.18. 3-140 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . S1 1 & C R1 GFDSS: VNG> triggered GFDSS: GF (pow./adm. Once GFDSS: tVNG> PS x has elapsed the display of the ground fault duration for the last ground fault is cleared automatically.) ready [ 038 026 ] GFDSS: Grd.3.18. fault pow. a time is only output after the end of the ground fault if the GFDSS: VNG> P Sx trigger has operated for at least the duration of set timer stage GFDSS: tVNG> P Sx. However. [ 009 037 ] GF_DA: GF duration pow.meas [ 009 024 ] + & 304 151 R ≥1 R ≥1 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: Reset LED 306 020 50Z0144A Fig.

fault pow. GFDSS: Grd.reac p.18. R C GF_DA: Voltage VNG p./adm. All measured values are output as per-unit quantities referred to the P139’s nominal current Inom.u.reac p. [ 009 022 ] & ≥1 R GF_DA: Curr. IN. [ 004 045 ] GF_DA: Curr. forward/LS [ 009 035 ] GFDSS: Direct.3. backward/BS [ 009 036 ] C ≥1 GFDSS: Current IN. IN. Also stored is the active and reactive component of the residual current determined at the time when the directional decision is output.act p. [ 009 021 ] I̲N R GFDSS: Direct.u. 3.u. [ 009 037 ] C GF_DA: Current IN p.act p.3 Neutral-Point Displacement Voltage The neutral-point displacement voltage present when timer stage GF DSS: tVNG> P Sx elapses is stored in memory.P139 3 Operation 3.u.3.2 Residual Current The residual current flowing when timer stage GFD SS: t VNG> PSx elapses is stored in memory.u. [ 009 020 ] GFDSS: V̲NG 304 150 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute R ≥1 MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: Reset LED 306 020 50Z0145A Fig. [ 009 023 ] GFDSS: Curr. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-141 . 3-103: Residual current and neutral-point displacement voltage from steady state value evaluation.18.u. IN.

delay IN elapsed C 304 157 GF_DA: Current IN p. [ 009 021 ] I̲N R C GF_DA: Curr. a time is only output after the end of the ground fault if the GFDSS: IN> P Sx trigger has operated for at least the duration of the set operate delay (GFDSS: Oper ate de lay IN PSx). 3-142 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . delay IN elapsed GF_DA: GF durat.u.18. IN filt.meas.18.P139 3 Operation 3. S1 1 & C R1 GFDSS: IN> triggered + 304 158 R ≥1 GFDSS: Op. [ 009 026 ] R ≥1 304 157 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: Reset LED 306 020 50Z0148A Fig. the display of the ground fault duration of the last ground fault is automatically cleared. curr. However. 3-105: Ground fault as determined by steady state current evaluation.4 Measured Ground Fault Data from Steady-State Power Evaluation 3.1 Ground Fault Duration The ground fault duration is defined as the time between operation and dropout of the GF D SS: I N> P Sx trigger.4.u. Once the operate delay has elapsed.18.4. GFDSS: Op. p.2 Residual Current The unfiltered and filtered residual currents that are present when the operate delay elapses (GF DSS: Operate delay IN PSx) are stored. 3-104: Measurement and storing the ground fault duration as determined by steady state current evaluation. 3. [ 009 025 ] GFDSS: I̲N filtered 304 159 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute R ≥1 MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: Reset LED 306 020 50Z0151A Fig.

18.3 Neutral-Point Displacement Voltage The neutral-point displacement voltage present when timer stage GFDSS: tVN G> P Sx elapses is stored in memory. A time value will only be issued if the trigger GFD SS: VNG> PSx has operated for at least the timer period set at GFD SS: tVNG> P Sx./adm.5.P139 3 Operation 3. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-143 . S1 1 & C R1 GFDSS: VNG> triggered 304 151 GFDSS: Admittance ready [ 038 167 ] GF_DA: GF duration admitt.5.1 Admittance.2 Residual Current The residual current flowing when timer stage GFDSS: tV NG> PSx elapses is stored in memory. This measured value is issued as a per-unit quantity referred to the P139’s nominal current Inom. fault pow.del ay Y( N) > PSx has elapsed. Conductance and Susceptance Conductance and susceptance are stored at the time when the directional decision is issued.18. Once GFDSS: tVN G> P Sx has elapsed the display of the ground fault duration for the last ground fault is cleared automatically. [ 009 037 ] R ≥1 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: Reset LED 306 020 50Z0152A Fig. The admittance value is measured at the time when the timer period set at GFD SS: Ope r. [ 009 068 ] + & R ≥1 GFDSS: Grd.5 Measured Ground Fault Data from Admittance Evaluation Ground Fault Duration The ground fault duration is defined as the time between operation and dropout of the GFDS S: V NG> P Sx trigger. 3. 3-106: Measurement and storing the ground fault duration from admittance evaluation.5. 3.18.18. 3.

u.u. Y(N) p.del. [ 009 037 ] C I̲N R GFDSS: Op. [ 009 066 ] GF_DA: Suscept.u. [ 004 193 ] R GF_DA: Conduct. 3-144 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . fault pow. G(N) p. backward/BS [ 009 036 ] GFDSS: Conduct. [ 009 020 ] GFDSS: V̲NG 304 150 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute R ≥1 MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: Reset LED 306 020 50Z0153A Fig. B(N) p. B(N) p. [ 009 021 ] C 304 175 GFDSS: Admitt. [ 004 192 ] & ≥1 R GFDSS: Suscept.u.u. [ 004 191 ] GF_DA: Admittance Y(N) p. [ 009 065 ] R GFDSS: Direct.Y(N)> elapsed GF_DA: Current IN p.u. 3-107: Measured ground fault data from admittance evaluation.u./adm.u. G(N) p.P139 3 Operation GFDSS: Grd. forward/LS [ 009 035 ] C ≥1 GFDSS: Direct. [ 009 067 ] C GF_DA: Voltage VNG p.

fault forw.19 Ground Fault Recording (Function Group GF_RC) 3. ground faults [ 004 100 ] 1: execute GF_RC: Reset record. 3-108: Counting ground fault events. ● A ground fault has been detected by transient ground fault direction determination (TGFD)./BS [ 041 089 ] MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] GF_RC: Reset record. A ground fault’s individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged.3 Time Tagging The date of each ground fault event is stored.2 ● A ground fault has been detected by ground fault direction determination using steady-state values (GFDSS). in progress [ 035 005 ] ≥1 MAIN: Gnd.19./LS [ 041 088 ] GF_RC: Record.P139 3 Operation 3. EXT [ 005 242 ] 50Z01B8A Fig.19.19. The date and time assigned to a ground fault event when the event begins can be read out from the ground fault memory on the local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. Counting Ground Fault Events Ground fault events are counted and identified by sequential numbers. The time information (relative to the onset of the ground fault) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the ground fault memory or through the PC or communication interfaces. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-145 . USER [ 100 000 ] + ≥1 R GF_RC: No. MAIN: Ground fault [ 041 087 ] MAIN: Gnd. fault backw. 3.1 Start Ground Fault Recording A ground fault exists and ground fault recording begins if at least one of the following conditions is met: 3.

n [ * ] 1 n Measured value 1 Measured value 2 Measured value 3 Measured value N MAIN: Time tag 306 021 & FT_RC: Record. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single ground fault. each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals. GF_RC: Record. unless memories have been cleared in the interim.P139 3. in progress [ 035 005 ] Signal 1 C 1 Signal 3 1 Signal n 1 + ≥1 1 Signal 2 GF_RC: GF memory overflow [ 035 006 ] CT200 R GF_RC: Ground flt.19. In addition to the signals.4 3 Operation Ground Fault Logging Protection signals during a ground fault event are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific ground fault event. n 1 033 010 2 033 011 3 033 012 4 033 013 5 033 014 6 033 015 7 033 016 8 033 017 0 1 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute ≥1 0: don't execute 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] GF_RC: Reset record. the measured ground fault data will also be entered in the ground fault memory. then GF _RC : GF me mory overflow is stored as the final signal. A total of eight ground fault logs. EXT [ 005 242 ] 12Z6141A Fig. the oldest ground fault log will be overwritten.record. After eight ground fault events have been logged. 3-109: Ground fault memory. The ground fault logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or communication interfaces.record. can be stored in the non-volatile ground fault memories. USER [ 100 000 ] GF_RC: Ground flt. in progress [ 035 000 ] R GF_RC: Reset record. 3-146 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

20. in pr ogres s signal. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-147 .P139 3 Operation 3.1 ● Running time ● Fault duration ● Fault current (short-circuit current) ● Fault voltage (short-circuit voltage) ● Fault impedance (short-circuit impedance) ● Fault reactance (short-circuit reactance) in percent of the line reactance and in Ω ● Line fault loop angle ● Fault distance ● Ground fault (short-circuit) current ● Ground fault loop angle ● Relative fault location ● Fault location in km Running Time and Fault Duration The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general starting signal. + 306 539 R FT_DA: Running time [ 004 021 ] ≥1 FT_RC: Record. and the fault duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the FT_RC: R ecor d.20 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA) When there is a primary system fault. in progress [ 035 000 ] + FT_DA: Fault duration [ 008 010 ] R MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute ≥1 ≥1 MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: Reset LED 306 020 50Z01A9A Fig. the P139 collects the following measured fault data: 3. MAIN: General start. 3-110: Running time and fault duration. int.

P139 3. trip signal 1 [ 060 005 ] 1: On general starting 2: On gen. With single-phase starting signals with ground the current values. PSx determines at which time during a fault the acquisition of fault data takes place. Depending on the setting a fault location output will occur during a general starting state or during a general starting state with a simultaneous general trip signal. PSx FT_DA: Outp.3 Acquisition of Fault Data The P139 determines from the phase-selective starting decision the fault type. ■ ■ ■ when an appropriately configured binary signal input is triggered during a general starting state. int.trip MAIN: Gen. 3.w. PSx set set set set 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 1 2 3 4 011 042 043 044 032 033 034 035 S8Z50B1C Fig. 305 076 Parameter FT_DA: Start data acqu.start. The fault impedance (short-circuit impedance) and the fault direction are determined from the voltage and current values collected from these measuring loops. values MAIN: General start. flt.20.2 3 Operation Fault Data Acquisition Time The setting at FT_D A: St art data acqu . 3-111: Enabling of measured fault data acquisition and fault location output. ● Trigger/Trip/End – Acquisition at the time. For three-phase starting signals with or without ground the minimum voltage value and the associated phase-to-phase current are selected from the phase-to-phase voltages as measured values. 305 075 306 539 FT_DA: Outp. are used for the selected measured variables.20. flt. PSx [ * ] 1 2 1: End of fault 2: Trigger/Trip/End FT_DA: Output meas. 3-148 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .locat. trip signal 2 [ 060 023 ] FT_DA: Output fault locat. The following settings are possible: ● End of fault – Acquisition at the end of the fault. FT_DA: Start data acqu. PSx [ * ] FT_DA: Trigger EXT [ 036 088 ] 1 2 MAIN: Gen. when a general starting state ends. the P139 selects a measuring loop based on the fault type. corrected by the ground factor. Moreover. which is then signaled via FT_DA : Fau lt type. when a general trip signal is issued.locat.

P139 3 Operation Starting (F T _ D A : F a u l t t y p e) Selected measured variables A IA-kG / VA-G B IB-kG / VB-G C IC-kG / VC-G A-N IA-kG / VA-G B-N IB-kG / VB-G C-N IC-kG / VC-G A-B IA-B / VA-B B-C IB-C / VB-C C-A IC-A / VC-A A-B-N IA-B / VA-B B-C-N IB-C / VB-C C-A-N IC-A / VC-A A-B-C IP-P(min) / VP-P(min) A-B-C-N IP-P(min) / VP-P(min) FT_DA: Abs. value kG PSx FT_DA: Angle kG PSx set set set set 012 012 013 013 012 012 013 013 1 2 3 4 037 087 037 087 036 086 036 086 19Z5009A Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-149 . value kG PSx [ * ] FT_DA: Angle kG PSx [ * ] I̲A I̲B I̲C k̲G·I̲N FT_DA: I̲N·k̲G 307 125 FT_DA: I̲A-I̲N·k̲G 307 126 FT_DA: I̲B-I̲N·k̲G 307 127 FT_DA: I̲C-I̲N·k̲G 307 128 Parameter FT_DA: Abs. 3-112: Formation of currents corrected by the ground factor.

loop PG 306 552 MAIN: Sel. The fault must be present for at least 60 ms so that fault measured variables (short-circuit data) may be determined. loop A-G 306 546 MAIN: Sel. loop C-A 306 551 MAIN: Sel. 306 515 MAIN: Starting G int.P139 3 Operation MAIN: Starting A int. In the case of multi-phase starting. The ground fault angle is the phase displacement between ground fault current and the selected measuring voltage. The primary fault reactance is calculated from the per-unit fault reactance using the nominal data for the set primary current and voltage transformers. loop C-G 306 548 MAIN: Sel. loop A-B 306 549 MAIN: Sel. meas. 3-113: Selecting measured variables to collect short-circuit data. meas. meas. meas. this is the current of the leading phase in the cycle. loop PP 306 553 FT_DA: Fault type [ 010 198 ] 19Z8071A Fig. loop B-G 306 547 MAIN: Sel. loop B-C 306 550 MAIN: Sel. 306 516 FT_DA: I̲A-I̲N·k̲G 307 126 FT_DA: I̲B-I̲N·k̲G 307 127 FT_DA: I̲C-I̲N·k̲G 307 128 I̲A I̲B I̲C V̲A-G V̲B-G V̲C-G MAIN: Vmeas 306 544 MAIN: Imeas 306 545 MAIN: Sel. The geometric sum of the three phase currents is displayed as the ground fault current. 306 514 MAIN: Starting C int. meas. meas. To determine short-circuit data the selected measured variables Imeas and Vmeas are applied when the fault was identified by the fault data acquisition function. meas. One phase current is selected as the fault current corresponding to the measuring loop selected. 3-150 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 306 513 MAIN: Starting B int. The ground fault data are only determined if a phase-to-ground loop has been selected for the measurement by the fault data acquisition function. meas.

Fault current and voltage are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to Inom and Vnom. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-151 . If the measured or calculated values are outside of the acceptable measuring range.b. overflow is displayed.P139 3 Operation Only the short-circuit current is determined should an m.c. trip signal be present or the transformer module fitted not include voltage transformers and the maximum phase current is displayed.

u. loop A-G FT_DA: Flt. meas.P139 3 Operation FT_DA: Output meas. meas. [ 010 002 ] MAIN: Sel.b. meas. N p.c. values C 1... 0 C1 ≥1 306 539 MAIN: M. loop A-B R C1 306 549 MAIN: Sel.3. loop selected [ 004 079 ] MAIN: Reset LED 306 020 19Z8055A Fig. PG/PP p. [ 004 025 ] FT_DA: Fault current P prim [ 010 199 ] 2 I̲max 1 3 R 4 1 R MAIN: Sel. 3-114: Acquisition of fault data (short circuit data).. meas. loop B-G FT_DA: Flt. int. meas. [ 004 026 ] 1 4 C2 R FT_DA: Fault loop angle P [ 004 024 ] 306 547 MAIN: Sel. prim. N prim. meas. prim. [ 004 049 ] R C2 306 550 MAIN: Sel.. meas. [ 004 028 ] 1 FT_DA: Fault react. [ 010 001 ] MAIN: Vnom V. loop C-G C3 1 306 548 MAIN: Sel. 3-152 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . loop B-C FT_DA: Fault impedance. 3 R V<2V 2 FT_DA: Fault curr. PG/PP prim [ 010 217 ] 2 . [ 004 029 ] 2 FT_DA: Fault loop angle N [ 004 048 ] 2 FT_DA: Fault curr.T. prim. 3 C1 1 306 546 MAIN: Sel.2 305 075 MAIN: Inom C.u.volt.u. loop C-A C3 306 551 R I̲A 1 I̲B 2 I̲C 3 R 1 ..T. loop PG C2 306 552 60 ms MAIN: General start. not fitted 1 C2 R 306 554 MAIN: Imeas 1 1 306 545 COMP R FT_DA: Fault current P p.4 MAIN: V.sec. sec [ 004 023 ] 1 FT_DA: Fault reactance.T. [ 010 216 ] R MAIN: Vmeas C 306 544 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute ≥1 MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] FT_DA: Meas. trip V EXT [ 004 061 ] ≥1 C 1.volt.

3-115: Acquisition of fault location. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-153 . which corresponds to 100% of the monitored line section.20. must be set.sec.4 Acquisition of Fault Location In order to determine the fault location as a percentage of the line length and in km. 3. FT_DA: Line length PSx [ * ] FT_DA: Line reactance PSx [ * ] FT_DA: Output fault locat.20. percent [ 004 027 ] ≥1 R MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: Reset LED Parameter FT_DA: Line length PSx FT_DA: Line reactance PSx set set set set 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 306 020 1 2 3 4 005 006 007 008 012 013 014 015 50Z01B4B Fig. the value of the line reactance. the values are not erased and can continue to be read out through the PC and communication interfaces. However. the fault data value is After pressing the reset key displayed as Not measured.P139 3 Operation 3. as well as the corresponding line length in km. [ 004 028 ] R MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute FT_DA: Fault locat. C 305 076 FT_DA: Fault location [ 004 022 ] FT_DA: Fault reactance.5 Fault Data Reset on the local control panel.

the user can set a logical “OR” combination of logic signals (m out of n parameter) whose appearance will trigger fault recording. trip s ignal 2 ● FT_RC : Trigger ● FT_RC : I > tri ggere d In addition.1 Start of Fault Recording A fault exists and fault recording begins if at least one of the following signals is present: ● MAIN : Gen eral star tin g ● MAIN : Ge n.21 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC) 3.21. 3-154 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . trip si gn al 1 ● MAIN : Gen.P139 3 Operation 3.

of faults [ 004 020 ] R ≥1 MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] + FT_RC: Reset record.21.P139 3 Operation 3. system disturb. USER [ 003 006 ] 1: execute FT_RC: No. trip signal 1 [ 036 005 ] MAIN: Gen.2 Fault Counting Faults are counted and identified by sequential numbers. The date and time assigned to a fault when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory on the local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. EXT [ 005 243 ] & ARC: Cycle running [ 037 000 ] & ≥1 FT_RC: System disturb. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-155 .21. FT_RC: I> [ 017 065 ] FT_RC: I> triggered [ 040 063 ] I̲A I̲B I̲C FT_RC: Fct. assig.trig active [ 002 002 ] FT_RC: Trigger USER [ 003 041 ] 0 1 0 ≥1 1 min FT_RC: Record. trip signal 2 [ 036 023 ] MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute + FT_RC: No. trigger [ 003 085 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 m out of n Signal 3 Signal n Selected signals FT_RC: Trigger EXT [ 036 089 ] FT_RC: Trigger [ 037 076 ] ≥1 FT_RC: Record.3 Time Tagging The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. in progress [ 035 000 ] 0: don't execute MAIN: General start. 3. 3-116: Start of fault recording and fault counter. 1: execute 306 539 MAIN: Gen. The time information (relative to the onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the fault memory or through the PC or communication interfaces. [ 004 010 ] R FT_RC: Reset record. A fault’s individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged. runn [ 035 004 ] S1 1 R1 12Z6221A Fig. int.

USER [ 003 006 ] 0 1 1: execute 0: don't execute 1: execute 12Z6161B Fig. overf low will be entered as the last signal. including the signals during the settable pre-fault and postfault times. the oldest fault recording will be overwritten. The fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or communication interfaces. overflow [ 035 001 ] CT200 R FT_RC: Fault recording n [ 1 * ] FT_RC: Pre-fault time [ 003 078 ] FT_RC: Post-fault time [ 003 079 ] n Fault memory n FT_RC: Fault recording n 1 003 000 2 033 001 3 033 002 Measured value 1 4 033 003 Measured value 2 5 033 004 Measured value 3 6 033 005 Measured value N 7 033 006 MAIN: Time tag 8 033 007 306 021 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute & ≥1 MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] R FT_RC: Reset record. can be stored in the non-volatile fault memories. If the time and date are changed during the pre-fault time. then FT_RC: Faul t me m. 3-117: Fault memory. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single fault. are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault.21. 3-156 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals. EXT [ 005 243 ] FT_RC: Reset record. the signal FT_R C: Faul ty t ime tag is generated. the measured RMS fault data will also be entered in the fault memory. A total of eight faults.P139 3. FT_RC: Record.4 3 Operation Fault Recordings Protection signals. In addition to the fault signals. unless memories have been cleared in the interim. in progress [ 035 000 ] Signal 1 C Signal 2 1 Signal 3 1 Signal n 1 + ≥1 1 FT_RC: Fault mem. After eight faults have been recorded.

but not the binary values. the values of all faults remain stored. then recording will terminate when the set maximum recording time is reached. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-157 .4 s is available for recording. Otherwise the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording time minus a sampling increment. When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart. The window length for oscillography recording before and after the fault can be set. then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten. This period can be divided among a maximum of eight faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be set.21. including the set pre-fault and post-fault times. The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum recording time. If a fault.4 s is exceeded.5 Fault Value Recording The following analog signals are recorded: ● Phase currents ● Phase-to-ground voltages ● Residual current measured by the P139 at the T 4 transformer ● Neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P139 at the T 90 transformer ● Reference voltage Vref (when a synchrocheck VT is fitted). If more than eight faults have occurred since the last reset. lasts longer than the set maximum recording time.P139 3 Operation 3. A maximum time period of 16. and the post-fault time is set to zero. ● Frequency. during and after a fault. The signals are recorded before. If the maximum recording time of 16. the analog values for the oldest fault are overwritten. The analog oscillography data of the fault record can only be read out through the PC or communication interfaces.

EXT [ 005 243 ] 19Z8020A Fig. USER [ 003 006 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute R Analog channel 1 Analog channel 2 Analog channel 3 Analog channel 4 Analog channel 5 Analog channel 6 Analog channel 7 Analog channel 8 Analog channel 9 Analog channel 10 ≥1 MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] FT_RC: Reset record. 3-158 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 3-118: Fault value recording.P139 3 Operation FT_RC: Record. in progress [ 035 000 ] C FT_RC: Max. recording time [ 003 075 ] FT_RC: Pre-fault time [ 003 078 ] FT_RC: Post-fault time [ 003 079 ] I̲A R I̲B R I̲C R V̲A-G R V̲B-G R V̲C-G R I̲N R V̲N-G R V̲ref R f FT_RC: Reset record.

two different threshold types can be active. enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset. I>>. The setting value Blocked deactivates this type of P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-159 . Three separate measuring systems are available for this purpose for: ● Phase currents system ● Negative-sequence current system ● Residual currents system Either the inrush stabilization function.22 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group DTOC) A three-stage definite-time overcurrent protection function (DTOC protection) is available in the P139. which means that in addition to a phase current exceeding its threshold also the voltage in an appropriate measuring loop must fall below a set threshold. timer stages are started and after the time periods have elapsed.1 Enabling or Disabling DTOC Protection DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled via parameter settings. Moreover. via setting parameters D TOC: V < (I>) P Sx or DTOC : V < ( I>>) PSx or D TOC : V< (I>>>) PSx.22. the short-circuit direction determination function (SCDD) or the auto-reclosing control may intervene in the functional sequence of the DTOC function.P139 3 Operation 3. an additional voltage check can be optionally activated. The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs. I>>>.22. This voltage threshold can be set independently for the stages I>. DTOC: General enable USER [ 022 075 ] 0 DTOC: Enabled [ 040 120 ] 1 0: No 1: Yes DTOC: Enable PSx [ * ] 0 1 0: No Parameter DTOC: Enable PSx set set set set 072 073 074 075 1 2 3 4 098 098 098 098 1: Yes 19Z5089A Fig.5. Moreover.11. (p. respectively. a signal is issued. The “dynamic” thresholds are active for the set hold time (see Section 3. Alternatively. 3. 3-100)) and the “normal” thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the current exceeds the set thresholds in one phase. 3.2 Phase Current Stages The three phase currents are monitored by the P139 with three-stage functions to detect when they exceed the set thresholds. 3-119: Disabling or enabling DTOC protection.

1. 3-120: Phase current stages. the selected stages of the DTOC function are blocked (see Section 3. active [ 040 090 ] & c DTOC: I> PSx [*] & c DTOC: I> dynamic PSx [*] I̲A DTOC: I> Starting A I̲B DTOC: I> Starting B I̲C DTOC: I> Starting C 460 515 460 516 460 517 & c DTOC: I>> PSx [*] & c DTOC: I>> dynamic PSx [*] DTOC: I>> Starting A 460 518 DTOC: I>> Starting B 460 519 DTOC: I>> Starting C 460 520 & c & c DTOC: I>>> PSx [ * ] [ * ] DTOC: I>>> Starting A 460 521 DTOC: I>>> Starting B 460 522 DTOC: I>>> Starting C 460 523 * Parameter DTOC: I> PSx DTOC: I> dynamic PSx DTOC: I>> PSx DTOC: I>> dynamic PSx DTOC: I>>> PSx DTOC: I>>> dynamic PSx set set set set 017 073 074 075 017 073 074 075 017 073 074 075 017 073 074 075 017 073 074 075 017 073 074 075 1 2 3 4 000 007 007 007 080 032 032 032 001 008 008 008 084 033 033 033 002 009 009 009 085 034 034 034 19Z8115A Fig. 3-160 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .11. internal overcurrent startings. the trip signal of the stages will be enabled. DTOC: Enabled & [ 040 120 ] MAIN: Protection active 306 001 MAIN: Dynam. IN>>. The trip signals from the DTOC function (stages I>. The trip signals from all phase current stages are blocked by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command. Depending on the setting of the short-circuit direction determination function. furthermore the voltage check is deactivated if MCMON finds that the VTs are not available. which is common for the threee stages: If the voltage in any of the phase-ground measuring loops falls below its threshold then this timer is started. When the inrush stabilization function is triggered.7.P139 3 Operation voltage check for the associated overcurrent stage. There is also a settable timer. (p. IN>. 3-102)). and the overcurrent starting is not enabled before this timer has elapsed. I>>. IN>>>) can be blocked by the short-circuit direction determination function. I>>>. param.

circ. DTOC: Block. stage I>. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-161 .Start.pt.P139 3 Operation DTOC: I> Starting A 460 515 DTOC: I> Starting B 460 516 DTOC: I> Starting C 460 517 MCMON: Meas. PSx [ 010 048 ] 2: Isolated/res. treat. 3-121: Phase current stages.ground. I> Px 3 0 ≥1 * Parameter DTOC: V< (I>) PSx DTOC: tSD PSx set set set set 011 011 011 011 012 012 012 012 1 2 3 4 244 245 246 247 206 207 208 209 450 137 19Z8116A Fig. V faulty [ 038 023 ] DTOC: V< (I>) PSx [  *  ] Blocked ≥1 fnom V̲A-G VA-G √3 V̲B-G VB-G √3 DTOC: Starting A 305 458 & fnom ≥1 ≥1 & DTOC: Starting B 305 459 & fnom V̲C-G ≥1 & VC-G √3 ≥1 & ≥1 & DTOC: Starting C 305 460 & + Σ ≥1 ≥1 fnom & − DTOC: Starting I> [ 040 036 ] & + Σ fnom ≥1 & − & + Σ fnom ≥1 & − & COMP ≥1 & V̲min DTOC: tSD PSx [  *  ] t ≥1 MAIN: Neutr. optional voltage check and blocking by inrush stabilization.

Start. optional voltage check and blocking by inrush stabilization. circ.P139 3 Operation DTOC: I>> Starting A 460 518 DTOC: I>> Starting B 460 519 DTOC: I>> Starting C 460 520 MCMON: Meas. 3-162 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . stage I>>.pt.ground. 3-122: Phase current stages. V faulty [ 038 023 ] DTOC: V< (I>>) PSx [  *  ] Blocked ≥1 fnom V̲A-G VA-G √3 V̲B-G VB-G √3 DTOC: Starting A 305 458 & fnom ≥1 ≥1 & DTOC: Starting B 305 459 & fnom V̲C-G ≥1 & VC-G √3 ≥1 & ≥1 & DTOC: Starting C 305 460 & + Σ ≥1 ≥1 fnom & − DTOC: Starting I>> [ 040 029 ] & + Σ fnom ≥1 & − & + Σ fnom ≥1 & − & COMP ≥1 & V̲min DTOC: tSD PSx [  *  ] t ≥1 MAIN: Neutr. treat. I>> Px 3 0 ≥1 * Parameter DTOC: V< (I>>) PSx DTOC: tSD PSx set set set set 011 011 011 011 012 012 012 012 1 2 3 4 248 249 250 251 206 207 208 209 450 141 19Z8117A Fig. DTOC: Block. PSx [ 010 048 ] 2: Isolated/res.

pt. V faulty [ 038 023 ] DTOC: V< (I>>>) PSx [  *  ] Blocked ≥1 fnom V̲A-G VA-G √3 V̲B-G VB-G √3 DTOC: Starting A 305 458 & fnom ≥1 ≥1 & DTOC: Starting B 305 459 & fnom V̲C-G ≥1 & VC-G √3 ≥1 & ≥1 & DTOC: Starting C 305 460 & + Σ ≥1 ≥1 fnom & − DTOC: Starting I>>> [ 039 075 ] & + Σ fnom ≥1 & − & + Σ fnom ≥1 & − & COMP ≥1 & V̲min DTOC: tSD PSx [  *  ] t ≥1 MAIN: Neutr. 3-123: Phase current stages. I>>> Px 3 0 ≥1 * Parameter DTOC: V< (I>>>) PSx DTOC: tSD PSx set set set set 011 011 011 011 012 012 012 012 1 2 3 4 252 253 254 255 206 207 208 209 450 145 19Z8118A Fig.P139 3 Operation DTOC: I>>> Starting A 460 521 DTOC: I>>> Starting B 460 522 DTOC: I>>> Starting C 460 523 MCMON: Meas. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-163 .Start.ground. PSx [ 010 048 ] 2: Isolated/res. optional voltage check and blocking by inrush stabilization. treat. DTOC: Block. stage I>>>. circ.

3-124: Phase current stages.P139 3 Operation DTOC: Blocking tI> EXT [ 041 060 ] C DTOC: Starting I> [ 040 036 ] DTOC: Mode timer start PSx [ * ] DTOC: tI> PSx [ * ] t 1: With starting & 2: With direction & SCDD: Direction tI> PSx [ * ] 1: Forward directional 0 DTOC: tI> elapsed [ 040 010 ] & 2: Backward directional & 3: Non-directional SCDD: Fault P forward [ 036 018 ] SCDD: Fault P backward [ 036 019 ] DTOC: Blocking tI>> EXT [ 041 061 ] C DTOC: Starting I>> [ 040 029 ] DTOC: tI>> PSx [ * ] t 0 & [ 040 033 ] & SCDD: Direction tI>> PSx [ * ] 1: Forward directional DTOC: tI>> elapsed & 2: Backward directional & 3: Non-directional DTOC: Blocking tI>>> EXT [ 041 062 ] C DTOC: Starting I>>> [ 039 075 ] DTOC: tI>>> PSx [ * ] t 0 & [ 040 012 ] & SCDD: Direction tI>>> PSx [ * ] 1: Forward directional DTOC: tI>>> elapsed & 2: Backward directional & 3: Non-directional * Parameter DTOC: tI> PSx DTOC: Mode timer start PSx SCDD: Direction tI> PSx DTOC: tI>> PSx SCDD: Direction tI>> PSx DTOC: tI>>> PSx SCDD: Direction tI>>> PSx set set set set 017 073 074 075 002 002 002 002 017 077 078 079 017 073 074 075 017 077 078 079 017 073 074 075 007 007 007 007 1 2 3 4 004 019 019 019 138 139 142 143 071 237 237 237 006 020 020 020 072 238 238 238 007 021 021 021 230 231 232 233 19Z8119A Fig. timers and SCDD dependency. 3-164 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

22. The “dynamic” thresholds are active for the set hold time for the “dynamic parameters” (see Section 3. timer stages are started and after the time periods have elapsed. (p. 3-101)) is triggered. two different threshold types can be active. the 1st stage of the negative-sequence current function is blocked. Alternatively. Ineg. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-165 . (p. 3-125: Trip signals from the DTOC phase current stages. trip signals from the DTOC negative-sequence current stages have no directional dependence. If the current exceeds the set thresholds.5. 3.Direct. Phase sequence A-B-C ● (Alternative terminology: clockwise rotating field) 1 I neg = 3 · | (I A + a 2 · I B + a · I C) | ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ Phase sequence A-C-B ● (Alternative terminology: anti-clockwise rotating field) ● I neg = 3 · | (I A + a · I B + a 2 · I C) | ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ Symbols used: 1 a = e2πj/3 = e j·120° ¯ a 2 = e4πj/3 = e j·240° ¯ The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P139 with three-stage functions to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds.3 Negative-Sequence Current Stages The P139 calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase current values according to this formula. When the short-circuit direction determination function (SCDD) is active. direct.tI>>> 310 067 ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] 19Z8008A Fig. direct. tI>> 304 462 DTOC: tI>>> elapsed [ 040 012 ] DTOC: Trip signal tI>>> [ 040 076 ] SCDD: Block. tI> 304 461 DTOC: tI>> elapsed [ 040 033 ] DTOC: Trip signal tI>> [ 040 011 ] SCDD: Block.11. The trip signals from the negative-sequence current stages are only enabled if the operating mode for the general starting has been set to With start. When the inrush stabilization function (see Section 3.P139 3 Operation DTOC: tI> elapsed [ 040 010 ] DTOC: Trip signal tI> [ 041 020 ] SCDD: Block.11. 3-100)) and the “normal” thresholds are active when no hold time is running. In addition these timer stages can also be automatically blocked by single-pole or multi-pole starting (depending on the setting).7. The result depends on the MAI N: Ph ase se quence setting. IN. a trip signal is issued. The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

3-126: Negative-sequence current stages. Ineg * * Parameter DTOC: Ineg> PSx DTOC: Ineg> dynamic PSx DTOC: tIneg> PSx DTOC: Ineg>> PSx DTOC: Ineg>> dynamic PSx DTOC: tIneg>> PSx set set set set 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 072 073 074 075 1 2 3 4 011 011 011 011 200 200 200 200 023 023 023 023 012 012 012 012 Parameter DTOC: Ineg>>> PSx DTOC: Ineg>>> dynamic PSx DTOC: tIneg>>> PSx MAIN: Gen.P139 3 Operation The trip signals from all negative-sequence current stages are blocked by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command. param. tIneg>>> EXT [ 036 143 ] DTOC: Trip signal tIneg>> [ 036 152 ] DTOC: tIneg>>> PSx [ * ] DTOC: Ineg>>> PSx [ * ] & c & DTOC: c Ineg>>> dynamic PSx [ * ] t 0 DTOC: tIneg>>> elapsed [ 036 150 ] DTOC: Starting Ineg>>> [ 036 147 ] & & MAIN: Gen. Ineg>>> 450 155 DTOC: Enabled [ 040 120 ] & MAIN: Protection active 306 001 MAIN: Dynam.neg 306 400 DTOC: Ineg> PSx [ * ] & c & PSx c Ineg> [dynamic * ] t 0 DTOC: tIneg> elapsed [ 036 148 ] DTOC: MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ] I̲A DTOC: Starting Ineg> [ 036 145 ] & I̲B Ineg I̲C & ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] DTOC: Block.Start. IN. IN.Start. tIneg> EXT [ 036 141 ] DTOC: tIneg> PSx [ * ] C MAIN: Bl. Ineg> 450 153 DTOC: Block. start. DTOC: Block. active [ 040 090 ] DTOC: Block. timer st. tIneg>> EXT [ 036 142 ] DTOC: tIneg>> PSx [ * ] C DTOC: Ineg>> PSx [ * ] & c & DTOC: Ineg>> dynamic PSx c [ * ] DTOC: Trip signal tIneg> [ 036 151 ] t 0 DTOC: tIneg>> elapsed [ 036 149 ] DTOC: Starting Ineg>> [ 036 146 ] & & DTOC: Block. mode PSx [ * ] DTOC: Trip signal tIneg>>> [ 036 153 ] 1: With start. Ineg>> 450 154 DTOC: Block. 3-166 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . mode PSx set set set set 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 072 073 074 075 017 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 013 013 013 013 202 202 202 202 025 025 025 025 201 201 201 201 024 024 024 024 027 219 220 221 19Z8082A Fig.Start. start.

the trip signal of stages IN> or IN>> will be enabled. start.4 Enabling or Disabling DTOC Residual Current Stages DTOC residual current stages can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters or through binary signal inputs. a signal is issued. 3-127: Trip signals from the DTOC negative-sequence current stages. start.11. 3-100)) and the “normal” thresholds are active when no hold time is running. In addition these timer stages can also be automatically blocked by single-pole or multi-pole starting (depending on the setting). The trip signals from the residual current stages are only enabled if the operating mode for the general starting has been set to With start. The “dynamic” thresholds are active for the set hold time (see Section 3. If the residual current exceeds the set thresholds. mode PSx set set set set 017 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 027 219 220 221 19Z5282B Fig. 3. Alternatively. IN.22. (p. The trip signals from the DTOC function (stages IN> and IN>> only) can be blocked by the short-circuit direction determination function (SCDD). Depending on the setting of the short-circuit direction determination function. The trip signals from all residual current stages are blocked by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.5.22. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-167 . 3. IN. The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs.5 Residual Current Stages The residual current is monitored by the P139 with four-stage functions to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. mode PSx [ * ] 1: With start. Ineg. timer stages are started and after the time periods have elapsed. Ineg * Parameter MAIN: Gen.P139 3 Operation DTOC: tIneg> elapsed [ 036 148 ] DTOC: tIneg>> elapsed [ 036 149 ] DTOC: tIneg>>> elapsed [ 036 150 ] & DTOC: Trip signal tIneg> [ 036 151 ] & DTOC: Trip signal tIneg>> [ 036 152 ] & DTOC: Trip signal tIneg>>> [ 036 153 ] ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] MAIN: Gen. two different threshold types can be active.

IN> PSx [ * ] I̲A I̲B 1 I̲C 2 1 . 3-128: Selecting the measured variable.22. 3-168 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . IN>> AND IN>>>: either the residual current calculated from the three phase currents or the residual current directly measured at the fourth transformer (T 4).P139 3 Operation 3. 2 1: Calculated DTOC: IN>>> 310 065 2: Measured DTOC: IN>>>> * Parameter DTOC: Eval. 2 I̲N DTOC: IN> 310 063 1: Calculated 2: Measured DTOC: Eval... IN>>> PSx set set set set 072 073 074 075 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 1 2 3 4 128 128 128 128 239 240 241 242 310 066 243 244 245 246 52Z0113B Fig....6 Selecting the Measured Variable A setting specifies which current will be used by the P139 as the residual current of the stages IN>. 2 DTOC: IN>> 310 064 1: Calculated 2: Measured DTOC: Eval.. DTOC: Eval. IN>> PSx DTOC: Eval. IN>> PSx [ * ] 1 2 1 . IN>>> PSx [ * ] 1 2 1 . IN> PSx DTOC: Eval. For stage IN>>>> the calculated residual current is always used.

param.neg c DTOC: IN> PSx [ * ] c DTOC: IN> dynamic PSx 306 400 & [ * t 0 DTOC: tIN> elapsed [ 040 013 ] ] & DTOC: I̲N DTOC: Starting IN> [ 040 077 ] 307 150 DTOC: Blocking tIN>> EXT DTOC: tIN>> PSx [ * ] C [ 041 064 ] & & DTOC: IN>> PSx [ * ] c c t 0 DTOC: tIN>> elapsed [ 040 121 ] DTOC: IN>> dynamic PSx [ * ] & DTOC: Starting IN>> [ 040 041 ] MAIN: Dynam. IN. timer st. PSx DTOC: tIN>>>> PSx set set set set 017 073 074 075 017 073 074 075 017 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 072 072 072 072 073 074 075 1 2 3 4 018 017 017 017 087 037 037 037 019 029 029 029 018 018 018 018 036 105 202 219 030 030 030 030 19Z8083A Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-169 . IN>> DTOC: Starting N 305 461 450 150 DTOC: Block.P139 3 Operation DTOC: Block. Start. IN> 450 149 DTOC: Block. IN>>> 450 151 DTOC: Block. Start. active [ 040 090 ] DTOC: Blocking tIN>>> EXT [ 041 065 ] DTOC: tIN>>> PSx [ * ] C & & c DTOC: IN>>> PSx [ * ] c DTOC: IN>>> dynamic PSx [ * ] t 0 DTOC: tIN>>> elapsed [ 039 079 ] & DTOC: Starting IN>>> [ 039 078 ] DTOC: Blocking tIN>>>> EXT [ 041 101 ] * & c DTOC: IN>>>> PSx [ * ] & c DTOC: IN>>>> dyn. PSx [ * ] t 0 DTOC: tIN>>>> elapsed [ 035 040 ] & DTOC: Enabled [ 040 120 ] MAIN: System IN enabled [ 040 133 ] * DTOC: tIN>>>> PSx [ * ] C DTOC: Starting IN>>>> [ 035 031 ] & Parameter DTOC: IN> PSx DTOC: IN> dynamic PSx DTOC: tIN> PSx DTOC: IN>> PSx DTOC: IN>> dynamic PSx DTOC: tIN>> PSx set set set set 017 073 074 075 017 073 074 075 017 073 074 075 017 073 074 075 017 073 074 075 017 073 074 075 1 2 3 4 003 015 015 015 081 035 035 035 008 027 027 027 009 016 016 016 086 036 036 036 010 028 028 028 Parameter DTOC: IN>>> PSx DTOC: IN>>> dynamic PSx DTOC: tIN>>> PSx DTOC: IN>>>> PSx DTOC: IN>>>> dyn. IN>>>> 450 152 DTOC: Blocking tIN> EXT [ 041 063 ] DTOC: tIN> PSx [ * ] C & MAIN: Bl. Start. Start. 3-129: Residual current stages.

tIN>>>> [ 035 046 ] SCDD: Block. direct. direct. start. Ineg * Parameter MAIN: Gen. mode PSx set set set set 017 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 027 219 220 221 12Z5103B Fig. 3-130: Trip signal from the DTOC residual current stages. tIN>> 304 464 ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] MAIN: Gen. start.P139 DTOC: tIN> elapsed [ 040 013 ] 3 Operation & DTOC: Trip signal tIN> [ 041 021 ] & DTOC: Trip signal tIN>> [ 040 028 ] DTOC: tIN>>> elapsed [ 039 079 ] & DTOC: Trip signal tIN>>> [ 040 079 ] DTOC: tIN>>>> elapsed [ 035 040 ] & DTOC: Trip sign. tIN> 304 463 DTOC: tIN>> elapsed [ 040 121 ] SCDD: Block. IN. mode PSx [ * ] 1: With start. 3-170 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

provided that it is permitted by the relevant MAIN settings: ■ ■ ■ ■ MA IN : MA IN : MAI N: MAI N: Bl.interm. 305 462 DTOC: H. ● As IN> starting ends.22.intm. the starting time is accumulated when IN> starting commences. ● If the limit value is reached and a general starting is present. t IN >. then a trip will occur when the next general starting phase commences.intmPSx set set set set 017 073 074 075 017 073 074 075 017 073 074 075 1 2 3 4 055 042 042 042 056 038 038 038 057 039 039 039 19Z5019A Fig. When the hold time has elapsed or after the hold-time logic has issued a trip (DTOC: Trip s ig. t IN >.i. the set hold-time D TO C: Holdt.7 Hold-Time Logic for Intermittent Ground Faults A hold-time logic for the treatment of intermittent ground faults is available in the P139.interm. tIN>.t im. trip cmd.assi g.IN>. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-171 .P139 3 Operation 3. the hold time is reset. the timer stage DTOC: Puls . tIN>.I N.intPSx [ * ] DTOC: tIN>. m ode P Sx (Address 017 027) Fct . 3-131: Hold-time logic for definite-time characteristics.interm.IN>.n eg P Sx (Address 017 015) Gen . 1 (Address 021 001) Fct .assig.in tm. tIN>.-time tIN>.int PSx is started and the charging of the accumulation buffer is thereby lengthened by the set value of the timer stage. then a trip results.in tPSx is running. inte rm. runn. 2 (Address 021 002) ● If the limit value is reached while the timer stage D TOC : Pu ls. DTOC: Puls. IN>. star t. PSx [ * ] DTOC: Hold-t. elapsed [ 040 099 ] Parameter DTOC: Puls. trip cm d.IN>.) accumulation is stopped and the accumulation buffer is cleared. ● The accumulation result is compared to the settable limit value at D TOC : tI N>.st.intmPSx [ * ] DTOC: Starting IN> [ 040 077 ] DTOC: Trip sig.intPSx DTOC: tIN>.prol.prol.prol. ● As the IN> starting in the residual current stage commences.int mPSx is restarted.prol . At the same time. P Sx. ● With each release of the trigger stage IN>. [ 039 073 ] Hold-time logic DTOC: t2 N 305 454 DTOC: Pulse prolong. runn [ 040 086 ] MAIN: General starting [ 040 000 ] DTOC: tIN>. PSx DTOC: Hold-t.

interm.intmPSx Setting = 80ms Setting = 15ms Setting = 300ms S8Z5001A Fig. 3-132: Signal flow for values below the accumulation limit value. runn.-time tIN>. [ 039 073 ] Settings DTOC: Puls. 305 462 DTOC: H.intPSx DTOC: tIN>. 3-172 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . tIN>.i. tIN>. runn [ 040 086 ] DTOC: t2 N 305 454 DTOC: Trip sig.prol.IN>.P139 3 Operation DTOC: Starting IN> [ 040 077 ] DTOC: Pulse prolong. PSx DTOC: Hold-t.intm.

prol.intmPSx Setting = 80ms Setting = 15ms Setting = 300ms 19Z5243A Fig. 305 462 DTOC: H. tIN>. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-173 . PSx DTOC: Hold-t.IN>.-time tIN>.P139 3 Operation DTOC: Starting IN> [ 040 077 ] DTOC: Pulse prolong.i. tIN>.intPSx DTOC: tIN>.intm. Settings DTOC: Puls. runn. 3-133: Signal flow for values at the accumulation limit value. [ 039 073 ] <1>= Startings not illustrated have occurred here. runn [ 040 086 ] DTOC: t2 N 305 454 DTOC: Trip sig.interm.

(p. For example. 8-1). but the address for I D M T 2 : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R is (017 052). also applies to IDMT2 with different numerical addresses.23 3 Operation Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups IDMT1 and IDMT2) In this section IDMT represents IDMT1. 3-134. enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset. 7-1) and Chapter 8. (Only IDMT1 is shown. Moreover. (p. 3-134: Disabling or enabling IDMT protection. The addresses given apply to IDMT1.23. the address for I D M T 1 : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R is (017 096) (given in Fig.1 Disabling and Enabling IDMT Protection IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. 3. the logic. The inverse-time overcurrent protection function (IDMT) operates with three separate measuring systems for: ● Phase currents system ● Negative-sequence current ● Residual current. 3-174)). however.) 3-174 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . The addresses for function group IDMT2 are given in Chapter 7.P139 3. Either the short-circuit direction determination function (SCDD) or the autoreclosing control function may intervene in the functional sequence of the IDMT function. (p. IDMT1: General enable USER [ 017 096 ] 0 IDMT1: Enabled [ 040 100 ] 1 0: No 1: Yes IDMT1: Enable PSx [ * ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes Parameter IDMT1: Enable PSx set set set set 072 073 074 075 1 2 3 4 070 070 070 070 19Z5020A Fig. This description is also valid for IDMT2 (if there is no indication to the contrary).

85 Very Inverse 19.0200 0. or the residual current.1 tr = + c) k ·R I 2 (I ) -1 ref 0.112 c Formula for the Reset Characteristic a (I 1 Constants I ref )b . depending on the measuring system.236 I ) (I ref t = k · (5. (p.0515 0. (p.6143 1.2663 1. The user can select from a large number of characteristics (see table below).03393 0.2000 2. 3-176) to Fig.05 .4910 21.0000 0. 3-138. 3-178)).50 10 Long Time Inverse 5.9341 2.0938 0.35 · ln I P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 I ref ) 3-175 .2969 0.1.2 Time-Dependent Characteristics The measuring systems for phase currents.0000 0.0000 2.18592 15.75 11 RI-Type Inverse t =k· 1 0.00 2.P139 3 Operation 3.00 0 Formula for the Tripping Characteristic Definite Time t=k Per IEC 255–3 t =k· Standard Inverse 2 a b I ref 0. 3-135. No.00 9 Short Time Inverse 0.00 3 Extremely Inverse 80.23.17966 9.8 . The measured variable is the maximum phase current.50 1. 10. residual current and negativesequence current operate independently of each other and can be set separately.10 Per ANSI a t = k ·( (I I ref b + c) tr = ) -1 k ·R I 2 (I ) -1 ref 8 Normally Inverse 8. The tripping characteristics available for selection are shown in the following figures (Fig.1217 29.00 1.6100 2..00 a t = k ·( (I 5 Moderately Inverse 6 7 R b ) -1 0.14 Per IEEE C37. Tripping Characteristic Characteristic settable factor: k = 0.00 4 Long Time Inverse 120.339 - 12 RXIDG-Type Inverse 0.1140 4..02 Very Inverse 13.60 Extremely Inverse 28. the negativesequence current.

05 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 I/Iref I/Iref Fig.1 k=0. Long Time Inverse 1000 1000 100 100 k=10 10 10 t/s k=10 k=1 t/s 1 1 k=0.1 k=0.1 k=0. Standard Inverse 1000 1000 100 100 k=10 10 10 t/s k=1 k=10 t/s 1 1 k=0.05 0. Very Inverse Characteristic 1: IEC 255–3.1 k=0.05 k=1 0. 3-176 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 3-135: Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3.05 0.01 0. Extremely Inverse Characteristic 4: IEC 255–3.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 I/Iref I/Iref Characteristic 3: IEC 255–3.1 k=0.01 k=1 0.P139 3 Operation IDMT Tripping Characteristics per IEC 255–3 Characteristic 2: IEC 255–3.1 k=0.1 0.1 0.

112 Characteristic 6: IEEE C37.1 k=0.P139 3 Operation IDMT Tripping Characteristics per IEEE C37.112.1 k=0.112. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-177 .112.1 k=0. Extremely Inverse 1000 100 10 t/s k=10 1 k=1 0.112.05 0. 3-136: Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.05 0.05 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 I/Iref I/Iref Characteristic 7: IEEE C37.01 0. Moderately Inverse 1000 1000 100 100 10 10 k=10 t/s k=10 t/s 1 k=1 1 k=1 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 I/Iref Fig.1 k=0.1 k=0.1 k=0. Very Inverse Characteristic 5: IEEE C37.

01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 I/Iref I/Iref Fig. Long Time Inverse 1000 100 k=10 10 t/s k=1 1 k=0.1 k=0.1 0.05 0. IDMT Tripping Characteristics.1 k=0.1 k=0.01 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 k=0.05 0.05 0.1 k=0. RI-Type Inverse and RXIDG-Type Inverse Characteristic 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse Characteristic 11: RI-Type Inverse 1000 1000 100 100 k=10 10 k=10 10 t/s k=1 1 t/s k=1 1 k=0. 3-137: Tripping characteristics as per ANSI.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 I/Iref Fig.1 k=0.05 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 I/Iref I/Iref Characteristic 10: ANSI.01 k=0.1 0.1 0.05 0. 3-138: RI-type inverse and RXIDG‑type inverse tripping characteristics.P139 3 Operation IDMT Tripping Characteristics per ANSI Characteristic 9: ANSI. Normally Inverse 1000 1000 100 100 10 10 t/s k=10 t/s 1 1 k=10 k=1 0.1 k=1 k=0. Short Time Inverse Characteristic 8: ANSI. 3-178 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .1 0.

y (y=“P” for the phase currents. y=“neg” for the negative-sequence current) is multiplied by the reference quantity (Iref.P139 3 Operation 3. y=“N” for the residual current.3 Enable Thresholds Minimum Operate Value A minimum operate value (threshold) may be defined for each of the phase currents. Minimum Trip Time A minimum trip time IDMT1: Min .23. After the timer has elapsed. trip time y P Sx (or I DMT2: Min. The timer stage is triggered only when the current exceeds the set threshold.neg. t rip t ime y PSx) may be defined for the phase currents (y=”P”). the residual current (y=”N”) and the negative-sequence current (y=”neg”). P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-179 . respectively) in order to form the minimum operate value. valid for function group IDMT1. regardless of the value of the current. The respective timer stage is started as soon as the associated minimum operate value is exceeded. There is no KI factor available for IDMT2 protection.N or Iref.P or Iref. the trip signal is issued. Each factor ID MT1: Factor I. the residual current and the negative-sequence current.

trip time P PSx IDMT2: Min. trip time y PSx 1 1 10 P Parameter IDMT1: Factor KI. trip time P PSx IDMT1: Min.P PSx 100 G IDMT1: Factor KI.y PSx 5 IDMT: Min.neg PSx set 1 007 250 001 173 007 254 set 2 007 251 001 174 007 255 set 3 007 252 001 175 008 002 set 4 007 253 001 176 008 005 Parameter IDMT1: Min. trip time N PSx set 1 072 077 072 079 072 078 set 2 073 077 073 079 073 078 P G neg IDMT1: Min.P139 3 Operation P t/s 10 G neg IDMT: Iref. trip time N PSx set 1 071 044 071 052 071 048 set 2 071 045 071 053 071 049 P G neg IDMT2: Min.trip time negPSx set 3 071 046 071 054 071 050 set 4 071 047 071 055 071 051 12Z6303B Fig. 3-180 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .trip time negPSx set 3 074 077 074 079 074 078 set 4 075 077 075 079 075 078 Parameter IDMT2: Min.N PSx neg IDMT1: Factor KI. 3-139: Influence of the minimum operate value and the minimum trip time on the IDMT characteristics.

23.7.5. The trip signal from the IDMT1 protection may also be blocked by the shortcircuit direction determination or the auto-reclosing control function. two different thresholds can be active.05-fold of the set reference current value is exceeded in one phase. (p. the phase current stage as well as the residual current stage is blocked. Moreover the tripping time will under no circumstances fall below a settable minimum time threshold irrespective of the current flow magnitude.11.) The inverse-time stage can be blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal input.11. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-181 . Alternatively. (When a change from a single-phase fault to a two-phase fault or from a two-phase fault to a three-phase fault had occurred. The “dynamic” threshold is active for the set hold time for the “dynamic parameters” (see Section 3. Depending on the setting of the short-circuit direction determination the trip signal will be enabled. the inrush stabilization was momentarily triggered which would reset the starting and the timer. When the inrush stabilization function (see Section 3. (p. 3-101)) is triggered. The IDMT protection will trigger when the 1.P139 3 Operation 3. The P139 will then determine the maximum current flowing in the three phases and this value is used for further processing. The trip signals of the phase current stages IDMT1 and IDMT2 are blocked by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command. because of transients during the change. it was possible that. 3-100)) and the “normal” threshold is active when no hold time is running.4 Phase Current Stage The three phase currents are monitored by the P139 to detect when they exceed the set thresholds. Depending on the characteristic selected and the current magnitude the P139 will determine the tripping time. However. when a phase starting is present then no subsequent triggering of the inrush stabilization will be taken into account.

The phase current stage or IDMT2 is displayed in Fig.P> Px 450 156 IDMT1: Enabled [ 040 100 ] & MAIN: Protection active 306 001 & & c IDMT1: Iref.P> [ 040 080 ] 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse ] c SCDD: Fault P backward [ 036 019 ] c IDMT1: Memory P clear [ 040 110 ] IDMT1: Block. 3-141.Start. tIref. (p. 3-142. ] 5: IEEE Moderately Inv.P dynamic PSx [ * ] IDMT: Starting A 304 359 IDMT: Starting B 304 360 c IDMT: Starting C 1. 3-183). ] 8: ANSI Normally Inv. trip time P PSx IDMT1: Hold time P PSx IDMT1: Release P PSx IDMT1: Factor KI. (p.Iref. active [ 040 090 ] 0: Definite Time * 1: IEC Standard Inverse ] 2: IEC Very Inverse 3: IEC Extr.P> EXT [ 040 101 ] I̲P. 11: RI-Type Inverse IDMT1: Factor KI. 3-184).P PSx [ * ] c IDMT1: Iref. IDMT1: Release P PSx 2: Delayed as per char. (Trip signal: see Fig.) 3-182 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P> elapsed [ 040 082 ] Parameter IDMT1: Mode timer start PSx SCDD: Direction tI> PSx IDMT1: Iref.P PSx IDMT1: Min.P139 3 Operation 3 IDMT1: Bl. IDMT1: Hold time P PSx [ 1: Without delay * 6: IEEE Very Inverse 7: IEEE Extremely Inv. ] 10: ANSI Long Time Inv. Inverse IDMT1: Factor kt. param.P PSx IDMT1: Iref. Note: The logic displayed here is not valid for IDMT2 as the parameters I D M T 1 : F a c t o r K I . trip time P PSx [ [ * ] 1: With starting & 2: With direction & SCDD: Direction tI> PSx [ * ] 1: Forward directional [ Setting IDMT1: Release P PSx 4: IEC Long Time Inv.P dynamic PSx IDMT1: Characteristic P PSx set set set set 007 007 007 007 017 077 078 079 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 1 2 3 4 226 227 228 229 071 237 237 237 050 050 050 050 003 003 003 003 056 056 056 056 Parameter IDMT1: Factor kt.P PSx set set set set 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 007 007 007 007 1 2 3 4 053 053 053 053 077 077 077 077 071 071 071 071 059 059 059 059 250 251 252 253 19Z8034A Fig.P IDMT1: Hold time P running [ 040 053 ] IDMT1: tIref. & 2: Backward directional * [ & * 9: ANSI Short Time Inv.P PSx 3: Non-directional [ SCDD: Fault P forward [ 036 018 ] * IDMT1: Starting Iref.05 Iref 304 361 I̲A & I̲B & I̲C & Setting IDMT1: Characteristic P PSx IDMT1: Characteristic P PSx [ MAIN: Dynam. P P S x and I D M T 1 : M o d e t i m e r s t a r t P S x do not exist with IDMT2.max/Iref.P PSx IDMT1: Mode timer start PSx * ] IDMT1: Min. 3-140: Phase current stage for IDMT1.

P> Px 450 162 IDMT2: Enabled [ 040 135 ] & MAIN: Protection active 306 001 & & c IDMT2: Iref. IDMT2: Starting Iref. param. 3-140.P dynamic PSx IDMT2: Characteristic P PSx set set set set 076 076 076 076 076 076 076 076 071 071 071 071 1 2 3 4 236 237 238 239 030 031 032 033 004 005 006 007 Parameter IDMT2: Factor kt.P139 3 Operation 3 IDMT2: Bl. 6: IEEE Very Inverse 7: IEEE Extremely Inv.05 Iref 304 361 I̲A & I̲B & I̲C & IDMT2: Characteristic P PSx [ * ] MAIN: Dynam.) The phase current stage for IDMT1 is displayed in Fig.Iref. (p. trip time P PSx [ * ] IDMT2: Factor kt.) P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-183 .P dynamic PSx [ * ] IDMT: Starting A 304 359 IDMT: Starting B 304 360 c IDMT: Starting C 1. 8: ANSI Normally Inv. Inverse 4: IEC Long Time Inv.P> EXT [ 040 136 ] 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse c C IDMT2: Memory P clear [ 040 178 ] IDMT2: Hold time P running [ 040 016 ] I̲P. IDMT represents IDMT2. (Note: The logic displayed here is not valid for IDMT1. 3-184).P IDMT2: tIref. 3-182). 11: RI-Type Inverse IDMT2: Block.P PSx IDMT2: Min. (Trip signal: see Fig. (p.P PSx IDMT2: Iref. 3-141: Phase current stage for IDMT2.max/Iref.P> [ 040 018 ] Setting IDMT2: Characteristic P PSx 0: Definite Time 1: IEC Standard Inverse 2: IEC Very Inverse 3: IEC Extr. tIref.P PSx [ * ] IDMT2: Hold time P PSx [ * ] Setting IDMT2: Release P PSx IDMT2: Release P PSx [ * ] 1: Without delay 2: Delayed as per char. 3-143.P PSx [ * ] c IDMT2: Iref. trip time P PSx IDMT2: Hold time P PSx IDMT2: Release P PSx set set set set 078 078 078 078 071 071 071 071 071 071 071 071 071 071 071 071 1 2 3 4 250 251 252 253 044 045 046 047 028 029 030 031 016 017 018 019 19Z8038A Fig.P> elapsed [ 040 021 ] Parameter IDMT2: Iref. 10: ANSI Long Time Inv. active [ 040 090 ] IDMT2: Min. 5: IEEE Moderately Inv. 9: ANSI Short Time Inv.Start.

P> 304 465 IDMT: ARC Starting Iref.P> [ 040 023 ] ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] 12Z5112A Fig. 3-143: Trip signal of the phase current stages for IDMT2.P> IDMT1: Starting Iref.P139 IDMT1: tIref.P> elapsed [ 040 021 ] IDMT2: Trip signal tIref. 3-142: Trip signal of the phase current stage for IDMT1.P> [ 040 084 ] ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] SCDD: Bl.Direct.P> [ 040 080 ] 304 367 12Z5111A Fig. 3-184 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . tIref.P> elapsed [ 040 082 ] 3 Operation IDMT1: Trip signal tIref. IDMT2: tIref.

Moreover the tripping time will under no circumstances fall below a settable minimum time threshold irrespective of the negative-sequence current flow magnitude. the negative-sequence current stage is blocked. (p. The inverse-time stage can be blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal input.7.05-fold of the set reference current value is exceeded by the negative-sequence current. Depending on the characteristic selected and the residual current magnitude the P139 will determine the tripping time.5. 3-101)) is triggered.5 Negative-Sequence Current Stage According to the following formulas the P139 will determine the negativesequence current and positive-sequence current. The “dynamic” threshold is active for the set hold time for the “dynamic parameters” (see Section 3. two different thresholds can be active.23. Alternatively. (p.11. In addition the inverse-time stage can also be automatically blocked by single-pole or multi-pole starting (depending on the setting). P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-185 . When the short-circuit direction determination function (SCDD) is enabled. When the inrush stabilization function (see Section 3.11.P139 3 Operation 3. 3-100)) and the “normal” threshold is active when no hold time is running. The trip signal from the negative-sequence current stage is blocked by the autoreclosing control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command. taking into account the set phase sequence (alternative terminology: Rotary field): Phase sequence A-B-C (alternative terminology: clockwise rotating field): 1 I neg = 3 · | (I A + a 2 · I B + a · I C) | ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ Phase sequence A-C-B (alternative terminology: anti-clockwise rotating field): I neg = ¯ 1 3 · | (I A + a · I B + a 2 · I C) | ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ a = e2πj/3 = e j·120° ¯ a 2 = e4πj/3 = e j·240° ¯ The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P139 to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. The IDMT protection will trigger when the 1. a trip signal from the IDMT negative-sequence current stage is always non-directional.

3-144: Negative-sequence current stage. the logic.neg> [ 040 108 ] 060 060 060 060 254 255 002 005 19Z8035A Fig. however. tIref. 7: IEEE Extremely Inv. tIref.neg PSx IDMT1: Iref.neg c MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ] IDMT1: Starting Iref.Iref. (Only IDMT1 is shown. 9: ANSI Short Time Inv. Ineg IDMT1: Block. timer st.trip time negPSx [ * ] 2: IEC Very Inverse IDMT1: Hold time neg PSx [ * ] 4: IEC Long Time Inv. IN. start.trip time negPSx IDMT1: Hold time neg PSx IDMT1: Release neg. 6: IEEE Very Inverse IDMT1: Release neg. also applies to IDMT2 with different numerical addresses. active [ 040 090 ] IDMT1: Factor kt. neg. and with the exception of parameter I D M T 1 : F a c t o r K I .neg PSx [ * ] MAIN: Gen. 3: IEC Extr.neg PSx [ * ] Setting IDMT1: Release neg.P139 3 Operation IDMT1: Bl.neg> elapsed [ 040 109 ] & ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] Parameter MAIN: Gen. Inverse 5: IEEE Moderately Inv. mode PSx IDMT1: Iref. PSx set set set set 017 001 001 001 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 1 2 3 4 027 219 220 221 051 051 051 051 004 004 004 004 057 057 057 057 Parameter IDMT1: Factor kt.neg IDMT1: Hold time neg runn.neg> 450 161 IDMT1: Enabled [ 040 100 ] MAIN: Protection active & 306 001 & & IDMT1: Iref.neg>EXT [ 040 102 ] IDMT1: Memory neg clear [ 040 111 ] MAIN: Bl. neg. neg. mode PSx [ * ] & 10: ANSI Long Time Inv. 11: RI-Type Inverse 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse c 1: With start. n e g P S x that does not exist for IDMT2. PSx IDMT1: Factor KI. IN.neg PSx [ * ] c c IDMT1: Iref. PSx IDMT1: Character. IDMT1: Factor KI.neg dynamic PSx [ * ] 1.Start. 306 400 [ 040 113 ] IDMT1: tIref. PSx [ * ] MAIN: Dynam.neg dynamic PSx IDMT1: Character.neg PSx IDMT1: Min.neg> & I̲A [ 040 107 ] I̲neg I̲B I̲C Setting IDMT1: Character. 8: ANSI Normally Inv. PSx [ * ] 1: Without delay 2: Delayed as per char. param.05 Iref I̲neg/Iref. start. PSx 0: Definite Time 1: IEC Standard Inverse IDMT1: Min.) 3-186 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .neg PSx set set set set 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 007 007 008 008 1 2 3 4 054 054 054 054 078 078 078 078 072 072 072 072 IDMT1: Trip sig.

however.05-fold of the set reference current value is exceeded by the residual current.) 3. the logic. two different thresholds can be active. Depending on the characteristic selected and the residual current magnitude the P139 will determine the tripping time. Alternatively. The trip signals of the residual current stages IDMT1 and IDMT2 are blocked by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command. The trip signal from the IDMT1 protection may also be blocked by the shortcircuit direction determination or the auto-reclosing control function.23. (Only IDMT1 is shown.6 Selecting the Measured Variable for the Residual Current Stage A setting specifies which current will be used by the P139 as the residual current: either the residual current calculated from the three phase currents or the residual current directly measured at the fourth current transformer (T 4). IDMT1: Evaluation IN PSx [ * ] I̲N 2 1 I̲A I̲B I̲C 1 1: Calculated 2 IDMT: IN 307 100 2: Measured Parameter IDMT1: Evaluation IN PSx set set set set 072 073 074 075 1 2 3 4 075 075 075 075 19Z5022A Fig. The “dynamic” threshold is active for the set hold time for the “dynamic parameters” (see Section 3. 3-100)) and the “normal” threshold is active when no hold time is running. The IDMT protection will trigger when the 1. The inverse-time stage can be blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal input. In addition the inverse-time stage can also be automatically blocked by single-pole or multi-pole starting (depending on the setting). Depending on the setting of the short-circuit direction determination the trip signal will be enabled. (p.7 Residual Current Stage The residual current is monitored by the P139 to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. Moreover the tripping time will under no circumstances fall below a settable minimum time threshold irrespective of the residual current flow magnitude.P139 3 Operation 3. 3-145: Selecting the measured variable. also applies to IDMT2 with different numerical addresses.11.23.5. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-187 .

neg IDMT1: Hold time N running [ 040 054 ] 306 400 IDMT1: tIref. mode PSx [ * ] 6: IEEE Very Inverse 7: IEEE Extremely Inv. 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse c & 1: With start. IN. (p. tIref. IDMT1: Hold time N PSx [ * ] & 3: Non-directional Setting IDMT1: Release N PSx SCDD: Ground fault forward [ 040 037 ] SCDD: Ground fault backw. 5: IEEE Moderately Inv. mode PSx IDMT1: Iref. 10: ANSI Long Time Inv.N PSx IDMT1: Iref. 3-190).N IDMT: IN 307 100 Setting IDMT1: Characteristic N PSx [ * ] IDMT1: Mode timer start PSx [ * ] & SCDD: Direction tIN> PSx [ * ] 1: Forward directional 1: IEC Standard Inverse 2: IEC Very Inverse 3: IEC Extr. active [ 040 090 ] & & IDMT1: Iref. (Trip signal: see Fig. IN. 3-146: Residual current stage for IDMT1.05 Iref IDMT1: Starting Iref. start. N P S x and I D M T 1 : M o d e t i m e r s t a r t P S x do not exist with IDMT2. start.N> EXT [ 040 103 ] IDMT1: Memory N clear [ 040 112 ] MAIN: Bl.N PSx set set set set 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 001 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 058 058 058 058 055 055 055 055 079 079 079 079 073 073 073 073 061 061 061 061 173 174 175 176 19Z8036A Fig. MAIN: Gen.Iref.P139 3 Operation IDMT1: Bl.N> [ 040 081 ] & I̲N/Iref. 3-189).N PSx IDMT1: Min.N> elapsed [ 040 083 ] Parameter IDMT1: Mode timer start PSx SCDD: Direction tIN> PSx MAIN: Gen.) The phase current stage for IDMT2 is displayed in Fig. (p. param. trip time N PSx IDMT1: Hold time N PSx IDMT1: Release N PSx IDMT1: Factor KI.N dynamic PSx set set set set 007 007 007 007 017 077 078 079 017 001 001 001 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 1 2 3 4 226 227 228 229 073 240 240 240 027 219 220 221 052 052 052 052 005 005 005 005 Parameter IDMT1: Characteristic N PSx IDMT1: Factor kt. timer st.N PSx [ * ] 2: Delayed as per char. Inverse IDMT1: Min.Start. (Note: The logic displayed here is not valid for IDMT2 as the parameters I D M T 1 : F a c t o r K I .N PSx c c [ * ] IDMT1: Iref.N dynamic PSx [ * ] c 1. IDMT1: Release N PSx [ * ] 1: Without delay 9: ANSI Short Time Inv. [ 040 038 ] 8: ANSI Normally Inv. 3-147.N> 450 160 IDMT1: Enabled [ 040 100 ] & MAIN: System IN enabled [ 040 133 ] MAIN: Dynam. trip time N PSx [ * ] & 2: Backward directional 0: Definite Time IDMT1: Factor kt.) 3-188 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 3-148. 11: RI-Type Inverse IDMT1: Factor KI.N PSx [ * ] & 1: With starting 2: With direction IDMT1: Characteristic N PSx 4: IEC Long Time Inv. Ineg IDMT1: Block.

) P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-189 . (Trip signal: see Fig. param. IN.neg IDMT2: Hold time N running [ 040 017 ] 306 400 IDMT2: tIref.05 Iref & I̲N/Iref. start. 9: ANSI Short Time Inv. start. (p.N PSx IDMT2: Iref.N dynamic PSx IDMT2: Characteristic N PSx set set set set 017 001 001 001 077 077 077 077 076 076 076 076 071 071 071 071 1 2 3 4 027 219 220 221 250 251 252 253 038 039 040 041 012 013 014 015 Parameter IDMT2: Factor kt. 3-190). Ineg & c 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse IDMT2: Block.N> [ 040 019 ] 307 100 Setting IDMT2: Characteristic N PSx [ * ] IDMT2: Factor kt. 3-188). The residual current stage for IDMT1 is displayed in Fig.N IDMT: IN IDMT2: Starting Iref.Start. 11: RI-Type Inverse MAIN: Gen. tIref. 3-147: Residual current stage for IDMT2. IN.N> elapsed [ 040 022 ] Parameter MAIN: Gen. trip time N PSx [ * ] IDMT2: Hold time N PSx [ * ] Setting IDMT2: Release N PSx IDMT2: Release N PSx [ * ] 1: Without delay 2: Delayed as per char. (p. IDMT2: Characteristic N PSx 0: Definite Time 1: IEC Standard Inverse 2: IEC Very Inverse 3: IEC Extr.N PSx IDMT2: Min. 6: IEEE Very Inverse 7: IEEE Extremely Inv. Inverse 4: IEC Long Time Inv. timer st.N PSx [ * ] c IDMT2: Iref. 8: ANSI Normally Inv. mode PSx [ * ] 1: With start. 3-149. 10: ANSI Long Time Inv. active [ 040 090 ] & & IDMT2: Iref.Iref. 3-146.P139 3 Operation IDMT2: Bl. 5: IEEE Moderately Inv.N> 450 166 IDMT2: Enabled [ 040 135 ] & MAIN: System IN enabled [ 040 133 ] MAIN: Dynam.N PSx [ * ] IDMT2: Min. mode PSx IDMT2: Iref.N> EXT [ 040 150 ] IDMT2: Memory N clear [ 040 188 ] MAIN: Bl. trip time N PSx IDMT2: Hold time N PSx IDMT2: Release N PSx set set set set 071 071 071 071 071 071 071 071 071 071 071 071 071 071 071 071 1 2 3 4 000 001 002 003 052 053 054 055 036 037 038 039 024 025 026 027 19Z8037A Fig.N dynamic PSx [ * ] c c 1. Note: The logic displayed here is not valid for IDMT1.

N> 304 466 IDMT: ARC Starting Iref.N> [ 040 085 ] ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] SCDD: Bl.23. Should starting not recur during the hold time period then. 3. When the starting times sum reach the tripping time value determined by the P139 then the corresponding signal will be issued. 3-191). tIref.N> [ 040 081 ] 12Z5113A Fig. Should starting recur during the hold time period then the time of the renewed starting will be added to the time period stored.N> elapsed [ 040 083 ] IDMT1: Trip signal tIref. the effect of hold time is shown by the example of a phase current stage. 3-150. (p.N> 304 368 IDMT1: Starting Iref.Direct. 3-149: Trip signal from the residual current stage for IDMT2. depending on the setting. IDMT2: tIref. 3-148: Trip signal from the residual current stage for IDMT1. The setting of the hold time defines the time period during which the IDMT protection starting time is stored after the starting has dropped out. 3-190 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P139 3 Operation IDMT1: tIref.N> [ 040 024 ] ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] 12Z5114A Fig.8 Holding Time Depending on the current flow the P139 will determine the tripping time and a timer stage is started. In Fig. the memory storing the accumulated starting times value will either be cleared without delay or according to the characteristic set.N> elapsed [ 040 022 ] IDMT2: Trip signal tIref.

P139 3 Operation Case A IDMT1: Starting Iref. however. also applies to IDMT2 with different numerical addresses.P> [ 040 080 ] IDMT1: Hold time P running [ 040 053 ] Determ.P> elapsed [ 040 082 ] Parameter IDMT1: Hold time P PSx set set set set 072 073 074 075 1 2 3 4 071 071 071 071 19Z5025A Fig. Example A: Hold time determined is not reached. trip time Per characteristic Non-delayed IDMT1: tIref.) P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-191 . 3-150: Effect of hold time shown with a phase current stage as an example. the logic. (Only IDMT1 is shown.P> elapsed [ 040 082 ] Case B IDMT1: Starting Iref.P> [ 040 080 ] IDMT1: Hold time P running [ 040 053 ] Determ. trip time Non-delayed Per characteristic IDMT1: tIref. Example B: Hold time determined is reached.

3-151: Enable/disable the short-circuit direction determination. Moreover. enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset. SCDD: General enable USER [ 017 070 ] 0 SCDD: Enabled [ 040 098 ] 1 0: No 1: Yes SCDD: Enable PSx [ * ] 0 1 0: No Parameter SCDD: Enable PSx set set set set 076 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 235 235 235 235 1: Yes 19Z5027A Fig. 3-192 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P139 3.1 ● Phase currents system ● Residual currents system Enable/disable the Short-Circuit Direction Determination The short-circuit direction determination can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters. With this feature it is possible to apply the P139 for directional definite-time overcurrent protection and directional inverse-time overcurrent protection. Two separate measuring systems are available for this purpose for: 3.24 3 Operation Short-Circuit Direction Determination (Function Group SCDD) The P139 provides short circuit direction determination (SCDD).24.

3-152. Depending on the type of fault the P139 will present various characteristic angles. the phase B to phase C voltage value (VB-C) and the characteristic angle αP = +45° are selected as measured variables (see Fig. Backward directional is apparent if the vector of the selected phase current lies in the range > ± 90° of the measuring relation.2 Phase Current Stages To determine direction in the phase current stages and depending on the type of fault a phase current and the opposed phase-to-phase voltage as well as the respective optimum characteristic angle are used.24. Beginning with the reference quantity the characteristic angle αP will determine the measuring relation. Forward directional is apparent if the vector of the selected phase current lies in the range ≤ ± 90° of the measuring relation. As an example for a single-pole fault in phase A to ground the phase A current value (IA). Measurem. 3-193)).P139 3 Operation 3. relation Forward direction αP IA VB-C Backward direction Line of direction S8Z5005A Fig. (p. The vector of the selected phase-to-phase voltage is the reference quantity. 3-152: Example for the forming of a directional phase current stage decision with a single-pole fault in phase A to ground (A-G) and with an inductive system and a phase sequence A-B-C (or clockwise rotary field direction). P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-193 . The measuring relation is defined as the angle bisector for the directional zone “Forward”.

V faulty [ 038 023 ] [ 040 062 ] MAIN: Starting A [ 040 005 ] MAIN: Starting B [ 040 006 ] MAIN: Starting C [ 040 007 ] >200 mV V̲A-G ≥2 V̲B-G V̲C-G >0. 3-203)). t ri p V EXT is not present.24.39. 304 460 I̲B I̲C 19Z5028B Fig.1 Inom SCDD: Determin. 3-360)).24.stage bl. ● The external signal MAIN: M.P139 3. circ. 3-153: Enabling direction determination for phase current stages. ● At least two phase-to-phase voltages exceed 200 mV. ● A phase current starting signal is present. is generated.10. ● Measuring-circuit monitoring has detected no faults in the voltage measuring loop (see Section 3. After being enabled and depending on the direction determination decision one of the following signals will be issued: ● With a fault in forward direction.b.1 Inom. SCDD: Enabled [ 040 098 ] SCDD: Blocked MCMON: Meas. c. ● All three phase current values exceed 0. 3-194 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . (p. (p. P enabled 304 456 ≥1 I̲A SCDD: Phase curr. Voltage memory can be applied when 3-pole faults have occurred (see Section 3. SCDD: Fault P backward To inhibit transient contention problems starting and dropping out of a direction determination decision in both directions is delayed for 30 ms. SCDD: Fault P for ward ● With a fault in backward (reverse) direction.3 3 Operation Enabling for Phase Current Stages Direction determination for phase current stages is only enabled if the following conditions are met simultaneously: ● The short-circuit direction determination is enabled. If the short-circuit direction determination is disabled the internal signal SCDD: Phase curr.stage bl.

B . SCDD: Fault P forward [ 036 018 ] SCDD: Fault P backward [ 036 019 ] 19Z5029B Fig.C .) P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-195 .P139 3 Operation MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ] 1: A . Imeas Characteristic Vmeas angle αP 306 515 I̲A I̲B at at Setting Setting Phase sequence Phase sequence A–B–C A–C–B I̲C V̲A-G V̲B-G V̲C-G A I̲A V̲B-C +45° +135° + B I̲B V̲C-A +45° +135° - C I̲C V̲A-B +45° +135° + A-B I̲A V̲B-C +60° +150° - B-C I̲C V̲A-B +30° +120° - C-A I̲C V̲A-B +60° +150° + A-B-C I̲C V̲A-B +45° +135° Direction determin. Starting 306 514 MAIN: Starting C int.C 2: A . (Note: Previous terminology of M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e was M A I N : R o t a r y f i e l d. Selected meas. 306 513 MAIN: Starting B int.B SCDD: Determin. P enabled 304 456 MAIN: Starting A int. var. 3-154: Direction determination for phase current stages.

A blocking signal for the IDMT phase current stage is formed when one of the following conditions is met: ● The direction for tIref. A blocking signal for the second DTOC phase current stage is formed when one of the following conditions is met: ● The direction for tI>> is set to Forward directional and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in backward direction. In case the direction determination function is not enabled (e. “Backward directional” or “Non‑directional”. ● The direction for tIref.P> is set to Forward directional and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in backward direction.g.24.P> is set to Backward directional and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in forward direction. ● The direction for tI>>> is set to Backward directional and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in forward direction.c. ● The direction for tI>> is set to Backward directional and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in forward direction. A blocking signal for the third DTOC phase current stage is formed when one of the following conditions is met: ● The direction for tI>>> is set to Forward directional and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in backward direction.P139 3.4 3 Operation Forming the Blocking Signal for the Phase Current Stages To form the blocking signal for the two DTOC phase current stages and the IDMT phase current stage the fault direction to evaluate the measuring decision may be set separately for each of the stages to either “Forward directional”. with a M.b. trip) it is possible to select whether stages set to Forward directional may be operated with biased tripping by enabling SC DD: Trip bias PSx. ● The direction for tI > is set to Backward directional and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in forward direction. A blocking signal for the first DTOC phase current stage is formed when one of the following conditions is met: ● The direction for tI> is set to Forward directional and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in backward direction. 3-196 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

direct. tIref. tIref.Direct. tIref.tI>>> 2: Backward directional 310 067 3: Non-directional SCDD: Direct. 3-155: Forming the blocking signals for the phase current stages. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-197 . tI> 2: Backward directional 304 461 3: Non-directional SCDD: Direction tI>> PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional SCDD: Block.P> PSx set set set set 017 077 078 079 017 077 078 079 017 077 078 079 007 007 007 007 017 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 074 236 236 236 071 237 237 237 072 238 238 238 230 231 232 233 066 233 233 233 52Z0130A Fig. tI>> 2: Backward directional 304 462 3: Non-directional SCDD: Direction tI>>> PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional SCDD: Block.P> PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional SCDD: Bl.P139 3 Operation SCDD: Trip bias PSx [ * ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes SCDD: Phase curr. direct.stage bl. 304 460 SCDD: Direction tI> PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional SCDD: Block.Direct.P> 2: Backward directional 304 465 3: Non-directional SCDD: Fault P forward [ 036 018 ] SCDD: Fault P backward [ 036 019 ] Parameter SCDD: Trip bias PSx SCDD: Direction tI> PSx SCDD: Direction tI>> PSx SCDD: Direction tI>>> PSx SCDD: Direct.

The characteristic angle αN may be set in the range: −90° to +90°. Beginning with the reference quantity the characteristic angle will determine the measuring relation. The specification of a good characteristic angle is carried out by the user according to the neutral-point treatment of the system. (p.P139 3. relation S8Z5006A Fig.5 3 Operation Residual Current Stages To determine direction in the residual current stages the residual current measured (IN) and the neutral-point displacement voltage (VN-G = −VG-N) are used. Forward directional is apparent if the vector of the residual current lies in the range ≤ ± 90° of the measuring relation. Here the residual current apparent with a single-pole fault in phase A to ground (A-G) and a forward directional fault will take up the approximate position as shown in Fig. In the following example the system neutral is grounded with a relatively low resistance. Line of direction Backward direction V̲G-N = -V̲N-G IN αN Forward direction Measurem. 3-198 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 3-156. Backward directional is apparent if the vector of the residual current lies in the range > ± 90° of the measuring relation.24. 3-198). With the characteristic angle αN = −45° a forward directional decision will be issued. 3-156: Example for forming a directional decision in the residual current stage. The measuring relation is defined as the angle bisector for the directional zone “Forward”. The reference quantity is the neutral-point displacement vector.

39.6 Conditioning and Selecting the Measured Variables For the short-circuit direction determination it is possible to use either the neutral-point displacement voltage calculated by the P139 from the three phaseto-ground voltages or the displacement voltage measured at the T 90 transformer.24. (p. SCDD: Evaluation VNG PSx [ * ] V̲N-G 2 V̲A-G V̲B-G V̲C-G 1 .b. 2 1 SCDD: VNG 1: Calculated 310 026 2: Measured Parameter SCDD: Evaluation VNG PSx set set set set 071 071 071 071 1 2 3 4 056 057 058 059 19Z6450A Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-199 . ● The neutral-point displacement voltage exceeds the threshold value set at S CD D: VNG> PSx. 3. t ri p V E XT is not present. 3-157: Selecting the measuring voltage.01 Inom ● The external signal MA IN: M. 3-360)) ● A residual current starting signal is present ● The residual current exceeds 0.c...7 Enabling for Residual Current Stages Direction determination for residual current stages is only enabled if the following conditions are met simultaneously: ● The short-circuit direction determination is enabled ● The short-circuit direction determination is not blocked by the measuringcircuit monitoring (see Section 3.P139 3 Operation 3.24.

[ 040 038 ] Parameter SCDD: Charact. 3-158: Enabling direction determination for residual current stages.P139 3 Operation SCDD: Enabled [ 040 098 ] MCMON: Meas. 3. N enabled 304 455 I̲N SCDD: Resid. SCDD: Charact. angle G PSx set set set set 017 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 076 243 243 243 19Z6452A Fig.01 Inom SCDD: Determin. circ. 306 516 DTOC: Starting IN>> [ 040 041 ] SCDD: VNG> PSx DTOC: Starting IN>>> [ 039 078 ] [ * ] SCDD: VNG 310 026 > 0.8 Forming the Blocking Signal for the Residual Current Stages To form the blocking signal for the two DTOC residual current stages and the IDMT residual current stage the fault direction to evaluate the measuring decision may be set separately for each of the stages to either Forward directional. SCDD: VNG 310 026 SCDD: Ground fault forward [ 040 037 ] SCDD: Ground fault backw. After being enabled and depending on the direction determination decision one of the following signals will be issued: ● With a fault in forward direction: SCDD: Ground fault for ward ● With a fault in backward direction: SCD D: Ground fault backw. angle G PSx [ * ] SCDD: Determin.24. N enabled 304 455 I̲N Direction determin. A blocking signal for the first DTOC residual current stage is formed when one of the following conditions is met: 3-200 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . To inhibit transient contention problems starting and dropping out of a direction determination decision in both directions is delayed for 30 ms. 304 454 Parameter SCDD: VNG> PSx set set set set 017 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 077 244 244 244 19Z6451A Fig. 3-159: Direction determination for residual current stages. V faulty [ 038 023 ] MAIN: Starting G int.stage bl.curr. Backward directional or Non-directional.

● The direction for tIref. A blocking signal for the second DTOC residual current stage is formed when one of the following conditions is met: ● The direction for tIN>> is set to Forward directional and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in backward direction. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-201 . ● The direction for tIN>>> is set to Backward directional and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in forward direction. A blocking signal for the third DTOC residual current stage is formed when one of the following conditions is met: ● The direction for tIN>>> is set to Forward directional and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in backward direction.c.P139 3 Operation ● The direction for tIN> is set to Forward directional and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in backward direction.N> is set to Forward directional and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in backward direction.g. with a M.b. In case of a phase current starting bias tripping in the residual current stage may be suppressed by enabling SCDD : Bl ock. A blocking signal for the IDMT residual current stage is formed when one of the following conditions is met: ● The direction for tIref. trip) it is possible to select whether stages set to Forward directional may be operated with biased tripping by enabling SCDD: Trip bias PSx. bi as G P Sx. ● The direction for tIN> is set to Backward directional and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in forward direction. ● The direction for tIN>> is set to Backward directional and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in forward direction. In case the direction determination function is not enabled (e.N> is set to Backward directional and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in forward direction.

bias G PSx SCDD: Trip bias PSx SCDD: Direction tIN> PSx SCDD: Direction tIN>> PSx SCDD: Direction tIN>>> PSx SCDD: Direct.N> 2: Backward directional 304 466 3: Non-directional SCDD: Ground fault forward [ 040 037 ] SCDD: Ground fault backw. direct.stage bl.Direct.Direct. 1 306 513 0: No MAIN: Starting B int. 3-202 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . direct.tIN>>> 2: Backward directional 310 068 3: Non-directional SCDD: Direct. tIN>> 2: Backward directional 304 464 3: Non-directional SCDD: Direction tIN>>> PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional SCDD: Block.N> PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional SCDD: Bl. tIN> 2: Backward directional 304 463 3: Non-directional SCDD: Direction tIN>> PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional SCDD: Block.curr.N> PSx 017 077 078 079 017 077 078 079 017 077 078 079 017 077 078 079 007 007 007 007 017 077 078 079 078 245 245 245 074 236 236 236 073 240 240 240 075 241 241 241 235 236 237 238 067 242 242 242 52Z0133A Fig. bias G PSx [ * ] 0 MAIN: Starting A int. tIref. 306 515 SCDD: Trip bias PSx [ * ] 1: Yes SCDD: Direction tIN> PSx SCDD: Resid. 1: Yes 306 514 MAIN: Starting C int. [ 304 454 * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional SCDD: Block. tIref. [ 040 038 ] Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4 SCDD: Block. tIref.P139 3 Operation SCDD: Block. 3-160: Forming the blocking signals for the residual current stages.

[ 040 038 ] S8Z5029A Fig. Direction determination in a phase system ● For direction determination in a phase system the SCDD function uses the fault-dependent short-circuit current and – in general – the phase-to-phase.9 Signaling Logic Fault directional signals generated by the directional determination function of the phase and residual current stages are grouped together to a combined function. |Delta f| > 2. [ 040 039 ] SCDD: Ground fault forward [ 040 037 ] SCDD: Fault P backward [ 036 019 ] SCDD: Fault P or G backw. With a three-pole fault in the phase-current stage the measurement loop voltage (VABmeas) is compared to the selected operate value (Vop.) of the voltage memory set by the user at SCDD: Ope r. if it has been enabled. 3-161: Fault signals from phase or residual current stages forward or backward directional. If VABmeas < Vop. usi ng m e mory If the voltage memory has not been enabled (i. In this case voltage memory is not used. that direction determination on above basis is no longer possible.5 Hz) the SCDD function will check if VABmeas is sufficient for direction determination.Val. This ensures that with single-pole and two-pole faults there is always sufficient voltage available for direction determination. then the SCDD function will not use VABmeas but will revert to the voltage memory. 3. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-203 .10 Short-Circuit Direction Determination Using Voltage Memory The short-circuit direction determination (SCDD) function group is subdivided into two subsets.val .V memory PSx.e. Direction determination in a residual current system ● For direction determination in a residual current system the measured residual current IN and the vector addition of the phase-ground voltages are applied. SCDD: Fault P forward [ 036 018 ] SCDD: Fault P or G forwd.24. The following signal is issued: SC DD: Dir ect .Val. un-faulted voltages (not involved in the short-circuit) assigned to the type of fault. [ 040 040 ] SCDD: Ground fault backw. For such fault occurrences there is a voltage memory available from which the SCDD function can obtain the necessary voltage information for direction determination.P139 3 Operation 3.24. there could be such a large 3-phase voltage drop. Should a three-pole fault occur close to the point of measurement. This procedure can also be applied to three-pole faults with a phase-tophase voltage > 200 mV.

a forward fault is detected if the voltage memory is disabled and if the pre-orientation is active (set under SCD D: Trip bias PSx). w/o measurem. us ing V me as If VABmeas < 200 mV. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . The following signal is issued: SCDD: For w.P139 3 Operation Should the result with a disabled voltage memory be VABmeas > 200 mV the direction will be determined on the basis of VABmeas. The following signal is issued: S CD D: Di rect. These signals are additionally delivered to the following signals: 3-204 ● SC DD: Fau lt P f or ward ● SCD D : Faul t P ba ckward ● SCD D : Faul t P or G f orwd. ● SCDD : Fault P or G backw. otherwise the directional decision is blocked.

This is especially critical as the overcurrent protection will only clear the fault after the set time delay period has elapsed. the manual close signal must be applied not only to the circuit breaker but at the same time also to the P139. This internal blocking signal will prevent that ARC is activated during an existing fault when a manual close signal is issued. To ensure fast fault clearance with manual closing.25 Switch on to Fault Protection (Function Group SOTF) When the circuit breaker is closed manually. however. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-205 . it is possible to switch on to an existing fault. the fastest possible fault clearance is desired. as long as there is no close request present from the ARC and no HSR cycle from an external auto reclose control is operating. With the manual close command a settable timer stage will be triggered. In this situation. By setting a parameter it is possible to choose which starting decisions from the overcurrent protection will generate a trip signal while the timer stage is running.P139 3 Operation 3. An internal blocking signal is generated together with the trigger signal for the timer stage.

ARC by close cmd R1 305 675 SOTF: Operating mode [ 011 061 ] 1 2 3 4 1: Trip by I> 2: Trip by I>> 3: Trip by I>>> 4: Trip by gen. (Only IDMT1 is shown.P> [ 040 080 ] & DTOC: Starting I>> [ 040 029 ] & DTOC: Starting I>>> [ 039 075 ] & SOTF: Trip signal [ 036 064 ] MAIN: General start. DTOC: Starting I> [ 040 036 ] & IDMT1: Starting Iref. ARC running EXT [ 039 063 ] ARC: Close request 303 102 MAIN: Manual close EXT [ 036 047 ] S1 1 SOTF: Bl. 306 539 19Z8067A Fig. [ 036 063 ] & 306 001 SOTF: Par. start. also applies to IDMT2 with different numerical addresses.) 3-206 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . int. however.P139 3 Operation SOTF: General enable USER [ 011 068 ] 0 1 SOTF: Enabled [ 040 069 ] & 0: No 1: Yes * PSU: PS y active [ * ] y PSU: PS y active 1 2 3 4 036 036 036 036 090 091 092 093 SOTF: Manual close timer [ 011 060 ] & MAIN: Protection active SOTF: tManual-close runn. the logic. 3-162: Switch on to fault protection.

protective signaling can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. while the DTOC or IDMT tripping times are bypassed. If only the P SI G: E nable EXT function is assigned to a binary signal input. It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset via PSI G: Enab le PS x. The function is enabled independently of parameter subsets via P SI G: General enable USER. then a signal at this input will have no effect. Selective instantaneous clearing of the line section affected by the fault is initiated by this function. 3. Parameters and configured binary signal inputs have equal status. If only the PS IG: Disable EXT function is assigned to a binary signal input.1 Disabling and Enabling Protective Signaling The function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or through binary signal inputs. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-207 .P139 3 Operation 3. If these enabling functions have been activated. then protective signaling is enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and it is disabled by a negative edge.26 Protective Signaling (Function Group PSIG) Protective signaling is used together with the short-circuit direction determination in power systems with single-end infeed and a subsequent parallel line configuration (line section).26.

26./user enabled [ 037 023 ] PSIG: Enable EXT [ 037 025 ] PSIG: Enable USER [ 003 132 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute PSIG: Disable EXT [ 037 026 ] PSIG: Disable USER [ 003 131 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute PSIG: Ready [ 037 027 ] MAIN: Protection active 306 001 PSIG: Blocking EXT [ 036 049 ] PSIG: Telecom. PSIG: General enable USER [ 015 004 ] 0 PSIG: Enabled [ 015 008 ] 1 0: No 1: Yes PSIG: Enable PSx [ * ] 0 Parameter PSIG: Enable PSx set set set set 015 015 015 015 1 2 3 4 014 015 016 017 1 0: No 1: Yes INP: Fct. 3-163: Protective signaling is ready. ● There must be no transmission fault. faulty [ 036 060 ] PSIG: Not ready [ 037 028 ] 45Z5032A Fig. 3-208 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P139 3 Operation 3. ● There must be no external blocking.2 Readiness of Protective Signaling In order for protective signaling (PSIG) to function. U xxx [ xxx xxx ] U x1 U x2 U x3 U xx Address 037 025 Address 037 026 PSIG: Ext. assignm. the following requirements must be satisfied: ● It must be enabled.

rel. (p.P139 3 Operation 3. or Transm. 3-164: Protective signaling over pilot wires.rel. With both operating modes and in the idle state there is a receive signal (DC loop closed) present at the local and at the remote station. Substation a L+ L- PSIG: Send (transm.relay) P139 S8Z5031A Fig.make con.26.break con.rel.relay) -K1 PSIG: Receive EXT L+/LL-/L+ P139 Pilot wire Substation b L- Pilot wire L+ -K2 PSIG: Receive EXT L+/LL-/L+ PSIG: Send (transm. 3-209)).break con) is to be connected by pilot wires to the input labeled PSI G: Re ce ive EXT at the remote station (see Chapter 5 “Installation and Connection” and Fig.3 Setting up a Communications Link When setting up a communications link the make contact or the break contact (dependent on the selected transmission relay operating mode Transm. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-209 . operating mode selected Transm. 3-164.

make con. SC DD : Ground fault forward SCDD: Fau lt P back ward SCD D: Fa ult P forward Fault residual current stage backward (reverse) Fault residual current stage forward Fault phase current stage backward (reverse) Fault phase current stage forward No No No No No No No Yes No Yes No No No Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes The signal PSIG: Trip s ignal is generated without delay after the DC loop is closed again with the general starting condition present and the status signal for a closed DC loop was issued to the binary signal input labeled PSIG: Receive EX T.4 3 Operation Operation of Protective Signaling When a general starting condition is issued the DC loop is opened without delay (Send). 3-210 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . and it is closed when the operating mode is set to Transm. send PSx the DC loop is closed again after the general starting condition has dropped out. When protective signaling is not ready the DC loop is open when the operating mode is set to Transm. Closing again of the DC loop with the general starting condition present after the set tripping time has elapsed occurs according to the operating mode selected at PPSIG: Di re c.break con.rel.rel.P139 3.depen de nce P Sx and dependent on the directional decisions: ● Independently of a directional decision ● Dependent on the condition that no directional decision by the phase current stage in backward (reverse) direction is present ● Dependent on the condition that no directional decision by the residual current stage in backward (reverse) direction is present ● Dependent that one of the conditions in below table is met: SCDD: Ground fault back w. Delayed by the release time set at PSIG: Release t.26.

dependence PSx set set set set 015 024 024 025 015 015 015 015 1 2 3 4 011 003 063 023 001 115 116 117 Parameter PSIG: Release t.c. mode PSx set set set set 015 024 024 025 015 024 025 025 1 2 3 4 002 001 061 021 012 051 011 071 3 4 1: 2: 3: 4: PSIG: Trip signal [ 038 007 ] Without Phase curr. [ 040 038 ] PSIG: Release t.rel. send PSx [ * ] PSIG: Send (signal) [ 036 035 ] PSIG: Send (transm.P139 3 Operation PSIG: Receive EXT [ 036 048 ] PSIG: Ready [ 037 027 ] PSIG: Receive (signal) [ 037 029 ] C PSIG: Tripping time PSx [ * ] MAIN: General starting [ 040 000 ] PSIG: Direc. mode PSx [ 015 009 ] [ * ] 0 1 1 2 0: don't execute 1: execute 1: Transm.break con 2: Transm. USER PSIG: DC loop op.system Phase/resid.relay) [ 037 024 ] PSIG: Test telecom.dependence PSx [ * ] 1 2 Parameter PSIG: Tripping time PSx PSIG: Direc. EXT [ 036 038 ] PSIG: Test telecom. PSIG: Test telecom. send PSx PSIG: DC loop op. chann.system SCDD: Fault P forward [ 036 018 ] SCDD: Fault P backward [ 036 019 ] SCDD: Ground fault forward [ 040 037 ] SCDD: Ground fault backw.rel. [ 034 016 ] 19Z6423A Fig. system Residual curr. 3-165: Protective signaling logic. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-211 .make con.

USER to execute. faulty [ 036 060 ] SFMON: Telecom. (p.26. send PSx [ * ] PSIG: Receive EXT [ 036 048 ] Release time send + 600ms MAIN: General starting [ 040 000 ] PSIG: Telecom.P139 3 Operation 3. with no general starting condition present. 3-212 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . In order to test the DC loop the communications link may be broken by setting the parameter at P SI G: Tes t t el e com .g. then the signal PSIG: Te lecom. 3-166: Protective signaling transmission fault. If during a faultless operation. 3-166. 3-212)). PSIG: Release t. send PSx set set set set 015 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 002 001 061 021 19Z5036A Fig.5 Monitoring and Testing the DC Loop for PSIG The pilot wires are monitored for interruptions. f aulty is issued (see Fig. faulty [ 098 006 ] Parameter PSIG: Release t. there is no signal received from the DC loop after the set release time period for the transmit relay (+ 600 ms) has elapsed. A transmission fault leads to a blocking of the protective signaling function. e.

Fig. (p. automatic reclosure of the line section will occur.P139 3 Operation 3. 3-167. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-213 .27 Auto-Reclosure Control (Function Group ARC) Under certain conditions the automatic reclosure control function (ARC) will cause a line section to be cleared and then. when the dead time has elapsed. 3-214) shows an example for the usual sequence of a failed highspeed reclosure (HSR) followed by a subsequent successful time-delay reclosure (TDR).

time I> PSx ARC: TDR trip.time I>runn 303 154 ARC: TDR trip.P139 3 Operation HSR has failed TDR successful ARC: Ready [ 004 068 ] ARC: Cycle running [ 037 000 ] DTOC: ARC starting I> 305 463 ARC: HSR trip. 3-214 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . [ 037 002 ] ARC: Dead time TDR runn. time running [ 037 005 ] ARC: Dead time HSR runn.time I>runn 303 155 MAIN: Gen.pulse time [015 067 ] ARC: No. trip command 1 [ 036 071 ] Terminated Terminated ARC: Oper. permit.time I> PSx ARC: Operative time PSx ARC: HSR dead time PSx ARC: TDR dead time PSx ARC: Reclaim time PSx set set set set 015 024 025 025 015 024 025 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 028 1 2 3 4 072 040 000 060 073 041 001 061 066 035 095 055 MAIN: Close cmd. TDR PSx 056 030 090 050 057 031 091 051 054 028 088 048 Setting: 1 19Z5041A Fig. 3-167: Example for an ARC sequence. [ 037 003 ] MAIN: Close command [ 037 009 ] Terminated ARC: Reclaim time running [ 036 042 ] ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] ARC: Reclosure successful [ 036 062 ] Parameter ARC: HSR trip.

then another attempt can be made to clear the fault with a time-delay reclosure (TDR). P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-215 . If these enabling functions have been activated. then a signal at this input will have no effect. the Auto-reclose control function can be disabled or enabled by setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.27.2 Enabling and Disabling the ARC Function Disabling or enabling may be carried out with parameters or binary signal inputs. The activation of the function is enabled generally (independent of parameter subsets) via ARC : Gen eral en able USER. 3. If only the parameter A RC: Disable EXT has been assigned to a binary signal input. then ARC will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. 3-168: Setting the operating mode of the ARC function.27.P139 3 Operation 3.1 ARC Operating Modes The ARC function available in the P139 offers the possibility of triggering starting times with different starting signals. multiple reclosures first begin with a high-speed reclosure (HSR). a trip signal is generated. Parameters and configured binary signal inputs have equal status. When the ARC operating mode has been set accordingly. ARC: Operating mode PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: HSR/TDR permitted 2: TDR only permitted 3: Test HSR only permit Parameter ARC: Operating mode PSx set set set set 015 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 051 025 085 045 19Z5037A Fig. If only the ARC : Enabl e EXT function is assigned to a binary signal input. If the fault is not cleared after reclosure by a HSR. Once the starting times have elapsed. Multiple reclosures are possible with the ARC function available in the P139. It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset via A RC: Gen eral en abl e USER. Multiple reclosures using only TDRs are also possible if the ARC operating mode is set accordingly.

3-169: Enabling or disabling auto-reclosure control. U xxx [ xxx xxx ] U x1 U x2 U x3 U xx Address 037 010 Address 037 011 ARC: Ext. assignm./user enabled [ 037 013 ] ARC: Enable EXT [ 037 010 ] ARC: Enable USER [ 003 134 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute ARC: Disable EXT [ 037 011 ] ARC: Disable USER [ 003 133 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute Parameter ARC: Enable PSx set set set set 015 015 015 015 1 2 3 4 046 047 048 049 19Z5038A Fig.P139 3 Operation ARC: General enable USER [ 015 060 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes ARC: Enable PSx [ * ] 0 1 ARC: Enabled [ 015 064 ] 0: No 1: Yes INP: Fct. 3-216 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

ARC: Blocking EXT [ 036 050 ] ARC: Blocked [ 004 069 ] ARC: Enabled [ 015 064 ] MAIN: Device on-line [ 003 030 ] 0: No (= off) ARC: Blocking time PSx [ * ] SOTF: Bl. When the blocking time has elapsed. 3-170: ARC blocking. provided that one of the following conditions is met: ● A blocking signal is present because of a manual close.27. ARC by close cmd 305 675 MAIN: Manual trip signal [ 034 017 ] ARC: Trip signal [ 039 099 ] ARC: Block. ● An external signal ARC : B locki ng EXT is present.P139 3 Operation 3. ARC blocking is canceled. ● Protection is disabled (off). time running [ 037 004 ] Parameter ARC: Blocking time PSx set set set set 015 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 058 032 092 052 19Z5040A Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-217 . When all blocking conditions have been removed. ● ARC is disabled. ● A manual trip command is issued via setting parameter.3 ARC Blocking Under certain conditions the ARC will be blocked and the signal AR C : Block ed will be issued. the blocking time is started.

3-171: ARC ready to operate. ● The circuit breaker must be capable of opening and closing again (CB opening & closing drive is ready). ● No ARC cycle is running.27.sig. ARC: CB clos. PSx set set set set 015 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 050 024 084 044 19Z5039A Fig. ● ARC is not blocked. For this purpose the following conditions need to be met simultaneously: ● Protection is activated (on).pos.P139 3.sig. 3-218 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .4 3 Operation ARC Ready to Operate An ARC cycle can only start if the ARC is ready. ● The circuit breaker contacts must be in closed position (closed position scanning is optional). PSx [ * ] 0 1 0: Without 1: With MAIN: CB closed 3p EXT [ 036 051 ] ARC: Ready [ 004 068 ] MAIN: Protection active 306 001 ARC: CB drive ready EXT [ 004 066 ] ARC: Not ready [ 037 008 ] ARC: Blocked [ 004 069 ] ARC: Cycle running [ 037 000 ] Parameter ARC: CB clos.pos.

If the tripping time has elapsed during an active ARC cycle while the operative time is still running.P139 3 Operation 3. a trip signal is issued. As an exception. If more than one starting is present then the trip signal will be issued after the HSR tripping time that has elapsed first. all tripping times already triggered and the operative time will be terminated.ne g> ● Start by programmable logic ● Ground fault direction determination by steady-state values (GFDSS) has operated and detected one of the following faults: ■ ■ ■ GFD SS: St art in g f orward/LS GFD SS: St art in g Y( N) > GF DSS : Starting forw ard/LS or GFDSS: St artin g Y(N)> If – in the operating mode HSR/TDR permitted – only one of the starting conditions listed above applies.P > (directional) ● IDMT1: St arti ng Ire f.N> (directional) ● IDMT1 : St arti ng Ir ef . if the associated HSR tripping time is set to Blocked. The HSR or TDR trip time having caused the trip signal also determines which dead time (HSR or TDR) is to be triggered. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-219 .5 Tripping Times When protection functions operating with auto-reclosure control are started. a TDR will be triggered first after having elapsed first. The ARC trip signal must be included in the “m out of n” selection of the trip commands. The beginning of the following starts or input signals trigger the tripping times provided that the starting conditions are met and the respective tripping times are not blocked. then the first trip signal is always generated by the HSR trip time stage. then some of the starting signals are directional: ● General starting ● DTO C: Start in g I> (directional) ● D TOC : St ar ting I>> (directional) ● D TO C : St arti ng I>>> (directional) ● D TOC : St ar ting IN> (directional) ● D TOC : St ar ting IN>> (directional) ● D TO C : St arti ng IN>>> (directional) ● I D MT 1 : S tarti ng Ir e f . Once the dead time commences. then no HSR will be initiated within the same ARC cycle. the tripping times (HSR or TDR) are started together with the operative time. regardless of the duration of the HSR or TDR tripping time setting. If the trip signal has been generated by a TDR tripping time stage.27. If short-circuit direction determination (SCDD) is enabled. HSR precedes TDR.

time I> PSx [ * ] DTOC: ARC starting I> ARC: Trip time HSR elaps. 3-172: Tripping time.time I>>PSx [ * ] DTOC: ARC starting I>> 305 464 ARC: HSRtrip.time I> PSx ARC: HSR trip. 3-220 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .t.time IN>PSx ARC: HSRtrip.time IN>>PSx ARC: HSRtrip.t. IN>>> PSx set set set set 015 024 025 025 015 024 025 025 014 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 014 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 072 040 000 060 074 101 151 101 096 102 152 102 076 103 153 103 031 104 154 104 098 105 155 105 19Z5042A Fig. part 1. 303 152 305 463 ARC: HSR trip.time I>>PSx ARC: HSRtrip.time IN>PSx [ * ] DTOC: ARC starting IN> 305 465 ARC: HSRtrip. IN>>> PSx [ * ] DTOC: Starting IN>>> [ 039 078 ] ARC: Block/reset HSR 303 104 Parameter ARC: HSR trip.time IN>>PSx [ * ] DTOC: ARC starting IN>> 305 466 ARC: HSRtrip.time I>>>PSx [ * ] DTOC: Starting I>>> [ 039 075 ] ARC: HSR trip.time I>>>PSx ARC: HSR trip.P139 3 Operation ARC: HSR trip.

time IN>>PSx [ * ] DTOC: ARC starting IN>> 305 466 ARC: TDRtrip.time I>>>PSx [ * ] DTOC: Starting I>>> [ 039 075 ] ARC: TDR trip.time I>>>PSx ARC: TDR trip.time I> PSx [ * ] DTOC: ARC starting I> ARC: Trip time TDR elaps. 305 463 303 153 ARC: TDR trip. IN>>> PSx set set set set 015 024 025 025 015 024 025 025 014 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 014 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 073 041 001 061 075 113 163 113 097 114 164 114 077 115 165 115 032 116 166 116 099 117 167 117 19Z5043A Fig.time I> PSx ARC: TDR trip.t. 3-173: Tripping time.time IN>>PSx ARC: TDRtrip. part 2. IN>>> PSx [ * ] DTOC: Starting IN>>> [ 039 078 ] ARC: Block/reset TDR 303 105 Parameter ARC: TDR trip.time IN>PSx [ * ] DTOC: ARC starting IN> 305 465 ARC: TDRtrip.P139 3 Operation ARC: TDR trip.time I>>PSx [ * ] DTOC: ARC starting I>> 305 464 ARC: TDRtrip.t.time I>>PSx ARC: TDRtrip.time IN>PSx ARC: TDRtrip. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-221 .

P139 3 Operation ARC: HSRtrip.t.t. 303 153 ARC: TDRtrip.neg PSx ARC: TDRtrip.t.t.Iref.neg PSx [ * ] ARC: Block/reset TDR 303 105 Parameter ARC: HSRtrip.Iref.Iref. 3-222 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .N PSx ARC: HSRtr.t.t.Iref.t.N PSx ARC: TDRtr.t.N PSx [ * ] ARC: TDRtr. part 3. 3-174: Tripping time.P> ARC: Trip time HSR elaps.t.N> 304 368 ARC: HSRtr.N PSx [ * ] IDMT: ARC Starting Iref.P PSx [ * ] IDMT: ARC Starting Iref.neg PSx [ * ] IDMT1: Starting Iref.P PSx ARC: TDRtrip.P PSx [ * ] ARC: Trip time TDR elaps.Iref.t.Iref. 303 152 304 367 ARC: HSRtrip.Iref.t.t.Iref.Iref.neg> [ 040 107 ] ARC: Block/reset HSR 303 104 ARC: TDRtrip.neg PSx set set set set 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 094 106 156 106 096 107 157 107 034 108 158 108 095 118 168 118 097 119 169 119 035 120 170 120 12Z6230A Fig.Iref.P PSx ARC: HSRtrip.Iref.Iref.

ARC: Block/reset HSR 303 152 303 104 ARC: TDR trip t.time GS PSx ARC: TDR trip.GFDSS PSx [ * ] ARC: Trip time TDR elaps.GFDSS [ 015 105 ] 1 2 3 1: Starting LS 2: Starting Y(N)> 3: Starting LS/Y(N)> ARC: Starting GFDSS GFDSS: Starting forward/LS [ 009 040 ] 303 151 GFDSS: Starting Y(N)> [ 009 074 ] ARC: HSR trip t.time GS PSx [ * ] ARC: Trip time TDR elaps.GFDSS PSx set set set set 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 078 109 159 109 079 121 171 121 19Z5045A Fig. 3-176: Tripping time. part 4.time GS PSx [ * ] ARC: Block/reset HSR ARC: Trip time HSR elaps.asg.time GS PSx set set set set 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 038 100 150 100 039 112 162 112 19Z5046A Fig.GFDSS PSx [ * ] ARC: Trip time HSR elaps. part 5.trip t. ARC: HSR trip.P139 3 Operation ARC: Sig. 303 153 ARC: Block/reset TDR 303 105 Parameter ARC: HSR trip t.GFDSS PSx ARC: TDR trip t. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-223 . 303 153 ARC: Block/reset TDR 303 105 Parameter ARC: HSR trip. 3-175: Tripping time. 303 104 303 152 MAIN: General starting [ 040 000 ] ARC: TDR trip.

LOGIC PSx set set set set 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 098 110 160 110 099 122 172 122 19Z5047A Fig. LOGIC PSx [ * ] ARC: Block/reset HSR ARC: Trip time HSR elaps. LOGIC PSx ARC: TDRtrip. ARC: Block/reset TDR 303 153 303 105 Parameter ARC: HSRtrip. 3-177: Tripping time.t. 303 104 303 152 ARC: Start by LOGIC [ 037 078 ] ARC: TDRtrip.t. part 6.P139 3 Operation ARC: HSRtrip.t.t. 3-224 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . LOGIC PSx [ * ] ARC: Trip time TDR elaps.

P139 3 Operation 3. I>>>PSx [ * ] 0 ARC: Block/reset TDR 1 303 105 0: No 1: Yes DTOC: Starting I>>> [ 039 075 ] ARC: Operating mode PSx [ * ] 2: TDR only permitted 3: Test HSR only permit ARC: Blocked [ 004 069 ] ARC: TDR not permitted 303 113 Parameter ARC: HSR block. I >>>PSx has been selected. ● I>>> starting is present and A RC: TDR block .f. ● The number of permitted TDRs (A RC: No. f. I>>>PSx ARC: TDR block.27.f. I>>>PSx has been selected. ARC: HSR block. perm it . and thus no further TDRs are permitted. ● I>>> starting is present and AR C: HSR block. TDR PSx) has been set to 0 or has been reached.f. I>>>PSx ARC: Operating mode PSx set set set set 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 080 111 161 111 081 124 174 124 051 125 185 145 19Z5048A Fig. 3-178: Blocking and resetting the tripping time stages. Except by the setting value Blocked the TDR tripping time stages are blocked or reset by one of the following conditions: ● AR C: Operati ng m ode PSx is set to Test HSR only permit. I>>>PSx [ * ] 0 ARC: Block/reset HSR 1 303 104 0: No 1: Yes ARC: HSR not permitted 303 150 ARC: TDR block. ● ARC : O pe rating mode P Sx is set to TDR only permitted.f.f. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-225 . ● An HSR is not permitted because an HSR or TDR has already occurred within the current ARC cycle.6 Blocking and Resetting the Tripping Times Except by the setting value Blocked the HSR tripping time stages are blocked or reset by one of the following conditions: ● AR C: Operati ng mode PSxis set to Test HSR only permit. ● The ARC is blocked. ● The ARC is blocked.

provided that the starting condition is met.27. 6-34)). The function ARC: Blocking trip NOT has been assigned to the second input on this AND element. An ARC cycle is running if the ARC is not blocked and one of the following conditions is met: 3. By using the programmable logic a binary signal input with serial operate delay and an AND element is implemented. ● ARC is blocked. The output from the AND element must be included in the configuration of the “m out of n” selection for the general trip command. The tripping time can be started by the output signal A RC : St art b y LOGI C. ● The reclaim time is running.assignm .1.assignm . As the ARC cycle proceeds.8 ● The operative time is running.g.27.9 Example of Programmable Logic in the ARC This example (see Fig. 2 (030 004) OR LOGIC : Outpu t 01 ( t) (042 033) AND NOT 3-226 AR C: Blocki ng trip (042 000) P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . and Programmable Logic If the ARC is ready. 1 (030 000) OR e. One or more starts do not trigger a tripping time stage because the relevant tripping time stages are disabled (t set to Blocked). the GFDSS Function. List parameter LOGIC : Fct. or start of a test HSR).27. ARC permits the generation of a trip command by the other protection functions if one of the following conditions is met: ● ARC cycle running is not applicable. Blocking the DTOC or IDMT Protection Function.11. ● A dead time is running. (p. 3-179. If a tripping time stage is started in this condition by an additional starting and as long as no final trip command has been issued. ● The operative time is running during a running tripping time. it will block the trip signals of DTOC and IDMT1 and IDMT2 protection as well as the GFDSS function and the programmable logic via the signal AR C: Block ing t ri p. ● A relevant starting type begins while a dead time is running. as long as the signal ARC : R eady is present at this time. with the presence of a relevant starting option (DTOC/IDMT starting. and ARC is not ready. ● The final reclaim time is running.5. the ARC again generates a trip command. the signal ARC : R eady is no longer taken into account. ● Only an HSR test is permitted (Test HSR only permit). 3. outp. 3-227)) illustrates the possible interconnection and the binary signal output for starting the tripping time stage via a binary signal input. LOGIC: Input 04 EXT (034 003) LO GIC : F ct. starting via programmable logic.P139 3. For this example the following list parameters need to be set from the local control panel (see Section 6. outp.7 3 Operation ARC Cycle An ARC cycle begins. GFDSS. (p.

3.27. 2 [ 030 004 ] LOGIC: Op. which implements a check of the synchronism conditions. 1 [ 030 000 ] LOGIC: Op. LOGIC: Fct. 3-179: Example of programmable logic in the ARC. mode t output 1 [ 030 001 ] ARC: Fct. One of the options offered by the programmable logic is the triggering of the ARC by an external protection device.10 General Control Functions The entire ARC sequence is monitored and controlled by a sequence control function. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-227 . reclosure requires a close enable by the ASC function.assgn. tLOGIC [ 015 033 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 m out of n Signal n LOGIC: Output 01 t 1 out of n 0 ARC: Start by LOGIC [ 037 078 ] LOGIC: Output 01 (t) LOGIC: Fct.P139 3 Operation In general. outp.assignm. mode t output 2 [ 030 005 ] m out of n ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] LOGIC: Output 02 (t) LOGIC: Output 02 (t) [ 042 035 ] S8Z5049B Fig. While the ASC function is enabled.assignm. any equation within the programmable logic function can be used to start the ARC tripping time. outp.

permit. [ 037 002 ] DTOC: ARC starting I> ARC: Dead time TDR runn.interr. TDR PSx [ * ] ARC: Reclaim time PSx [ * ] ARC: Enabled [ 015 064 ] ARC: Ready [ 004 068 ] ARC: Trip signal [ 039 099 ] ARC: Blocked [ 004 069 ] ARC: Cycle running [ 037 000 ] MAIN: General starting [ 040 000 ] ARC: Dead time HSR runn.N> 303 102 304 368 IDMT1: Starting Iref. permit. [ 037 003 ] ARC: Oper. CB trip [ 036 040 ] 305 466 DTOC: Starting IN>>> [ 039 078 ] ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] ARC: (Re)close request [ 037 077 ] IDMT: ARC Starting Iref.P139 3 Operation ARC: Operative time PSx [ * ] ARC: Operating mode PSx [ * ] ARC: HSR dead time PSx [ * ] ARC: TDR dead time PSx [ * ] ARC: No.neg> [ 040 107 ] ARC: HSR not permitted ARC: Starting GFDSS ARC: TDR not permitted 303 150 303 113 303 151 ARC: HSR ARC: Start by LOGIC [ 037 078 ] ARC: Trip time HSR elaps. time running [ 037 005 ] 305 463 ARC: Reclaim time running [ 036 042 ] DTOC: ARC starting I>> 305 464 DTOC: Starting I>>> [ 039 075 ] ARC: (Re)close signal HSR [ 037 007 ] DTOC: ARC starting IN> ARC: (Re)close signal TDR [ 037 006 ] 305 465 DTOC: ARC starting IN>> ARC: Sig. 3-228 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P> 304 367 ARC: Close request IDMT: ARC Starting Iref.block 305 001 ASC: Close enable [ 037 083 ] ASC: Close rejection [ 037 086 ] ARC: (Re)close request [ 037 077 ] ASC: Enabled [ 018 024 ] ARC: Close command & 303 021 & & ASC: Manual close request 305 000 & * Parameter ARC: Operating mode PSx ARC: Operative time PSx ARC: HSR dead time PSx ARC: TDR dead time PSx ARC: No. 303 153 ARC: Test HSR A-B-C [ 034 023 ] ASC: Active 305 003 ASC: Close enable w. 303 156 ARC: TDR 303 006 303 152 ARC: Trip time TDR elaps. TDR PSx ARC: Reclaim time PSx set set set set 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 051 025 085 045 066 035 095 055 056 030 090 050 057 031 091 051 068 037 097 057 054 028 088 048 19Z8049A Fig. 3-180: ARC sequence control.

If this is the case. the signal AR C: Sig. During the dead time. If TDR after HSR is not permitted then the current reclaim time will be the last reclaim time of the ARC cycle. once the close command pulse time has elapsed. The ARC cycle is completed after the last reclaim time has elapsed. C B t rip (interruption breaker trip signal) is issued and it is reset after the final HSR or TDR of the current ARC cycle. If during the reclaim time there is no starting with trip command. The startings set off the associated tripping time stages and the operative time. If an HSR tripping time is running during the operative time then the signal A RC: Trip s ign al is issued and this signal can lead to a trip command if the function assignment for the trip commands is configured appropriately. With the release of the starting. If the HSR does not succeed and another starting occurs then a TDR is started if at least one TDR is permitted. Instead the signal AR C: Blocki ng trip is set to a logic value of “0” and a trip by other protection functions is enabled. the last reclaim time will be started directly and the blocking of protection trip signals is cancelled. If a trip signal occurs during the last reclaim time then it will be regarded as a final trip. This signal is also reset immediately when the signal AR C : Block ed appears during an ARC cycle. The reclaim time is started simultaneously.11 High-Speed Reclosure (HSR) If the starting conditions are met then any ARC-relevant protection startings will trigger an ARC cycle. If there is no starting during the dead time. If the operative time has elapsed before the starting drops out. a reclosure command is issued once the dead time has elapsed. the signal ARC: ARC: R eclosu re success ful is issued and the ARC cycle is terminated once the reclaim time has elapsed.27.P139 3 Operation 3. the procedures described in the section “Joint Operation of the ARC and ASC Functions” are also applicable. While the ASC function is enabled. the last reclaim time is started and the blocking of protection trip signals is cancelled. the operative time is terminated and the HSR dead time begins. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-229 . If the last reclaim time has elapsed and another starting occurs then the tripping time stages are no longer started. int err . the P139 keeps checking whether any ARC-relevant startings occur. When the signal ARC: Cycle runn ing appears.

3-181: HSR signal sequence (example shown is with ASC disabled – see also section “Joint Operation of the ARC and ASC Functions”). [ 037 002 ] MAIN: Close command [ 037 009 ] ARC: Reclaim time running [ 036 042 ] ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] ARC: Reclosure successful [ 036 062 ] ARC: Sig. 3-230 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .time I> PSx ARC: Operative time PSx ARC: HSR dead time PSx ARC: Reclaim time PSx set set set set 015 024 025 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 072 040 000 060 066 035 095 055 056 030 090 050 054 028 088 048 MAIN: Close cmd.interr. CB trip [ 036 040 ] Parameter ARC: HSR trip.pulse time [015 067 ] ARC: No.time I>runn 303 154 ARC: Trip signal [ 039 099 ] DTOC: Trip signal tI> [ 041 020 ] MAIN: Gen. time running [ 037 005 ] ARC: Dead time HSR runn.P139 3 Operation HSR has failed HSR successful ARC: Ready [ 004 068 ] ARC: Cycle running [ 037 000 ] DTOC: ARC starting I> 305 463 ARC: HSR trip. trip command 1 [ 036 071 ] Terminated Terminated ARC: Oper. permit. TDR PSx Setting: 0 19Z5050A Fig.

If the ASC function decides against a reclosure then the reclaim time is started and the ARC cycle is completed after the reclaim time has elapsed. and this signal can lead to a trip command if the function assignment for the trip commands is configured appropriately. illustrated for a high-speed reclosure (HSR). or if its decisions are to be ignored. a close request is sent to the ASC. 3-232) shows the joint operation of the ARC and ASC functions. then there is a close enable. 3-182. the operative time is terminated and the HSR dead time begins. The ASC checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a HSR tripping time is running during the operative time then the signal A RC : Tri p si gnal is issued. (p. If the ASC is disabled or deactivated. If the starting conditions are met then any ARC-relevant protection startings will trigger an ARC cycle.P139 3 Operation 3. the signal AR C: Re closu re s ucces sfu l is issued and the ARC cycle is terminated once the reclaim time has elapsed. Moreover. If during the reclaim time there is no starting with trip command. The startings set off the associated tripping time stages and the operative time.27. After the dead time has elapsed.12 Joint Operation of the ARC and ASC Functions Fig. the reclaim time is started. If a positive decision is reached during the ASC operative time. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-231 . and the close command is issued. With the release of the starting. then a close command is issued immediately.

P139 3 Operation Close enable Close reject ARC: Ready [ 004 068 ] ARC: Cycle running [ 037 000 ] DTOC: ARC starting I> 305 463 ARC: HSR trip. time running [ 037 005 ] ARC: Dead time HSR runn. TDR PSx Setting: 0 19Z51BHA Fig. 3-232 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . permit.pulse time [015 067 ] ARC: No.time running [ 037 093 ] ASC: Close enable [ 037 083 ] ASC: Close rejection [ 037 086 ] MAIN: Close command [ 037 009 ] ARC: Reclaim time running [ 036 042 ] ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] ARC: Reclosure successful [ 036 062 ] ARC: Sig.time I>runn 303 154 ARC: Trip signal [ 039 099 ] MAIN: Gen.interr. CB trip [ 036 040 ] Parameter ARC: HSR trip.time I> PSx ARC: Operative time PSx ARC: HSR dead time PSx ARC: Reclaim time PSx ASC: Operative time PSx set set set set 015 024 025 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 018 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 072 040 000 060 066 035 095 055 056 030 090 050 054 028 088 048 010 034 034 034 MAIN: Close cmd. 3-182: HSR signal sequence (example shown is with ASC enabled). trip command 1 [ 036 071 ] Terminated Terminated ARC: Oper. [ 037 002 ] ARC: (Re)close request [ 037 077 ] Terminated ASC: Operat.

P139 3 Operation 3.13 Test HSR A test HSR can only be triggered when the ARC is ready to operate and if the operating mode has been set to Test HSR only permit. IDMT and other protection functions is cancelled so that any system fault can be properly cleared.27. ARC: Test HSR A-B-C USER [ 011 066 ] 0 1 0: don't execute ARC: Test HSR A-B-C [ 034 023 ] 1: execute ARC: Test HSR A-B-C EXT [ 037 017 ] ARC: Ready [ 004 068 ] ARC: Reject test HSR [ 036 055 ] S8Z5040A Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-233 . 3-183: Test HSR. Once the close command pulse time has elapsed. The subsequent sequence corresponds to a successful HSR (open and reclose command when the HSR dead time has elapsed). Each “Test HSR” request that does not result in a test HSR generates the signal AR C: R eject test HSR. further triggering during the reclaim time does not result in a further HSR. a trip signal of defined duration is issued. A test HSR can be triggered either via setting parameter or via a binary signal input and adds an increment to the A RC: Number HSR A-B-C counter. the blocking of the trip signals from the DTOC. In this operating mode. Once a test HSR has been triggered.

A TDR may occur after a HSR if reclosure has occurred as the result of the HSR or if the operating mode set for the ARC allows only TDRs. The operative time is started simultaneously. Once the dead time has elapsed. During the dead time. The ARC cycle is completed after the last reclaim time has elapsed. If during the last reclaim time there is no starting with trip command. While the ASC function is enabled. The reclaim time is started simultaneously. the signal ARC: Sig. a reclosure command is issued once the dead time has elapsed. If a trip signal occurs during the last reclaim time then it will be regarded as a final trip. the operative time is terminated and the TDR dead time begins. Instead the signal A RC : Bl ockin g tri p is set to a logic value of “0” and a final trip by other protection functions is enabled. If there is a new starting during the reclaim time and at least one TDR is still permitted then the reclaim time is terminated and another trip is issued when the tripping time has elapsed. If there is no starting during the dead time. a further reclosure command is issued. the procedures described in the section “Joint Operation of the ARC and ASC Functions” are also applicable. When the signal A RC : C ycl e run n in g appears. This is only possible if the setting for A RC : No. once the close command pulse time has elapsed. 3-234 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .14 3 Operation Time-Delay Reclosure (TDR) Multiple reclosures using TDRs are possible if the operating mode is set accordingly. the signal A RC : Re closure succe ssful will be issued. If a TDR tripping time is running during the operative time then the signal ARC: Trip signal is issued and this signal can lead to a trip command if the function assignment for the trip commands is configured appropriately.P139 3. permit. TDR PSx (number of permitted TDRs) is not zero. If this is the case. C B trip (interruption breaker trip signal) is issued automatically and it is reset after the final HSR or TDR of the current ARC cycle. If no further TDR is permitted during the current ARC cycle then this will be the last reclaim time. If the operative time has elapsed before the starting drops out. If the last reclaim time has elapsed and another starting occurs then the tripping time stages are no longer started. the P139 keeps checking whether any ARC-relevant startings occur.int er r. With the release of the starting. the last reclaim time is started and the blocking of protection trip signals is cancelled. If the starting conditions are met then any ARC-relevant protection startings will trigger the associated tripping times. the last reclaim time will be started directly and the blocking of protection trip signals is cancelled. This signal is also reset immediately when the signal AR C: Bl ocke d appears during an ARC cycle.27.

TDR PSx 056 030 090 050 Setting: 2 057 031 091 051 054 028 088 048 19Z5051A Fig.time I>runn 303 154 ARC: TDR trip. [ 037 003 ] MAIN: Close command [ 037 009 ] Terminated Terminated ARC: Reclaim time running [ 036 042 ] ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] ARC: Sig.interr.P139 3 Operation HSR has failed DTR has failed TDR successful ARC: Ready [ 004 068 ] ARC: Cycle running [ 037 000 ] DTOC: ARC starting I> 305 463 ARC: HSR trip. 3-184: Signal sequence of a failed HSR followed by a failed TDR and then by a final successful TDR (example shown is with ASC disabled). permit. time running [ 037 005 ] ARC: Dead time HSR runn. [ 037 002 ] ARC: Dead time TDR runn.time I> PSx ARC: TDR trip. trip command 1 [ 036 071 ] Terminated Terminated Terminated ARC: Oper. CB trip [ 036 040 ] ARC: Reclosure successful [ 036 062 ] Parameter ARC: HSR trip.pulse time [015 067 ] ARC: No. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-235 .time I>runn 303 155 ARC: Trip signal [ 039 099 ] MAIN: Gen.time I> PSx ARC: Operative time PSx ARC: HSR dead time PSx ARC: TDR dead time PSx ARC: Reclaim time PSx set set set set 015 024 025 025 015 024 025 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 025 015 024 024 028 1 2 3 4 072 040 000 060 073 041 001 061 066 035 095 055 MAIN: Close cmd.

16 Counter for Number of CB Operations The maximum number of CB operations within an ARC cycle (or within a specific time period) may be set with parameter MAI N: CB1 max. 3-185: ARC counters.e. ope r. oper.15 3 Operation ARC Counters The following events are counted: ● Number of high-speed reclosures (HSR) that have been carried out ● Number of time-delay reclosures (TDR) that have been carried out. The counter at MAI N: CB1 act. in particular there will be no blocking of CB operation! When a CB fault has occurred (i. is immediately set to 1. cap.as s ign The number of CB operations permitted. d ev ice open and DEV01 : Sw itch . Operation of the CB is recognized from the contact position signals DEV0 1: Switch. cap. ARC: (Re)close signal HSR [ 037 007 ] + ARC: Number HSR A-B-C [ 004 007 ] R ARC: (Re)close signal TDR [ 037 006 ] + ARC: Number TDR [ 004 008 ] R ARC: Reset counters USER [ 003 005 ] 0 1 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute 0: don't execute 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] ARC: Reset counters EXT [ 005 244 ] 12Z6147A Fig. ca p.27. 3-236 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . are then decremented by 1 with each CB operation. ope r.de vice clos e d. Associated with this parameter is the counter at MAIN: CB1 act. The associated counters can be reset either individually or as a group. 3. may only be decremented to a value of 1. to which the maximum number of CB operations permitted is assigned as soon as the positive edge of an event is present that has been selected by a “1 out of n” parameter at MA IN : CB1 re ady f ct. MAIN: CB1 fau lty E XT is set to Yes) the counter MAIN : C B1 act . Reaching a value of 1 will in no way effect the protection or control functionality. cap.P139 3. cap. op er. set with the counter at MAIN: CB 1 act .27. ope r.

3-79)). and voltage. angle. Parameters and configured binary signal inputs have equal status. It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset via ARC : Enable PSx. two voltages – generally the voltages on the line and busbar sides – are compared for differences in frequency.P139 3 Operation 3. 3.g.11.28.28 Automatic Synchronism Check (Function Group ASC) The automatic synchronism check (ASC) function allows the P139 to verify that before a close or reclose command is issued synchronism exists between system sections that are to be synchronized (paralleled) or whether one of the system sections is de-energized. the busbar voltage VA-B is the reference voltage. ASC: Measurement loop PSx [ * ] V̲A-G V̲B-G V̲C-G ASC: Select. If only the ARC: Enabl e EX T function is assigned to a binary signal input. If only the AR C: Dis able E XT function has been assigned to a binary signal input. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-237 . then the ASC will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge.loop PG 305 008 1: Loop A-G 2: Loop B-G ASC: Vmeas 305 007 3: Loop C-G 4: Loop A-B Parameter ASC: Measurement loop PSx set set set set 031 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 5: Loop B-C 6: Loop C-A 060 044 044 044 47Z0125A Fig. If these enabling functions have been activated. The function is enabled generally (independently of the parameter subsets) at AR C : Gener al enabl e U SER. meas. (p. ASC can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The measurement loop must be set to correspond to the reference voltage connection (ASC: Measur eme nt loop P Sx) so that the correct measuring voltage is selected for the comparison. 3-186: Selecting the measurement loop. In order to check for synchronism. the line side or the busbar side). Connecting the reference voltage transformer will determine which of the system sections will provide the reference voltage (e. In the connection example shown in section “Conditioning of the Measured values” (see Section 3. then a signal at this input will have no effect.1 Disabling and Enabling the ASC Function The function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or through binary signal inputs.

assignm. U xxx [ xxx xxx ] U x1 U x2 U x3 U xx Address 037 049 Address 037 061 ASC: Ext. 3-238 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P139 3 Operation If the ASC function is disabled an activation enable will always be issued./user enabled [ 037 092 ] ASC: Enable EXT [ 037 049 ] ASC: Enable USER [ 003 136 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute ASC: Disable EXT [ 037 061 ] ASC: Disable USER [ 003 135 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute Parameter ASC: Enable PSx set set set set 018 018 018 018 1 2 3 4 020 021 022 023 19Z5232A Fig. 3-187: Enabling/disabling the automatic synchronism check function. ASC: General enable USER [ 018 000 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes ASC: Enable PSx [ * ] 0 1 ASC: Enabled [ 018 024 ] 0: No 1: Yes INP: Fct.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-239 .w.c.b.block 305 001 0 1 ASC: Close reject.w. was tripped or by an appropriately configured binary signal input. The user can also specify separately for high-speed reclosures (HSR) and timedelayed reclosures (TDR) whether reclosure will be carried out with or without a check.rej.b. 3-188: ASC readiness and blocking.28. Blocking can be brought about if a voltage transformer m.w.P139 3 Operation 3.block PSx [ * ] ASC: Close enable w.block PSx ASC: Active for HSR PSx ASC: Active for TDR PSx set set set set 018 077 078 079 018 077 078 079 018 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 003 032 032 032 001 030 030 030 002 031 031 031 19Z51BCA Fig.c.c. The user can specify whether closing or reclosing will always be enabled or not (reclosure with or without a check) when the ASC function is blocked. trip Vref EXT [ 036 086 ] ASC: Blocking EXT [ 037 048 ] ASC: Blocked [ 038 018 ] ASC: Enabled [ 018 024 ] ASC: Ready [ 037 079 ] ASC: Not ready [ 037 082 ] MAIN: Protection active 306 001 ASC: Clos. MAIN: M.2 ASC Readiness and Blocking The ASC function is ready if it is activated and enabled and if there is no blocking.b. trip V EXT [ 004 061 ] MAIN: M.rej.block 305 002 0: No 1: Yes ASC: Active for HSR PSx [ * ] 0 ASC: Active 305 003 1 0: No 1: Yes ARC: HSR 303 156 ASC: Active for TDR PSx [ * ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes ARC: TDR 303 006 ASC: Manual close request 305 000 Parameter ASC: Clos.

3-189: Close request for autoreclose control.3 3 Operation Close Request The ASC function can be triggered by ARC. EXT [ 000 106 ] ASC: Test AR close requ. Close requests via a setting parameter.EXT [ 037 063 ] 50ms 0 1 500ms INP: Fct. close request 306 012 DEV01: Close request ASC: Manual close request 307 001 305 000 ASC: AC effect. [ 008 240 ] 19Z8073A Fig. for DEV01 305 040 ASC: AR close requ. the binary signal input or the control function are accepted only if no ARC cycle is running.close requ. USER [ 008 238 ] 0 1 500ms 1 0: don't execute 1: execute ASC: AR Close request [ 008 239 ] ASC: AR close request EXT [ 008 236 ] 50ms 0 ASC: Enabl.28. assignm. U xxx [ 152 xxx ] U x1 U x2 U x3 U x4 U xx Address 037 063 ASC: Test AR close r.EXT).P139 3. via setting parameters. 3-240 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . from an appropriately configured binary signal input (ASC: Enabl.USER [ 008 237 ] ASC: Test 0 1 100ms 1 305 004 1 500ms 0: don't execute 1: execute ASC: Test AR close r. ARC: (Re)close request [ 037 077 ] ARC: Cycle running [ 037 000 ] ASC: Gen. or via a close request from the control function.close requ.

close request 306 012 DEV01: Close request ASC: Manual close request 307 001 305 000 ASC: AC effect. assignm. 3-190: Close request for manual close command. for DEV01 305 040 ASC: MC close requ. If the close enable is issued before the ASC operative time has elapsing. Otherwise an A SC : C lose r e j ecti on signal is generated for 100 ms. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-241 . The ASC operative time is started with the close request.USER [ 018 005 ] ASC: Test 305 004 0 1 100ms 1 1 500ms 0: don't execute 1: execute ASC: Test MC close requ.close requ. the close command is issued. U xxx [ 152 xxx ] U x1 U x2 U x3 U x4 U xx Address 037 063 ASC: Test MC close r.EXT [ 037 063 ] 50ms 0 1 500ms INP: Fct. [ 034 019 ] ASC: Test MC close r. USER [ 018 004 ] 0 500ms 1 1 0: don't execute 1: execute ASC: MC Close request [ 034 018 ] ASC: MC Close request EXT [ 037 062 ] 50ms 0 ASC: Enabl.P139 3 Operation ARC: (Re)close request [ 037 077 ] ARC: Cycle running [ 037 000 ] ASC: Gen. EXT [ 037 064 ] 19Z8072A Fig.

close request ASC: Gen. close request 306 012 306 012 ASC: Operat. 3-248)).28. (p.8. 3-191: Signal flow for a close enable and a close rejection.28. The following operating mode settings are possible: 3-242 ● Voltage-checked ● Synchronism-checked ● Voltage/synchronism-checked P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 3.pulse time [ 015 067 ] D5Z5073B Fig.time running [ 037 093 ] ASC: Close enable [ 037 083 ] ASC: Close rejection [ 037 086 ] MAIN: Close command [ 037 009 ] MAIN: Close command [ 037 009 ] Parameter ASC: Operative time PSx set set set set 018 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 010 034 034 034 MAIN: Close cmd.4 ASC Operating Modes The criteria for a close enable are determined by the ASC operating mode setting (see Section 3.P139 3 Operation Close enable Close reject ASC: Cycle running [ 038 019 ] ASC: Cycle running [ 038 019 ] ASC: Gen.time running [ 037 093 ] ASC: Operat.

che ck PSx ASC: MC V > sync.che ck P Sx ASC: AR V< volt. che ck P Sx ASC: AR tmin v -check PSx A SC: MC tmin v-ch eck P Sx ASC: AR V> syn c.mode v-chk.28. mode PSx ASC : AR with tCB PSx A SC: MC wit h tC B P Sx ASC : AR Op . Close enable conditions for Auto-reclose control Close enable conditions for Manual close command ASC: AR op.P139 3 Operation 3.5 Extended Settings for the Close Enable Conditions The close enable conditions can now be set separately for auto-reclose control and manual close command.m od e v -chk . HSR or TDR) or by a close request from an external ARC device sent to the binary signal input function ASC: AR close req ue st EXT.chk P Sx The automatic reclosure setting parameters become active when a close request is issued by the integrated ARC (for an RRC.ch eck PSx ASC: MC V < vol t. mod e P Sx ASC: MC op. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-243 .che ck PSx A SC: MC V> volt.P Sx ASC: AR V> volt .che ck PSx ASC: AR D elta Vmax PSx ASC: MC De lta Vmax P Sx ASC : AR Delta f m ax PSx ASC: MC Del ta f max P Sx ASC: AR Delta phi max PSx ASC: MC De lta phi max P Sx ASC: AR tmin sy nc.chk PSx ASC: MC tmin sync.PSx A SC: MC op. This makes it possible to select different operating modes as well as different tolerance ranges.

for tmin. The condition for “slightly asynchronous power systems” is given if the difference in frequencies lies within the range of 10 mHz < Δf < Δfmax. yes yes Close with tCB Δf < 10 mHz no no Normal mode. within operative time.synchr. 3-192: Functional sequence and close conditions for the Synchronism check. within operative time. Raise close command so that closing takes place at Δφ = 0 (taking CD close time and internal delays into account). close if: close if: close if: ΔV < ΔVmax ΔV < ΔVmax ΔV < ΔVmax Δf < Δfmax Δf < Δfmax Δφ < Δφmax Δφ < Δφmax for tmin.6 Considering the CB Close Time In slightly asynchronous power systems. allowing for the set CB close time M AIN: t C B. 47Z1085A_EN Fig. Asynchronous mode.synchr. for tmin. difference in voltage phase angles approaches 0°).synchr. within operative time. 3-244 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .28. Synchronous mode.cl ose is then issued sooner. If this condition and the voltage condition (ΔV < ΔVmax) are met then the next point in time is continuously calculated at which the phasors for Vref and the corresponding voltage of the three-phase system are in phase (e.P139 3 Operation 3. setting A SC: AR with tC B PSx to Yes makes it possible to consider the circuit breaker closing time when issuing a close command. The close command.g.

ch eck P Sx Depending on the operating mode selected for the voltage check. then the close enable is issued after the set minimum time has elapsed.7 Voltage-Checked Close Enable The synchronism-checked close enable can be bypassed using the voltagechecked close enable without affecting the former.ch eck PSx ASC: AR V< vo lt .check PSx ASC: MC V< vol t.28.check PSx ASC: MC V > vol t.P139 3 Operation 3. all three phase-to-ground voltages need to exceed or fall below the set value in order to meet the condition for voltage-checked closing. ASC: AR tm in v-ch eck PSx A SC: MC tmin v-ch eck P Sx The following operating modes for voltage checking can be selected separately for each parameter subset: ● Vref but not V ● V but not Vref ● Not V and not Vref ● Not V or not Vref ● N V&Vref or V&n Vref P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-245 . If the conditions corresponding to the set operating mode for the voltage synchronism check are met. For this purpose the three phase-to-ground voltages and the reference voltage Vref are monitored to determine whether they exceed or fall below the set threshold values. ASC: AR V> vo lt .

check PSx ASC: AR Op.mode v-chk. mode PSx [ * ] 1: Voltage-checked ASC: AR V> volt. mode PSx ASC: AR V> volt.P139 3 Operation ASC: Enabled [ 018 024 ] ASC: Active 305 003 ASC: AR op.ch [ 037 085 ] ASC: Close enable [ 037 083 ] 1 100ms ARC: HSR 1 100ms 303 156 ASC: Close enable. meas.sync./sync. 3-246 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .loop PG ASC: AR Op.check PSx [ * ] 1V̲A-G·√3 1V̲B-G·√3 1V̲C-G·√3 ASC: Select.check PSx [ * ] 3: Volt.ch [ 037 084 ] Parameter ASC: AR op.volt.PSx ASC: AR tmin v-check PSx set set set set 018 018 018 018 026 077 078 079 018 077 078 079 018 018 018 018 018 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 025 026 027 028 017 043 043 043 017 040 040 040 029 030 031 032 018 041 041 041 19Z8080A Fig.check PSx ASC: AR V< volt.mode v-chk. 3-193: Voltage-checked close enable for autoreclose control.PSx [ * ] 1 305 008 2 V̲ref ASC: AR tmin v-check PSx [ * ] 1 V̲ref·√3 1 2 1 2 2 3 4 6 1: Vref but not V 2: V but not Vref 3: Not V and not Vref 4: Not V or not Vref 6: N V&Vref or V&n Vref ASC: Close enable.-checked V̲A-G 1V̲A-G·√3 V̲B-G 1V̲B-G·√3 V̲C-G 1V̲C-G·√3 ASC: AR V< volt.

meas. 3-194: Voltage-checked close enable for autoreclose control for manual close control.PSx [ * ] 1 305 008 2 V̲ref 1 V̲ref·√3 1 2 1 2 2 3 4 6 1: Vref but not V 2: V but not Vref 3: Not V and not Vref 4: Not V or not Vref 6: N V&Vref or V&n Vref ASC: Close enable.ch [ 037 084 ] Parameter ASC: MC op.-checked V̲A-G 1V̲A-G·√3 V̲B-G 1V̲B-G·√3 V̲C-G 1V̲C-G·√3 ASC: MC V< volt. mode PSx [ * ] 1: Voltage-checked ASC: MC V> volt.ch [ 037 085 ] ASC: Close enable [ 037 083 ] 1 100ms 1 100ms ARC: HSR 303 156 ASC: Close enable./sync.loop PG ASC: MC op.volt.mode v-chk.P139 3 Operation ASC: Enabled [ 018 024 ] ASC: Active 305 003 ASC: MC op.check PSx [ * ] 1V̲A-G·√3 1V̲B-G·√3 1V̲C-G·√3 ASC: MC tmin v-check PSx [ * ] ASC: Select.check PSx ASC: MC V< volt.check PSx ASC: MC op.sync.mode v-chk.check PSx [ * ] 3: Volt. mode PSx ASC: MC V> volt.PSx ASC: MC tmin v-check PSx set set set set 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 1 2 3 4 056 057 058 059 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 060 061 062 063 072 073 074 075 19Z8081A Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-247 .

angle difference. ASC : AR Delta f m ax PS x ● ASC: MC V> s yn c. ASC : AR Delta V max P Sx ● A SC: MC D elta V max P Sx The frequency difference between measuring voltage and reference voltage must not exceed the set threshold value. chk P Sx. In the event of another close request. grounding both the phase-to-ground and the phase-tophase voltages are checked. The voltage magnitude difference. t reat .28. P Sx is Low-imped. and frequency difference are stored as measured synchronism data at the time the close request is issued. (When with a three-phase voltage the setting of MAIN: Neutr.chk PS x or A SC: MC tmi n sync. they are automatically overwritten by the new data. Synchronism is recognized if the following conditions are met simultaneously: ● The three phase voltages and the reference voltage must exceed the set threshold value. 3-248 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . the ASC checks the voltages for synchronism. If the setting is Isolated/res.P139 3.) ASC: AR V> sync.) ASC : AR Delta phi max PS x ASC: MC De lta phi max PSx If these conditions are met for at least the set time ASC : A R tmin sync.che ck P Sx A SC: MC D el ta f max PSx The angle difference between measuring voltage and reference voltage must not exceed the set threshold value. (In these comparisons the set offset angle AS C: Ph i of fs e t PSx is taken into account. and frequency is approximately 100 ms.8 3 Operation Synchronism-Checked Close Enable Before a close enable signal is issued.che ck P Sx ● The difference in magnitude between measuring voltage and reference voltage must not exceed the set threshold value. only the phase-to-phase voltages are checked.pt. respectively. angle. then a close enable signal is issued. The ASC operating time for the determination of differences in voltage.ground.

3-195: Synchronism-checked close enable for auto-reclose control. mode PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 4 048 076 077 078 025 026 027 028 034 042 042 042 011 035 035 035 1 * 2 3 1: Voltage-checked 2: Sync. mode PSx ASC: Phi offset PSx ASC: AR V> sync.loop [ 004 088 ] ASC: Volt.check PSx [ * ] V̲A-G V̲A-G⋅√3 V̲B-G V̲B-G⋅√3 V̲C-G V̲C-G⋅√3 ASC: Select. [ 004 091 ] ASC: Frequ. grounding ASC: AR V> sync. diff.loop PG 305 008 V̲ref 1 2 ASC: AR tmin sync.sync.chk PSx set set set set 018 077 078 079 018 077 078 079 018 077 078 079 018 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 012 036 036 036 014 038 038 038 013 037 037 037 015 039 039 039 3: Volt. meas. treat. difference [ 004 090 ] ASC: AR Delta f max PSx [ * ] ASC: Angle difference [ 004 089 ] Δfmax φ ASC: Phi offset PSx ASC: AR Delta phi max PSx [ * ] [ * ] Δφmax φ .ch [ 037 084 ] ASC: Test 305 004 ASC: AR Delta Vmax PSx [ * ] ΔVmax ASC: Volt.P139 3 Operation ASC: Active * Parameter MAIN: Neutr.pt.-checked Parameter ASC: AR Delta Vmax PSx ASC: AR Delta f max PSx ASC: AR Delta phi max PSx ASC: AR tmin sync.φcorr 47Z1112A Fig.pt. PSx ASC: AR op. sel. magnit./sync. meas. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-249 . PSx [ * ] 1: Low-imped. treat.chk PSx 1 V̲ref⋅√3 [ * ] 2 1 1 2 100ms ASC: Close enable.-checked MAIN: Neutr.check PSx set set set set 010 001 001 001 018 018 018 018 018 077 078 079 018 077 078 079 305 003 ASC: AR op.

pt.φcorr 47Z1113A Fig.chk PSx [ * ] 1 V̲ref⋅√3 2 1 1 2 100ms ASC: Close enable. meas.P139 3 Operation ASC: Active * Parameter MAIN: Neutr. 3-196: Synchronism-checked close enable for manual close command. PSx ASC: MC op.sync. mode PSx ASC: Phi offset PSx ASC: MC V> sync.loop [ 004 088 ] ASC: MC Delta f max PSx [ * ] ASC: Volt.-checked MAIN: Neutr. [ 004 091 ] ASC: Frequ.ch [ 037 084 ] ASC: Test 305 004 ASC: MC Delta Vmax PSx [ * ] ΔVmax ASC: Volt. treat./sync.loop PG 1 305 008 2 V̲ref ASC: MC tmin sync. PSx [ * ] 1: Low-imped. 3-250 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . grounding ASC: MC V> sync. diff. treat.check PSx [ * ] V̲A-G V̲A-G⋅√3 V̲B-G V̲B-G⋅√3 V̲C-G V̲C-G⋅√3 ASC: Select. sel. meas.pt. difference [ 004 090 ] ASC: Angle difference [ 004 089 ] Δfmax φ ASC: Phi offset PSx [ * ] ASC: MC Delta phi max PSx [ * ] Δφmax φ .-checked Parameter ASC: MC Delta Vmax PSx ASC: MC Delta f max PSx ASC: MC Delta phi max PSx ASC: MC tmin sync.chk PSx set set set set 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 1 2 3 4 080 081 082 083 084 086 087 088 089 091 092 093 098 099 100 101 3: Volt. mode PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 4 048 076 077 078 056 057 058 059 034 042 042 042 052 053 054 055 1 * 2 3 1: Voltage-checked 2: Sync. magnit.check PSx set set set set 010 001 001 001 000 000 000 000 018 077 078 079 000 000 000 000 305 003 ASC: MC op.

USER ASC: MC close re qu . close request 306 012 ASC: Close rejection [ 037 086 ] ASC: Test 305 004 ASC: Operat. If at the end of the operate time no network synchronism is registered.w. EXT ASC: Te st MC close r. EXT ASC: Tes t AR close re qu.USER ASC: Tes t AR close r.10 Testing the ASC Function For test purposes a close request can be issued via a setting parameters or an appropriately configured binary signal input (see Fig.U SER ASC: Te st MC close r. USER ASC: AR close re qu est EXT ASC: MC Close re qu es t EXT ASC: AR Close request ASC: MC Cl ose reque st ASC : Test AR cl ose r.or synchronism-checked closing are met. 3-198.time running [ 037 093 ] ASC: Close reject. Triggering parameter for auto-reclose control Triggering parameter for manual close command ASC: AR close re qu. In this case no close command is issued and it is not counted. A SC: Test MC close re qu.28. a 100 ms signal ASC : C lose r ejection is issued.28. 3.block 305 002 Parameter ASC: Operative time PSx set set set set 018 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 010 034 034 034 D5Z5076A Fig. 3-252)). then the close enable signal is issued if the conditions for voltage.9 Voltage/Synchronism-Checked Close Enable If this setting has been selected. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-251 . The ASC cycle and the operating time are started by the test close request. (p. The network synchronism is checked during the whole operating time and ASC : Cl ose e nable is set accordingly. Separate triggering parameters are available for testing the function with parameters for manual (MC) and automatic (AR) reclosure. ASC: Operative time PSx [ * ] ASC: Cycle running [ 038 019 ] ASC: Gen. 3-197: ASC sequence control.P139 3 Operation 3.

close request ASC: Gen.time running [ 037 093 ] ASC: Close enable [ 037 083 ] 2 2 ASC: Close rejection [ 037 086 ] 2 ASC: Close rejection [ 037 086 ] ASC: Close enable [ 037 083 ] 1 Parameter ASC: Operative time PSx set set set set 018 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 2 > 100 ms 010 034 034 034 19Z5230A Fig.P139 3 Operation Close enable Close reject ASC: Cycle running [ 038 019 ] ASC: Cycle running [ 038 019 ] ASC: Gen. close request 306 012 306 012 ASC: Operat. 3-198: ASC sequence during testing. 3-252 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .time running [ 037 093 ] ASC: Operat.

(p. PSx set set set set 037 037 037 037 037 037 037 037 1 2 3 4 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 12Z51BGB Fig. for DEV01 305 040 Sel.6. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-253 .check 2: Autom. synchr.28.42. 3-199: Integrating the ASC function into the control and monitoring of switchgear units.synchron.6. However if ASC: Sys te m in tegrat. If the control function issues a close request then the close command for the circuit breaker requires the A SC : Close en able (see Section 3.synchron. P Sx is set to Autom.control Parameter ASC: CB assignment PSx ASC: System integrat. Control’. Data generated and continuously updated by the ASC function is transmitted – when configurations have been set accordingly – to the central control station. This requires that the circuit breaker is assigned to an external device and that the ASC system integration is set to ‘Autom. ASC: Enabled [ 018 024 ] ASC: CB assignment PSx [ * ] No assignment DEV01 DEV02 DEV03 DEVxx ASC: AC effect.synchr. DEV01 ASC: Close enable DEV01 305 041 ASC: Close enable [ 037 083 ] ASC: System integrat. PSx [ * ] 1 2 1: Autom. where operators may make decisions as to which external device is to be given a switching command. 3-397)).P139 3 Operation 3.check ASC will not interfere with any switching commands.11 Integrating the ASC Function into the Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units ASC triggering by a close request from the control functions is also possible.

loop [ 004 088 ] ASC: Volt. magnit. [ 004 091 ] ASC: Angle difference [ 004 089 ] ASC: Frequ.v. 3-254 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .28.12 3 Operation Measured Values Obtained by ASC The following measured values are obtained and calculated during an ASC cycle and are transmitted during a set cycle time: ● Voltage from the reference voltage channel ● Voltage from the selected measuring loop ● Difference in phase voltage magnitudes ● Difference in phase angles ● Frequency difference Outside of the ASC cycle the measured values have the status of Not measured.meas. ASC: Transm. diff.cycle. sel.P139 3. [ 101 212 ] ASC: Cycle running [ 038 019 ] ASC: Voltage Vref [ 004 087 ] ASC: Volt. 3-200: Measured values obtained by ASC. difference [ 004 090 ] 19Z5231A Fig. meas.

close rejections [ 009 034 ] R MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] ASC: Reset counters EXT [ 006 074 ] ASC: Reset counters USER [ 003 089 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute 47Z1377A Fig. close request & + R + 306 012 ASC: No. ASC: Manual close request >S 1 1 305 000 >R 1 MAIN: Close command [ 037 009 ] ASC: Gen.13 ASC Counters The following ASC signals are counted: ● Number of reclosures after a close request via setting parameters or an appropriately configured binary signal input ● Number of close requests ● Number of close rejections The counters can either be reset individually (at the address at which they are displayed) or as a group. man.clos [ 004 009 ] ASC: No. 3-201: ASC counters. close requests [ 009 033 ] R ASC: Close rejection [ 037 086 ] + ASC: No. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-255 .P139 3 Operation 3.28. RC aft.

3-256 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .1 Disabling and Enabling Ground Fault Direction Determination Using Steady-State Values The ground fault direction determination using steady-state values can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. In this case only the filtered residual current is used as a criterion for a ground fault.P139 3. the admittance evaluation mode. as an alternative. 3. Switching over to Steady-state current evaluation is made by setting parameters or an appropriately configured binary signal input. enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set. By using the ARC function it is possible to intervene in the functional sequence of ground fault direction determination using steady-state values. Also possible is a steady-state current evaluation only. Ground fault direction determination is then not possible.29 3 Operation Ground Fault Direction Determination Using Steady-State Values (Function Group GFDSS) Ground fault direction determination is carried out by evaluating the neutralpoint displacement voltage and the residual current using the steady-state power evaluation mode or.29. Moreover.

) not ready [ 038 027 ] & GFDSS: GF (curr. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-257 .) ready [ 038 026 ] & GFDSS: GF (curr. GFDSS: GF (pow.2 Ground Fault Direction Determination Using Steady-State Values Is Ready A ready signal is issued for the evaluation mode selected if the protection and the ground fault direction determination using steady-state values are enabled. GFDSS: Enable PSx [ * ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes GFDSS: General enable USER [ 016 060 ] GFDSS: Enabled [ 042 096 ] & 0 1 0: No 1: Yes & MAIN: Protection active 306 001 GFDSS: Operating mode [ 016 090 ] 1 2 3 1: Steady-state power 2: Steady-state current 3: Steady-state admitt. 3-202: Enabling. [ 039 071 ] & Parameter GFDSS: Enable PSx set set set set 001 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 050 051 052 053 GFDSS: Admittance ready [ 038 167 ] GFDSS: Admittance not ready [ 038 168 ] 12Z6243A Fig.) ready [ 038 028 ] GFDSS: GF (curr. EXT [ 038 020 ] GFDSS: GF (pow.) not ready [ 038 029 ] GFDSS: GF (curr.) eval.) evaluat.29. disabling and readiness of the ground fault direction determination using steady-state values.P139 3 Operation 3.

The connection of the measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting at GFDS S: Meas . GFDSS: Evaluation VNG PSx [ * ] V̲N-G 2 V̲A-G V̲B-G V̲C-G 1 .29. dir ecti on PSx. If the time stage was set to a time delay less than 60 ms only one period will be used for filtering.P139 3 Operation 3. 3. This will result in the suppression of typical ripple-control frequencies in addition to all integer-frequency harmonics.3 Conditioning and Selecting the Measured Values For the conditioning of measured values the P139 is fitted with integrated transformers. 2 1 1: Calculated GFDSS: V̲NG 304 150 2: Measured Parameter GFDSS: Evaluation VNG PSx set set set set 016 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 083 011 012 013 12Z6241A Fig. As an alternative it is possible to use the neutral-point displacement voltage calculated by the P139 from the three phase-to-ground voltages or the displacement voltage measured at the T 90 transformer for steady-state power evaluation. 3-258 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . Depending on the selected operating mode (cos phi circuit or sin phi circuit) the sign of the active power (GF D SS : Op./adm P Sx = sin phi circuit) is used to determine the direction. The measurement is enabled when the time delay set at GF DSS: VNG> PSx and which was triggered by VNG> has elapsed.GF pow .m.29.4 Steady-State Power Evaluation Ground fault direction determination using steady-state values requires the neutral-point displacement voltage and the residual current values to be able to determine a ground fault direction. When the Standard connection has been made a ground fault on the line side will issue the decision “LS” and a ground fault on the busbar side will issue the decision “BS”. Three periods are used for evaluation if the time stage GF DSS: V NG> PSx has been set to a time delay equal to or greater than 60 ms. The current transformer has been especially designed for this application so that it will perform with a very small phase-angle error.m.. The frequency provided by the setting f/fnom is filtered from these values by using a Fourier analysis./adm PSx = cos phi circuit) or of the reactive power (GF D SS: Op.GF pow. 3-203: Selecting the measuring voltage..

[ 009 037 ] GFDSS: VNG> triggered 304 151 C GFDSS: f/fnom (P meas.P139 3 Operation GFDSS: GF (pow.m. int./adm PSx [ * ] GFDSS: Meas.GF pow. direction PSx [ * ] I̲N 1 1 2 2 1: cos phi circuit 1: Standard 2: sin phi circuit 2: Opposite 1: cos phi circuit 2: sin phi circuit C C P GFDSS: Direction LS 304 153 Q GFDSS: Direction BS 304 154 C GFDSS: P 304 155 GFDSS: Q 304 156 Parameter GFDSS: VNG> PSx GFDSS: f/fnom (P meas. t 306 539 0 GFDSS: Grd. fault pow.) PSx GFDSS: tVNG> PSx GFDSS: Op./adm. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-259 ./adm PSx GFDSS: Meas. 3-204: Direction determination with the “Steady-state power” operating mode.) ready [ 038 026 ] C GFDSS: VNG> PSx [ * ] GFDSS: tVNG> PSx [ * ] MAIN: General start.GF pow.) PSx [ * ] GFDSS: V̲NG filtered GFDSS: V̲NG 304 152 304 150 GFDSS: Op. direction PSx set set set set 016 000 000 000 016 001 001 001 016 000 000 000 016 000 000 000 016 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 062 233 234 235 091 044 045 046 061 230 231 232 063 236 237 238 070 002 003 004 12Z6240A Fig.m.

1 3 Operation cos φ Circuit The directional decision is not enabled until the active component of the residual current exceeds the set threshold and the phase displacement between residual current and neutral-point displacement voltage is smaller than the set sector angle. 3-205: Characteristic of the ground fault direction determination using steady-state values.P139 3. 3260). “cos φ” operating mode. The sector angle makes it possible to extend the “dead zone” to take into account the expected phase-angle errors of the measured variables. VNG BS BS GFDSS: Sector angle BS PSx GFDSS: IN. (p.4. These settings make it possible to achieve the characteristic shown in Fig. 3-260 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .and reset-delayed.act>/reac> LS PSx GFDSS: Sector angle LS PSx LS LS D5Z50BLA Fig.29.act>/reac> BS PSx IN GFDSS: IN. 3-205. The trip signal “forward directional” issued by the ground fault direction determination using steady-state values (GFDSS) is blocked by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command. Output of the direction decisions is operate.

3-261).2 sin φ Circuit The direction decision is enabled if the reactive component of the residual current has exceeded the set threshold operate value.4. The “forward directional” trip signal issued by the ground fault direction determination using steady-state values (GFDSS) is blocked by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.and reset-delayed. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-261 . This setting makes it possible to achieve the characteristic shown in Fig. “sin φ” operating mode. Output of the direction decisions is operate.P139 3 Operation 3. (p.act>/reac> LS PSx IN BS LS D5Z50BMA Fig.act>/reac> BS PSx LS GFDSS: IN.29. 3-206: Characteristic of the ground fault direction determination using steady-state values. VNG BS GFDSS: IN. 3-206.

./adm PSx [ * ] C GFDSS: IN.act>/reac> LS PSx [ 1. forward/LS [ 009 035 ] ] φ < sector angle LS GFDSS: Release delay BS PSx [ * ] GFDSS: Operate delay BS PSx C [ GFDSS: Sector angle BS PSx [ * * ] ] GFDSS: Release delay BS PSx GFDSS: Direct.act p. 3-262 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .m. 3.GF pow.act 1./adm PSx GFDSS: Sector angle LS PSx GFDSS: Sector angle BS PSx GFDSS: IN.reac 2. IN./LS [ 009 031 ] GFDSS: Release delay LS PSx [ * ] GFDSS: Operate delay LS PSx [ C * ] GFDSS: Sector angle LS PSx [ * GFDSS: Direct. 3 GFDSS: V̲NG filtered C GFDSS: IN.act>/reac> BS PSx [ 304 152 * ] GFDSS: Q 304 156 IN.P139 3 Operation GFDSS: GF (pow.reac p. 4 1: cos phi circuit * ] 2. /BS [ 009 041 ] Parameter GFDSS: Op. backward/BS [ 009 036 ] φ < sector angle BS GFDSS: GF (curr. [ 004 046 ] 4 3 GFDSS: Current IN. 3-207: Output of the direction decisions with the “steady-state power” operating mode.act>/reac> LS PSx GFDSS: IN..) not ready [ 038 029 ] GFDSS: Starting backw.u. [ 004 045 ] 1 .) ready [ 038 026 ] GFDSS: Op. 3.u. 4 2: sin phi circuit GFDSS: P 304 155 IN.GF pow. 4 GFDSS: Curr. 2 GFDSS: Direction LS 304 153 GFDSS: Direction BS 304 154 ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] GFDSS: Starting forward/LS [ 009 040 ] GFDSS: Trip signal forw.act>/reac> BS PSx set set set set 016 000 000 000 016 000 000 000 016 000 000 000 016 000 000 000 016 000 000 000 1 2 3 4 063 236 237 238 065 242 243 244 068 248 249 250 064 239 240 241 Parameter GFDSS: Operate delay LS PSx GFDSS: Operate delay BS PSx GFDSS: Release delay LS PSx GFDSS: Release delay BS PSx set set set set 016 000 000 000 016 001 001 001 016 001 001 001 016 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 066 245 246 247 069 044 045 046 072 005 006 007 067 251 252 253 073 008 009 010 12Z6242A Fig.m.

6 Steady-State Admittance To determine a ground fault direction the steady-state admittance evaluation requires the neutral-point displacement voltage and the residual current values.29. GFDSS: Admittance ready [ 038 167 ] GFDSS: GF (pow.) PSx [ * ] GFDSS: Release delay IN PSx [ * ] MAIN: General start. [ 004 047 ] Parameter GFDSS: f/fnom (I meas. 3. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-263 . GF (curr.) [ 009 038 ] 306 539 t I̲N 0 0 t GFDSS: Op. 3-208: Evaluation of the residual current.) ready [ 038 026 ] GFDSS: GF (curr. If the residual current value exceeds the set threshold a ground fault signal is issued after the settable operate delay has elapsed. p. 3-209: Counting ground faults.5 Steady-State Current Evaluation The frequency provided by the setting f/fnom is filtered from the residual current value by using a Fourier analysis.u. GFDSS: Ground fault (curr. IN filt. Counting Ground Faults The number of ground faults is counted.) ready [ 038 028 ] C GFDSS: Operate delay IN PSx [ * ] GFDSS: IN> PSx [ * ] GFDSS: f/fnom (I meas. meas) [ 009 003 ] R GFDSS: Reset counters USER [ 003 004 ] 0 1 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute ≥1 0: don't execute 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] GFDSS: Reset counters EXT [ 005 245 ] 12Z61BRA Fig. The counter may be reset either individually or together with other counters. int. delay IN elapsed 304 157 GFDSS: IN> triggered 304 158 GFDSS: I̲N filtered 304 159 GFDSS: Curr.) PSx GFDSS: IN> PSx GFDSS: Operate delay IN PSx GFDSS: Release delay IN PSx set set set set 016 001 001 001 016 001 001 001 016 001 001 001 016 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 092 047 048 049 093 017 018 019 094 020 021 022 095 023 024 025 12Z6244A Fig.29. Three periods are used for evaluation. GFDSS: Direction BS + 304 154 GFDSS: No.P139 3 Operation 3.

Phase-angle errors of the system transformers can be compensated with the setting at GFDSS : C or rect ion angle P Sx. dire ction P Sx.GF pow.m. Depending on the selected operating mode (cos phi circuit or sin phi circuit) the sign of the active power (GFDSS : Op.P139 3 Operation The frequency provided by the setting f/fnom is filtered from these values by using a Fourier analysis.GF pow. When the Standard connection has been made a ground fault on the line side will issue the decision “LS” and a ground fault on the busbar side will issue the decision “BS”. 3-264 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 ./adm PSx = cos phi circuit) or of the reactive power (GFDSS : Op.m. The connection of the measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting at GF D SS: Meas. The measurement is enabled when the time delay set at GFDSS: t VNG> PS x and which was triggered by VNG> has elapsed./adm PSx = sin phi circuit) is used to determine the direction.

/adm. direction PSx [ * ] I̲ 1 1 2 2 1: cos phi circuit 1: Standard 2: sin phi circuit 2: Opposite C GFDSS: Correction angle PSx [ * ] C C P GFDSS: Direction LS Q 304 153 GFDSS: Direction BS 304 154 C GFDSS: P GFDSS: Q Parameter GFDSS: VNG> PSx GFDSS: f/fnom (P meas./adm PSx [ * ] GFDSS: Meas. 3-210: Direction determination with the “Steady-state admittance” operating mode.) PSx [ * ] GFDSS: V̲NG GFDSS: V̲NG filtered 304 150 304 152 GFDSS: Op./adm PSx GFDSS: Correction angle PSx GFDSS: Meas. int.GF pow. C 306 539 GFDSS: tVNG> PSx [ * ] GFDSS: VNG> PSx [ * ] GFDSS: Admittance ready [ 038 167 ] t 0 GFDSS: Grd. [ 009 037 ] GFDSS: VNG> triggered 304 151 C GFDSS: f/fnom (P meas. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-265 .) PSx GFDSS: tVNG> PSx GFDSS: Op.m.m.P139 3 Operation MAIN: General start.GF pow. direction PSx set set set set 016 000 000 000 016 001 001 001 016 000 000 000 016 000 000 000 016 001 001 001 016 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 062 233 234 235 091 044 045 046 061 230 231 232 063 236 237 238 110 026 027 028 070 002 003 004 304 155 304 156 12Z6245A Fig. fault pow.

1 3 Operation cos φ Circuit Direction determination is enabled when the conductance value (conductance G(N)) on the ground return exceeds the set threshold.P139 3. 3-266 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . (p. “cos φ” operating mode.and reset-delayed. 3-211.29. 3-211: Characteristic for ground fault direction determination using steady-state admittance. Output of the direction decisions is operate. The trip signal in forward direction issued by the ground fault direction determination using steady-state values (GFDSS) is blocked by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command. This setting makes it possible to achieve the characteristic shown in Fig. 3-266).6. VNG BS BS GFDSS: G(N)> / B(N)> BS PSx GFDSS: G(N)> / B(N)> LS PSx LS LS 19Z5059A Fig.

“sin φ” operating mode. 3-267).2 sin φ Circuit Direction determination is enabled when the conductance value (susceptance B(N)) on the ground return exceeds the set threshold.29. 3-212. (p. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-267 .P139 3 Operation 3. VNG BS GFDSS: G(N)> / B(N)> BS PSx LS GFDSS: G(N)> / B(N)> LS PSx IN BS LS 19Z5060A Fig. Output of the direction decisions is operate.6. The trip signal in forward direction issued by the ground fault direction determination using steady-state values (GFDSS) is blocked by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.and reset-delayed. This setting makes it possible to achieve the characteristic shown in Fig. 3-212: Characteristic for ground fault direction determination using Steady-state admittance.

forward/LS [ 009 035 ] GFDSS: Release delay BS PSx [ * ] GFDSS: Operate delay BS PSx [ * ] t t 0 0 t GFDSS: Direct. 3./adm PSx GFDSS: G(N)> / B(N)> LS PSx GFDSS: G(N)> / B(N)> BS PSx set set set set 016 000 000 000 016 001 001 001 016 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 063 236 237 238 111 029 030 031 112 032 033 034 Parameter GFDSS: Operate delay LS PSx GFDSS: Operate delay BS PSx GFDSS: Release delay LS PSx GFDSS: Release delay BS PSx set set set set 016 000 000 000 016 001 001 001 016 001 001 001 016 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 066 245 246 247 069 044 045 046 072 005 006 007 073 008 009 010 12Z6246A Fig.) not ready [ 038 029 ] Parameter GFDSS: Op.m.3 Non-Directional Ground Fault Determination The admittance value from the ground return is used for evaluation.u.. If the admittance value exceeds the set threshold a ground fault signal is issued after the settable operate delay has elapsed. 4 5 Y(N) GFDSS: Admitt.u. 4. 5 2: sin phi circuit GFDSS: Starting backw. 3./LS [ 009 031 ] ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] GFDSS: Operate delay LS PSx [ * ] t GFDSS: Release delay LS PSx [ * ] 0 0 GFDSS: Direct. 2 GFDSS: Trip signal forw. 5 C GFDSS: G(N)> / B(N)> BS PSx [ * ] 2.m.GF pow.u..6. B(N) p.P139 3 Operation GFDSS: Admittance ready [ 038 167 ] C GFDSS: Direction LS GFDSS: G(N)> / B(N)> LS PSx [ * ] 304 153 GFDSS: Direction BS GFDSS: Starting forward/LS [ 009 040 ] 304 154 GFDSS: Op. /BS [ 009 041 ] GFDSS: P 304 155 G(N) 1. 3-268 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 3-213: Output of the direction decisions with the “Steady-state admittance” operating mode. 3 GFDSS: V̲NG filtered 304 152 GFDSS: Q 304 156 B(N) 2.GF pow.29. Y(N) p. 4. [ 004 191 ] GFDSS: Conduct. 3./adm PSx [ * ] 1: cos phi circuit 1. backward/BS [ 009 036 ] GFDSS: GF (curr. [ 004 192 ] 5 4 GFDSS: Suscept. [ 004 193 ] 3 1 . G(N) p.

delay Y(N)> PSx GFDSS: Y(N)> PSx [ * ] [ * GFDSS: Rel. GFDSS: Op. 3-123)).) ready [ 038 028 ] GFDSS: GF (pow. The counters may be reset individually or together with other counters (see Section 3.Y(N)> elapsed + 304 175 GFDSS: No.del. fault pow.del. 3. forward/LS [ 009 035 ] + GFDSS: No. 3-215: Counting ground faults. (p. [ 009 002 ] R GFDSS: Direct. delay Y(N)> PSx set set set set 016 001 001 001 016 001 001 001 016 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 113 035 036 037 114 038 039 040 115 041 042 043 12Z6247A Fig. delay Y(N)> PSx ] [ * ] MAIN: General start.7 Counting the Ground Faults Detected by Steady-State Power and Admittance Evaluation The number of ground faults and directional decisions are counted. 306 539 t I̲N 0 0 GFDSS: GF (curr. GF admitt.29. GF power/admitt. [ 009 037 ] + GFDSS: No. GFDSS: Op.delay Y(N)> PSx GFDSS: Rel. GF forward/LS [ 009 000 ] R GFDSS: Direct. Y(N) [ 009 060 ] R GFDSS: Grd.P139 3 Operation The trip signal from the non-directional ground fault determination is blocked by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.) ready [ 038 026 ] t GFDSS: Trip Y(N)> [ 009 075 ] GFDSS: Trip signal Y(N)> [ 009 072 ] ARC: Blocking trip [ 042 000 ] GFDSS: Starting Y(N)> [ 009 074 ] Parameter GFDSS: Y(N)> PSx GFDSS: Oper. backward/BS [ 009 036 ] + GFDSS: No.Y(N)> elapsed 304 175 GFDSS: Admittance ready [ 038 167 ] C GFDSS: Oper. int.11. GF backward/BS [ 009 001 ] R GFDSS: Reset counters USER [ 003 004 ] 0 1 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute ≥1 0: don't execute 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] GFDSS: Reset counters EXT [ 005 245 ] 12Z6191B Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-269 . 3-214: Evaluating admittance./adm.20.

3-270 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . Moreover. the transient ground fault detection function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.P139 3. enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.1 Disabling and Enabling the Transient Ground Fault Detection Function The transient ground fault detection function is available where the P139 has been fitted with voltage transformers and with the transient ground fault evaluation module.30 3 Operation Transient Ground Fault Detection (Function Group TGFD) Ground fault direction is determined by evaluating the neutral-point displacement voltage and the residual current using the transient ground fault measurement method. In this case.30. 3.

30. ● Self-monitoring has detected no faults with transient ground fault detection.60Hz 60: 60 Hz [ 093 098 ] TGFD: Ready [ 037 080 ] TGFD: Blocking EXT [ 004 034 ] TGFD: Direct. fnom [ 010 030 ] 1: Yes 50: 50 Hz SFMON: Fcts. ● The transient ground fault detection function is enabled. disabling and readiness of the transient ground fault detection function. ● The nominal frequency is set to 50 Hz. determined [ 004 030 ] SFMON: TGFD mon. N [ 093 097 ] Parameter TGFD: Enable PSx set set set set 001 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 054 055 056 057 12Z6282A Fig. N [ 093 093 ] SFMON: DAC faulty module N [ 093 095 ] SFMON: +15V faulty mod.P139 3 Operation 3. ● Transient ground fault detection has issued no directional decisions. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-271 . MAIN: Protection active 306 001 TGFD: Enable PSx [ * ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes TGFD: General enable USER [ 016 040 ] 0 TGFD: Enabled [ 037 100 ] 1 0: No MAIN: Nominal frequ.2 Readiness of the Transient Ground Fault Detection Function A ready signal is issued if the following conditions are met: ● Protection is enabled.not perm. N [ 093 096 ] SFMON: -15V faulty mod. 3-216: Enabling.f. triggered [ 093 094 ] TGFD: Not ready [ 037 081 ] SFMON: Module N DPR faulty [ 093 090 ] SFMON: Module N RAM faulty [ 093 091 ] TGFD: Hardware fault 304 207 SFMON: Time-out module N [ 093 092 ] SFMON: Invalid SW vers. ● There is no external blocking.

P Sx.P139 3. PSx. Higher frequency components are filtered out of the measured values for residual current and neutral-point displacement voltage. direc. Trigger decisions for current and voltage are compared to determine the ground fault direction where. When the Standard connection has been made a ground fault on the line side will issue the decision “LS” and a ground fault on the busbar side will issue the decision “BS”. Settable triggers monitor the magnitudes of the residual current and neutral-point displacement voltage harmonics as well as the neutral-point displacement voltage fundamental.30. The time period after which a new transient ground fault may be detected is given by the setting of the operate delay +40 ms. 3-217: Selecting the neutral-point displacement voltage. after it has elapsed. The directional decision is enabled after the operate delay has elapsed. 3-272 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 ..30. 3. As an alternative it is possible to use the neutral-point displacement voltage derived by the P139 from the three phase-to-ground voltages. 2 1: Calculated TGFD: V̲NG 304 200 2: Measured Parameter TGFD: Evaluation VNG PSx set set set set 016 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 048 058 059 060 12Z6283A Fig. which follows monitoring of the neutral-point displacement voltage's fundamental. The sign of the neutral-point displacement voltage's harmonic component is determined immediately after the current harmonic has exceeded the positive or negative threshold value. The connection of the measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting for TGFD: Me asure m.4 Determining the Ground Fault Direction A ground fault's direction can only be determined if the TGFD function is ready.. separately for the positive and negative half-waves. The connection of the measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting at TGFD: Measurem. direc. evaluation depends on the connection of the measuring circuits. Furthermore the operation of a current trigger will start a timer stage that. will enable the TGFD function to detect further transient ground faults. circ.3 3 Operation Conditioning and Selecting the Measured Values To condition measured values VNG and IN the P139 is fitted with integrated transformers. as a rule. IN will in no way influence direction determination by the transient ground fault detection function. TGFD: Evaluation VNG PSx [ V̲N-G * ] 2 1 V̲A-G V̲B-G V̲C-G 1 . To determine the ground fault direction the P139 will evaluate trigger decisions by the harmonics monitoring function. A pole reversal of the residual current measuring circuit through the global setting at MA IN: Conn. m eas.

PSx set set set set 016 001 001 001 016 001 001 001 016 001 001 001 016 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 042 064 065 066 041 061 062 063 044 067 068 069 045 073 074 075 12Z62EUA Fig.P139 3 Operation TGFD: Hardware fault 304 207 TGFD: Ready [ 037 080 ] TGFD: IN. direc. directional decisions are output until the neutral-point displacement voltage's fundamental component no longer exceeds the trigger threshold set at TGFD: VNG> P Sx.p> PSx TGFD: VNG> PSx TGFD: Operate delay PSx TGFD: Measurem.p> PSx C [ * ] TGFD: IN. 3-218: Direction determination. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-273 . PSx [ * ] TGFD: Direction LS 1 304 204 1 TGFD: Direction BS 2 304 205 2 1: Standard 2: Opposite Parameter TGFD: IN. direc.p triggered I̲N 304 201 Positive peak value Negative peak value TGFD: VNG> PSx [ TGFD: V̲NG * TGFD: Operate delay PSx [ * ] ] TGFD: Ground fault [ 004 033 ] 304 200 C TGFD: VNG> (f0) triggered 304 202 TGFD: VNG> triggered 304 203 Positive peak value S1 1 Negative peak value R1 S1 1 R1 S1 1 R1 S1 1 R1 TGFD: Measurem. Directional decisions are output for the duration of the set buffer time. If buffer time is set to 0 s.

3-220: Resetting directional decisions. TGFD: Reset signal USER [ 003 009 ] 0 1 ≥1 TGFD: Signals reset [ 004 141 ] 100 ms 0: don't execute 1: execute TGFD: Reset signal EXT [ 004 140 ] MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute ≥1 TGFD: Reset signal 304 206 MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] 12Z61EWA Fig. a setting parameter or through an appropriately configured binary signal input. Should the buffer time be set to ∞ (“infinity”) the directional decision must be reset so that a new transient ground fault can be detected. 3.30. 3-274 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .5 Resetting a Directional Decision While the buffer time is elapsing the directional decisions can be reset from the integrated local control panel.P139 3 Operation TGFD: Hardware fault 304 207 TGFD: Buffer time PSx [ TGFD: Direction LS 304 204 TGFD: Direction BS 304 205 * ] TGFD: Forward / LS [ 004 031 ] 1 R TGFD: Backward / BS [ 004 032 ] 1 R t=0s TGFD: Reset signal 100ms TGFD: Direct. 3-219: Output of directional decisions. determined [ 004 030 ] 0 304 206 TGFD: VNG> (f0) triggered 304 202 S1 1 R1 Parameter TGFD: Buffer time PSx S1 1 set set set set 016 001 001 001 R1 1 2 3 4 043 070 071 072 12Z62EVA Fig.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-275 . triggered [ 093 094 ] TGFD: VNG> triggered 304 203 TGFD: VNG> (f0) triggered & 304 202 TGFD: Ready [ 037 080 ] MT_RC: Reset record.6 Monitoring the Measured Values TGFD is blocked after 5 s if the respective set threshold value is exceeded by the current or the higher frequency content of the neutral-point displacement voltage in the absence of a ground fault (that is while the neutral-point displacement voltage fundamental stays below the set trigger threshold). 3.30. TGFD: Ground fault [ 004 033 ] + TGFD: No. GF [ 004 015 ] R TGFD: Forward / LS [ 004 031 ] + TGFD: No. 5s TGFD: IN. The counters can be reset either individually or as a group. USER [ 003 008 ] 1: execute MT_RC: Reset record.7 Counting the Transient Ground Faults The number of transient ground faults and directional decisions are counted. EXT [ 005 240 ] 12Z61EXB Fig.p triggered 30 ms & 304 201 0 SFMON: TGFD mon. GF forward/LS [ 004 013 ] R TGFD: Backward / BS [ 004 032 ] + TGFD: No. 3-221: Monitoring the measured values. GF backward/BS [ 004 014 ] R TGFD: Reset counters USER [ 003 022 ] 0 1 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] ≥1 0: don't execute 1: execute 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] TGFD: Reset counters EXT [ 005 246 ] 12Z61EYA Fig.P139 3 Operation 3.30. 3-222: Counting the transient ground faults.

3-159)) and “Unbalance Protection (I2>.31 3 Operation Motor Protection (Function Group MP) The P139 features a motor protection function (MP function).33. (p. Moreover. enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset. 3. 3-276 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . MP: General enable USER [ 017 059 ] 0 MP: Enabled [ 040 115 ] 1 0: No 1: Yes MP: Enable PSx [ * ] 0 1 0: No Parameter MP: Enable PSx set set set set 024 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 148 147 197 147 1: Yes 19Z5073A Fig. 3-223: Enable/disable the motor protection function.22. Section 3.31. (p.1 Enable/Disable the Motor Protection Function The motor protection function can be enabled or disabled via a parameter setting. Protection functions specially adapted for this application are available: ● Overload protection including a thermal replica of the motor (complete memory) ● Taking into account heat dispersion processes in the rotor after several startups ● Separate cooling time constants for running and stopped motors ● Monitoring of startup frequency including re-start blocking ● Heavy starting logic ● Locked rotor protection ● Logic function for the operating mode including thermal overload protection (THERM) ● Special startup measured values during commissioning ● Running Time Meter The definite-time overcurrent protection stages required for global motor protection operation as well as the necessary unbalance protection are described in sections “DTOC Protection” (Section 3.P139 3. respectively. 3-303))”. This motor protection function is specifically designed to protect directly switched highvoltage asynchronous motors with thermally critical rotors.

/Iref IP. For this the maximum value of the three phase currents is evaluated.P> is used as a starting stage for overload protection.max r.31. When the threshold kP·Iref is exceeded then the current stage operates. MP: Enabled [ 040 115 ] MAIN: Protection active MP: Iref PSx [ * ] 306 001 I̲A MP: Factor kP PSx [ * ] I̲B I̲C MP: IP. 3-224: Starting conditions. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-277 .max r.P> is used as the starting signal.m./Iref I̲max 304 740 Iref⋅kP MP: Operating mode PSx [ * ] 0 MP: Starting k*Iref> [ 041 057 ] 1 0: Without THERM 1: With THERM MP: St. The settable reference current Iref is used as the reference quantity for the operate value and the tripping time.s.P139 3 Operation 3.2 Starting Conditions The overcurrent stage Iref. kP⋅Iref>/Istup> 304 703 MP: Istup> 304 702 Parameter MP: Iref PSx MP: Factor kP PSx MP: Operating mode PSx set set set set 017 024 024 025 017 024 024 025 018 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 012 131 181 131 040 132 182 132 041 142 192 142 19Z5074A Fig.m. The output signal from the current stage Iref.s.

P139 3 Operation 3. The end of a startup process is detected when.g.P>.31. ● Startup: The onset of startup in a directly switched asynchronous motor is detected when the measured maximum RMS phase current value exceeds the threshold value set at MP: IStUp> PSx for a minimum time duration period set at MP: tIStUp> P Sx. The possible individual operating states with a directly switched asynchronous motor are detected via various trigger stages as listed below: ● Machine stopped: If the measured maximum RMS phase current value has dropped below the threshold of 0. The overload memory will be incremented if the measured maximum RMS phase current value exceeds the threshold value of Iref. after the onset of startup has been identified.1·Iref the function will decide on “machine stopped” (signaled by MP: Machi ne s t opped). No-load currents for asynchronous motors lie significantly above the current threshold value of 0. the thermal replica is plotted as precisely as possible.3.1 Operating State Recognition The P139 features an operating state recognition function with which the overload protection function is controlled. the measured maximum RMS phase current value falls below the threshold value of 0.1 Iref. ● Overload range: For a machine the overload range starts with current values exceeding the maximum permissible continuous thermal current of the machine. e. 3-278 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .3 Overload Protection 3.6·IStUp>. ● Machine running: If the measured maximum RMS phase current value exceeds the threshold of 0.1·Iref the function will decide on “machine running” (signaled by MP : Machin e run n ing).31.

● 60%: The value 60% temporarily represents the minimum value stored by the overload memory after three consecutive startups of the machine. The following values stored in the overload memory have particular significance within the range of this model: ● 0%: The value 0% represents the cold state of a protected object. ● 20%: The value 20% represents the minimum value stored by the overload memory when the protected object is at operating temperature or after initial startup.3.P139 3 Operation 3.2 Overload Memory The thermal overload protection function featured by the P139 is specifically suited for protection of high-voltage asynchronous motors with thermally critical rotors.g. The hysteresis for a defined release of the trip signal is 1%. a very common motor type. A running machine is always considered as being at operating temperature.31. The overload memory mapping process that results in a replica of the actual thermal conditions existing in the protected object includes the following operations: P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-279 . it has cooled down to ambient temperature. ● 40%: The value 40% temporarily represents the minimum value stored by the overload memory after two consecutive startups of the machine. For this there is a specific overload memory available that presents a replica of the protected object’s relative overtemperature based on the coolant temperature and with a values range from 0 to 100 %. e. ● 100%: The instant when the overload memory reaches the value of 100% (trip threshold) an overload protection trip will be issued.

0. The counter reading at any given time indicates the number of consecutive startups that are still permitted.31. 3-225. on the selected tripping characteristic (MP : Ch ar acte r.0. If the machine is running.-up PSx of the overload memory.2 ● Machine stopped: m0 t = τmachine stopped · ln m(t) 3. then the stored value is continuously and automatically pre-decreased. This time constant is used to map the heat transfer in the asynchronous motor from the copper of the rotor to the rotor’s iron core. Depending on the setting of MP: Perm. the permissible number of consecutive startups is either “three from cold or two from warm” or “two from cold or one from warm”. ● Mapping of cooling: When the measured maximum RMS phase current value has fallen below the current threshold of IkIref. The cooling time duration from an initial value m0 to an interim value of m(t) can be determined as follows: ● Machine running: m0 .2 t = τrotating machine · ln m(t ) . governed by the settable heat dispersion time constant MP: Tau after st. 3281)): 3-280 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P> and when the mapping of heat transfer. if applicable. ups PS x. The rate of this increase of the storing value depends on the magnitude of the maximum RMS phase current value and. stoppe d PSx and will continue until the minimum loading state of 0% is reached. If the machine is stopped. for example. then cooling of the protected object is simulated by a continuous decreasing of the value stored in the overload memory. The rate for this pre-decreasing of the stored value is constant and ranges at about 40% of the discharge (τ after startup = 20) within a time duration of 60 s. has been completed. This continuous pre-decreasing of the stored value is carried out linearly up to the minimum value stored after initial startup (mentioned above) and depending on the count of the startup frequency monitor. No . decreasing of the stored value will be governed by the constant MP: Tau mach.6·IStUp> (load range). ● Mapping of heat transfer: After a startup has been identified and the maximum RMS phase current value has fallen below the current threshold of 0.P139 3 Operation ● Mapping of heating: Basically the overload memory is continuously incremented when the maximum RMS phase current value measured will have exceeded the threshold value of kP·Iref (overload range). (p. type P P Sx).3 Startup Frequency Monitoring The P139 features a startup counter in “count down” circuit configuration for startup frequency monitoring. to a certain extent. decreasing of the stored value will be governed by the cooling time constant MP: Tau mach. The startup counter is controlled as follows (see Fig.running P Sx and will continue until the minimum loading state of 20% is reached.st .3. Decreasing of the stored value is an exponential function of time.

When the machine is stopped then the startup counter will be incremented by “1” if the stored value in the overload memory drops below the threshold of 40%. 20% or 2%. in conjunction with “mapping of cooling” of the protected object.P139 3 Operation ● Decrementing the startup counter (number of startups still permitted): As the end of a startup is detected. 3. respectively.31. respectively. 3-225: Overload memory and startup counter.3. For this application the P139 features a specific logic function that can be activated by the following two settings: P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-281 . respectively. the startup counter is decremented by “1 ”. When the counter reading reaches its minimum value of “0”. ● Incrementing the startup counter (number of startups still permitted): When the setting for the permissible number of consecutive startups is “three from cold or two from warm” and the machine is running. in conjunction with “mapping of cooling” of the protected object.4 Heavy Starting Logic The heavy starting application involves a situation in which a machine’s startup time tStUp exceeds its maximum possible blocking time tE from operating temperature. When the setting for the permissible number of consecutive startups is “two from cold or one from warm” and the machine is running. then the startup counter is incremented by “1” if the stored value in the overload memory drops below a threshold value of 22%. The signal MP: R ecl osu re bl ocked is withdrawn if the stored value in the overload memory drops below the threshold of 40% (for “three from cold or two from warm”) or 22% (for “two from cold or one from warm”). When the machine is stopped then the startup counter will be incremented by “1” if the stored value in the overload memory drops below the threshold of 20% or 2%. in conjunction with “mapping of cooling” of the protected object. in conjunction with “mapping of cooling” of the protected object. then the signal MP: R ecl osur e bl ocked is issued and can – and indeed should – be configured to an output relay with which CB closure is blocked. m in % Overload memory 100 80 60 40 20 t Startup counter RC blocking 3 2 1 t S8Z5054B Fig. then the startup counter is incremented by “1” if the stored value in the overload memory drops below a threshold value of 40% or 22%.

from an overspeed monitor. -ups PSx)h. which leads to an immediate trip decision. a higher value is set than for the maximum permissible blocking time tE from operating temperature (MP : Bl ocking ti me tE PSx).s t.-up time tStUpPSx). When a running machine is detected once the set time tE has elapsed. the overload memory is automatically set to a value of 100%. then the stored value in the overload memory is automatically frozen and tracking is only restarted after the set startup time tStUp has elapsed. if both settings are identical. the logic function checks to see whether the machine is actually running.serves as the criterion for a running machine. 3-282 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . they have no effect on the protective function and the heavy starting logic is not active. Once the set time tE has elapsed. corrected by the discrimination time tStUp>. These two setting values are only relevant for this particular application. for example .P139 3 Operation ● The permissible number of consecutive startups is limited to “two from cold or one from warm” (MP: P erm. When a locked rotor state is detected after the set time tE has elapsed. No. ● For the permissible startup time tStUp (MP : St. When this logic function has been activated. then the two timer stages tE and tStUp are triggered at the time when the onset of a startup is detected. The presence of an external signal .

At I = 6·Iref.31. 3-285)).cold for the asynchronous motor must be known. The equation for determining the setting value t6Iref can be derived from the above equations for tripping time t. The possibility of choosing between two different tripping time characteristics takes into account the fact that the user or the application may require a more restrictive or a less restrictive type of protection.1 3-283 . Setting the overload protection function on the basis of the “cold” tripping time where m0 = 0 % (“cold curve”) is permitted since the conditions for a machine at operating temperature are automatically taken into account. the tripping times are limited in the direction of lower values. for example.4% and is thus below the specified accuracy of the protection device. selection of the logarithmic characteristic provides significantly higher tripping times than selection of the reciprocally squared characteristic (see Fig.m0) · t6I · 36 · ln ref (I / I ref)2 .cold · (I startup / I ref)2 36 Logarithmic: t6I ref 1 = tblock.3. since the latter characteristic neglects any heat transfer to the cooling medium in the overload range.cold · 36 · ln P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 (I startup / I ref)2 (I startup / I ref)2 .5 Tripping Time Characteristics The P139 user can choose between the following two tripping time characteristics: ● Reciprocally squared: t = (1 .P139 3 Operation 3. the logarithmic characteristic in the overload range also takes into account heat transfer to the coolant. With reference to the basic physical model (two-body model). but this heat transfer becomes less significant as the overcurrent increases. For currents in excess of 10 Iref. (p. For a low overcurrent range. For this the startup current Istartup and the maximum permissible blocking time from cold tblock. 3-227.m0) · t6I ● ref · 36 (I / I ref)2 Logarithmic: t= (I / I ref)2 (1 . The conditional equations for the setting value t6Iref are therefore the following: ● Reciprocally squared: t6I ● ref = tblock. the tripping time increase is only about 1.1 where m0 in each case signifies the pre-charging of the overload memory at time t = 0.

2 1.0 3. 3-226: Tripping time characteristics.P139 3 Operation t in s Startup Overload Load Logarithmic Reciprocally squared 0.0 2.0 I/Iref S8Z5053A Fig. 3-284 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

2. at I/Iref > 2.5 we have m=0.P139 3 Operation 10000 1000 100 t / s 10 1 0.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 I / IB logarithmic characteristic (at t6IB=100s) reciprocally squared characteristic (at t6IB=10s) reciprocally squared characteristic (at t6IB=100s) logarithmic characteristic (at t6IB=1s) logarithmic characteristic (at t6IB=10s) reciprocally squared characteristic (at t6IB=1s) S8Z50D 6A Fig. 3-227: Tripping characteristic of motor protection (at I/Iref = 2. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-285 .5 we have m=0).

it is always necessary to check and ensure that the plausibility condition tblock. the stored value status in the overload memory is always coupled to the reading of the counter MP : St-u ps still pe rmitt.3.6 3 Operation Plausibility Conditions A number of plausibility conditions need to be observed in order to ensure that the protected object is given optimum protection and that unintended tripping is prevented.3. ● Operation condition “machine starting up”: Once the end of a startup is detected and the startup counter is decremented as a result. if the value in the overload memory is set automatically. Therefore. it can therefore be assumed that there is a corresponding extra margin available.7 The setting value for the overload protection function is determined on the basis of the stated maximum permissible blocking time from the cold state tblock.MP). a plausibility check of the thermal replica is automatically performed prior to cyclic processing.dur.take n f . When the calculation is based on a constant startup current (OL_D A : St art-u p cu rre nt. However.cold = 1. However. ● When the permissible number of consecutive startups is set for the sequence 'three from cold or two from warm' and if this set permissible number of consecutive startups is also intended to be used up during operation. a protective trip during the tE period must be guaranteed. ● Operation condition “machine running” but not “starting up”: A cyclic plausibility check of the thermal replica is carried out such that if the stored value in the overload memory is below 20% it is increased to the minimum value of 20% (= machine at operating temperature). then this will result in the plausibility condition tstartup = 0.MP) must not exceed 60%. Initialization or Plausibility Check of the Thermal Replica Under the following conditions.s tartu p. since the startup current decreases during the course of the startup time (OL_D A: T.31. and re-initialization of the thermal replica will be triggered: ● The power supply has been interrupted ● Protection has been disabled (off) ● Motor protection has been disabled (off) If the above conditions no longer apply.cold. when a machine at operating temperature is connected.6·tblock. if appropriate. to the associated minimum value. Therefore. 3-286 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P139 3.31.25·tE is met. ● 3. the stored value in the overload memory is increased.cold. then the heating during startup in the overload memory (OL_D A : Heat.s tart-u p. For each of the above procedures involving initialization or a plausibility check of the thermal replica. the counter reading is also changed to a plausible value as a function of the protection setting. the P139 will not be able to track the thermal replica of the protected object. thereby causing the rate of value storing into the memory to decrease as well. MP) over the entire startup period.

the overload memory will be incremented when the maximum RMS phase current is above the current threshold set at MP: IStUp> P Sx. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-287 . t6Iref = 1s Setting THERM protection: time constant 1 = 300 s. With the onset of another startup of the asynchronous motor (not the first startup). This threshold value set at MP: RC perm it te d.1 Logic Function for the Operating Mode with Thermal Overload Protection (THERM) For particular applications. In such cases the motor protection function (MP) is too restrictive.1 1 3 Setting MP protection: 5 I / Iref 7 9 11 reciprocally squared characteristic. 3-228: Tripping characteristic of motor protection with operating mode With THERM (“cold” characteristic). when mapping protected object cooling.4 Exceptional Overload Protection Cases 3.P139 3 Operation 3.4. trip limit value = 100% S8Z50F3A Fig. If this threshold is not exceeded. 1000 100 t / s 10 1 0. it is possible to change the overload memory threshold value assumed for general use.31. The MP protection function then serves as rotor protection and the THERM protection function as stator protection. the value stored in the overload memory will remain constant and the thermal model of the thermal overload protection function (THERM) will become active.4. to either 40 % (with “three startups from cold or two from warm”) or 22 % (with “two startups from cold or one from warm”).2 Change of Threshold for “Reclosure Permitted” Depending on the particular application. When MP: Op erat in g m ode P Sx is set to With THERM. For such applications the MP and THERM protection functions are combined. Thereafter. 3.31. Θ< P Sx can differ from these average values so as to be more restrictive or less restrictive. the stored value in the memory after a startup will initially be decremented until the mapping of the heat transfer from the copper of the rotor to the rotor core is complete. the thermal model of the THERM protection function will be temporarily blocked during the startup time. the machine may be operated in the overload range for a longer period of time.31.

st.stopped PSx MP: Perm.repl.-ups PSx 1: Reciprocal squared 2. 1st startup MP: Machine stopped 304 701 MP: Istup> Parameter MP: Character.running PSx MP: Tau mach. perm. repl.1⋅Iref MAIN: Protection active MP: RC permitted.stopped PSx [ * ] MP: IP. MP p.st.-up PSx MP: Tau mach.-up time tStUpPSx MP: Blocking time tE PSx set 1 set 2 set 3 set 4 set 4 018 024 024 025 017 024 024 025 017 024 024 025 017 024 024 025 017 024 024 025 043 141 191 141 053 133 183 133 042 134 184 134 043 143 193 143 304 702 047 140 190 140 044 144 194 144 12Z6232A Fig.type P PSx MP: t6Iref PSx MP: Tau after st. [ 005 086 ] Machine starting up MP: Blocking time tE PSx [ * ] MP: Reclosure blocked [ 040 049 ] MP: Trip by failed st-up [ 041 081 ] Freeze memory With heavy starting Memory = 100% With heavy starting MP: Speed monitor n> EXT [ 040 045 ] Machine running With heavy starting MP: Reset therm.buffer MP [ 004 018 ] sequence control Machine stopped MP: IStUp> PSx [ * ] MP: Therm. No. Θ< PSx [ * ] 306 001 Trip memory and MP: Therm. 3-229: Overload protection in motor protection.st.1: 2/1 cold/warm 2: logarithmic 3.-up PSx [ * ] MP: Tau mach.running PSx [ * ] MP: St./Iref MP: Perm.p.u.s.-ups PSx [ * ] 304 740 < 0. No.-up time tStUpPSx [ * ] MP: tIStUp> PSx [ * ] MP: Trip signal [ 040 046 ] MP: St-ups still permitt [ 004 012 ] MP: St-ups st. 3-288 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . replica THERM sequence control 304 700 Not dur.type P PSx [ * ] Setting Setting MP: Character. kP⋅Iref>/Istup> 304 703 MP: Tau mach.P139 3 Operation MP: Therm.m. replica [ 041 083 ] MP: Startup [ 040 119 ] MP: Block.-ups PSx set set set set 017 024 024 025 017 024 025 025 018 024 024 025 017 024 024 025 017 024 024 025 017 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 029 135 185 135 041 136 186 136 042 137 187 137 088 138 188 138 089 139 189 139 Parameter MP: RC permitted.repl.type P PSx MP: Perm.max r.u. No.2: 3/2 cold/warm MP: t6Iref PSx [ * ] MP: Tau after st. Θ< PSx MP: IStUp> PSx MP: tIStUp> PSx MP: St. [ 005 071 ] MP: St.block EXT [ 040 044 ] MP: Character.

of start-ups [ 004 011 ] ≥1 MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] 12Z6231A Fig.4.4 Resetting the Thermal Replica The thermal replica for motor heating can be reset at the local control panel or via an appropriately configured binary signal input.31. MP: Reset replica USER [ 022 073 ] 0 1 0: don't execute MP: Reset therm. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-289 .31. The counter can be reset either individually or with others as a group. MP: Startup [ 040 119 ] + R MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MP: No.3 Startup Counter The motor startups are counted. 3-231: Resetting the thermal replica.4.P139 3 Operation 3. 3-230: Startup counter. 3. replica [ 041 083 ] 1: execute MP: Reset replica EXT [ 041 082 ] MP: Enabled [ 040 115 ] MAIN: Protection active 306 001 19Z5077A Fig.

If the operating state recognition function detects a running machine and the measured maximum RMS phase current falls below the set operate value for a set time. a protection device of singlechannel design with alarm signal and/or normally-energized arrangement (“closed-circuit principle”) will normally suffice. 3. 3-232: Low load protection in motor protection. 3-290 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . According to NAMUR NE 31 (NAMUR: German committee on standards for measuring and control engineering). as it cannot be linked directly to either the general starting signal or the trip command.m. the P139 has been classified in specifications class 3.P139 3 Operation 3.6 Protection of Increased-Safety Machines Motors that are operated in hazardous areas must not reach a temperature level in the case of overload or blocking that would be critical for the existing air-gas mixture.5 Low Load Protection The low load protection function makes it possible to monitor the load torque of a motor drive for a minimum level. alternatively. which requires increased-safety protection (type “Ex e”./Iref MP: tI< elapsed [ 040 047 ] 304 740 MP: Machine stopped 304 701 Parameter MP: I< PSx MP: tI< PSx set set set set 017 024 024 025 017 024 024 025 1 2 3 4 048 145 195 145 050 146 196 146 19Z5078A Fig. By connection and configuration of the output relay MAIN: Block ed/f ault y. a requirement for a higher specifications class can be met by a customized “1 out of 2” or “2 out of 3” circuit. specifications and measures for their fail-safe functioning) and owing to a lack of more specific standards also based on DIN V VDE 0801 (on computers in safety systems). Based on this risk analysis involving the examination of extensive measures for prevention and management of malfunction. In special cases. General The P139 was subjected to risk analysis based on the DIN V 19 250 standard of May 1994 (on basic safety considerations for measuring and protection relays) as well as DIN V 19 251 of February 1995 (on measuring and protection relays. an alarm signal can be given for delayed switch-off based on an assessment of the operational conditions by trained staff.max r. then an appropriate signal is issued. The P139 is suitable for this type of application. but the P139 must be installed outside the hazardous area. For this risk area. the increased-safety machine can be switched off immediately or.31. The signal needs to be configured to a separate output relay.). specifications class 3 corresponds to risk area 1.s. MP: I< PSx [ * ] MP: tI< PSx [ * ] MP: IP.31.

1 021 001 Par/Func/Glob MP : Tr ip si gnal DTOC: Tri p si gnal tI> I 2>: tIn eg> e lapsed During startup of the P139 and during its operation. On the configuration of functions.assig. the output relays must be operated in a normallyenergized arrangement (“closed-circuit principle”). 11-1)). (p.P139 3 Operation Restrictive Safety-Oriented Configuration For the P139 to operate in a restrictive safety-oriented mode under all operational conditions. K 150 196 902 Par/Conf MAIN: Gen . Essential General Configuration: Function Address Path in Menu Tree Setting MAIN: D evice on -line 003 030 Par/Func/Glob Yes (= on) MAIN: Tr ip cmd . mode K 902 150 197 Par/Conf NE updating MAIN: Fct .t rip cmd . the relevant output relay is energized during normal operation and drops out in the event of an activation of the associated function or in the event of a malfunction. 6-1). please see Chapter 6. USER 021 012 Par/Func/Glob No O UTP: Outp. In this arrangement.re l.block USER 021 014 Par/Func/Glob No DTOC: Function group DTOC 056 008 Par/Conf With MP: Funct ion group MP 056 022 Par/Conf With I2>: Function group I 2> 056 024 Par/Conf With DTOC: General enable USER 022 075 Par/Func/Gen Yes MP: Gener al e nabl e U SER 017 059 Par/Func/Gen Yes I2>: Gener al enabl e U SER 018 090 Par/Func/Gen Yes In order to implement a restrictive safety-oriented configuration for the protection of electrical increased-safety machines. assignm.block. cyclic self-monitoring tests are run. the configuration should be equivalent to the example shown in the table below: Relay Function K 902 Address Path in Menu Tree Associated Function OU TP: Fct . In the event of a positive test result. tr ip command 1 O UTP: Op er. The entry of monitoring signals of lesser significance into the P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-291 . Monitoring signals prompted by a serious hardware or software fault in the unit are always entered in the monitoring signal memory. (p. a specified monitoring signal will be issued and stored in a non-volatile (NV) memory – the monitoring signal memory (see Chapter 11.

K 901 OUTP: Fct . The assignment of signals of lesser significance to the signal MA IN : Fct. assignm. assign. assignm. fau lt by an “m out of n” parameter (MAIN : Blocke d/fau lty) is optional. The user can select this option by setting a “m out of n” parameter. fa ult 021 031 Par/Func/Glob SFMON: Error K 90 2 SFMON: Def ect.module s lot 4 SFMON: Def ect.B. The blocking of the protection device is governed by similar principles. mode K 908 150 215 Par/Conf NE updating MAIN : Fct .module sl ot 1 SFMON: D efe ct. K 908 150 214 Par/Conf MAIN: Fct. assign . the “Warning” can be configured onto an output relay as in the following example: Relay Function Address Path in Menu Tree Associated Function z. K 901 150 193 Par/Conf SFMON: Warni ng ( re lay) SFMON: Fct .module s lot 9 For safety-oriented operation. assign. fau lt OUTP: Oper. V fau lt y SFMON: U nde r vo ltage 3-292 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . wa rning 021 030 Par/Func/Glob SFMON: Ph ase s e qu. signals prompted by a serious hardware or software fault in the unit always lead to a blocking of the unit. assi gn. that is.P139 3 Operation monitoring signal memory is optional. Relay Function Address Path in Menu Tree Associated Function K 908 OUTP: Fct .

of h ours ru n to monitor the number of hours a protected machine has operated. val. Additionally the number of hours run may be defaulted to any desired initial value ranging from 0 to 65000 hours. Hours_R un. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-293 .P139 3 Operation 3.31. The default is initialized by setting MP: In itialize Hours_Run to execute.7 Running Time Meter The P139 features a running time meter MP : No. The time period (in hours) is measured during which the P139 has detected “Machine running” (compare with signal MP: M achi ne s topped and this value is compared with the maximum number to be set at MP: Machi ne s toppe d When the time period value measured exceeds the set value at the value for M P: Sig. This value is defined at MP: I nit . Hou rs_R un > is set to Yes.

1 Readiness of Thermal Overload Protection Thermal overload protection is not ready (TH ER M: N ot re ady) if one of the following conditions applies: 3. 3. Disabling and Enabling Thermal Overload Protection Thermal overload protection may be disabled or enabled by setting parameters.2 ● Thermal overload protection is disabled. Moreover. ● Thermal overload protection is blocked because of a fault in the coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition. is generated by the P139. enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset. ● The thermal replica is blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.32. thermal overload protection can be implemented.32. ● Thermal overload protection is blocked because of an incorrect setting. ● Relative replica ● Absolute replica Either operating mode can be enabled or disabled individually. Operating Modes Two operating modes can be selected for thermal overload protection. the thermal overload protection is blocked and the error message THE RM: Setting e rror.block. However.32 3 Operation Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM) Using this function. Only one of the operating modes may be enabled for thermal overload protection. if both operating modes are enabled at the same time. 3-233: Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection. 3-294 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . THERM: General enable USER [ 022 050 ] 0 1 THERM: Enabled [ 040 068 ] & 0: No 1: Yes THERM: Enable PSx [ * ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes PSU: PS y active [ * ] y PSU: PS y active Parameter THERM: Enable PSx 1 2 3 4 036 036 036 036 set set set set 072 073 074 075 090 091 092 093 1 2 3 4 175 175 175 175 19Z6112B Fig.P139 3.

● Last measured temperature: The coolant temperature set at THERM: Defau lt CTA PSx is applied if no last measured values are available because a device warm restart or a parameter subset selection was carried out. All parameters relevant to coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition are hidden if the analog module Y has not been fitted in the P139. ● Default temperature value: The coolant temperature set at TH ERM: De fault CTA PSx is applied. The setting for THE RM: Fu n ct. due to a broken wire. If the parameters TH ER M: Se l ect meas . The thermal model will then be continued and displayed on the basis of the measured current alone. ● ME AS I: Open ci rc.i npu tPSx have been set incorrectly the thermal overload protection is blocked and the error message THERM: Sett in g e rror. The temperature measured before such an erratic change is stored and applied.inputPSx. is determined by the measured value inputs (function group MEASI). PT100 The thermal model uses these signals as a criterion to determine a fault in the coolant temperature measurement.P139 3 Operation 3. A fault at both measured value inputs selected will lead to the issuance of the signal TH ER M: CTA er ror. The thermal overload protection function is not blocked. One of the 11 measuring inputs listed above is selected for the primary measurement of coolant temperature by setting the parameter THERM: Select meas.CTA fail . The thermal overload protection function is not blocked. All further measured values are issued as Not measured. An open measuring circuit. 20mA i np.P Sx determines how the thermal overload protection is to continue functioning when the coolant temperature measurement has failed. This will result in the issuance of these signals: ● ME AS I: Open ci rc. As a rule there is an erratic change of the measured value when a fault has occurred in the coolant temperature measurement. The following functions can be selected to guarantee continued and stable performance of the thermal overload protection when the coolant temperature measurement has failed.32.block. ● Blocking: The signals THERM: Warni ng and THERM: Trip sign al are reset and blocked.f . is generated. The tripping time is calculated by including the setting for TH ERM: De fault C TA PSx.3 Coolant Temperature Effect To permit coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition. the analog (I/O) module Y with a 20 mA current input and the “PT100” input must be fitted. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-295 .

without taking into account an offset due to a variable coolant temperature.P139 3. it is recommended to set the THER M: D efau lt C TA PSx parameter to the maximum permitted coolant temperature. 3-296 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .32.4 3 Operation Thermal Overload Protection Operation without Coolant Temperature (Ambient) Acquisition In order to ensure thermal overload protection.

T6 040 218 set set set set 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 MEASI: Open circ.CTA fail. backup th.CTA fail.PSx MEASI: Open circ.5 Relative Replica The rated operating current of the protected object and its overload tolerance for maximum coolant (ambient) temperature are the basis of the relative thermal replica. 3. T4 040 208 Parameter THERM: Select meas. backup th. 3-234: Coolant temperature monitoring. by CTA error 305 200 1: Default temp.32. Ty [ * ] THERM: Sel. 3: Blocking Tx. & [ 040 192 ] & MEASI: Open circ. T9 040 253 1 2 3 4 177 177 177 177 080 080 200 200 177 177 177 177 19Z6110B Fig.inputPSx THERM: Sel. T7 040 219 MEASI: Open circ. T8 040 252 MEASI: Open circ. 20mA inp. Ty ] THERM: CTA error EXT [ 038 062 ] THERM: Funct.inputPSx [ * ] 0 1 2 n 0: None 1: PT100 2: 20mA input 3: T1 & n: Tx MEASI: Open circ. T1 040 193 MEASI: Open circ.P139 3 Operation THERM: Select meas.PSx [ * ] 1 2 & 3 THERM: Block. Ty MEASI: Open circ. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-297 . T3 040 195 MEASI: Open circ. T2 040 194 MEASI: Open circ. T5 040 209 MEASI: Open circ. value 2: Last meas. PT100 [ 040 190 ] 11: T9 MEASI: Overload 20mA input [ 040 191 ] >1 & MEASI: Open circ.f. PSx [ * ] THERM: With CTA 0 & 305 201 1 2 n 0: None 1: PT100 2: 20mA input 3: T1 n: Ty THERM: CTA error [ 039 111 ] & 11: T9 & & [ * SFMON: CTA error [ 098 034 ] & MEASI: Open circ. PSx THERM: Funct.temperat.f.

P S x and T H E R M : O / T f . THER M: Max . obj . THER M: Max . P S x settings. obj.P139 3 Operation In the Relative replica operating mode.perm. an overtemperature results at the maximum coolant temperature. I r e f p e r s . PSx ● The maximum coolant temperature (maximum ambient) Θc.pe rm. If coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition is used.max.tmpP Sx Absolute Replica The thermal limit current of the protected object is the reference current of the absolute thermal replica. PSx The maximum permitted coolant temperature Θc.tmp.max is derived from the difference between the T H E R M : M a x .6 ● The maximum permissible temperature of the protected object Θmax. the following settings have to be made for thermal overload protection: ● The rated operating current of the protected object: THERM: Ir ef PSx ● The tripping threshold Δϑtrip is set at TH ER M: Rel. t m p . o b j . 3-298 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . the following parameters have to be set for thermal overload protection: ● The thermal limit current of the protected object: IDMT1: Min. For this limit current. trip time N PSx ● The limit temperature for tripping Θmax. the following parameters must be set: 3. Ire f pers .max ).32. p e r m . PSx ● The overtemperature as a result of a persistent limit current (Θmax Θc.perm. THER M: O/T f. In the Absolute replica operating mode. THER M: Max . O/T trip PSx.tm p. cool.

001 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 I / I ref 7 8 9 10 11 D5Z50BEB_EN Fig.7 Tripping Characteristics The maximum RMS phase current I is used to track a first-order thermal replica as specified in IEC 255-8.cons t.1 200 110 0.Δϑ0 Θa .Δϑtrip · (1 .P139 3 Operation 3.Θa.Θa.01 1 50 0.1.max I The Δϑtrip tripping threshold is set to a fixed value of 100% if the operating mode is Absolute replica. THERM: Tim.32.Θ ) ref max .max )2 .>Ibl PSx ● The accumulated thermal load Δϑ0 ● The current measured coolant temperature Θc The tripping threshold in the two operating modes is calculated as follows: (I t = τ · ln (I I ref )2 . P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-299 . Other than the operating mode dependent settings the following parameters will govern the tripping time: ● The set thermal time constant τ of the protected object. Θ/% 10000 1000 τ / min 100 200 110 10 1000 50 t / min 1 200 110 30 50 0. 3-235: Tripping characteristics of thermal overload protection (tripping characteristics apply to ΔϑP = 0 % and identical settings for the maximum permissible coolant temperature and coolant temperature).

32. the trip signal is maintained until the status of the thermal replica has decreased by the value set at TTHERM: Hystere sis t rip PSx. at least for a fixed time of 5 s. O/T war nin g PSx ● Absolute replica: THE RM: Warn in g te mp. a time-to-tripping threshold (pre-trip time) can be set.10 Cooling If the current falls below the default threshold of 0. O/T tri p PSx ● Absolute replica: TH ER M: Max. 3.<Ibl PSx. the thermal replica is applied with the time constant set at THERM: Ti m. 3.9 Trip The trip threshold is set according to the selected operating mode with the following parameters: ● Relative replica: THERM: Rel .2. a warning signal can be set at one of the following parameters: ● Relative replica: THERM: Re l.obj . This element in the thermal model takes account of the cooling characteristics of stopped motors. a warning signal will be issued. 3-300 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .32.1 Iref. These two time constants should be set to the same value for transformers and power lines.32. When the time left until tripping falls below this setting.PSx If a trip command is issued.P139 3.const.8 3 Operation Warning Signal Depending on the selected operating mode.tmp. PSx Additionally.pe rm.

p. PSx [ * ] THERM: c Max.const.<Ibl PSx [ * ] c THERM: Start.Iref pers. O/T warning PSx THERM: Rel.PSx set set set set 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 1 2 3 4 188 188 188 188 167 167 167 167 153 153 153 153 THERM: Therm.cool.fact.tmpPSx [ * ] THERM: c Rel.perm. [ 004 179 ] 187 187 187 187 Parameter THERM: Tim.OL_RC PSx THERM: Tim.tmp.u.u. O/T trip PSx THERM: Default CTA PSx THERM: Hysteresis trip PSx THERM: Warning pre-trip PSx set set set set 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 1 2 3 4 185 185 185 185 184 184 184 184 181 181 181 181 186 186 186 186 183 183 183 183 191 191 191 191 19Z8042A Fig.<Ibl PSx THERM: O/T f.Iref pers.1.obj. replica p. [ 004 178 ] THERM: Object temp. O/T warning PSx [ * ] 0 1 0: No c THERM: Rel.const.cool. PSx THERM: Warning temp.P139 3 Operation I̲A THERM: I COMP I̲B 305 202 I̲C I̲P.>Ibl PSx set set set set 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 072 073 074 075 1 2 3 4 179 179 179 179 180 180 180 180 THERM: Pre-trip time left [ 004 139 ] THERM: Temp.obj.OL_RC PSx [ * ] c k·Iref c THERM: O/T f.PSx [ * ] THERM: Absolute replica [ 022 065 ] THERM: c Max.perm. O/T trip PSx [ * ] c THERM: Default CTA PSx [ * ] 1: Yes THERM: Relative replica [ 022 064 ] THERM: Within pre-trip time [ 041 109 ] SFMON: Setting error THERM [ 098 035 ] THERM: Setting error. p. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-301 .>Ibl PSx [ * ] c THERM: Iref PSx [ * ] <0. offset replica [ 004 109 ] THERM: Coolant temp.perm.fact.tmpPSx THERM: Rel.tmp.max MAIN: Protection active AR_MV c & 306 001 THERM: Enabled [ 040 068 ] THERM: Starting k*Iref> [ 041 108 ] THERM: Block replica EXT [ 041 074 ] THERM: Block.2. [ 039 110 ] THERM: Warning [ 039 025 ] THERM: Trip signal [ 039 020 ] THERM: Hysteresis trip PSx [ * ] THERM: Warning pre-trip PSx [ * ] 0 1 THERM: Buffer empty [ 039 112 ] 0: No 1: Yes THERM: With CTA THERM: Status THERM replica [ 004 016 ] c 305 201 Coolant temperature THERM: Object temperature [ 004 137 ] THERM: Coolant temperature [ 004 149 ] R I/Iref THERM: Reset replica [ 039 061 ] c Parameter THERM: Iref PSx THERM: Start. 3-236: Thermal overload protection. by CTA error c & 305 200 THERM: Tim.therm p.const.block.perm. [ 004 017 ] THERM: Current I.1.therm prim [ 007 220 ] 182 182 182 182 THERM: Current I.u [ 007 221 ] Parameter THERM: Max.u. PSx THERM: Max.1 Iref THERM: Tim. PSx [ * ] THERM: Warning temp.const.2.

THERM: Reset replica USER [ 022 061 ] 0 1 THERM: Reset replica [ 039 061 ] 0: don't execute 1: execute THERM: Enabled [ 040 068 ] THERM: Reset replica EXT [ 038 061 ] Q9Z5020A Fig.12 Resetting The thermal replica may be reset either via a setting parameter or via an appropriately configured binary signal input. 3-237: Resetting the thermal replica.11 3 Operation Operation Together with the Motor Protection Function If the thermal overload protection function is operated together with the motor protection function (function group MP) and if another startup of an asynchronous motor occurs (other than the first startup). Resetting is possible even when thermal overload protection is disabled. 3.32.32. 3-302 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . The motor protection will effect the thermal overload protection and not vice versa if both protection functions are applied simultaneously. then the thermal overload protection function will be temporarily blocked during the startup time. Thermal overload protection can be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.P139 3.

Moreover.1 Disabling and Enabling the Unbalance Protection Function The unbalance protection function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-303 . I2>: General enable USER [ 018 090 ] 0 1 0: No I2>: Enabled [040 073 ] 1: Yes I2>: Enable PSx [ * ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes Parameter I2>: Enable PSx set set set set 018 018 018 018 1 2 3 4 220 221 222 223 19Z5082A Fig.33. 3-238: Enable/disable the unbalance protection function.P139 3 Operation 3. 3. enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.33 Unbalance Protection (Function Group I2>) The P139 features an unbalance protection function (I2> protection).

33. These signals cannot be linked to the general starting signal but can be configured to the trip command. 3-239: Unbalance protection. a signal is issued.2 Functional Description The presence or absence of unbalance is assessed on the basis of the negativesequence system current.P139 3 Operation 3. The unbalance protection signals can be configured to separate output relays. The negative-sequence current is monitored to determine whether it exceeds the set thresholds. 3-304 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . The following stages are available for the negative-sequence current: ● Unbalance stage Ineg> with time delay tIneg> ● Unbalance stage Ineg>> with time delay tIneg>> The elapsing of all operate delays may be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs. I2>: Blocking tIneg> EXT [ 041 076 ] I2>: Blocking tIneg>> EXT [ 041 077 ] I2>: Enabled [ 040 073 ] & MAIN: Protection active 306 001 & I2>: Blocking EXT C I2>: Ineg> PSx [ * ] [ 035 100 ] >0. After the set operate delays have elapsed.1 Inom I2>: tIneg> PSx [ * ] t |I̲neg|/Inom 0 I2>: tIneg> elapsed [ 035 033 ] I2>: Starting Ineg> [ 035 024 ] I̲A I̲B I2>: Ineg>> PSx [ * ] I̲C I2>: tIneg>> PSx [ * ] I2>: tIneg>> elapsed [ 035 034 ] MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ] I2>: Starting Ineg>> [ 035 025 ] I̲neg Parameter I2>: Ineg> PSx I2>: tIneg> PSx I2>: Ineg>> PSx I2>: tIneg>> PSx set set set set 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 1 2 3 4 091 224 225 226 093 230 231 232 092 227 228 229 094 233 234 235 19Z5083B Fig.

34. disabling and readiness of V<> protection. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-305 . 3.34.34 Under and Overvoltage Protection (Function Group V<>) The time-voltage protection function evaluates the fundamental wave of the phase voltages and of the neutral-point displacement voltage as well as the positive-sequence voltage and negative-sequence voltage obtained from the fundamental waves of the three phase-to-ground voltages. circ.1 Disabling and Enabling V<> Protection V<> protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover.2 V<> Protection Readiness V<> protection is ready if it is enabled and no fault has been detected in the voltage-measuring circuit by the measuring-circuit monitoring function. V faulty [ 038 023 ] V<>: Ready [ 042 003 ] V<>: Not ready [ 042 004 ] Parameter V<>: Enable PSx set set set set 076 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 246 246 246 246 19Z5085A Fig. 3.P139 3 Operation 3. 3-240: Enabling. enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset. V<>: General enable USER [ 023 030 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes V<>: Enable PSx [ * ] 0 V<>: Enabled [ 040 066 ] 1 0: No 1: Yes MCMON: Meas.

34. P Sx The undervoltage stages are blocked if during active monitoring the set threshold of at least one phase is not exceeded by the phase currents. Vpos<. The following two settings may be used to activate the operating mode for minimum current monitoring and to set the enabling threshold: ● V <>: I enable V< PSx ● V <>: Op.P139 3 Operation 3.3 Minimum Current Monitoring There is an optional enabling threshold available with the V<> element which is based on minimum current monitoring for the undervoltage stages (V<. mode V< mon. 3-241: Enabling threshold for the undervoltage stages. V<>: Op. V<<. 3-306 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . mode V < mon. Vpos<<). V<<<. PSx [ * ] V<>: V< ready 0 460 506 1 0: Without 1: With V<>: I enable V< PSx [ * ] I̲A I̲B I̲C Parameter V<>: Op. PSx V<>: I enable V< PSx set set set set 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 1 2 3 4 162 163 164 165 155 159 160 161 19Z8089A Fig. mode V< mon.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-307 .P139 3 Operation 3. Otherwise the trip command would always be present when the system voltage was disconnected. If undervoltage monitoring decisions are to be included in the trip commands. and it would therefore not be possible to close the circuit breaker again. V<>: Operating mode PSx [ * ] MAIN: Protection active 306 001 V<>: Ready [ 042 003 ] fnom V̲A-G V̲B-G fnom 1 V̲C-G fnom fnom VA-G √3 fnom 2 VB-G √3 fnom VC-G √3 1V̲A(-B) 1 2 1V̲B(-C) 1V̲C(-A) 1: Delta 2: Star Parameter V<>: Operating mode PSx set set set set 076 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 001 001 001 001 47Z0147A Fig. Dependent on the set operating mode of V<> protection. then it is recommended that transient signals be used.4 Monitoring the Phase Voltages The P139 checks the voltages to determine whether they exceed or fall below set thresholds. 3-242: Selection of the measured values.34. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs. either the phase-to-ground voltages (Star operating mode) or the phase-to-phase voltages (Delta operating mode) are monitored.

V<> meas. 3-243: Overvoltage monitoring. V<> meas.P139 3 Operation V<>: Hyst. PSx set set set set 076 077 078 079 076 077 078 079 011 011 011 011 076 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 004 004 004 004 006 006 006 006 092 094 095 096 048 048 048 048 19Z8091A Fig. 3-308 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . V<> meas. PSx [ * ] V<>: tV> PSx [ * ] V<>: Hyst. PSx [ * ] V<>: V> PSx [ * ] V<>: tV> elapsed [ 041 034 ] 1V̲A(-B) 1V̲B(-C) V<>: Starting V> [ 041 030 ] 1V̲C(-A) V<>: tV> 3-pole PSx [ * ] V<>: Blocking tV> EXT [ 041 068 ] V<>: tV> 3-pole elapsed [ 041 098 ] V<>: Starting V> 3-pole [ 041 097 ] V<>: tV>> PSx [ * ] V<>: V>> PSx [ * ] V<>: tV>> elapsed [ 041 035 ] V<>: Starting V>> [ 041 096 ] V<>: tV>> 3-pole PSx [ * ] V<>: Blocking tV>> EXT [ 041 069 ] V<>: tV>> 3-pole elapsed [ 010 227 ] V<>: Starting V>>> [ 010 231 ] V<>: Starting V>/>> A(-B) [ 041 031 ] V<>: Starting V>/>> B(-C) [ 041 032 ] Parameter V<>: V> PSx V<>: tV> PSx V<>: tV> 3-pole PSx set set set set 076 077 078 079 076 077 078 079 076 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 003 003 003 003 005 005 005 005 V<>: Starting V>/>> C(-A) [ 041 033 ] 027 027 027 027 Parameter V<>: V>> PSx V<>: tV>> PSx V<>: tV>> 3-pole PSx V<>: Hyst. Part 1: stages V> and V>>.

PSx set set set set 011 011 011 011 011 011 011 011 011 011 011 011 076 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 099 105 117 118 048 048 048 048 19Z8092A Fig. PSx [ * [ * ] ] V<>: V>>> PSx [ * ] V<>: tV>>> elapsed [ 010 233 ] 1V̲A(-B) 1V̲B(-C) V<>: Starting V>>> [ 010 231 ] 1V̲C(-A) V<>: tV>>> 3-pole PSx [ * ] V<>: Blocking tV>>> EXT [ 010 246 ] V<>: tV>>> 3-pole elapsed [ 010 234 ] V<>: Starting V>>> 3-pole [ 010 232 ] Parameter V<>: V>>> PSx V<>: tV>>> PSx V<>: tV>>> 3-pole PSx V<>: Hyst. 3-244: Overvoltage monitoring. Part 2: stage V>>>. V<> meas. V<> meas. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-309 . V<> meas. PSx [ * ] V<>: tV>>> PSx V<>: Hyst.P139 3 Operation V<>: Hyst.

[ 042 025 ] V<>: tV<< 3p elaps. PSx set set set set 076 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 V<>: Starting V</<< A(-B) [ 041 038 ] V<>: Starting V</<< B(-C) [ 041 039 ] 048 048 048 048 V<>: Starting V</<< C(-A) [ 041 040 ] Parameter V<>: V< PSx V<>: tV< PSx V<>: tV< 3-pole PSx V<>: V<< PSx V<>: tV<< PSx V<>: tV<< 3-pole PSx set set set set 076 077 078 079 076 077 078 079 076 077 078 079 076 077 078 079 076 077 078 079 011 011 011 011 1 2 3 4 007 007 007 007 009 009 009 009 028 028 028 028 008 008 008 008 010 010 010 010 119 124 125 126 19Z8093A Fig.) 3-310 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . PSx [ * ] V<>: V< ready V<>: tV< elapsed [ 041 041 ] V<>: V< PSx [ * ] Setting(s) blocked 1V̲A(-B) 1V̲B(-C) V<>: Starting V< [ 041 037 ] V<>: tV< 3-pole PSx [ * ] 1V̲C(-A) V<>: Fault V< [ 041 110 ] V<>: tV< 3-pole elapsed [ 042 006 ] Setting(s) blocked V<>: Starting V< 3-pole [ 042 005 ] V<>: tV<< PSx [ * ] V<>: Fault V< 3-pole [ 041 111 ] V<>: V<< PSx [ * ] V<>: tV<< elapsed [ 041 042 ] Setting(s) blocked V<>: Starting V<< [ 041 099 ] V<>: tV<< 3-pole PSx [ * ] V<>: Fault V<< [ 041 112 ] V<>: Blocking tV<< EXT [ 041 071 ] V<>: tV>> 3-pole elapsed [ 010 227 ] Setting(s) blocked V<>: tV< elaps. (Transient pulse: See following diagram. trans [ 010 230 ] V<>: Fault V<< 3-pole [ 011 132 ] Parameter V<>: Hyst. 3-245: Undervoltage monitoring. trans. V<> meas. Part 1: stages V< and V<<. [ 042 024 ] V<>: tV<< elapsed trans. transient [ 042 023 ] V<>: Starting V<< 3-pole [ 010 228 ] V<>: tV< 3p elaps. V<> meas.P139 3 Operation V<>: Blocking tV< EXT [ 041 070 ] V<>: tV< PSx [ * ] V<>: Hyst.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-311 . transient [ 042 023 ] V<>: tV< 3-pole elapsed [ 042 006 ] V<>: tV< 3p elaps. trans. [ 042 024 ] V<>: tV<< elapsed [ 041 042 ] V<>: tV<< elapsed trans. trans [ 010 230 ] V<>: tV<<< elaps.trans [ 042 007 ] Parameter V<>: V<<< PSx V<>: tV<<< PSx V<>: tV<<< 3-pole PSx V<>: Hyst.trans [ 010 240] V<>: tV</<</<<< el. [ 042 025 ] V<>: tV<< elapsed [ 041 042 ] V<>: tV<< 3p elaps. trans. [ 010 238 ] V<>: tV<<< 3p elaps. Part 2: stage V<<< and transient pulse for stages V</<</<<<. V<> meas. V<> meas. PSx V<>: tTransient pulse PSx set set set set 011 011 011 011 011 011 011 011 011 011 011 011 076 077 078 079 076 029 1 2 3 4 083 083 083 083 088 088 088 088 127 127 127 127 048 048 048 048 077 029 078 029 079 029 19Z8094A Fig. 3-246: Undervoltage monitoring. PSx [ * ] V<>: V< ready V<>: tV<<< elapsed [ 010 237 ] V<>: V<<< PSx [ * ] Setting(s) blocked 1V̲A(-B) 1V̲B(-C) V<>: Starting V<<< [ 010 235 ] V<>: tV<<< 3-pole PSx [ * ] 1V̲C(-A) V<>: Fault V<<< [ 011 134] V<>: tV<<< 3-pole elapsed [ 010 239 ] Setting(s) blocked V<>: Starting V<<< 3-pole [ 010 236 ] V<>: Fault V<<< 3-pole [ 011 133 ] V<>: tTransient pulse PSx [ * ] V<>: tTransient pulse PSx [ * ] V<>: tV< elapsed [ 041 041 ] V<>: tV< elaps.P139 3 Operation V<>: Blocking tV<<< EXT [ 010 247 ] V<>: tV<<< PSx [ * ] V<>: Hyst.

P139 3. This is based on the MA IN: Phase seque nce setting (alternative terminology: Rotary field). Phase sequence A-B-C (clockwise rotating field) ● Negative-sequence voltage: V̲neg = ● · | (V̲A–G + a̲2 · V̲B–G + a̲ · V̲C–G) | Positive-sequence voltage: V̲pos = 3-312 1 3 1 3 · | (V̲A–G + a̲ · V̲B–G + a̲2 · V̲C–G) | P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .and Negative-Sequence Voltages The P139 determines the positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltages from the fundamental components of the phase-to-ground voltages according to the formulas given below.5 3 Operation Monitoring the Positive.34.

If undervoltage monitoring decisions are to be included in the trip commands. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-313 . then it is recommended that transient signals be used. and it would therefore not be possible to close the circuit breaker again. Otherwise the trip command would always be present when the system voltage was disconnected. If the voltage exceeds or falls below the set thresholds. then a signal is issued once the set operate delays have elapsed.and negative-sequence voltages.P139 3 Operation Phase sequence A-C-B (anti-clockwise rotating field) ● Negative-sequence voltage: V̲neg = ● · | (V̲A–G + a̲ · V̲B–G + a̲2 · V̲C–G) | Positive-sequence voltage: V̲pos = ● 1 3 1 3 · | (V̲A–G + a̲2 · V̲B–G + a̲ · V̲C–G) | Symbols used: a = e2πj/3 = e j·120° ¯ a 2 = e4πj/3 = e j·240° ¯ MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ] MAIN: Protection active & C 306 001 V<>: Ready [ 042 003 ] fnom V̲A-G V<>: V̲pos 305 250 fnom V̲B-G V̲pos fnom V̲C-G V̲neg V<>: V̲neg 305 251 D5Z50AYB Fig. The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs. 3-247: Determination of positive.) The positive-sequence voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. and the negative-sequence voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds set thresholds. (Note: The previous terminology for MAIN: Phase sequence was MAIN: Rotary field.

[ 042 027 ] V<>: tVpos</<< elap. trans. V<> deduc.P139 3 Operation V<>: Blocking tVpos> EXT [ 041 090 ] V<>: Hyst. PSx 076 049 077 049 078 049 079 049 19Z80AZA Fig. 3-248: Monitoring the positive-sequence voltage. [ 042 026 ] V<>: tVpos<< elaps. V<> deduc.trans [ 042 018 ] V<>: Vpos<< PSx 076 020 077 020 078 020 079 020 V<>: tVpos<< PSx 076 022 077 022 078 022 079 022 V<>: tTransient pulse PSx 076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029 V<>: Hyst. 3-314 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .trans. PSx [ * ] V<>: tVpos> PSx [ * ] V<>: Vpos> PSx [ * ] V<>: tVpos> elapsed [ 042 012 ] V<>: V̲pos 305 250 V<>: Starting Vpos> [ 042 010 ] V<>: Blocking tVpos>> EXT [ 041 091 ] V<>: tVpos>> PSx [ * ] V<>: Vpos>> PSx [ * ] V<>: tVpos>> elapsed [ 042 013 ] V<>: Blocking tVpos< EXT [ 041 092 ] V<>: Starting Vpos>> [ 042 011 ] V<>: tVpos< PSx [ * ] V<>: V< ready 460 506 V<>: Vpos< PSx [ * ] V<>: tVpos< elapsed [ 042 016 ] Setting(s) blocked V<>: Starting Vpos< [ 042 014 ] V<>: tVpos<< PSx [ * ] V<>: Blocking tVpos<< EXT [ 041 093 ] V<>: Fault Vpos< [ 041 113 ] V<>: tVpos<< elapsed [ 042 017 ] V<>: Vpos<< PSx [ * ] Setting(s) blocked V<>: Starting Vpos<< [ 042 015 ] V<>: Fault Vpos<< [ 041 114 ] V<>: tTransient pulse PSx [ * ] Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4 Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4 Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4 V<>: Vpos> PSx 076 015 077 015 078 015 079 015 V<>: tVpos> PSx 076 017 077 017 078 017 079 017 V<>: Vpos>> PSx 076 016 077 016 078 016 079 016 V<>: tVpos>> PSx 076 018 077 018 078 018 079 018 V<>: Vpos< PSx 076 019 077 019 078 019 079 019 V<>: tVpos< PSx 076 021 077 021 078 021 079 021 V<>: tVpos< elaps. PSx [ * ] V<>: Hyst. V<> deduc.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-315 .P139 3 Operation V<>: Blocking tVneg> EXT [ 041 094 ] V<>: tVneg> PSx [ * ] V<>: Hyst. PSx 076 049 077 049 078 049 079 049 D5Z52BAA Fig. V<> deduc. V<> deduc. PSx [ * ] V<>: Vneg> PSx [ * ] V<>: tVneg> elapsed [ 042 021 ] V<>: V̲neg 305 251 V<>: Starting Vneg> [ 042 019 ] V<>: Blocking tVneg>> EXT [ 041 095 ] V<>: tVneg>> PSx [ * ] V<>: Vneg>> PSx [ * ] V<>: tVneg>> elapsed [ 042 022 ] V<>: Starting Vneg>> [ 042 020 ] Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4 V<>: Vneg> PSx 076 023 077 023 078 023 079 023 V<>: tVneg> PSx 076 025 077 025 078 025 079 025 V<>: Vneg>> PSx 076 024 077 024 078 024 079 024 V<>: tVneg>> PSx 076 026 077 026 078 026 079 026 V<>: Hyst. 3-249: Monitoring the negative-sequence voltage.

PSx [ * ] V<>: VNG> PSx [ * ] MAIN: Protection active 306 001 V<>: Ready [ 042 003 ] V<>: tVNG> elapsed [ 041 045 ] V<>: Blocking tVNG>> EXT [ 041 073 ] V<>: Starting VNG> [ 041 044 ] V<>: VNG>> PSx [ * ] V<>: tVNG>> PSx [ * ] V<>: tVNG>> elapsed [ 041 046 ] V<>: V̲NG 305 252 Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4 V<>: VNG> PSx 076 011 077 011 078 011 079 011 V<>: tVNG> PSx 076 013 077 013 078 013 079 013 V<>: VNG>> PSx 076 012 077 012 078 012 079 012 V<>: tVNG>> PSx 076 014 077 014 078 014 079 014 V<>: Hyst. 3. 3-79)). V<> deduc. the V<> function monitors either the neutral-point displacement voltage calculated by the P139 from the three phase-to-ground voltages or the neutral-point displacement voltage formed externally via the fourth voltage measuring input. PSx 076 049 077 049 078 049 079 049 V<>: Starting VNG>> [ 042 008 ] D5Z52BCA Fig. V<>: Blocking tVNG> EXT [ 041 072 ] V<>: tVNG> PSx [ * ] V<>: Hyst.P139 3 Operation 3. The neutral-point displacement voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds set thresholds.34. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The triggers are followed by respective timer stages that can be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs. V<> deduc.7 Monitoring the Reference Voltage The reference voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. for example the neutral-point displacement voltage from the open delta winding of the voltage transformers (see Section 3. (p. 3-250: Selecting the measured value.6 Monitoring the Neutral-Point Displacement Voltage Depending on the setting.11. V<>: Evaluation VNG PSx [ * ] V̲N-G 2 1 V̲A-G V̲B-G V̲C-G 1 V<>: V̲NG 2 305 252 1: Calculated 2: Measured Parameter V<>: Evaluation VNG PSx set set set set 076 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 002 002 002 002 47Z0148A Fig. 3-251: Monitoring the neutral-point displacement voltage. 3-316 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .34.

circ. V<> deduc. part 1: stages Vref>/>>/>>>. V<> deduc. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-317 . PSx [ * ] [ C V<>: Vref> PSx [ * * ] C ] V<>: tVref> elapsed V̲ref [ 007 047 ] V<>: Starting Vref> V<>: Blocking tVref>> EXT [ 007 037 ] [ 007 051 ] V<>: tVref>> PSx [ C V<>: Vref>> PSx [ * * ] C ] V<>: tVref>> elaps.P139 3 Operation V<>: Blocking tVref> EXT [ 007 036 ] V<>: tVref> PSx V<>: Hyst. [ 007 213 ] V<>: tVref>>> elapsed [ 010 242 ] V<>: Starting Vref>>> [ 010 241 ] Parameter V<>: Hyst. 3-252: Monitoring the reference voltage. PSx set set set set 076 077 078 079 1 2 3 4 049 049 049 049 Parameter V<>: Vref> PSx V<>: tVref> PSx V<>: Vref>> PSx V<>: tVref>> PSx V<>: Vref>>> PSx V<>: tVref>>> PSx set set set set 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 1 2 3 4 064 071 075 079 066 069 073 077 065 068 072 076 067 070 074 078 065 068 072 076 067 070 074 078 19Z8095A Fig. [ 007 048 ] V<>: Blocking tVref>>>EXT [ 010 248 ] V<>: Starting Vref>> [ 007 052 ] V<>: tVref>>> PSx [ MAIN: Protection active C 306 001 V<>: Vref>>> PSx [ * ] * ] C MCMON: M. Vref flty.

V<> deduc. PSx set 1 set 2 set 3 set 4 076 077 078 079 076 077 078 079 029 029 029 029 V<>: tVref</<</<<< el. Vref flty. trans.P139 3 Operation V<>: Blocking tVref< EXT [ 007 039 ] V<>: tVref< PSx V<>: Hyst. [ 007 057 ] V<>: tVref<< elaps. part 2: stages Vref</<</<<<. 3-318 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . PSx [ * ] [ C V<>: Vref< PSx [ * ] * ] V<>: tVref< elapsed [ 007 053 ] C V<>: Fault Vref< [ 007 061 ] V̲ref V<>: Blocking tVref<< EXT [ 007 046 ] Setting(s) blocked V<>: Starting Vref< [ 007 055 ] V<>: tVref<< PSx [ C V<>: Vref<< PSx [ * * V<>: tVref<< elapsed [ 007 054 ] ] C ] V<>: Fault Vref<< [ 007 062 ] Setting(s) blocked V<>: Blocking tVref<<<EXT [ 010 249 ] V<>: Starting Vref<< [ 007 056 ] V<>: tVref<<< PSx [ MAIN: Protection active C 306 001 V<>: Vref<<< PSx [ * * V<>: tVref<< elapsed [ 007 054 ] ] C ] MCMON: M. [ 007 213 ] V<>: Fault Vref<<< [ 011 135 ] Setting(s) blocked V<>: Starting Vref<<< [ 010 243 ] V<>: tTransient pulse PSx [ * ] V<>: tVref< elaps. 3-253: Monitoring the reference voltage. [ 007 063 ] 049 049 049 049 Parameter V<>: Vref< PSx V<>: tVref< PSx V<>: Vref<< PSx V<>: tVref<< PSx V<>: Vref<<< PSx V<>: tVref<<< PSx set set set set 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 007 011 011 011 011 011 011 011 011 1 2 3 4 086 097 101 105 088 099 103 107 087 098 102 106 096 100 104 108 059 062 069 070 071 072 073 074 19Z8096A Fig. [ 007 060 ] V<>: tVref<<< elaps.circ.tr.trans [ 010 245 ] Parameter V<>: tTransient pulse PSx V<>: Hyst.trans. V<> deduc.

3-254: Enabling. 3.1 Disabling or Enabling Over‑/Underfrequency Protection The frequency protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.35. The frequency is determined from the difference in time between the zero crossings of the voltage (voltage zeroes).35 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>) The P139 monitors the voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set frequencies. disabling and readiness of f<> protection. Moreover. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-319 . The over-/underfrequency protection function has four stages. f<>: General enable USER [ 023 031 ] 0 1 0: No f<>: Enabled [ 042 100 ] 1: Yes f<>: Enable PSx [ * ] 0 f<>: Ready [ 042 101 ] 1 0: No 1: Yes Parameter f<>: Enable PSx set set set set 018 018 018 018 1 2 3 4 f<>: Not ready [ 042 140 ] 196 197 198 199 F5Z0104C Fig.P139 3 Operation 3. enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset. The operation of over-/underfrequency protection will be explained below using the first stage as an example.

3-320 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P139 3. f<>: Selection meas. This can be either a phase-to-ground voltage or a phase-to-phase voltage. the user defines the voltage that is used by the over-/underfrequency protection function for measurement purposes. 3-255: Selecting the measuring voltage.35. volt [ 018 202 ] MAIN: Protection active 306 001 f<>: Ready [ 042 101 ] fnom V̲A-G VA-G √3 V̲B-G VB-G √3 V̲C-G VC-G √3 1 fnom 2 fnom 3 fnom 4 fnom 5 fnom 6 1 6 f<>: V̲Meas 305 725 1: Voltage A-G 2: Voltage B-G 3: Voltage C-G 4: Voltage A-B 5: Voltage B-C 6: Voltage C-A 47Z0150A Fig.2 3 Operation Selecting the Measuring Voltage By selecting a measuring voltage setting.

If an operate threshold below the set nominal frequency is set. the user can choose between the following operating modes: 3. If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold. the evaluation time can be set by the user. V< [ 018 200 ] f<>: Blocked by V< [ 042 102 ] f<>: V̲Meas 305 725 f<>: Evaluation time [ 018 201 ] f<>: No. If an operate threshold in excess of the set nominal frequency is set. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-321 .35. 3-256: Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting. the P139 checks to determine whether the frequency falls below the operate threshold. f<>: Undervolt.35. In order to avoid frequency stage starting caused by brief frequency fluctuations or interference. periods reached 305 701 f<>: fMeas 305 726 47Z0151A Fig.4 Operating Modes of Over-/Underfrequency Protection For each stage of the over-/underfrequency protection function. 3. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.3 Undervoltage Blocking and Evaluation Time Over-/underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of sufficient magnitude. Over-/underfrequency protection will be blocked instantaneously if the measuring voltage falls below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage. the P139 monitors the frequency to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. The operate conditions must be satisfied for at least the duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be issued.P139 3 Operation 3. the P139 checks to determine whether the frequency exceeds the operate threshold.35.5 ● Frequency monitoring ● Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient monitoring (df/dt) ● Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring (Δf/Δt) Frequency Monitoring Depending on the setting. a set timer stage is started. block.

Monitoring the mean value of the frequency gradient is started with the starting of frequency monitoring.35. If the frequency decreases by the set value Δf within the set time Δt. a set timer stage is started. then the Δt/Δf monitoring function will be blocked until the underfrequency monitoring function drops out. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate decision of the monitoring function.7 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Mean Frequency Gradient Monitoring (Δf/Δt) The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual substations and may vary over time due to power swings. If both operate conditions are satisfied. 3.P139 3. In this operating mode of over-/underfrequency protection. then the Δt/Δf monitoring function operates instantaneously and generates a trip signal. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. the frequency is also checked to determine whether the set frequency gradient is reached (in addition to being monitored for exceeding or falling below the set threshold).6 3 Operation Frequency Monitoring Combined with Differential Frequency Gradient Monitoring (df/dt) In this operating mode of the over-/ underfrequency protection function. The trip signal can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.35. frequency monitoring must be set for “underfrequency monitoring”. 3-322 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . Therefore it makes sense to take the mean value of the frequency gradient into account for loadshedding systems. Monitoring for overfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency increase. monitoring for underfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency decrease.

P139 3 Operation f f< Δf Δt Start Δt Δt t Start Δt Function blocked Trip Δf/Δt F5Z0128C Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-323 . 3-257: Operation of frequency monitoring combined with Δf/Δt monitoring.

3-258: First stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function.c.P139 3 Operation f<>: Blocking f1 EXT [ 042 103 ] f<>: Oper. trip V EXT [ 004 061 ] f<>: Starting f1 [ 042 107 ] f<>: df1/dt PSx [ * ] f<>: No. Delta f/Delta t MAIN: Nominal frequ. mode f1 PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: f 2: f with df/dt f<>: f1 PSx [ * ] 3: f w. 3-324 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . cond. mode f1 PSx f<>: f1 PSx f<>: df1/dt PSx f<>: Delta f1 PSx f<>: Delta t1 PSx f<>: tf1 PSx set set set set 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 018 1 2 3 4 120 121 122 123 100 101 102 103 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 104 105 106 107 47Z0152A Fig. periods reached 305 701 f<>: fMeas df/dt 305 726 f<>: Starting f1/df1 [ 042 108 ] Start.b. met f<>: Delta t1 elapsed [ 042 110 ] Parameter f<>: Oper. fnom [ 010 030 ] f<>: tf1 PSx [ * ] f<>: Ready [ 042 101 ] MAIN: Protection active 306 001 f<>: Trip signal f1 [ 042 111 ] f<>: Blocked by V< [ 042 102 ] MAIN: M. cond. met SFMON: Setting error f<> [ 098 028 ] f> f<>: Delta f1 PSx [ * ] f<>: Delta t1 PSx [ * ] df/dt f<>: Delta f1 triggered [ 042 109 ] Start.

val.P139 3 Operation 3. frequ.8 fmin-/fmax Measurement For the acquisition of the minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition and for the acquisition of the maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition. USER P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-325 . f or f < Both measured event values are reset automatically at the onset of a new overfrequency or underfrequency situation. A manual reset is also possible: ● f<>: Reset meas .35. the two following measured event values are available: ● f<>: Max . fre qu. for f> ● f<>: Min.

36 3 Operation Directional Power Protection (Function Group P<>) The power directional protection function determines the active and reactive power from the fundamental currents and voltages. is evaluated for direction determination 3.2 Power Determination The P139 determines the active and reactive power from the three phase currents and the phase-to-ground voltages.36. The sign of the active or the reactive power. 3.36. respectively. enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset. 3-326 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 3-259: Enabling or disabling power directional protection. power determination will be blocked. P<>: General enable USER [ 014 220 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes P<>: Enabled PSx [ * ] P<>: Enabled [ 036 250 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes Parameter P<>: Enabled PSx set set set set 014 014 014 014 1 2 3 4 252 253 254 255 45Z5051A Fig.P139 3.1 Disabling and Enabling P<> Protection The power directional protection can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters. If the measuring-circuit monitoring function detects malfunctioning in the voltage measuring circuit. Moreover.

If the decisions of power monitoring are to be included in the trip commands when values have fallen below set thresholds. Otherwise the trip command would always be present when the system voltage was disconnected.3 Power Monitoring The P139 checks the determined power values to detect whether they exceed or fall below set thresholds. circ. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.36.P139 3 Operation 3. P<>: Enabled [ 036 250 ] MCMON: Meas. then it is recommended that transient signals be used. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-327 . 3-260: Power determination. V faulty [ 038 023 ] fnom P<>: P I̲A 402 631 fnom I̲B fnom I̲C fnom V̲A-G fnom V̲B-G fnom V̲C-G P<>: P+ 402 633 P<>: P402 634 P<>: Q 402 632 P<>: Q+ 402 635 P<>: Q402 636 45Z5052A Fig. and it would therefore not be possible to close the circuit breaker again.

ratio P> PSx [ * ] P<>: P P<>: Starting P> [ 035 086 ] 402 631 P<>: Operate delay P>>PSx [ * ] P<>: Release delay P>>PSx [ * ] P<>: Blocking tP>> EXT [ 035 083 ] P<>: Signal P>> delayed [ 035 090 ] P<>: P>> PSx [ * ] P<>: Diseng.36. ratio P>>PSx [ * ] P<>: Starting P>> [ 035 089 ] Parameter P<>: P> PSx P<>: Diseng. 3-328 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . ratio P>>PSx P<>: Operate delay P>>PSx P<>: Release delay P>>PSx set set set set 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 1 2 3 4 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 19Z5271A Fig. 3-261: Active power monitoring when the set thresholds are exceeded. The starting signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays. When the active power exceeds the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set. a starting results.4 Active Power Monitoring when Set Thresholds are Exceeded The P139 monitors the active power with two-stage functions to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds.P139 3 Operation 3. P<>: Operate delay P> PSx [ * ] P<>: Release delay P> PSx [ * ] P<>: Blocking tP> EXT [ 035 082 ] P<>: Signal P> delayed [ 035 087 ] P<>: P> PSx [ * ] P<>: Diseng. ratio P> PSx P<>: Operate delay P> PSx P<>: Release delay P> PSx set set set set 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 1 2 3 4 120 200 201 202 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 Parameter P<>: P>> PSx P<>: Diseng.

36. P<>: Direction P> PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional 2: Backward directional 3: Non-directional P<>: Trip signal P> [ 035 088 ] P<>: Signal P> delayed [ 035 087 ] P<>: P+ 402 633 P<>: P402 634 P<>: Direction P>> PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional 2: Backward directional 3: Non-directional P<>: Trip signal P>> [ 035 091 ] P<>: Signal P>> delayed [ 035 090 ] Parameter P<>: Direction P> PSx P<>: Direction P>> PSx set set set set 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 1 2 3 4 136 137 138 139 156 157 158 159 45Z5054A Fig. if it is negative. A setting determines whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional. a backward.(reverse-) directional decision results.P139 3 Operation 3. a forward-directional decision is issued. a backward. 3-262: Direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when the set thresholds are exceeded.5 Active Power Direction when Set Thresholds are Exceeded The P139 determines the sign of the active power. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-329 . If the sign is positive.(reverse-) directional or a nondirectional decision.

6 Reactive Power Monitoring when Set Thresholds are Exceeded The P139 monitors the reactive power with two-stage functions to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. ratio Q>>PSx P<>: Operate delay Q>>PSx P<>: Release delay Q>>PSx set set set set 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 1 2 3 4 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 19Z5270A Fig.36. ratio Q> PSx [ * ] P<>: Starting Q> [ 035 092 ] P<>: Q 402 632 P<>: Operate delay Q>>PSx [ * ] P<>: Release delay Q>>PSx [ * ] P<>: Blocking tQ>> EXT [ 035 085 ] P<>: Signal Q>> delayed [ 035 096 ] P<>: Q>> PSx [ * ] P<>: Diseng.P139 3 Operation 3. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set. a starting results. When the reactive power exceeds the set thresholds. The starting signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays. ratio Q> PSx P<>: Operate delay Q> PSx P<>: Release delay Q> PSx set set set set 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 1 2 3 4 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 Parameter P<>: Q>> PSx P<>: Diseng. P<>: Operate delay Q> PSx [ * ] P<>: Release delay Q> PSx [ * ] P<>: Blocking tQ> EXT [ 035 084 ] P<>: Signal Q> delayed [ 035 093 ] P<>: Q> PSx [ * ] P<>: Diseng. 3-330 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . ratio Q>>PSx [ * ] P<>: Starting Q>> [ 035 095 ] Parameter P<>: Q> PSx P<>: Diseng. 3-263: Reactive power monitoring when the set thresholds are exceeded.

a backward. 3-264: The direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when the set thresholds are exceeded. if it is negative. a forward-directional decision is issued. If the sign is positive. A setting determines whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional.36. P<>: Direction Q> PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional 2: Backward directional 3: Non-directional P<>: Trip signal Q> [ 035 094 ] P<>: Signal Q> delayed [ 035 093 ] P<>: Q+ P<>: Q- 402 635 402 636 P<>: Direction Q>> PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional 2: Backward directional 3: Non-directional P<>: Trip signal Q>> [ 035 097 ] P<>: Signal Q>> delayed [ 035 096 ] Parameter P<>: Direction Q> PSx P<>: Direction Q>> PSx set set set set 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 017 1 2 3 4 176 177 178 179 196 197 198 199 45Z5056A Fig.7 Reactive Power Direction when Set Thresholds are Exceeded The P139 determines the sign of the reactive power.(reverse-) directional or a nondirectional decision. a backward.(reverse-) directional decision results. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-331 .P139 3 Operation 3.

When the active power falls below the set thresholds.P139 3. 3-332 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .8 3 Operation Active Power Monitoring when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds The P139 monitors the active power with two-stage functions to detect when it falls below the set thresholds. a starting results. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set.36. The starting signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.

ratio P< PSx set 1 017 030 017 034 017 060 set 2 set 3 017 031 017 032 017 033 017 035 017 036 017 037 017 061 Parameter P<>: P<< PSx P<>: Diseng. [ 035 062 ] P<>: tP</tP<< elaps. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-333 .ratio P<< PSx [ * ] [ C * ] P<>: Signal P<< delayed [ 035 061 ] Setting(s) blocked P<>: Starting P<< [ 035 060 ] & P<>: Fault P<< [ 035 063 ] & P<>: tTransient pulse PSx [ * ] P<>: tTransient pulse PSx [ * ] P<>: tP< elapsed trans.ratio P<< PSx P<>: Operate delay P<<PSx P<>: Release delay P<<PSx P<>: tTransient pulse PSx set 1 set 2 017 234 017 238 017 242 017 246 017 235 017 236 017 237 017 239 017 240 017 241 017 243 017 244 017 245 017 247 017 248 017 249 018 246 018 247 set 4 set 3 set 4 P<>: Operate delay P< PSx 017 062 017 063 P<>: Release delay P< PSx 017 226 017 227 017 228 017 229 018 248 018 249 19Z5272B Fig.trans [ 035 178 ] Parameter P<>: P< PSx P<>: Diseng. 3-265: Active power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds. ratio P< PSx [ P<>: P * ] P<>: Release delay P< PSx C [ * ] P<>: Signal P< delayed [ 035 055 ] 402 631 Setting(s) blocked P<>: Starting P< [ 035 054 ] & P<>: Blocking tP<< EXT [ 035 051 ] P<>: Fault P< [ 035 057 ] & P<>: P<< PSx [ * ] P<>: Operate delay P<<PSx [ * ] P<>: Release delay P<<PSx P<>: Diseng. [ 035 056 ] P<>: tP<< elapsed trans.P139 3 Operation P<>: Blocking tP< EXT [ 035 050 ] P<>: P< PSx [ * ] P<>: Operate delay P< PSx [ * ] P<>: Diseng.

3-334 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .(reverse-) directional decision results.36.9 3 Operation Active Power Direction when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds The P139 determines the sign of the active power. If the sign is positive. if it is negative. a forward-directional decision is issued.(reverse-) directional or a nondirectional decision. a backward. a backward. A setting determines whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional.P139 3.

3-266: The direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when values fall below set thresholds. [ 035 056 ] P<>: P+ P<>: P- & 402 633 & & 402 634 P<>: Starting P<< [ 035 060 ] P<>: Direction P<< PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional 2: Backward directional 3: Non-directional & P<>: Signal P<< delayed [ 035 061 ] & P<>: Trip signal P<< [ 035 064 ] & & & P<>: tP<< elapsed trans. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-335 .010 Snom P<>: Direction P< PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional 2: Backward directional 3: Non-directional P<>: Signal P< delayed [ 035 055 ] & & P<>: Trip signal P< [ 035 058 ] & P<>: Trip signal P< trans [ 035 059 ] & & P<>: tP< elapsed trans. P<< trans.P139 3 Operation P<>: Starting P< [ 035 054 ] Apparent power S > 0. [ 035 065 ] & Parameter P<>: Direction P< PSx P<>: Direction P<< PSx set 1 017 230 017 250 set 2 set 3 017 231 017 232 017 233 017 251 017 252 017 253 set 4 & 19Z5273B Fig. [ 035 062 ] & P<>: Trip sig.

3-336 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 035 056 3 P<>: Fault P< 035 057 Parameter 1 2 3 P<>: Operate delay P< PSx P<>: Release delay P< PSx P<>: tTransient pulse PSx set 1 017 060 017 226 018 246 set 2 set 3 017 061 017 062 017 063 017 227 017 228 017 229 018 247 018 248 018 249 set 4 19Z5278A Fig.P139 3 Operation 1 P<>: Starting P< 035 054 P<>: Operate delay P< PSx * P<>: Release delay P< PSx 2 * P<>: Signal P< delayed 035 055 P<>: tP< elapsed trans. 3-267: Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the active power monitoring.

ratio Q<< PSx P<>: Operate delay Q<<PSx P<>: Release delay Q<<PSx P<>: tTransient pulse PSx set 1 set 2 018 085 018 086 018 095 018 096 018 213 018 214 018 236 018 237 018 246 018 247 set 3 set 4 018 087 018 088 018 097 018 098 018 215 018 216 018 238 018 239 018 248 018 249 19Z5276B Fig. P<>: Blocking tQ< EXT [ 035 052 ] P<>: Q< PSx [ * ] P<>: Operate delay Q< PSx [ * ] P<>: Diseng. ratio Q< PSx [ P<>: Q * ] P<>: Release delay Q< PSx C [ * ] P<>: Signal Q< delayed [ 035 067 ] 402 632 Setting(s) blocked P<>: Starting Q< [ 035 066 ] & P<>: Blocking tQ<< EXT [ 035 053 ] P<>: Fault Q< [ 035 069 ] & P<>: Q<< PSx [ * ] P<>: Diseng. ratio Q< PSx P<>: Operate delay Q< PSx P<>: tQ</tQ<< elaps.P139 3 Operation 3. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-337 . 3-268: Reactive power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds.trans [ 035 179 ] P<>: Release delay Q< PSx set 1 018 035 018 044 018 052 018 056 set 2 set 3 018 036 018 037 018 045 018 046 018 053 018 054 018 057 018 058 set 4 018 038 018 047 018 055 018 059 Parameter P<>: Q<< PSx P<>: Diseng.36. When the reactive power falls below the set thresholds.ratio Q<< PSx [ * ] P<>: Operate delay Q<<PSx [ * ] P<>: Release delay Q<<PSx C [ * ] P<>: Signal Q<< delayed [ 035 011 ] Setting(s) blocked P<>: Starting Q<< [ 035 010 ] & P<>: Fault Q<< [ 035 049 ] & P<>: tTransient pulse PSx [ * ] P<>: tTransient pulse PSx [ * ] P<>: tQ< elapsed trans. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set. [ 035 068 ] P<>: tQ<< elapsed trans. a starting results.10 Reactive Power Monitoring when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds The P139 monitors the reactive power with two-stage functions to detect when it falls below the set thresholds. The starting signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays. [ 035 016 ] Parameter P<>: Q< PSx P<>: Diseng.

11 3 Operation Reactive Power Direction when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds The P139 determines the sign of the reactive power. If the sign is positive. if it is negative. a backward.P139 3. a forward-directional decision is issued.(reverse-) directional or a nondirectional decision.36. 3-338 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .(reverse-) directional decision results. A setting determines whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional. a backward.

[ 035 016 ] & Parameter P<>: Direction Q< PSx P<>: Direction Q<< PSx set 1 018 081 018 242 set 2 set 3 018 082 018 083 018 084 018 243 018 244 018 245 set 4 & 19Z5277B Fig.010 Snom P<>: Direction Q< PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional 2: Backward directional 3: Non-directional P<>: Signal Q< delayed [ 035 067 ] & & P<>: Trip signal Q< [ 035 155 ] & & P<>: tQ< elapsed trans. Q< trans. Q<< trans. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-339 . [ 035 068 ] & & P<>: Trip sig.P139 3 Operation P<>: Starting Q< [ 035 066 ] Apparent power S > 0. [ 035 156 ] P<>: Q+ & 402 635 P<>: Q- & 402 636 P<>: Starting Q<< [ 035 010 ] P<>: Direction Q<< PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional 2: Backward directional 3: Non-directional & P<>: Signal Q<< delayed [ 035 011 ] & P<>: Trip signal Q<< [ 035 176 ] & P<>: Trip sig. [ 035 177 ] & & & P<>: tQ<< elapsed trans. 3-269: Direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when values fall below set thresholds.

3 035 068 P<>: Fault Q< 035 069 1 2 3 P<>: Operate delay Q< PSx P<>: Release delay Q< PSx P<>: tTransient pulse PSx set 1 018 052 018 056 018 246 set 2 set 3 018 053 018 054 018 055 018 057 018 058 018 059 018 247 018 248 018 249 Parameter set 4 19Z5279A Fig. 3-340 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P139 3 Operation 1 P<>: Starting Q< 035 066 P<>: Operate delay Q< PSx * P<>: Release delay Q< PSx 2 * P<>: Signal Q< delayed 035 067 P<>: tQ< elapsed trans. 3-270: Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the reactive power monitoring.

3-272: Directional starting signal issued by the reactive power monitoring. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-341 . 3-271: Directional starting signal issued by the active power monitoring.010 Snom P<>: Starting P> [ 035 086 ] & P<>: Direction P forw.36. [ 035 194 ] P<>: Starting Q>> [ 035 095 ] P<>: Starting Q< [ 035 066 ] P<>: Starting Q<< [ 035 010 ] Apparent power S > 0. [ 035 191 ] P<>: Starting P>> [ 035 089 ] P<>: Starting P< [ 035 054 ] P<>: Starting P<< [ 035 060 ] P<>: P+ 402 633 P<>: P- 402 634 19Z5274B Fig.P139 3 Operation 3. [ 035 181 ] & P<>: Direction P backw.010 Snom 19Z5275B Fig.12 Apparent power S Starting Signal with Direction > 0. [ 035 193 ] & P<>: Direction Q backw. P<>: Q+ 402 635 P<>: Q402 636 P<>: Starting Q> [ 035 092 ] & P<>: Direction Q forw.

If C BF: Dis able EXT is the only function assigned to a binary signal input.37 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF) The P139 features the CB failure protection function. 3.P139 3 Operation 3. If C BF: Enable USER is the only function assigned to a binary signal input. 3-273: Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection. CBF: General enable USER [ 022 080 ] 0 1 & CBF: Enabled [ 040 055 ] 0: No 1: Yes INP: Fct. then a signal at this input will have no effect. If this parameter has been activated the CBF function may be enabled or disabled using setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. 3-342 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . Parameters and configured binary signal inputs have equal status. After a trip command has been issued the CBF function checks that the circuit breaker has actually been opened. then circuit breaker protection will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. assignm.37.1 Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Failure Protection The function is enabled at CBF: Ge ne ral e nabl e USER./user enabled [ 038 040 ] CBF: Enable USER [ 003 016 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute CBF: Disable EXT [ 038 042 ] & CBF: Disable USER [ 003 015 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute 47Z1138B Fig. U xxx [ xxx xxx ] U x1 U x2 U x3 U xx Address 038 041 & ≥1 Address 038 042 & & CBF: Enable EXT [ 038 041 ] & & ≥1 ≥1 S1 1 R 1 CBF: Ext.

superv [ 022 172 ] blocked 19Z6130B Fig.37.P139 3 Operation 3.37. CBF: Enabled [ 040 055 ] ≥1 CBF: Not ready [ 040 025 ] & CBF: Blocking EXT [ 038 058 ] CBF: t1 3p [ 022 165 ] blocked ≥1 & CBF: t2 [ 022 166 ] blocked CBF: Delay/starting trig. ● Circuit breaker protection is being blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal input. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-343 .3 Detecting a CB Tripping A break in current flow is the preferred criterion to detect a successful CB tripping.2 Readiness of Circuit Breaker Protection Circuit breaker failure protection will be unavailable under the following conditions: ● The CBF function is not activated. 3-274: Signal C B F : N o t r e a d y. ● All CBF timer stages have been set to blocked. [ 022 155 ] blocked CBF: Delay/fault beh. 3. Protection functions that have tripping criteria not directly dependent on current flow may additionally be provided with status signals from CB auxiliary contacts for evaluation. CB [ 022 171 ] blocked CBF: Delay/CB sync.

Moreover. 3-275: Current flow monitoring. When the residual current monitoring function is disabled.37.. As long as a residual current exceeding the comparator threshold is flowing.4 3 Operation Current Flow Monitoring This function is used to detect a break in current flow safely. CBF : C ur rent fl ow C and the multiple signal CBF: Current flow Phx. the current flow criterion is not met and the corresponding signal (C BF: Curre nt flow N) is issued. no monitoring is carried out and the CBF : C urr en t f low N = No signal is issued continuously. 2 CBF: IN< [ 022 180 ] ≥1 CBF: Current flow N [ 038 235 ] CBF: IN 460 394 64Z1103C Fig. 3-344 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . CBF: Curre nt flow B. As long as current flow criteria are met the monitoring function will continuously issue the phase selective signals CBF : C urr en t f low A.. there is a residual current monitoring function which can be enabled/ disabled. For this either the residual current value measured directly at the CT or the value derived from the three phase currents may be used.P139 3. CBF: I< [ 022 160 ] I̲A CBF: Current flow A [ 038 230 ] I̲B CBF: Current flow B [ 038 231 ] I̲C CBF: Current flow C [ 038 232 ] CBF: Current flow Phx [ 038 233 ] CBF: Evaluation IN [ 022 184 ] 0 1 2 0: Without 1: Calculated 2: Measured c1 c2 + + + I̲N 1 2 1 . The CBF function continuously compares sampled current values with the set threshold value C BF: I<. immediately and pole-selectively.

CBAux. The P139 can check the following CB status signals for plausibility and evaluate them: ● The open signal from the circuit breaker. The evaluation of current criteria is not affected by this blocking. 3-276: Plausibility check of CB status signals. Assigning necessary for this is made with the parameters MAI N: Sig. MAIN: CB open 3p EXT ● The closed signal from the circuit breaker. If only one of the two possible CB status signals has been configured.5 Evaluation of CB Status Signals Trip signals included in MAI N: Gen . asg. MA IN: CB clos e d 3 p EXT The evaluation of the CB status signals is blocked. U xxx [ xxx yyy ] U x01 U x02 U x03 U xxx Address 031 028 Address 036 051 MAIN: CB open 3p EXT [ 031 028 ] MAIN: CB closed 3p EXT [ 036 051 ] & & & CBF: CB pos. the P139 will issue the CBF: CB pos. can be selected with the parameter CBF: Fct.P139 3 Operation 3. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-345 . CB cl ose d. which use CB status signals in addition to current flow monitoring. assignm. Status signals from external devices are processed similarly to the MAI N: CB open 3p EXT and MAIN: CB closed 3p EX T CB status signals.assignm. As an alternative the status signals from the external device may be used by the P139. tri p command 1. C B ope n or MAIN: Sig.. if the configuration of the respective binary signal inputs or the signal levels are not plausible. INP: Fct. asg. implausible [ 038 210 ] ≥1 & 19Z6131C Fig.37. im pl ausi ble signal. then this configured signal will always be considered plausible by the P139. As a result. Applying CB status signals depends on the type of auxiliary contacts available.

included in the Gen. Trip signal 1 is considered a start criterion. The CB auxiliary contacts are evaluated when no current flow is registered. has been selected from the protection function in parameter C BF: Fct. t rip. ● The CBF : t 1 3 p signal will be issued if the startup criterion is still present when the time delay set at timer stage CB F: Trip signal t1. The following criteria are evaluated as a startup criterion: Internal startup criterion ● Generating the Gen. Current flow monitoring is the primary evaluation criterion. The trip signals will be issued as long as the current criterion is not met or the CB's state is signaled as closed. In case of an external CB fault the elapsing of timer stage t2 may be interrupted by a signal to a binary signal input appropriately configured at CBF: CB fau lt y EXT. for the evaluation of the CB auxiliary contacts. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a backup circuit breaker or protection system. Should a loss of gas pressure occur in the arcing chambers of installed type SF-6 circuit breakers then all surrounding circuit breakers must be immediately tripped without waiting for a reaction from the damaged switch. ● The C BF: t2 signal will be issued if the startup criterion is still present when the time delay set at timer stage CBF: Trip signal t2.P139 3. C BAu x. the state of the general trip signal or the external trigger signal is no longer taken into account.7 Timer Stages and Output Logic Associated timer stages are started when a startup criterion is met. External startup criterion ● Triggering by a protection device operating in parallel (CBF: Start 3p E XT) may be used as a start criterion. The CBF function will thus reset only if the current criterion is met (current values to fall below I< with all three phases) or the CB's state is open. The CB auxiliary contacts are evaluated when no current flow is registered and the respective trip signal. has elapsed. After a CBF startup. To be on the safe side an additional two pole trigger may be implemented by applying the CBF: Star t e nabl e E XT signal. Current flow monitoring is the primary evaluation criterion. 3.6 3 Operation Startup Criteria Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection function will occur when the CB is recognized as closed during a startup criterion.37. by setting the parameter CBF: Start with m an.37. In addition it may be selected. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip coil. Trip command 1. 3-346 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .assig nm. that a manual trip signal will be used as a start criterion.

CBF: Not ready [ 040 025 ] CBF: Startup 3p [ 038 211 ] c t c t CBF: CB faulty EXT [ 038 234 ] CBF: t1 3p [ 022 165 ] 0 CBF: t2 [ 022 166 ] CBF: Trip signal t1 [ 038 215 ] CBF: CB failure [ 036 017 ] 0 CBF: Trip signal t2 [ 038 219 ] & 19Z6433A Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-347 . 3-277: Startup of circuit breaker failure protection. implausible [ 038 210 ] CBF: I< [ 022 160 ] & ≥1 & I̲A & I̲B & S 1 1 R 1 I̲C MAIN: CB open 3p EXT [ 031 028 ] ≥1 MAIN: CB closed 3p EXT [ 036 051 ] ≥1 & ≥1 ≥1 & S 1 1 R 1 CBF: Startup 3p [ 038 211 ] >1 CBF: Start with man. blocked [ 021 013 ] MAIN: Gen. [ 022 159 ] Signal 1 m out of n Signal 2 Signal 3 Selected signals CBF: CB pos. 3-278: Timer stages of circuit breaker failure protection. U xxx [ xxx yyy ] U x01 U x02 U x03 & ≥1 U xxx CBF: Start enable EXT [ 038 209 ] CBF: Start 3p EXT [ 038 205 ] Address 038 209 & 19Z6132D Fig. CBAux. trip signal 1 [ 036 005 ] MAIN: Manual trip signal [ 034 017 ] & ≥1 0: No 1: Yes & & INP: Fct.P139 3 Operation CBF: Fct. trip [ 022 154 ] 0 1 MAIN: Trip cmd.assignm. assignm.

t1 [ 022 169 ] 0 & 1 S 1 1 R 1 CBF: Min.dur. the user can set minimum time-delays for trip commands. 3-348 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . will remain active until reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary signal input. will operate in latching mode.t2 [ 022 170 ] 0 1 & S 1 1 R 1 0: No 1: Yes MAIN: Latch. blocked [ 021 013 ] & CBF: Trip signal t1 [ 038 215 ] t 0 ≥1 CBF: Trip command t1 [ 038 220 ] ≥1 CBF: Trip command t2 [ 038 224 ] ≥1 CBF: Latching trip cmd. The corresponding trip command.t2 [ 022 168 ] 0: No 1: Yes & CBF: Trip signal t2 [ 038 219 ] t 0 ≥1 CBF: Latching trip cmd.8 3 Operation Trip Commands While trip signals issued by the CB failure protection have no timer stages available. CBF: Min.37. issued by the CB failure protection function.dur.P139 3. reset [ 040 139 ] 19Z6134B Fig.t1 [ 022 167 ] MAIN: Trip cmd. trip cmd. 3-279: CBF trip commands. By appropriate setting it can be selected that trip commands. trip cmd. trip c. set to latch mode.

When such a fault is detected behind the CB the CBF : F ault beh ind CB signal is issued. 3-281: Fault behind CB protection. The signal C BF: Delay /st artin g t rig. will be issued after timer stage CBF : Trip s ign al. 3. implausible [ 038 210 ] CBF: Delay/fault beh. which is fed from the remote end. Fault behind CB protection recognizes such faults through the current criterion if the circuit breaker does not indicate that it is closed after the time delay set at C BF: D ela y/fau lt be h. CB CBF: I< [ 022 171 ] [ 022 160 ] & I̲A & t 0 CBF: Fault behind CB [ 038 225 ] I̲B I̲C MAIN: CB open 3p EXT [ 031 028 ] MAIN: CB closed 3p EXT [ 036 051 ] 19Z6136D Fig. [ 022 155 ] MAIN: General starting [ 040 000 ] CBF: Starting trig. 3-280: Starting trigger.37.37.P139 3 Operation 3. This may also prevent unwanted triggering of the circuit breaker failure function.10 Fault Behind CB Protection A fault behind a CB (downstream) is a fault that may occur between a circuit breaker already open and a CT. EXT [ 038 016 ] t & CBF: Trip signal [ 040 026 ] CBF: Starting [ 038 021 ] 0 19Z6135B Fig. CBF: Delay/starting trig.9 Starting Trigger The signal CBF : S tarti ng will be issued when the signal CBF: St arting t rig. EX T is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input and a general starting condition is present. CBF: CB pos. has elapsed. In such a case the far end circuit breaker may be triggered by an InterMiCOM protective interface. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-349 . CB has elapsed.

P139 3.11 3 Operation CB Synchronization Supervision CB synchronization supervision recognizes states where not all circuit breaker contacts are open or closed. When this time-delay has elapsed the signal CBF: TripSig CBsync. This function uses both current flow monitoring and evaluation of CB state signals to detect CB synchronization. Poles that are recognized as being open will still be signaled.37.super is issued. 3-282: CB synchronization supervision. 3-350 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .superv A open [ 038 227 ] & CBF: CBsync. In order to bridge CB operating times the time-delay CB F: D e l ay/CB s ync. CBF: CB pos.superv [ 022 172 ] & t CBF: TripSig CBsync.superv B open [ 038 228 ] & CBF: CBsync.super [ 038 226 ] 0 ≥1 I̲B I̲C <3 & CBF: CBsync. implausible [ 038 210 ] MAIN: CB open 3p EXT [ 031 028 ] MAIN: CB closed 3p EXT [ 036 051 ] ≥1 CBF: I< [ 022 160 ] I̲A CBF: Delay/CB sync.superv can be used.superv C open [ 038 229 ] 19Z6137B Fig.

38 Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Function Group CBM) The P139 features a circuit breaker monitoring function.1 Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Monitoring Circuit breaker monitoring may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. 3.P139 3 Operation 3. 3. CBM: General enable USER [ 022 010 ] 0 1 0: No CBM: Enabled [ 044 130 ] 1: Yes 48Z5404A Fig.2 Variants The wear condition of a circuit breaker may be determined using a variety of methods: ● Monitoring the mechanical switching operations ● Accumulating ruptured current values ● Accumulating the squared ruptured current values ● Calculating the current-time integral of ruptured and accumulated current values ● Calculating the remaining switching operations with reference to the CB wear characteristic. This function supports state-controlled maintenance of circuit breakers. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-351 . 3-283: Enabling or disabling circuit breaker monitoring.38.38.

In such a case the parameters for this knee point are to be set to Blocked. 3-352 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 3-284. (p.C B) ● The circuit breaker's mean ruptured current (CBM: Med. curr. For proper performance of circuit breaker monitoring it should be observed that the knee points must be applied in a logically correct sequence (continuously descending).CB) and the permitted number of CB operations at mean ruptured current (CBM: Pe rm. curr. Imax.CB) The mean ruptured current is not available for all types of circuit breakers. Im e d. 3-352) displays the wear characteristics for a circuit breaker with a nominal current of 2000 A and a maximum ruptured current of 63 kA. C B op. CB op. The knee points in Fig. Itrip .C B) ● The circuit breaker's maximum ruptured current (CBM: Max.C B) and the permitted number of CB operations at maximum ruptured current (CBM: Pe rm. I trip.3 CB Wear Characteristic Manufacturers of circuit breakers usually provide wear characteristics displaying the maximum number of permissible CB operations in relation to the ruptured current.38.P139 3 Operation 3. When set currents and numbers of CB operations are not plausible according to the characteristic the P139 will issue an error message and block circuit breaker monitoring. 3-352) are necessary to set the wear characteristic for the circuit breaker: ● The circuit breaker's nominal current (CBM: Inom.CB) and the permitted number of CB operations at nominal current (CBM: Perm. 100000 10000 1000 100 10 0. (p. The mean ruptured current is 48 kA. 3-284. Inom. Number of permissible CB operations Fig.1 1 10 100 Disconnection current in kA 19Z6123A_EN Fig. A knee point is not considered in the characteristic when at least one of the parameters for the knee point is set to Blocked. CB op. 3-284: Circuit breaker wear characteristic.

P139 3 Operation 3.CB): Remaining permitted number of CB operations at Inom. EXT or trip: Function triggered by the general trip command 1 or CB open signal generated by an auxiliary contact Measured values and counters are re-determined with each triggering and compared with set threshold values.CB): Max permitted number of CB operations at Inom. only: Function triggered only by the general trip command 1 ● With CB sig. Calculation is per this equation: nrem(I nom. In addition differing inherent time delays from the two command chains can be configured independently of each other so as to achieve optimum time adjustment. CB s ig.CB: Nominal current for the CB ● n(Inom. The cycle is started by a trigger criterion.CB: Ruptured current ● n(Id. acqu.CB): Permitted number of CB operations at Id. C BM: Curr.38.EXT only: Function triggered by the CB open signal generated by an auxiliary contact ● CB sig. Definition for the end of a cycle: The remaining time of a power cycle duration has elapsed after the last detected current zero crossing. t. The start of the cycle time is corrected by the settable correction times. 3. The number of remaining CB operations nrem(Inom. to be triggered by the position signal issued by the CB auxiliary contacts.38.CB before disconnection ● nrem. The maximum cycle time duration is defined with 220 milliseconds. The CBM: Curr. flow e nd ed B. flow en ded C) signal is then issued.5 ● Inom.CB) is calculated and displayed phase selectively after each disconnection by the P139. f l ow en de d A (CBM: Curr. CBM: Cycle r un nin g B or C BM: Cy cle run nin g C are issued. A fault on a CB pole is considered to be apparent if further current zero crossings are detected after P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-353 .(Inom.38. A correction value can be set in order to determine the trip time at CBM: Corr.0(Inom. Another correction value can be set at C B M: Corr. This enables to correctly evaluate the leading or lagging auxiliary contacts or the delay between issuing the trip command and opening of the CB contacts.0(I nom.CB ● Id.CB) n(I d.CB) = nrem.6 Cycle for Circuit Breaker Monitoring The circuit breaker monitoring cycle is defined pole-selectively.t ime t r ip to be triggered by the open command.CB) Where: 3.CB): Remaining permitted number of CB operations at Inom.CB) - n(I nom.CB after disconnection Operating Modes Setting the parameter CBM: Operati ng mode will select the condition under which the function will be triggered: ● With trip cmd.4 Calculating the CB Wear State The current wear state of the circuit breaker is given as the number of remaining CB operations at nominal current conditions.CB according to wear characteristics ● nrem. acqu. During an active cycle the signals C BM: C ycl e ru n ni ng A.

3-354 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . when setting external devices.P139 3 Operation the maximum cycle time has elapsed. trip cmd. so that operational trip commands. issued to the circuit breaker by the control function. CB open [ 021 017 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal n m out of n Selected signal CBM: Internal CB trip 310 030 MAIN: CB open 3p EXT [ 031 028 ] 19Z6125C Fig. asg. CBM: tmax> C) signal is issued. asg. 3-286: Forming the linked “open” state signal. trip cmd. as g. parameter so that the function in the P139 will be triggered by CB auxiliary contacts.. CBM: Sig.7 Linking Control Functions with the Trip Command With the P139. 3-285: Forming the linked trip commands. are considered additionally to the general trip command 1. 3. the trip command from the optional control function can be linked with the general trip command 1 of the protection. asg. 310 025 MAIN: Gen. Measured values from the respective CB tripping are canceled and the CBM: tmax> A (CBM: tmax> B. [ 022 152 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal n m out of n Selected signal CBM: internal trip cmd. The external devices' “open” state signal may be linked to the control function's “open” state signal by setting the C BM: Si g. tri p cmd.38. trip command 1 [ 036 071 ] 19Z6124B Fig. MAIN: Sig. In such a case the trip command from the control function must be associated by the parameter C BM: Si g.

● Per-unit ruptured current ● Squared per-unit ruptured current ● Sum of the per-unit ruptured currents ● Sum of the squared per-unit ruptured currents ● Current-time integral of the per-unit ruptured current ● Sum of the current-time integrals of the per-unit ruptured currents The ruptured current is derived from the RMS current value detected before a last zero crossing.8 Pole-Selective Counter Values and Measured Values The P139 separately evaluates each phase current and generates an individual wear presentation for each CB pole. 3-287. The integral of the current-time area is calculated between the trip time and the current's disappearance. 3-356). The following counter values are presented pole-selectively: ● The number of mechanical switching operations made ● The number of remaining CB operations at CB nominal current This value is derived by evaluating wear with reference to the CB's wear characteristic. (p.P139 3 Operation 3. The current's disappearance is recognized when no further current zero crossings are detected. The following measured values are presented pole-selectively.38. An example for calculation of the current-time integral is displayed in Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-355 . and per-unit values refer to the CB's nominal current: ● Primary ruptured current This value is applied to evaluate wear with reference to the CB's wear characteristic.

Accumulated measured values are not affected by such a reset operation.38. Only such measured values and counter values in the P139 may be set to new values that do not have their default values set to Blocked. 3-356 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .00 -20.00 15.00 -5. Executing the set command results in initializing all default values in the P139 to Blocked.00 10.10 Setting Measured Values Setting measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function is necessary when the respective CB has already been exposed to operating conditions or has been replaced.00 0.00 -10. time running 19Z6126A Fig.00 5. 3.9 Resetting Measured Values Measured values from the respective last CB trip may be reset via the interfaces on the P139.P139 3 Operation 20. 3-287: Calculation of the current-time integral when CBM is triggered by a general trip command 1.38.00 Calculating the current-time integral Gen.00 -15. The available interfaces on the P139 may be used to set measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function. trip command 1 Corr. 3. The stored value will remain unchanged if the default value is set to Blocked.

CB op. curr.P139 3 Operation MAIN: Protection active & 306 001 C CBM: Enabled [ 044 130 ] CBM: Operating mode [ 022 007 ] 1 & 2 & 3 & C C MAIN: Inom C. CB oper. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-357 .acqu. 3-288: Triggering and calculating circuit breaker monitoring. Imed. Imax. A CBM: Set remain. A CBM: Remain. only CBM: Perm. USER [ 003 013 ] Phase x / Current Ix CBM: Set No.CB [ 022 015 ] 310 025 CBM: Internal CB trip CBM: Max. A [ * ] CBM: Set remain. of CB oper. prim.val. No. CB op. CB op.time trip [ 007 249 ] CBM: Set No. acqu. EXT or trip CBM: Blocked [ 044 199 ] CBM: internal trip cmd.CB [ 022 012 ] CBM: Med. Inom. CB op. A [ * ] CBM: Set ΣItrip A [ * ] CBM: Set ΣItrip**2 A [ * ] CBM: Set ΣI*t A [ * ] R CBM: Itrip A [ * ] R CBM: I*t A [ * ] R CBM: Itrip.prim A [ * ] R CBM: Itrip**2 A [ * ] S CBM: ΣItrip A [ * ] S CBM: ΣItrip**2 A [ * ] S CBM: ΣI*t A [ * S CBM: No. of CB oper.T.t. A CBM: Set ΣItrip A CBM: Set ΣItrip**2 A CBM: Set ΣI*t A CBM: No. CB op. [ 010 001 ] 1: With trip cmd. CB op. A A / IA 022 131 022 134 022 137 022 140 022 143 008 011 008 014 B / IB 022 132 022 135 022 138 022 141 022 144 008 012 008 015 C / IC 022 133 022 136 022 139 022 142 022 145 008 013 008 016 Phase x / Current Ix CBM: Itrip A CBM: I*t A CBM: Itrip. A [ * ] S CBM: Remain. A [ * ] ] CBM: Initialize values [ 003 011 ] CBM: Reset meas. CB oper. Itrip. No. [ 022 018 ] C CBM: Corr.EXT only 3: CB sig.prim A CBM: Itrip**2 A CBM: ΣItrip A CBM: ΣItrip**2 A CBM: ΣI*t A A / IA 009 047 009 061 009 212 009 051 009 071 009 077 009 087 B / IB 009 048 009 062 009 213 009 052 009 073 009 078 009 088 C / IC 009 049 009 063 009 214 009 053 009 076 009 079 009 089 52Z0145A Fig.CB [ 022 016 ] 310 030 fnom I_x CBM: Perm.CB [ 022 017 ] CBM: Corr.CB [ 022 014 ] CBM: Perm. Itrip. CB op. curr. CB sig. CBM: Inom.CB [ 022 013 ] 2: With CB sig.

An alarm is issued should the number of remaining CB operations drop below this threshold. No. CB op. CB op .12 Monitoring Ruptured Currents In addition to the evaluation of the CB wear state and monitoring of the number of CB operations performed. The number of CB operations performed is displayed. A threshold value can be set with the parameter CBM: No. C [ 008 013 ] 19Z6122B Fig. CB op. CB op.< [ 044 136 ] CBM: Remain. CB op. CB operations > [ 022 019 ] CBM: No. An alarm is issued should the accumulated current values exceed any of these thresholds. of CB oper. < [ 022 020 ] CBM: Remain. <.P139 3. C BM: Σ Itrip**2> and CBM: ΣI *t>. B [ 008 015 ] CBM: Remain. CB op. Threshold values can be set with the parameters C BM: Σ Itrip>.38. > [ 044 135 ] CBM: No. 3-358 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .38. C CBM: Remain No. No. An alarm is issued should the number of CB operations performed exceed this threshold.11 3 Operation Monitoring the Number of CB Operations Depending on the selected operating mode the P139 will calculate the current wear state of the circuit breaker after each disconnection. 3-290: Monitoring the number of CB operations performed. The number of remaining CB operations at CB nominal current are calculated and displayed. the P139 features the means to accumulate and display the ruptured current values and the square of these values. B [ 008 012 ] CBM: No. Rem. At the same time each switching operation will increment the P139's counter for the number of CB operations. A [ 008 014 ] CBM: Sig. A [ 008 011 ] CBM: Sig. No. 3. 3-289: Monitoring the remaining number of CB operations at nominal current. of CB oper.CB op. A threshold value can be set with the parameter CBM: Remain No. CB ope rat ions >. No. C [ 008 016 ] 19Z6121B Fig. of CB oper. No. C CBM: No.

38. CBM protection is blocked if one of the following conditions is met: ● Circuit breaker monitoring is blocked by parameters. 3-291: Blocking circuit breaker monitoring. so that such testing does not corrupt monitoring results.13 Blocking Circuit Breaker Monitoring When protection injection testing is carried out the circuit breaker monitoring function should be blocked. ● Circuit breaker monitoring is blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal input. CBM: Blocked [ 044 199 ] CBM: General enable USER [ 022 010 ] & CBM: Blocking EXT [ 044 128 ] CBM: Blocking USER [ 022 150 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes 48Z5346B Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-359 .P139 3 Operation 3.

b. trip Vref EXT [ 036 086 ] 300ms 0 SFMON: M. 300ms MAIN: M. if VTs are fitted. trip V [ 098 000 ] MCMON: Meas.c.circ.max .min is the lowest.P139 3. V faulty [ 038 049 ] SFMON: Meas. the voltages as well as the reference voltage for balance. V faulty [ 038 023 ] MCMON: Undervoltage [ 038 038 ] MCMON: Phase sequ. V.Vref flty.b.circ.circ. ● No general starting signal is present.39 3 Operation Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON) During healthy system operation.b.b.c. If either unbalance or the lack of measuring voltage is detected.circ.b. Vref triggered [ 038 100 ] SFMON: M. V. Current monitoring is based on checking the difference in the phase current magnitudes under the following operate condition: I P. circ. [ 040 078 ] MCMON: FF. 3. V faulty [ 098 017 ] MCMON: M. trip Vref [ 098 011 ] MCMON: Meas.c.c. trip VNG EXT [ 002 183 ] MCMON: M. In order to suppress short-term transients. I faulty [ 040 087 ] SFMON: Meas.V.39.max ≥ I diff> where IP. trip V EXT [ 004 061 ] 0 SFMON: M.circ.I faulty [ 098 016 ] MAIN: M. VNG flty.max is the highest of the three phase currents and IP. [ 007 214 ] 52Z0146A Fig. action is taken to prevent the unit from malfunctioning.min I P. the P139 monitors the phase currents and.circ. 3-360 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .I faulty [ 037 020 ] MCMON: Meas. circ. Idiff> is the set operate value MCMON: Idi f f>. circ. 3-292: Monitoring signals. In the event of a fault.c. [ 098 023 ] MAIN: M. If connection is to two current transformers only (phase ANC connection only) evaluation of current IB can be disabled by an appropriate selection for the operating mode. [ 007 213 ] MCMON: M. ● The difference between the maximum and the minimum phase current exceeds 0. the measuring stage Idiff> is followed by a set operate-delayed timer stage MCMON: Ope rate de l ay. measuring-circuit monitoring is blocked.V.I P.Vref flty.1 Current Monitoring Current monitoring is only enabled if the following conditions are simultaneously met: ● Measuring-circuit monitoring is enabledMCMON: General enable US ER. Vref flty.05⋅Inom. Measuring-circuit monitoring can be disabled by the appropriate setting.

The signal MCMON : Me as .min| |I̲P. then the MC MON : Un dervolt age signal is issued. I faulty [098 005 ] 19Z5087A Fig.min| |I̲P. either a minimum current having the default threshold setting of I>0.05⋅Inom or the closed position of the circuit breaker contacts can be used as enabling criteria.max|-|I̲P. ● Measuring circuit monitoring is enabled. If at least one of the phase-to-phase voltages falls below the set trigger value MC MON : V min< for the duration of the time-delay MC MO N: O pe rat e de lay.min|/ MAIN: General starting [ 040 000 ] |I̲P. ● A general starting signal is absent.P139 3 Operation MCMON: General enable USER [ 014 001 ] 0 MCMON: Enabled [040 094 ] 1 0: No 1: Yes MCMON: Op. mode Idiff> [ 017 028 ] 0 1 2 1. circ. IC I̲A 1 I̲B 2 I̲C 3 |I̲P.39. I faulty [040 087 ] SFMON: Meas. 3 0: Without 1: IA.max| >0. k. circ. In addition to these conditions.max|-|I̲P. 3. vol tage o.65 Vnom and there is no incorrect phase sequence.05 Inom MCMON: Idiff> [ 017 024 ] MCMON: Operate delay [ 017 023 ] MCMON: Meas. 2.max| |I̲P. 3-293: Monitoring the current-measuring circuits. 3 2: IA. is generated if all three phase-tophase voltages exceed the fixed threshold of 0. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-361 . IC 1. IB.2 Voltage Monitoring Voltage monitoring is only enabled if the following conditions are met simultaneously: ● The P139 is fitted with voltage transformers.

V faulty [ 038 049 ] 60<φ(VC-A)<180° t 0 SFMON: Phase sequ. mode Vmin< monit [ 018 079 ] 1 2 & 3 & 1: Vmin< 2: Vmin< with I enable 3: Vmin< w. voltage o. monitor.CB cont. [ 038 048 ] MCMON: Phase sequ.65 Vnom C & & MCMON: Meas.39. [ 018 019 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes >0.4 Vnom C & & C MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ] 60<φ(VA-B)<180 60<φ(VB-C)<180° MCMON: Phase sequ.3 Phase-Sequence Monitoring Phase-sequence monitoring is enabled only if the following conditions are simultaneously met: 3-362 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .k.enab MAIN: CB closed 3p EXT [ 036 051 ] & C MCMON: Vmin< [ 017 022 ] t MCMON: Undervoltage [ 038 038 ] 0 & V̲A-G + V̲B-G - SFMON: Undervoltage [ 098 009 ] + V̲C-G + >0.05 Inom MCMON: Enabled [ 040 094 ] C I̲A I̲B I̲C MCMON: Op. 3.P139 3 Operation MCMON: Operate delay [ 017 023 ] MAIN: General starting [ 040 000 ] >0. V faulty [ 098 001 ] 19Z5088B Fig. 3-294: Monitoring the voltage-measuring circuits.

P139 3 Operation ● Measuring circuit monitoring is enabled. Once the time-delay has elapsed. ● No general starting signal is present. ● Phase-sequence monitoring is enabled. V faulty is issued. the phase-sequence monitoring trigger is followed by a set time-delay of 1 s. the signal MC MON: Phase s e qu. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-363 . In order to suppress short-term transients.4⋅Vnom. ● All three phase-to-ground voltages exceed 0.

Vref triggered [ 038 100 ] 036 051 MAIN: CB closed 3p [ 031 042 ] SFMON: FF. A short circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference voltage is present when the following conditions are met: ● The circuit breaker is closed. MCMON: FF. Vref [ 014 012 ] U x2 U x3 U xx Address MCMON: FF.4 3 Operation “Fuse Failure” Monitoring of the Reference Voltage The P139 includes “Fuse Failure” monitoring of the reference voltage function.1⋅Vnom.c. Fuse Failure monitoring of the reference voltage is only possible if the ASC function has been configured.39.P139 3. This is specifically applied when no auxiliary contact is available on the voltage transformer m.Vref enabled USER [ 014 013 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes V̲ref |V̲ref|-|V̲Meas|≥ ASC: Vmeas 0. 3-364 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . delay FF. U xxx [ 152 xxx ] U x1 MCMON: Oper. Fuse Failure monitoring must be able to discriminate between a short circuit in the three-phase network being monitored and a reference voltage missing because of a short circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference voltage. Vref triggered [ 098 022 ] 47Z0178B Fig. which is required by the “Automatic Synchronism Check” (ASC).1 Vnom 305 007 INP: Fct. If fuse failure monitoring is not desired it can be disabled by setting parameters. 3-295: “Fuse Failure” monitoring of the reference voltage. assignm.b. ● The voltage difference between the line side and the busbar must exceed 0.

40.P139 3 Operation 3. it is only applied for monitoring and signaling purposes as well as to monitor temperature limits.1 Enable/Disable the Limit Value Monitoring Function The Limit Value Monitoring function can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters. then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.2 Monitoring Phase Currents and Phase Voltages With the P139 monitoring of the following measured values is possible in order to determine if they exceed set upper limit values or fall below set lower limit values: ● Maximum phase current ● Minimum phase current ● Maximum phase-to-phase voltage ● Minimum phase-to-phase voltage ● Maximum phase-to-ground voltage ● Minimum phase-to-ground voltage If any of the measured values exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or lower limit values. 3.40 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT) Limit Value Monitoring is not designed to be a high-speed protection function. 3. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-365 .40.

3-366 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P139 3 Operation LIMIT: General enable USER [ 014 010 ] 0 LIMIT: Enabled [ 040 074 ] 1 0: No 1: Yes LIMIT: I> [ 014 004 ] LIMIT: tI> [ 014 031 ] MAIN: Protection active 306 001 LIMIT: tI> elapsed [ 040 220 ] LIMIT: I>> [ 014 020 ] I̲A I̲B LIMIT: tI>> [ 014 032 ] I̲C LIMIT: tI>> elapsed [ 040 221 ] I̲max I̲min LIMIT: I< [ 014 021 ] LIMIT: tI< [ 014 033 ] LIMIT: tI< elapsed [ 040 222 ] LIMIT: I<< [ 014 022 ] LIMIT: tI<< [ 014 034 ] LIMIT: tI<< elapsed [ 040 223 ] 47Z0153A Fig. 3-296: Limit Value Monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current.

max V̲PP. 3-297: Limit Value Monitoring of maximum and minimum phase-to-phase voltage and maximum and minimum phase-to-ground voltage.min C LIMIT: VPP< LIMIT: tVPP< [ 014 029 ] [ 014 041 ] t C LIMIT: VPP<< LIMIT: tVPP<< [ 014 030 ] [ 014 042 ] t C LIMIT: VPG> 0 LIMIT: tVPG> [ 014 023 ] [ 014 035 ] t COMP C LIMIT: VPG>> 0 LIMIT: tVPG> elapsed [ 040 224 ] 0 LIMIT: tVPG>> elapsed [ 040 225 ] LIMIT: tVPG>> [ 014 024 ] [ 014 036 ] t V̲PG.P139 3 Operation LIMIT: Enabled [ 040 074 ] & C LIMIT: VPP> LIMIT: tVPP> [ 014 027 ] [ 014 039 ] MAIN: Protection active 306 001 t V̲A-G COMP C LIMIT: VPP>> LIMIT: tVPP> elapsed [ 040 228 ] 0 LIMIT: tVPP>> elapsed [ 040 229 ] 0 LIMIT: tVPP< elapsed [ 040 230 ] LIMIT: tVPP>> [ 014 028 ] V̲B-G 0 [ 014 040 ] V̲C-G t V̲PP.min C LIMIT: VPG< LIMIT: tVPG< [ 014 025 ] [ 014 037 ] t C LIMIT: tVPP<< elapsed [ 040 231 ] 0 LIMIT: VPG<< LIMIT: tVPG<< [ 014 026 ] [ 014 038 ] t 0 LIMIT: tVPG< elapsed [ 040 226 ] LIMIT: tVPG<< elapsed [ 040 227 ] 47Z0154B Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-367 .max V̲PG.

LIMIT: Enabled [ 040 074 ] MAIN: Protection active 306 001 V̲A-G LIMIT: VNG> [ 014 043 ] LIMIT: tVNG> [ 014 045 ] LIMIT: tVNG> elapsed [ 040 168 ] V̲B-G V̲C-G LIMIT: VNG>> [ 014 044 ] LIMIT: tVNG>> [ 014 046 ] LIMIT: tVNG>> elapsed [ 040 169 ] S8Z52G8A Fig. 3-368 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . calculated from the three phase-to-ground voltages. If any of the thresholds are exceeded.40.3 3 Operation Monitoring the Neutral-Point Displacement Voltage The neutral displacement voltage. then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed. 3-298: Monitoring the neutral-point displacement voltage.P139 3. is monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds set thresholds.

LIMIT: Starting IDC.u.lin> [ 040 180 ] LIMIT: Enabled [ 040 074 ] LIMIT: IDC. is monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-369 .lin>> [ 040 181 ] LIMIT: IDC.lin< [ 014 116 ] LIMIT: tIDC. [ 004 136 ] LIMIT: Starting IDC.lin< [ 040 184 ] LIMIT: IDC. IDC. If any of the measured values exceed or fall below the corresponding upper or lower limit values then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.lin>> [ 014 113 ] LIMIT: tIDC.lin< elapsed [ 040 186 ] LIMIT: Starting IDC.lin> [ 014 110 ] LIMIT: tIDC.lin<< [ 014 115 ] LIMIT: tIDC. p.lin>> elapsed [ 040 183 ] LIMIT: Starting IDC.lin< [ 014 114 ] LIMIT: tIDC.lin<< [ 014 117 ] LIMIT: tIDC.lin<< [ 040 185 ] LIMIT: IDC. 3-299: Monitoring the linearized measured DC values.P139 3 Operation 3.lin>> [ 014 111 ] LIMIT: tIDC.4 Monitoring the Linearized Measured DC Values The direct current.40.lin> [ 014 112 ] MAIN: Protection active 306 001 LIMIT: tIDC.lin<< elapsed [ 040 187 ] S8Z52G6A Fig.lin.lin> elapsed [ 040 182 ] MEASI: Curr. linearized by the analog measured data input.

LIMIT: General enable USER [ 014 010 ] LIMIT: Enabled [ 040 074 ] 0: No 1: Yes MAIN: Device on-line [ 003 030 ] LIMIT: Vref> [ 042 144 ] LIMIT: tVref> [ 042 148 ] 1: Yes (= on) LIMIT: tVref> elapsed [ 042 152 ] LIMIT: Vref>> [ 042 145 ] LIMIT: tVref>> [ 042 149 ] LIMIT: tVref>> elapsed [ 042 153 ] Vref LIMIT: Vref< [ 042 146 ] LIMIT: tVref< [ 042 150 ] LIMIT: tVref< elapsed [ 042 154 ] LIMIT: Vref<< [ 042 147 ] LIMIT: tVref<< [ 042 151 ] LIMIT: tVref<< elapsed [ 042 155 ] 19Z5215A Fig.5 Monitoring the Reference Voltage The reference voltage Vref (when synchrocheck VT is fitted) is monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or lower limit values.40. If the measured value exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or lower limit values then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.P139 3 Operation 3. 3-300: Monitoring the reference voltage. 3-370 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

P139 3 Operation 3. If any of the measured values exceed or fall below the corresponding upper or lower limit values then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed. LIMIT: Starting T> [ 040 170 ] LIMIT: Enabled [ 040 074 ] LIMIT: T> [ 014 100 ] LIMIT: tT> [ 014 103 ] MAIN: Protection 306 active 001 MEASI: Temperature T [ 004 133 ] LIMIT: tT> elapsed [ 040 172 ] LIMIT: Starting T>> [ 040 171 ] LIMIT: T>> [ 014 101 ] LIMIT: tT>> [ 014 104 ] LIMIT: tT>> elapsed [ 040 173 ] LIMIT: Starting T< [ 040 174 ] LIMIT: T< [ 014 105 ] LIMIT: tT< [ 014 107 ] LIMIT: tT< elapsed [ 040 176 ] LIMIT: Starting T<< [ 040 175 ] LIMIT: T<< [ 014 106 ] LIMIT: tT<< [ 014 108 ] LIMIT: tT<< elapsed [ 040 177 ] 19Z5212A Fig.6 Monitoring the Measured “PT 100” Temperature Value The temperature value that is measured by the P139 with a resistance thermometer (PT 100) connected to the analog (I/O) module Y.40. 3-301: Monitoring the measured “PT 100” temperature value. is monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or lower limit values. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-371 .

If any of the measured values exceed or fall below the corresponding upper or lower limit values then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.7 3 Operation Monitoring the Measured Temperature Values T1 to T9 The temperatures that are measured by the P139 using temperature sensors connected to the temperature p/c board (RTD module) are each monitored by two stages to determine if they exceed or fall below set thresholds. 3-302: Monitoring the measured temperature value T1 as an example for measured temperature values T1 to T9.40.P139 3. LIMIT: Starting T1> [ 040 200 ] LIMIT: Enabled [ 040 074 ] LIMIT: T1> [ 014 120 ] LIMIT: tT1> [ 014 122 ] MAIN: Protection active 306 001 LIMIT: tT1> elapsed [ 040 202 ] MEASI: Temperature T1 [ 004 224 ] LIMIT: Starting T1>> [ 040 201 ] LIMIT: T1>> [ 014 121 ] LIMIT: tT1>> [ 014 123 ] LIMIT: tT1>> elapsed [ 040 203 ] LIMIT: Starting T1< [ 040 204 ] LIMIT: T1< [ 014 124 ] LIMIT: tT1< [ 014 126 ] LIMIT: tT1< elapsed [ 040 206 ] LIMIT: Starting T1<< [ 040 205 ] LIMIT: T1<< [ 014 125 ] LIMIT: tT1<< [ 014 127 ] LIMIT: tT1<< elapsed [ 040 207 ] 19Z5213A Fig. 3-372 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

2. it will replaced by T4. 3-51)) are forwarded to the Limit Value Monitoring function.40. issued by the function group MEASI (see Section 3. 3. T6 ● Group 3: T7. If the backup temperature sensor from group 2 also fails it will be replaced by the corresponding sensor from group 3. T5. Should temperature sensor T4 also fail it will replaced by T7. T9 If ME AS I: BackupTe mpSe ns or P Sx is set to None the Limit Value Monitoring function will operate without backup sensors. with setting: Backup sensor from group 3. The association of backup temperature sensors is listed below: Main sensor Backup sensor from group 2.P139 3 Operation 3.7. with the setting Group 1 . T1 (or MEASI: Open ci rc. (p.9 ● L IMI T: St arti ng T1> ● L IM IT: St arti ng T1 >> ● LIMI T: Start in g T1 < ● L IM IT: Start i ng T1<< ● LIMI T: t T1 > e lapse d ● LIMI T: t T1>> e laps ed ● LIMI T: t T1 < e lapsed ● LIMI T: t T1<< e laps ed Backup Sensors When an open circuit has occurred the 2-out-of-3 logic available with the Limit Value Monitoring function will revert to backup sensors. If ME AS I: BackupTe mpSe nsor PSx is set to Group 1 .2/3. under the assumption that MEASI: BackupTe mpSe ns or P Sx is set to Group 1 . the defective temperature sensor from group 1 is replaced by the corresponding sensor from group 2.8 Open Circuit PT 100 The open circuit signals from the temperature sensors. T3 ● Group 2: T4.2 or Group 1 . …) will lead to blocking of these signals: 3. For this purpose the temperature sensors connected to the temperature p/c board (RTD module) are divided into three groups: ● Group 1: T1.40.2/3 T1 T4 T7 T2 T5 T8 T3 T6 T9 Should temperature sensor T1 fail. with setting: Group 1 . T2. T2.2/3.10 2-out-of-3 Monitoring Limit values resulting from temperature values measured by main sensors (from group 1) or their corresponding backup sensors are processed by the “2-out-of-3” P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-373 .40. The selection of such backup sensors for the Limit Value Monitoring function is made in the function group MEASI. An open circuit signal MEASI: Open circ.2/3 Group 1 . T8.

LI MIT: 2out of3 with T1. T9 Tx: T3 or backup sensor (T6 or T9) 040 253 LIMIT: tT9>> elapsed 041 243 19Z5210A Fig. T2 040 194 LIMIT: tT2>> elapsed 040 213 LIMIT: tTx>> elapsed MEASI: Open circ.2 Group 1 .2. T5 tTx>> for 2 of 3 limit values 040 209 LIMIT: tT5>> elapsed 041 163 MEASI: Open circ. T7 040 219 Tx: T1 or backup sensor (T4 or T7) LIMIT: tT7>> elapsed 041 183 MEASI: Open circ.P139 3 Operation Limit Value Monitoring function. This is displayed in the following figure.3 [ 041 248 ] Tx: T2 or backup sensor (T5 or T8) 040 252 LIMIT: tT8>> elapsed 041 193 MEASI: Open circ. T8 elapsed LIMIT: 2out of3 with T1. 3-303: Using backup sensors (M E A S I : B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r P S x) with the “2-out-of-3” Limit Value Monitoring function. MEASI: Enabled [ 035 008 ] MEASI: BackupTempSensor PSx [ 004 243 ] without Parameter MEASI: BackupTempSensor PSx set set set set 004 004 004 004 1 2 3 4 243 244 245 246 Group 1 . T3 040 195 LIMIT: tT3>> elapsed 040 163 LIMIT: tTx>> elapsed MEASI: Open circ.2. 3-374 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . T6 040 218 LIMIT: tT6>> elapsed 041 173 MEASI: Open circ. T4 040 208 LIMIT: tT4>> elapsed 041 153 MEASI: Open circ.2/3 MEASI: Open circ. T1 040 193 LIMIT: tT1>> elapsed 040 203 LIMIT: tTx>> elapsed MEASI: Open circ.3.

5.P139 3 Operation All functions associated with temperature sensors operate in a parallel mode.6 may use temperature sensors from group 2 even though these backup sensors are configured to group 1. T8 040 252 LIMIT: tT8>> elapsed 041 193 MEASI: Open circ.6 [ 041 249 ] without open circuit LIMIT: tT6>> elapsed without open circuit LIMIT: tT7>> elapsed without open circuit LIMIT: tT8>> elapsed without open circuit tTx>> for 2 of 3 limit values elapsed LIMIT: 2out of3 with T7. L IMI T: 2out of3 w ith T 4. 3-304: Limit Value Monitoring function “2-out-of-3” for temperature sensors T4 to T6 and T7 to T9. T6 040 218 LIMIT: tT6>> elapsed 041 173 MEASI: Open circ. In this way the “2-out-of-3” Limit Value Monitoring function.8. T5 040 209 LIMIT: tT5>> elapsed 041 163 MEASI: Open circ. MEASI: Open circ. T9 040 253 LIMIT: tT9>> elapsed 041 243 LIMIT: tT4>> elapsed without open circuit LIMIT: tT5>> elapsed tTx>> for 2 of 3 limit values elapsed LIMIT: 2out of3 with T4. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-375 . If M E A S I : B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r P S x is set to None this scheme will also apply to temperature sensors T1 to T4.9 [ 041 250 ] LIMIT: tT9>> elapsed without open circuit 19Z5211A Fig. T4 040 208 LIMIT: tT4>> elapsed 041 153 MEASI: Open circ.5. T7 040 219 LIMIT: tT7>> elapsed 041 183 MEASI: Open circ.

These temperature sensors. Sensor RTD RTD RTD Rotor Bearing Bearing Stator 19Z5236 Fig. 3-305: Temperature measurements on a motor to be used with the Limit Value Monitoring function (LIMIT) and the Thermal Overload protection (THERM). can be distributed as follows: ● On the stator there are three temperature sensors as the main sensors (group 1: T1.11 Application Example A motor protection application is shown in the figure below with temperature sensors T1 to T9 connected to the temperature p/c board (RTD module) and a “PT 100” resistance thermometer connected to the analog (I/O) module Y.P139 3 Operation 3. for example. T6) used by the “2-out-of-3” Limit Value Monitoring function ● One temperature sensor on each of the bearings is used for individual Limit Value signaling ● One main and one backup sensor inside the coolant are used by the thermal replica in the Thermal Overload protection RTD Phase B C Ambient temperature/ Coolant temperature RTD Stator RTD RTD RTD RTD Backup Temp.40. T2. T3) and three backup sensors (group 2: T4. 3-376 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . T5. Sensor RTD A RTD RTD RTD RTD Main Temp.

assignm.as sign m. initial conditions for governing the equations can be set using setting parameters. that can be used independently of each other. outp.ass ignm. For example for output 1: ■ ■ LO GIC : Time t1 ou tput 1 and LOGI C: Time t 2 ou tpu t 1: settable from 0 to 600 s. or L OG_2: Fct . There are only two differences between these two function groups: ● LOGIC offers 32 logical equations. 2 to L OGIC : Fct . The following description concentrates on the function group LOGIC. Logical operations of the function group LOGIC can be controlled through the binary signal inputs in different ways. 1 to LO G_2 : F ct . whereas the input signals LOGIC: Set 1 EXT (or LOGIC: Set 2 EXT.ass ignm . 1 (or LOGI C : F ct.) Warning! ⚫ When using the programmable logic. Binary signals in the P139 may be linked by logical “OR” or “AND” operations with the option of additional NOT operations by setting L OGIC: Fct. ● On the other hand. out p. In particular.41 Programmable Logic (Function Groups LOGIC and LOG_2) Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals within a framework of Boolean equations. then this is interpreted as “Logic externally set”. LOGI C: Set 8 EXT) are latched.P139 3 Operation 3. LOG_2 offers only 4 logical equations. outp. (For LOG_2. Two function groups for programmable logic are available. LOG_2 features long-term timers. or through the serial interfaces. it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time performance during startup of the P139. during operation and when there is a fault (blocking of the P139) are fulfilled. The binary input signals LOGIC: I npu t 01 E XT (or L OGIC: In put 0 2 EXT. outp.000 s. then the last plausible state remains stored in memory. …. The following rule applies to the operators: “NOT” before “AND” before “OR”. If the input signals of the two binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they both have a logic value of “1”). The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs configured for LOGI C: S et 1 EXT if the corresponding reset input L OGIC: Res et 1 EXT) has been configured for a binary signal input. In addition to the signals generated by the P139. through binary signal inputs. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-377 . there are no such parameters for assigning binary input signals. LOG_2 : Time t1 output 1 and LOG_2: Time t2 out put 1: settable from 0 to 60. Where applicable. …. A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. LOGIC: In put 4 0 EXT) have an updating function. outp.ass ignm. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. If only one or neither of the two functions is configured. any differences to LOG_2 are mentioned. 32. the user must carry out a functional type test to conform with the requirements of the relevant protection/control application. 4).

3-306: Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals.P139 3 Operation LOGIC: Set 1 USER [ 034 030 ] 0 1 0: No LOGIC: 1 has been set [ 034 067 ] 1: Yes INP: Fct. U xxx [ xxx xxx ] U x1 U x2 U x3 U xx Address 036 051 Address 036 059 LOGIC: 1 set externally [ 034 075 ] LOGIC: Set 1 EXT [ 034 051 ] LOGIC: Reset 1 EXT [ 034 059 ] D5Z52FAB Fig. assignm.) The LOGIC : Trigge r 1 signal is a “triggering function” that causes a 100 ms pulse to be issued. (The logic does not apply to LOG_2. 3-378 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

mode t output 1 [ 030 001 ] LOGIC: Input 01 EXT [ 034 000 ] 0 LOGIC: Input 16 EXT [ 034 015 ] 1 2 3 LOGIC: 1 has been set [ 034 067 ] 4 5 0 LOGIC: 8 has been set [ 034 074 ] 0: Without timer stage 1: Oper. 3-307: Setting options for programmable logic.assignm.del./rel./puls.rt 5: Minimum time LOGIC: 8 set externally [ 034 082 ] LOGIC: Output 01 (t) [ 042 033 ] LOGIC: Set 1 USER [ 034 030 ] LOGIC: Set 8 USER [ 034 037 ] LOGIC: Trigger 1 [ 034 038 ] 0 LOGIC: Output 01 [ 042 032 ] 1 0: don't execute 1: execute LOGIC: Trigger 8 [ 034 045 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute D5Z52CDA Fig.del.P139 3 Operation LOGIC: General enable USER [ 031 099 ] LOGIC: Enabled [ 034 046 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes MAIN: Protection active LOGIC: Fct.retrig 5 LOGIC: Time t1 output 1 [ 030 002 ] LOGIC: Time t2 output 1 [ 030 003 ] 4: Op. LOGIC: 1 set externally [ 034 075 ] 3: Op. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-379 ..delay 2: Oper./releas.dur. outp.dur. function group LOGIC (shown here for output 1).delay./puls. 1 [ 030 000 ] 306 001 Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 Signal n LOGIC: Op.

retrig 4: Op./rel. The equations are processed in the sequence defined by the order of each equation.assignm. (p.rt 5: Minimum time 5 LOG_2: Time t1 output 1 [ 050 002 ] LOG_2: Time t2 output 1 [ 050 003 ] LOG_2: Output 1 (t) [ 052 033 ] LOG_2: Output 1 [ 052 032 ] 19Z80CDA Fig./puls../puls. The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further. 3-380 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . mode t output 1 [ 050 001 ] LOG_2: Fct. 3-381) to Fig. This offers the possibility of assigning a freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each Boolean equation. higher order. It should be noted that in the case of overlapping equations. In the Minimum time operating mode. (p.delay 2: Oper.P139 3 Operation LOG_2: General enable USER [ 011 137 ] LOG_2: Enabled [ 011 138 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes MAIN: Protection active 306 001 LOG_2: Op.dur. If the P139 is switched to offline the equations are not processed and all outputs are set to the “0” logic level. function group LOG_2 (shown here for output 1).dur. 3-383)) show the time characteristics for the various timer stage operating modes.del. the setting of timer stage t2 has no effect. 3: Op. 3-313.del. equation as an input signal thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations. the result is provided by the equation with the highest order. The following diagrams (Fig.delay. outp. The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two timer elements and a choice of operating modes. 3-309. 3-308: Setting options for programmable logic./releas. 1 [ 050 000 ] 0 1 2 Signal 1 3 Signal 2 4 Signal 3 5 0 Signal n 0: Without timer stage 1: Oper.

delay).del. t2 > 0s LOGIC: Output n LOGIC: Output n (t) t1 t2 t1 t2 D5Z50BZA Fig./puls.dur./releas. if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .) P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-381 .) t2 = 0s LOGIC: Output n LOGIC: Output n (t) t1 t1 t1 = 0s LOGIC: Output n LOGIC: Output n (t) t2 t2 t1. if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 . (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2. t2 > 0s LOGIC: Output n LOGIC: Output n (t) t1 t2 t1 t2 D5Z50BYA Fig. (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2. 3-310: Operating mode 2: Pulse. delayed pickup (Oper.).P139 3 Operation t2 = 0s LOGIC: Output n LOGIC: Output n (t) t1 t1 t1 = 0s LOGIC: Output n LOGIC: Output n (t) t2 t2 t1. 3-309: Operating mode 1: Pickup/reset delay (Oper.

3-312: Operating mode 4: Pulse. if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 ./puls. delayed pickup. t2 > 0s LOGIC: Output n LOGIC: Output n (t) t1 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 D5Z50CBA Fig.delay. t2 > 0s LOGIC: Output n LOGIC: Output n (t) t2 t1 t1 t2 t2 t2 D5Z50CAA Fig.rt).) t2 = 0s LOGIC: Output n LOGIC: Output n (t) t1 t1 t1 = 0s LOGIC: Output n LOGIC: Output n (t) t2 t2 Retrigger pulse t1.) 3-382 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P139 3 Operation t2 = 0s LOGIC: Output n LOGIC: Output n (t) t1 t1 Retrigger pulse t1 = 0s LOGIC: Output n LOGIC: Output n (t) t2 t2 t2 Retrigger pulse t1. (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2. 3-311: Operating mode 3: Pickup/reset delay. (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2.. retriggerable (Op.retrig).del./rel.dur. retriggerable (Op. if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-383 . The output of the logic operation then has the same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has been assigned were triggered.) Through appropriate configuration. if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 . it is possible to assign the function of a binary input signal to each output of a logic operation. 3-313: Operating mode 5: Minimum time (Minimum time). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2.P139 3 Operation LOGIC: Output n LOGIC: Output n (t) t1 t1 D5Z50CCA Fig.

1 [ 044 000 ] Signal 1 EXT [ AAA AAA ] Signal 2 EXT [ BBB BBB ] Signal 3 EXT [ CCC CCC ] Signal n EXT [ NNN NNN ] Address AAA AAA LOGIC: Output 01 [ 042 032 ] Signal 1 EXT [ AAA AAA ] INP: Fct.) 3-384 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . U xxx [ xxx xxx ] Address BBB BBB -Uxxx D5Z52FBA Fig.assig.assig. if the parameters from LOGIC are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .P139 3 Operation LOGIC: Sig.outp. (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2. 3-314: Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations. assignm. 1(t) [ 044 001 ] Address BBB BBB LOGIC: Output 01 (t) [ 042 033 ] Signal 2 EXT [ BBB BBB ] INP: Fct. assignm. outp. U xxx [ xxx xxx ] Address AAA AAA -Uxxx LOGIC: Sig.

The control functions are available and all related function groups and parameters are visible only if the binary module X(6I 6O) is ordered and fitted to the following slot: ● For case 40 TE: slot 6 ● For case 84 TE: slot 12 The Bay Panel type defines the layout of a bay with its switchgear units. 3. the P139 first checks whether the switch command may be executed.42. The interlock conditions are defined in the interlocking logic for each switching unit within the bay that is subject to control actions and for each control direction (Open/Close).1 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions Before a switching unit within the bay is closed or opened by the control functions of the P139. it may be cancelled selectively for each switching unit and each control direction. The check of bay or station interlock equations can be cancelled for all electrically controllable switchgear units within a bay. A switch command will be executed if the optional control enable has been issued and the interlock conditions are met. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-385 . If “Local” has been selected as the control point. Different conditions are defined for the bay interlock equations to operate with or without station interlock.42 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (Function Groups DEV01 to DEV10) The P139 is designed to control up to 6 switchgear units. If the station interlock is active. the bay and station interlocks may be cancelled through an appropriately configured binary signal input.P139 3 Operation 3.

rejection 307 018 19Z50ADA Fig. act. 3-386 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . rejection 307 016 DEVxx: Close cmd. viol. rejection 307 017 DEV01: Close cmd. 3-315: General enable for switch commands issued by the control functions.acc. 3-316: Rejection of the switching commands.deact [ 221 007 ] Selected signal LOC: Loc.active [ 221 005 ] MAIN: SI active USER [ 221 002 ] MAIN: Subst. [ 221 001 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes 19Z50ABA Fig.block.enabl. rejection 307 015 MAIN: Interlock equ.interl. activating or canceling the interlocks. ctrl. [ 221 018 ] DEVxx: Open cmd. [ 221 057 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 Signal n MAIN: Enable control [ 221 058 ] Without function Selected signal MAIN: Inp. [ 221 000 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes MAIN: BI active USER [ 221 003 ] MAIN: Bay interlock. DEV01: Open cmd.P139 3 Operation MAIN: Inp.asg. interl.asg. act.

(221 103) set. (221 101) reset. yes Interlocking check OK? no Command rejected. Internal flag set. from binary input. the text for the device's name. Int. dev . Command termination. will be used as the device's designation. electr. for example). no Internal flag set. for example). (221 102) set.42. flag OR (221 101) OR (221 102) OR (221 103) set? yes Command rejected. 3-317: “Double Command Lockout”. from local HMI.interf MAIN: Command from HMI MAIN: Cmd. Command rejected. (221 101) set. fr. from COMM1: from local HMI: from binary input: MAIN: Cmd. fr. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-387 .2 Designation of External Devices Each external device represented in the Bay Panel is identified by an external device designation. This includes interlocking of parallel switching operations and further switch commands to the currently selected switching unit. Control command Control command Control command open / close open / close received open / close received received from COMM1. (221 102) reset. flag OR (221 101) OR (221 102) OR (221 103) set? no Int.P139 3 Operation During a switch command is being executed. 19Z8123A Fig.ctrl 221 101 221 102 221 103 Internal flag reset. Cmd start: Internal parameter check OK? Int. any further switch command is rejected (“Double Command Lockout”). With this selection. comm. Internal flag set. 3. in case of DEV01. flag OR (221 101) OR (221 102) OR (221 103) set? yes Command rejected. (221 103) reset. no no yes Command rejected. entered by the user at DE V01 : DEVName U ser (in case of DEV01. or this parameter is set to Device Name User. ex t. The user can either select this designation from a list of over 70 pre-defined names (via the parameter D EV 0 1: D esign at. yes Command received: Command execution.

The assignment of inputs and outputs for an automatic configuration is shown in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix. The P139 offers a selection from pre-defined bay types. 3-318: Bay type selection. Longer text entries are truncated to 4 characters internally.42.3 Bay Type Selection The P139 is designed to control up to six switchgear units.) 3. Should the required bay type be missing from the standard selection then the user can contact the manufacturer of the P139 to request the definition of a customized bay type to download into the P139. By applying the bay editor from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1 the user can define new bay types. the P139 can automatically configure the binary inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of switchgear units. MAIN: Type of bay [ 220 000 ] MAIN: Auto-assignment I/O [ 221 065 ] BB1 Q0 MAIN: Direct motor control 306 029 MAIN: DEVxx is a C. 3-388 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .B. Once the user has selected a bay type. 306 044 19Z50AQA Fig.P139 3 Operation (The maximum length is 4 characters. The bay type defines the layout of a bay with its switchgear units. as with the fixed identifiers.

Setting options for the P139 and the different possibilities to integrate a switchgear unit into the functional sequence of the P139 (processing of status signals only or controlling and signaling) will be explained below.---]. ● The bay interlock conditions for the “Open” / “Close” command control of the switchgear units. The list of Bay Panel types in the Appendix shows which binary inputs and output relays have been assigned signals or commands for control of switchgear units in the case of automatic configuration. Function group DEV01 will be used throughout in this example. the following definitions are made: ● Manually operated switchgear units with status signals to be processed.P139 3 Operation 3. for operation with or without the station interlock function. ● Switchgear units to be controlled and signaled by the P139. If set to No. using one switchgear unit as an example. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-389 . the binary inputs for switchgear status signals and the output relays for control commands are configured automatically if MAI N: A ut o-assi gnme nt I/O is set to Yes. ● Binary inputs required for switchgear units with direct motor control. ● Binary outputs required for switchgear units with direct motor control. the user will need to carry out this configuration. When a Bay Panel type is selected.4 Defining a Bay Panel Type With the selection of a Bay Panel type. If a signal is identified in the function diagrams by function group “COMM1:” with a blank address [--.42. it will indicate that it is a signal to or from the communication interface and that it has not been assigned an address.

the updated status is signaled. The signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see Section 3. have elapsed. 3-390 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 3. pos.42.pos. the running time monitoring function is started. the previous switchgear unit status will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is operating.5.2 Switch Truck For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs.5 Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units 3. the state actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled.1 Status Signals The status signals ‘Open’ and ‘Closed’ are assigned to binary signal inputs.interm. If such a configuration has been assigned. s uppr. If DEV01: Stat.Su pe rv.42.5. Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have reached their new position.46. it is possible to configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug.P139 3 Operation 3. the status signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit is set to “Open” while the input has a logic value of “1”. a delay time of 5 s is started.1. Once this time period has elapsed and there is no status signal for the position.1. (p.42. 3-421)) are used for further processing.ind. For the duration of the set time period for running time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined position – either “Open” or “Closed” – the signal “Intermediate position” is issued. If no logic value of “1” is present at any of the two binary signal inputs. is set to Yes. is set to Yes. If D EV01: I nterm.Op . The signal “Faulty position” is issued if the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their “Open” or “Closed” position after the set time period for running time monitoring and the delay time set in MAIN: Delay Man.

device closed [ 210 037 ] DEV01: Dev. [ 210 027 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes 0 1 2 3 0 3 DEV01: Control state [ 210 018 ] 0: Intermediate pos.pos [ 210 038 ] Selected group DEV01: Open signal EXT [ 210 030 ] DEV01: Closed signal EXT [ 210 031 ] Debouncing DEV01: Op.P139 3 Operation DEV01: Interm. 3-319: Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units. [ 210 011 ] [ 210 036 ] DEV01: Switch. [ 210 012 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes DEV01: Inp.interm.tr./flt.asg. dev. suppr.pos.time switch. [ 210 004 ] Chatter suppression DEV01: Stat. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-391 . interm. sw.ind. device open DEV01: Gr. debounc. plug [ 210 014 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 Signal n Without function Selected signal DEV01: Switch. assign. 1: Open 2: Closed 3: Faulty position 19Z50AJA Fig. pos.

Usually.ctr. comm. Selection of the Control Point”.42.asg.el.6 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units 3.asg.ctrl. remote control is carried out via the communication interface. fr. re ce ive d Selection of the Switchgear Unit to be Controlled and Generating a Switching Request The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected and the switching command is sent to this selected switchgear unit. The selection of the control point is described in the section entitled “Configuration of the Bay Panel and of the Measured Value Panels.42. fr.i nterf ● MAI N: C ommand from HMI ● MA IN : Cmd.e l. switchgear units can be controlled via binary inputs configured appropriately (configuration via DE V01: I np .ope n or D EV 01: In p. the appropriate control inputs need to be configured for switchgear units selected to be controlled. This can be carried out via the local control panel using the selection key and pressing the “Open” or “Close” key to generate the switching request. re ce ive d ● DEV01: C lose cmd. For control via binary inputs.2 ● D EV0 1: Ope n cmd.6. The setting MAIN : Elect rical con trol determines whether the inputs function as remote or local control points.1 Local or Remote Control of External Devices Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. ele ctr. local control via the keys on the local control panel.ctrl or or Additionally the following state signals are issued and entered into the operating data memory: 3.6.close).42. the control commands “Open” or “Close” will also address the switchgear unit to be controlled. 3-392 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P139 3 Operation 3. Moreover. Dependent on the respective position of control the P139 will issue the following logic state signals: ● MA IN : C md. For control via the communication interface.

viol. 3-320: Generating a switching request.block. mon.ctrl.] COMM1: Close command DEV01 [ --.el. [ 221 018 ] DEV01 DEV01: Open request 307 000 DEV01: Close request 307 001 MAIN: Electrical control [ 221 061 ] 2: Local 1: Remote LOC: Rem.active [ 221 005 ] LOC: Return t.close [ 210 020 ] Selected signal COMM1: Open command DEV01 [ --.active [ 221 004 ] DEV01: Inp.--. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-393 .open [ 210 019 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 Signal n Selected signal DEV01: Inp. [ --. trg 305 550 LOC: Return t. local control 19Z50AAA Fig. trg. MAIN: End command 307 012 306 028 DEV01: Latching time runn.acc. trg 305 551 MAIN: Interlock equ.] DEV01: Latching time [ 210 005 ] DEV01: End open command 307 002 DEV01: End close command 307 003 MAIN: Direct motor control 306 029 DEV01: Latching time elaps.P139 3 Operation LOC: Loc. COMM1: Motor rel.acc.asg.] 307 011 1) Keys.el.ctr. illum.--.select.block.--.asg.

rejection 307 015 MAIN: Communication error [ 221 019 ] ILOCK: Output 02 DEV01: Open w/o stat.42. act. the conditions for the “Open” command for operation without the station interlock function. Bay interlock conditions for operation with or without the station interlock function can be defined. DEV01: Open request 307 000 DEV01: Close request 307 001 DEV01: Fct.3 3 Operation Enabling Switching Commands Before a switching command is executed. [ 210 026 ] 1: Yes DEV01: Enable BI close 307 005 DEV01: Close cmd.BIwSI open [ 210 039 ] ILOCK: Output 03 DEV01: Fct. for example. int.P139 3. 3-394 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .asg. rejection 307 016 DEV01: Fct.assig. [ 221 001 ] MAIN: Subst.asg.6.BI w/o SI cl [ 210 042 ] DEV01: Enable BI open 307 004 DEV01: Open cmd. 3-321: Assignment of the equations of the interlocking logic to the switching commands. interl.BI w/o SI op [ 210 041 ] ILOCK: Output 01 [ 250 032 ] ILOCK: Output 32 [ 250 063 ] MAIN: Bay interlock. act. [ 221 000 ] ILOCK: Output 01 DEV01: Fct. enabling of switching commands by the bay interlock function. the P139 checks the interlocking conditions defined in the interlocking logic to determine whether a switching command is permitted or not.BIwSI clos [ 210 040 ] ILOCK: Output 04 DEV01: Enable SI Open 307 019 DEV01: Enable SI Close 307 020 19Z50AEA Fig.assig.interl [ 210 025 ] 1: Yes DEV01: Close w/o stat. The assignment of an output relay from the interlocking logic to a switching command determines the interlocking conditions that define.

If the P139 detects a communication error or if there is no communication interface available. interl. the switching operation is carried out provided that the enable from the bay interlock is still present.42.--. there will then be a check – taking into account the station interlock functions – as to whether switching is permitted or not.interl [ 210 025 ] DEV01: Enable SI Open 307 019 0 1 0: No COMM1: Enable SI open DEV01 1: Yes COMM1: Close request DEV01 [ --.6. [ 210 026 ] DEV01: Enable SI Close 307 020 0 1 0: No COMM1: Enabl.--. If there is to be a check on the bay interlock and the station interlock function. If bay interlocking issues a switching enable. MAIN: Communication error [ 221 019 ] DEV01: Close request 307 001 DEV01: Open request 307 000 MAIN: Bay interlock. [ 221 000 ] [ --. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-395 . the bay interlock conditions defined for operation without station interlock functions will be considered. the “Open” or “Close” switching operation can be carried out without checking the station interlock function conditions.SI close DEV01 1: Yes [ --.--.] DEV01: Close w/o stat. In this case.] DEV01: Open w/o stat. a switching request will be sent to the substation control level. the bay interlock will be checked first. At substation control level.] [ --.] 19Z50AFA Fig. int.P139 3 Operation 3. act. there needs to be a communication link with the substation control level. Optionally. [ 221 001 ] DEV01: Enable BI open 307 004 DEV01: Enable BI close COMM1: Open request DEV01 307 005 MAIN: Subst. act. there will be an automatic switch to bay interlock without the station interlock function.4 Bay Interlock for Operation with the Station Interlock Function For the station interlock function conditions to be interrogated. 3-322: Enabling of the switching commands by the station interlock. If the substation control level also issues an enabling command.--.

307 013 0: No 1: Yes MAIN: Gen. trip command 1 [ 036 071 ] DEV01: With gen.B. DEV01: With gen. trip command 2 [ 036 022 ] DEV01: With close cmd. 3-396 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 3-323: Linking to the protection commands.5 3 Operation Linking Protection Commands to Switching Commands For circuit breakers. the “Open” command can be linked to the protection trip signals.P139 3.6.2 [ 210 022 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes MAIN: Gen. trip cmd. The trip (open) or close commands of the protection functions are executed directly without a check of the interlocking conditions.42.1 [ 210 021 ] MAIN: DEVxx is a C./prot [ 210 023 ] 0 1 0: No DEV01: Protect. The “Close” command can also be linked to the close command of the protection functions. trip cmd. 306 044 0 1 DEV01: Protection trip cmd. The Bay Panel type defines which of the switchgear units are circuit breakers. close cmd. 307 014 1: Yes MAIN: Close command [ 037 009 ] D3Z75FNA Fig.

control a “Close” request will automatically issue a “Close” command for the circuit breaker after a close enable was issued by the ASC. where operators may make decisions as to which external device is to be given a switching command.synchr.6 Issue of Switching Commands Dependent on the operating mode (set at D EV 01 : O pe r. PSx is set to Autom. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-397 .) set for commands. PSx is set to Autom. m ode cmd. When the automatic synchronism check (ASC) is active and the parameter AS C: Syst em i nt e gr at. However if ASC : System i ntegrat. switching commands are issued for the set timer durations or according to time control.42.6.P139 3 Operation 3.check ASC will not interfere with any switching commands. Data generated and continuously updated by the ASC function is transmitted – when configurations have been set accordingly – to the central control station.synchron.

307 013 DEV01: Protect. 3-398 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 3-324: Issue of switching commands. [ 221 230 ] MAIN: Cmd. dur.6. [ 210 024 ] 1 & 1 t & 1 t & 1 t & 1 t 2 3 1: Long command 2: Short command 3: Time control & & MAIN: Mon. short cmd. [ 221 056 ] DEV01: Open command & DEV01: Close command [ 210 028 ] ≥1 MAIN: Device on-line [ 003 030 ] 0: No (= off) & [ 210 029 ] ≥1 & MAIN: Enable control [ 221 058 ] MAIN: Bay interlock. [ 221 001 ] DEV01: Enable BI open ≥1 & 307 004 DEV01: Enable SI Open 307 019 DEV01: Open request 307 000 & ≥1 DEV01: Enable BI close & 307 005 DEV01: Enable SI Close 307 020 DEV01: Close request & ≥1 307 001 ASC: AC effect.long cmd. [ 221 231 ] DEV01: Oper. 307 014 MAIN: Cmd. mot.1 Blocking of Switchgear Device Operation It is possible to generally block open and / or close commands to a switchgear device. for DEV01 305 040 & ASC: Close enable DEV01 305 041 19Z81AGA Fig.42. 3. drives tr. Setting parameters DE V01 : Block cmd open and DEV01: Block cmd close (and correspondent parameters for the other DEVxx) are available for this purpose. mode cmd. dur.P139 3 Operation DEV01: Open cmd blocked 460 513 DEV01: Close cmd blocked 460 514 DEV01: Protection trip cmd. close cmd. act.6.

just like with a breach of the interlocking conditions. 3-325: Blocking of switchgear device operation.6. cmd.P139 3 Operation To each of these setting parameters can be signals assigned. e xt . termin. 3. is issued.2 External Termination Control If the operating mode Time control was selected it is possible to intervene in the control process of external switchgear units by using external termination contacts.6.42. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-399 . each of these signals then activate the blocking of the switching command appropriate to this setting parameter. c DEV01: Function group DEV01 [ 210 047 ] DEV01: Block cmd open [ 218 120 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 DEV01: Open cmd blocked Signal n 460 513 Selected signal c DEV01: Block cmd close [ 218 160 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 DEV01: Close cmd blocked Signal n 460 514 Selected signal 19Z8103A Fig. In this case the signal MAI N: Int erlock equ. v iol. to Yes and binary signal inputs must be configured so they can be connected to the external termination contacts. It will then be necessary to set the P139 at MA IN: W.

is set to No) the switching command is terminated after the set latching time has elapsed. which can be set to debouncing and chatter suppression mode (see Section 3.46.. If such a configuration has been assigned. The P139 expects that the switchgear unit has reached its intermediate position within a period of time that can be configured via DEV01: StartCmdTime superv .6. If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected (MAI N: W . pos . te rmin . If the operating mode without external termination contacts was selected (MAI N: W. In case of a switchgear unit for which it is (almost) impossible to detect the intermediate position it is recommended to switch off this monitoring by setting the parameter to Blocked. 3-421)).inter m. the status signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit is set to ‘Open’ while the input has a logic value of “1”.42. For the duration of running time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined position – either “Open” or “Closed” – the signal “Intermediate position” is issued.. a delay time of 5 s is started. it is possible to configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. running time monitoring for the switchgear unit is started.1. when a termination command is issued while the set time period for running time monitoring is active. (p. respective setting parameters exist for the other DEVxx). is set to Yes. the state actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled.ind.8 Time Control of Switching Commands After sending an Open / Close command. e xt . the previous switchgear unit status will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is operating. after the set latching time has elapsed. suppr.7 3 Operation Switch Truck For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs. (p. Once this time period has elapsed and there is no status signal for the position. 3-393)). If D EV01: I nt erm. Moreover.1.42. po s. e xt. te rmi n.6. is set to Yes) the switching command is terminated. is set to Yes. cmd . the updated status is signaled. If the switchgear unit has not reached its intermediate position after this time has elapsed then the command is deactivated and an exceeded timer is flagged by the signal MA IN : St artcmdti me e xcee d. (for DEV01. 3-400 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . the P139 expects a status signal – “Open” or “Closed” to be issued by the switchgear unit within the duration of running time monitoring.. 3. If the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their “Open” or “Closed” position after the set time period for running time monitoring has elapsed the signal Faulty position is issued. cmd. 3-320.P139 3. when either the ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ position status signal is received or the set time period for running time monitoring has elapsed (see Fig. The status signal for the position of the contacts on the switchgear unit is present at appropriately configured binary inputs on the P139. Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have reached their new position. If DEV0 1: Stat.

interm. [ 210 012 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes DEV01: Inp. Open Closed Faulty position DEV01: Control state [ 210 018 ] MAIN: Startcmdtime exceed. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-401 . 307 010 DEV01: Stat. . device open [ 210 036 ] [ 210 011 ] DEV01: Switch.time mon. 3 0: 1: 2: 3: Intermediate pos. dev.device closed [ 210 037 ] DEV01: Dev. suppr. DEV01: Switch. [ 210 007 ] t 0 0.ind.tr. 3-326: Monitoring of switching commands.P139 3 Operation DEV01: Interm. plug [ 210 014 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 Signal n Without function Selected signal DEV01: Gr. [ 210 027 ] 0 DEV01: Start runn. assign. debounc.asg.pos. [ 221 112 ] 19Z80AKA Fig.time switch. . sw. 1 307 008 0: No 1: Yes 0 1 2 3 DEV01: StartCmdTime superv. interm. device runn./flt. pos.pos [ 210 038 ] Selected group DEV01: Open signal EXT [ 210 030 ] Debouncing DEV01: End open command DEV01: Closed signal EXT [ 210 031 ] Chatter suppression MAIN: Direct motor control 307 002 DEV01: Op. [ 210 004 ] DEV01: End close command 307 003 t 0 306 029 DEV01: Open command [ 210 028 ] DEV01: Close command [ 210 029 ] DEV01: Switch.

DEV01: Close command [ 210 029 ] 1 3 DEV01: Switch. 3-327: Sequence for time control of switching commands without external termination control.device closed [ 210 037 ] 4 1 3 4 10 ms DEV01: Latching time [ 210 005 ] DEV01: Op. [ 210 004 ] 19Z5201B Fig. asg.device closed [ 210 037 ] DEV01: Inp.P139 3 Operation DEV01: Close command [ 210 029 ] 3 1 DEV01: Switch. end Close [ 210 016 ] 1 3 10 ms DEV01: Latching time [ 210 005 ] 19Z5202B Fig. 3-328: Sequence for time control of switching commands with external termination control. example for switching operation “close”. 3-402 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . example for switching operation “close”. device open [ 210 036 ] DEV01: Switch. device open [ 210 036 ] DEV01: Switch.time switch. dev.

device open and DE V01 : Switch. cap.P139 3 Operation 3. to which the maximum number of CB operations permitted is assigned as soon as the positive edge of an event is present that has been selected by a “1 out of n” parameter at MAI N: CB1 ready f ct. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-403 . cap. Operation of the CB is recognized from the contact position signals DE V0 1: Swit ch. Reaching a value of 1 will in no way effect the protection or control functionality. ope r. cap. set with the counter at MA IN: CB1 act. may only be decremented to a value of 1. oper. cap.ass ign. are then decremented by 1 with each CB operation.42.e. MAI N: CB1 f aul ty EXT is set to Yes) the counter M AIN: CB1 act. Associated with this parameter is the counter at MA IN: CB1 act . ope r. cap. oper.9 Monitoring the Number of CB Operations Permitted The maximum number of CB operations within an ARC cycle (or within a specific time period) may be set with parameter MAIN: CB1 max . is immediately set to 1. oper. The counter at MAIN: CB1 act.de vice clos e d.6. The number of CB operations permitted. in particular there will be no blocking of CB operation! When a CB fault has occurred (i.

is issued.drives t [ 221 028 ] 19Z6417A Fig. 306 020 MAIN: Mon.42.42. mot.time mot. drives tr. One counter per DEVxx function group is available for this purpose. motor drive op.1 Monitoring the Motor Drives in Case of Direct Motor Control For bays with direct motor drive control of load disconnecting switches. a monitoring function is provided to protect motors from overheating. the control commands are enabled again. + 307 008 [ 221 025 ] R MAIN: Perm.mot.7 Direct Motor Control 3. Moreover. drive s tr.2 Counter for the Open / Close Commands All Open and Close commands to the switchgear unit are counted. permiss. a limit value can optionally be set for the counter value. 3-329: Monitoring the Motor Drives in Case of Direct Motor Control.time mot. the signal MAIN : Mon . no control commands to motor-driven switchgear units will be executed.No. mot.drives [ 221 026 ] MAIN: Cool.7. If the number of switching operations within the monitoring period exceeds the set limit. 3. [ 221 056 ] n=1 MAIN: Mon.drive op MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute [ 221 027 ] COMP n MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: Reset LED n>No.time mon. For the duration of the set cooling time.P139 3 Operation 3. Once the set cooling time has elapsed.7. 3-404 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . DEV01: Start runn.42. isolating links or grounding switches. If the counter value reaches the set limit a warning signal is issued. The number of switching operations within a set monitoring period is counted. MAIN: No. oper.

en d f. the following modified control sequence described below applies to motor-operated switchgear units. The list of Bay Panel types shows which bay types are defined for direct motor control.limit [ 218 211 ] COMP [ 003 002 ] 1: execute 1 ≥1 DEV01: Warning op. If a Bay Panel type with direct motor control is selected. DC fail . [ 219 081 ] MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] 19Z8104A Fig. however. For bays with direct motor control of load disconnecting switches. 3-330: Counter for the Open / Close Commands. 3-331. this would involve the danger of contact burn.P139 3 Operation The diagram shows the example of function group DEV01. is set to No: In this case the direction control contacts will remain closed. (Note: This feature bears the danger of an undefined switch position!) Moreover. the single-pole command CMD _1: C omman d C012 is defined for control of the motor relay. An example for the connection of a bay with direct motor control is illustrated in Chapter “Installation and Connection”. If the status signal is not received during this time period a signal is transferred to the substation control level.42. However. 3-407). the singlepole command C MD_1: Command C0 11 is defined for control of the shunt windings and the single-pole signal SIG_1: Si gnal S0 12 E XT (debounced and conditioned by chatter suppression) is defined for the status signal to the motor relay. A different type of monitoring is active if MAI N: Cmd.3 Time Control for Direct Motor Control The control sequence described above applies to all switchgear units operated via an “Open” contact or a “Close” contact. a set monitoring time period is started during which the status signal must be issued by the motor relay. The logic. isolating links or grounding switches. In addition. is valid for all DEVxx with the appropriate parameters. DEV01: Operation counter [ 210 043 ] m DEV01: Open command [ 210 028 ] ≥1 DEV01: Operation counter [ 210 043 ] CT=m + R DEV01: Close command [ 210 029 ] DEV01: Oper.7. D C f ail. 3. the P139 issues the following signals (depending on the type of fault) when the monitoring time delay has expired: P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-405 . the “Close” command issued to the output relays. configured to Motor relay Cmd or Shunt winding. After triggering the motor relay. This results in interrupting the motor control command circuit and thereby preventing an undefined switch position. is set to its default value Yes. a binary input for the status signal of the motor relay and one output relay each to trigger the motor relay and the shunt windings will have to be configured.count. In the example illustrated in Fig.en d f. (p. is terminated if MAIN : Cmd .count.

te rmin. Monitoring of the switching command is then the same as with electromechanically operated switchgear units. e xt . The monitoring time period is again started with the termination of the “Close” command to the motor relay and after it has elapsed the control commands “Open” or “Close” are also terminated. LOGIC (processing by the programmable logic function). If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected (MAI N: W . The switching command to the motor relay is always terminated after the set latching time has elapsed. when either the “Open” or “Closed” position status signal is received or the set time period for running time monitoring has elapsed (see Fig. 3-393)). If the operating mode external termination contacts was selected (MA IN : W. Acknowledging from the local control panel HMI is done by pressing the CLEAR (C) key. COMMx / IEC / GOOSE (signaling via the control system) or they may be mapped to the signal panel as an alarm signal. when a termination command is issued while the set time period for running time monitoring is active. termi n. cmd . cmd. the switching command is also terminated when either the “Open” or “Closed” position status signal is received.s tar t – This signal is issued if the K200 contacts have not closed after the set monitoring time-delay has elapsed. The monitoring time period is again started with the termination of the “Close” command to the motor relay and after it has elapsed the control commands “Open” or “Close” are also terminated. the running time monitoring of the motor relay is started simultaneously with this status signal. ● (221 110) MA IN: DE V op. 3-320.ter m. is set to No) the “Close” command to the motor relay is terminated after the set latching time has elapsed. ● (221 109) MA IN : DC f ail. w/o PI = No. OUTP (assignment to output relays).P139 3 Operation ● (221 108) MA IN : DC fail . 3-406 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . With the setting MA IN: e xt. For further processing each of these fault signals may be configured to selection parameters from the function groups LED (assignment to LED indicators). cmd. cmd. E nd – This signal is issued if the K200 contacts have not opened after the set monitoring time-delay has elapsed. is set to Yes) the switching command to the motor relay is terminated after the set latching time has elapsed. ex t. If the status signal from the motor relay is issued during the monitoring time period.tim e e xcee de d – This fault signal is issued (as a group signal) when no positive position signal (status signal) has been received from the external device after a command has been issued and the set running time-delay has elapsed.cmd. (p. The same is valid for the shunt windings.

time Dir. ext. device runn. mon. 307 011 DEV01: Inp. End [ 221 108 ] 0: No 1: Yes 19Z81AHA Fig. cmd.--.time mon.P139 3 Operation MAIN: Device on-line [ 003 030 ] 0: No (= off) MAIN: W. termin. trg. [ --. DC fail.end f. [ 221 063 ] 0: No 1: Yes DEV01: Switch. end Close [ 210 016 ] Selected signal MAIN: Direct motor control 306 029 DEV01: Open command [ 210 028 ] & CMD_1: Command C012 [ 200 056 ] & CMD_1: Command C011 [ 200 051 ] DEV01: Close command [ 210 029 ] MAIN: ext.] & Debouncing & Chatter suppression & & MAIN: End command 306 028 MAIN: Cmd. end Open [ 210 015 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 & Signal n Selected signal DEV01: Inp.Contr. cmd. asg. w/o PI [ 221 115 ] & & DEV01: Latching time elaps. [ 221 060 ] SIG_1: Signal S012 EXT [ 226 092 ] COMM1: Motor rel. 307 012 MAIN: Mon.cmd. asg. 3-331: Control and monitoring of the motor relay. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-407 . & SIG_1: Logic signal S012 [ 226 093 ] 307 008 0 1 MAIN: DC fail. 307 010 DEV01: Latching time runn.term. [ 221 111 ] & DEV01: Start runn.

[ 221 060 ] DEV01: Latching time [ 210 005 ] DEV01: Op.time Dir. device open [ 210 036 ] DEV01: Switch.P139 3 Operation CMD_1: Command C011 [ 200 051 ] DEV01: Close command [ 210 029 ] CMD_1: Command C012 [ 200 056 ] DEV01: Switch.device closed [ 210 037 ] 10 ms MAIN: Mon. [ 210 004 ] 19Z5203C Fig. example for switching operation “close”.time switch. 3-408 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 3-332: Sequence of time monitoring for direct motor control without external termination.Contr. dev.

together with a single-pole signal (see also function group SIG_1.P139 3 Operation DEV01: Close command [ 210 029 ] CMD_1: Command C012 [ 200 056 ] DEV01: Switch.time Dir. Three single-pole commands (see also function group CMD_1. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-409 .45. Section 3.Contr. [ 221 060 ] DEV01: Latching time [ 210 005 ] 19Z5204C Fig.4 Single-Pole Commands for Integrated Direct Motor Control The P139 has an integrated logic for direct motor control.7.device closed [ 210 037 ] DEV01: Inp. are available for this purpose. asg. example for switching operation “close”. (p. 3. Section 3. 3-417)). end Close [ 210 016 ] 10 ms MAIN: Mon. 3-418). (p. 3-333: Sequence of time monitoring for direct motor control with external termination.46. device open [ 210 036 ] DEV01: Switch.42.

not to 2-pole standard devices. 3-413). or with the single-pole signal “SIG_DC3” (SI G_1 : Logic SIG_DC3). if MAI N: ex t. CM D_1: CM D_DC2 ● Direct control without check back signal. Section 3. de lay t 1.te rm. The operation of this command is delayed by the set value MAIN: DC op. Moreover.P139 3 Operation CMD_1: CMD_DC1 ● Direct control of starting sequence with impulse command. or with positive indication of the final switchgear position. The operation of this command is delayed by the set value MAIN: DC o p. If none of these reset conditions is met after the set monitoring time-delay has elapsed the reaction of the P139 depends on the setting MAI N: C md. In either case the reset is delayed by the set value MAIN: DC2/3 rele ase d ela y. delay t 1. w/o P I = No. but this reset is delayed by the set value MAIN: DC2/3 release de lay. The command is reset with positive indication of the final switchgear position.cmd. This is applicable only to Three Position Drives (see function group TPDx. The operation of this command is delayed by the set value MAIN: DC op. D C fai l .43.: 3-410 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . delay t1. The command is reset…: ■ ■ with positive indication of the final switchgear position. The command is reset either when the timer M AIN: DC1 impulse t 2 has elapsed.e nd f . this requires external high-precision contacts for command reset and for breaking the power circuit of the motor drive. (p. CMD_1: CM D_DC 3 ● Direct control with check back signal.

block. device open [ 210 036 ] 19Z8121A Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-411 . device open [ 210 036 ] 19Z8120A Fig.s tar t (221 110) MAI N: D EV op. is set to its default value Yes the command is terminated.- - . cmd. cmd.e nd f. 3-335: Direct control without check back signal (C M D _ 1 : C M D _ D C 2).acc. CMD_1: CMD_DC2 config. D C f ai l.assignment K xxx [ xxx xxx ] K x1 0 1 K x2 0: No K x3 1: Yes K xx -K xxx 202 001 Address & MAIN: DC1 impulse t2 [ 221 241 ] & 1 t CMD_1: CMD_DC1 [ 202 001 ] & COMM1: Command CMD_DC1 [ - - .7.assignment K xxx [ xxx xxx ] 0 K x1 1 K x2 0: No -K xxx K x3 1: Yes K xx Address DEV01: Latching time [ 210 005 ] & 1 t 202 006 & MAIN: DC2/3 release delay [ 221 242 ] 1 t CMD_1: CMD_DC2 [ 202 006 ] COMM1: Command CMD_DC2 [ - - . delay t1 [ 221 240 ] c 0 t OUTP: Fct. En d (221 109) MAIN: DC f ail.en d f . time exce eded This behavior is comparable to the time-monitoring described in Section 3. (p.42.3.] LOC: Rem. CMD_1: CMD_DC1 config.active [ 221 004 ] DEV01: Switch. 3-334: Direct control of starting sequence with impulse command (C M D _ 1 : C M D _ D C 1). [ 202 009 ] MAIN: DC op. If MA IN : Cmd.P139 3 Operation ■ ■ If MAI N: C md.- - .active [ 221 004 ] DEV01: Switch. D C fail . delay t1 [ 221 240 ] c 0 t OUTP: Fct. is set to No the contacts of the assigned output relays remain closed and the P139 issues the following signals (depending on the type of fault) when the monitoring time delay has expired: (221 108) MAIN: DC f ail.acc. 3-405). [ 202 004 ] MAIN: DC op.] LOC: Rem.block.

assignment K xxx [ xxx xxx ] 0 K x1 1 K x2 0: No -K xxx K x3 1: Yes K xx 202 006 Address DEV01: Latching time [ 210 005 ] & & MAIN: DC2/3 release delay [ 221 242 ] 1 t 1 t CMD_1: CMD_DC3 [ 202 011 ] COMM1: Command CMD_DC3 [ - - . [ 202 014 ] MAIN: DC op. delay t1 [ 221 240 ] c 0 t OUTP: Fct.- - .acc.block. 3-412 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .] LOC: Rem. w/o PI [ 221 115 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes SIG_1: SIG_DC3 config.cmd. device open [ 210 036 ] MAIN: ext.log [ --.---] 0: No 1: Yes SIG_1: SIG_DC3 EXT [ 233 004 ] & Debouncing & Chatter suppression SIG_1: Logic SIG_DC3 [ 233 005 ] 19Z8122A Fig. 3-336: Direct control with check back signal (C M D _ 1 : C M D _ D C 3). [ 233 007 ] 0 c 1 COMM1: Signal SIG_DC3.term.active [ 221 004 ] & DEV01: Switch.P139 3 Operation CMD_1: CMD_DC3 config.

coun te r-cl ockw.43 Three Position Drive (Function Groups TPDx) For the direct motor control via three-position switches. = No / Yes The operation commands are counted (TP D1: Operat ion count er for TPD1).43. 3. either open or closed. After termination of the switching command. the warning message SFMON: Inval id con fi g. The function groups TPD1 to TPD4 allow for comfortably setting up.2 ● It must be a combination of two 2-pole standard switches. coun t. a warning signal (TPD1: W arning op. Monitoring and Control Checking the control commands and the switchgear positions of the assigned switching units the P139 determines into which of the two possible rotating directions (clockwise or counter-clockwise) the motor is changing.) P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-413 . happens to end up in a faulty position any further motor operation has to be blocked.) ● (219 003) TPD1 : TPD1 Di sconne ctor = Not assigned / DEV01 … DEV10 ● (219 004) TPD 1: TPD 1 ground.TPDx will be issued. or a medium position which corresponds to both the disconnector and the grounding switch being open. For example for TDP1 this is done using the settings below. (This is a common signal for all four TPDx function groups. a disconnector and a grounding switch.cou nt . The signal MAIN: Shu nt tri p ove rrun can be used for this. and this is signaled with the following logical state signals: ● (219 001) TP D1: Cmd. (Corresponding settings exist for TPD2…TPD4. ● Each switchgear unit must be assigned only once. otherwise no monitoring would be possible. If the counter value exceeds a settable limit (TP D1: Ope r. up to four “virtual” switching units can be defined. s witch = Not assigned / DEV01 … DEV10 For these settings. operating one common motor drive. a 3-position switch must be in a well-defined position. the following conditions must be fulfilled 3. cl ockwise = No / Yes ● (219 002) TP D1: Cmd.P139 3 Operation 3. for TPD1) is issued. limit for TPD1). a disconnector and a grounding switch. monitoring and control of such combinations of disconnecting and grounding switches.1 Setting up a Three Position Drive Function groups TPDx can be disabled or enabled using the following setting parameters: ● (219 000) TPD 1: Fu nct ion group TPD1 = Without / With ● (219 020) TPD2: Fun cti on group TP D2 = Without / With ● (219 040) TPD3: Fun cti on group TP D3 = Without / With ● (219 060) TPD4 : F un cti on group TP D4 = Without / With For every required TPDx it must then be set which switching unit is the disconnector and which is the grounding switch. ● Indication of the switchgear positions must be available. disconnector or the grounding switch. Each such virtual switching unit is composed of two “real” switches. If any of the assigned switching units. (Otherwise.43.) ● No bay type must be selected that controls any of these switchgear units. this would be a multiple configuration of a switchgear unit and is not permitted.

counter-clockw. [ 219 007 ] & ≥1 S1 R1 1 MAIN: Shunt trip overrun [ 221 114 ] & 19Z8101A Fig. also applies to other configurations with different parameter addresses. [ 219 002 ] 460 510 DEV02: Open command [ 210 078 ] DEV02: Close command [ 210 079 ] DEV02: Control state [ 210 068 ] 1: Open 2: Closed 3: Faulty position DEV03: Open command [ 210 128 ] & DEV03: Close command [ 210 129 ] DEV03: Control state [ 210 118 ] 1: Open 2: Closed 3: Faulty position & & ≥1 MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute ≥1 TPD1: Operation counter [ 219 005 ] + R MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] TPD1: Oper.count. 3-337: Monitoring and control of a Three Position Drive.limit [ 219 006 ] COMP TPD1: Warning op. The logic. however.P139 3 Operation The logic shown here is an example for the case of TPD1 with the setting DEV02 for the disconnector and DEV03 for the grounding switch.count. clockwise [ 219 001 ] ≥1 TPD1: Cmd. TPD1: Ready & ≥1 TPD1: Cmd. 3-414 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

The interlock conditions are defined in the form of Boolean equations in the interlocking logic function. Chapter A6. These automatically defined interlock conditions – determined by the choice of bay type – can be modified by the user at any time to fit particular station requirements. The bay interlock equations for operation with station interlock differ from the bay interlock equations for operation without station interlock (see Vol. after debouncing and chatter suppression A maximum of 32 equations with 32 equation elements each are available to define interlock conditions. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-415 . A5-1). (p. Vol. 2. The following signals acquired by the P139 are linked by logic operations for the bay interlock: ● Function blocks 1 and 2 ● Programmable logic outputs ● Switchgear position signals. after debouncing and chatter suppression ● Single-pole signals. Chapter A5. The choice of the bay type automatically defines the bay interlock conditions (or equations) for the ‘Open’ and ‘Close’ operations of the individual switchgear units in the bay.P139 3 Operation 3. The output signal of one equation can be fed into a higherorder equation as an input thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations. 2.44 Interlocking Logic (Function Group ILOCK) The switching commands to the controllable switchgear units in the bay are enabled only after interlock conditions have been checked. The following rule applies to the operators: “NOT” before “AND” before “OR”. (p. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. A6-1)).

As additional processor capacity must be provided for each of these checks it must be ensured that a favorable compromise is found for the cycle time setting value. after which a check of the interlock conditions is carried out. interm. interm. Therefore the parameter (221 104) IL OCK: Cycle t inter l. outp.assignm.check allows for setting the cycle time (range from 100 ms to 10 s). device open [ 210 036 ] DEV10: Switch. device open [ 211 236 ] DEV01: Switch. As the P139 CPU load is dependent on the total number of function groups having been configured it is not possible to suggest a generally acceptable cycle time value./flt. block. block.pos [ 211 238 ] SIG_1: Logic signal S001 [ 226 005 ] & ≥1 ILOCK: Output 01 [ 250 032 ] 19Z80ACA Fig. but on the other hand this cycle time value should not be so large that the P139 system will be under too much strain. 2 active [ 221 023 ] LOGIC: Output 01 [ 042 032 ] LOGIC: Output 32 [ 042 094 ] LOGIC: Output 01 (t) [ 042 033 ] LOGIC: Output 32 (t) [ 042 095 ] DEV01: Switch. 3-416 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . On the one hand it is desirable to select a cycle time value which is as short as possible so that changes in the interlock conditions are updated without any notable delays. 3-338: Interlocking logic as illustrated for equation 1.pos [ 210 038 ] DEV10: Dev.P139 3 Operation ILOCK: Fct./flt.device closed [ 211 237 ] DEV01: Dev.1 IEC 61850 Reporting As the interlock conditions are also transmitted together with reporting in the IEC 61850 communication protocol it is a requirement that these interlock conditions are cyclically checked and not only with the request for a switching operation. 1 [ 250 000 ] MAIN: Fct. 1 active [ 221 015 ] MAIN: Fct. 3.device closed [ 210 037 ] DEV10: Switch.44.

active [ 221 004 ] & 19Z50ALB Fig.. or MAI N: Cmd. an appropriately configured output relay will be triggered and a signal issued. C001 [ 200 002 ] K x2 0 1 1 2 0: No -K xxx K x3 K xx Address 200 001 & 3 1: Yes 1: Long command 2: Short command 3: Persistent command & 1 t & 1 t & ≥1 CMD_1: Command C001 [ 200 001 ] COMM1: Command C001 [ - - . dur. [ 221 231 ] K x1 CMD_1: Command C001 config. dur. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-417 . [ 221 230 ] OUTP: Fct.assignment K xxx [ xxx xxx ] MAIN: Cmd. as illustrated for Command C001. The following settings are possible: ● Long command ● Short command ● Persistent command If the operating mode Long command or Short command has been selected the output relay will be triggered for the time period set at MA IN: Cmd. dur.block. mode cmd. short cmd.long cmd.45 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1) Commands may be transmitted to the P139 via the communications interface. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole commands.acc.P139 3 Operation 3.] LOC: Rem. The setting options and the functional sequence are shown in the example for Command C001. When the P139 receives such a command. The user can select the operating mode for each 1-pole command. MAIN: Cmd. long cmd . short cmd. 3-339: Functional sequence for single-pole commands. dur.- - . and if the remote control mode is enabled. [ 200 004 ] CMD_1: Oper.

single-pole signals issued by the system may be transmitted by the P139 via its appropriately configured binary signal inputs to the control station. A requirement for transmission of the “Start signal” message is that the logic “1” signal is present for the set minimum time period. If setting Start/end signal has been selected then a message is transmitted every time the signal state at the binary signal input changes.1. The following settings are possible: ● Without function ● Start/end signal ● Transient signal If setting Without function has been selected then no message is transmitted when the signal state at the binary signal input changes. 3-418 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .46 3 Operation Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1) Binary. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole signals.1. 3-421)). Such single-pole input signals are conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see Section 3. If setting Transient signal has been selected then a message is transmitted every time the signal state at the binary signal input changes form logic “0” to logic “1”. The following figure displays setting modes and the functional sequence with the example for logic signal S001.46. This conditioned signal is then presented as SIG_1: Logi c s ignal S00 1 (to SI G_1: Logic signal S064).P139 3. Signaling behavior via the communications interface is determined by selecting the operating mode. (p.

S001 [ 226 001 ] 0 1 2 0: Without function 1: Start/end signal 2: Transient signal 19Z50AMA Fig.asg.log [ --. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-419 . [ 226 007 ] 0 1 0: No Selected group 1: Yes Debouncing SIG_1: Signal S001 EXT [ 226 004 ] SIG_1: Logic signal S001 [ 226 005 ] Chatter suppression SIG_1: Min.---] SIG_1: Oper. S001 [ 226 002 ] COMM1: Signal S001. sig.S001 [ 226 003 ] SIG_1: Signal S001 config. dur.P139 3 Operation SIG_1: Gr. 3-340: Functional sequence for single-pole signals with the example for logic signal S001. debounc. mode sig.

mon. debounc. Each of these signals can be assigned to one of eight groups and for each of these groups the debouncing time and chatter suppression can be set. [ 210 011 ] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1: Group 1 2: Group 2 3: Group 3 4: Group 4 5: Group 5 6: Group 6 MAIN: Debounce time gr. debouncing and chatter suppression are included as standard.1 3 Operation Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control In the acquisition of signals for control purposes.46. 3-341: Group assignment and setting of debouncing and chatter suppression.1 [ 221 202 ] 7: Group 7 8: Group 8 DEV01: Closed signal EXT [ 210 031 ] Debouncing & Chatter suppression Group 1 COMM1: Debounced signal 304 400 DEV01: Open signal EXT [ 210 030 ] 19Z5067B Fig.asg.S001 [ 226 003 ] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1: Group 1 2: Group 2 3: Group 3 4: Group 4 5: Group 5 6: Group 6 7: Group 7 8: Group 8 SIG_1: Signal S001 EXT [ 226 004 ] DEV01: Gr. the functions real time acquisition (time tagging). time gr. debounc.P139 3. 3-420 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 1 [ 221 200 ] MAIN: Chatt. assign.1 [ 221 201 ] MAIN: Change of state gr. illustrated for group 1. Matching of these two parameters achieves the suppression of multiple spurious pickups. SIG_1: Gr.

OpMem sorted then all entries are always saved in chronological order in the operating data memory.1 Debouncing The first pulse edge of a signal starts a timer stage running for the duration of the set debouncing time.1 Debouncing and Chatter Suppression 3.OpMem sorted. a telegram containing the time tag of the first pulse edge is generated. parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g set to the value 1stEdge. If the signal is stable until the set debouncing time elapses.) Example: Set debouncing time: 50 ms. 3-342: Signal flow with debouncing when time tagging occurs with the 1st pulse edge (e. If above parameter has been set to the value 1stEdge. As an alternative the time tag may be generated after debouncing by setting parameter MA IN : Time tag to the value After debounce time.1. Each pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer stage. After the set debouncing time has elapsed. the state of the signal is checked. Telegram with time tag 1s 2e Signal sequence time tag F0Z5011B Fig. If it is the same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge.1.1. Time-tagged entries of the first pulse edge are only generated after debounce time has elapsed.g.46.OpMem unsort) they are not necessarily saved in chronological order in the operating data memory. If these entries are saved without delay (setting of MAI N: Time tag to the value 1stEdge. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-421 .P139 3 Operation 3. e: end.46. no telegram is generated. s: start.OpMem unsort or 1stEdge.

1.2 Chatter Suppression Sending of the first telegram starts a timer stage running for the duration of the set monitoring time. Telegram with time tag 1s 2e 3s 4e Signal sequence time tag Debouncing F0Z5012A Fig. After the first “inadmissible” signal change. 3-422 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . Once the timer stage has elapsed. number of admissible signal changes: 4. it is re-triggered by each new signal change.1. set chatter monitoring time: 200 ms. Set debouncing time: 20 ms. telegrams are generated for the admissible signal changes. While the timer stage is elapsing. e: end. 3-343: Signal flow for debouncing and chatter suppression. While the timer stage is elapsing. no further telegrams are generated and the timer stage is re-triggered. The number of admissible signal changes can be set.P139 3 Operation 3. s: start. each signal change triggers a telegram.46.

● setting “Blocked” disables the limit check. Each positive pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer stage.47 Binary Counts (Function Group COUNT) The P139 features four binary counters. there is a limit value that can be optionally set: ● COUNT: Limi t cou nter 1 (and the same way for counters 2 to 4). If it is the same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge. The counters may be set to a specific count value (preload function) by setting a parameter or via the serial interfaces.3 Counting Function The debounced binary signal is counted by a 16 bit counter. Such a binary signal can be provided with debouncing. The values of the counters can be shown on the LC-display and read out via the PC interface or the communications interface. debouncing time period: 50 ms.47. 3-344: Debouncing signal flow. 3. it will not be counted. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-423 . The binary input signal will be counted if it is stable during the set debouncing time period. (This setting is the default value. 3.1 Enable/Disable the Counting Function The counting function (COUNT) can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters. Each of these can count the positive pulse edges of a binary signal present at an appropriately configured binary signal input.2 Debouncing The first positive pulse edge of the binary input signal to be counted will trigger a timer stage which will continue to run for the set debouncing time period.) A warning signal (COU NT: Warn in g cou n t 1 and the same way for counters 2 to 4) is issued if the associated counter value exceeds the set limit. the state of the signal is checked.P139 3 Operation 3. Count Signal sequence 19Z50APA Fig. For each of the four counters. 3. After the set debouncing time has elapsed. ● settable from 1 to 65000.47.47.

In all other cases the counter values are transmitted at time intervals determined by a free running internal clock.47. 3-424 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 3.P139 3.4 3 Operation Transmitting the Counter Values via Communications Interface The counter values are transmitted via the communications interface when a signal is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input. When the counter value is transmitted at cyclic intervals.5 Counter Values Reset The counter values may be reset – all at once – by setting parameter COU NT: Reset USER or via an appropriately configured binary signal input as well as by the general reset action. then transmission is time synchronized if the ratio 60/(set cycle time) comes to an integer.47. a trigger signal is issued by a setting parameter or at cyclic intervals as set at the cycle time stage C OUNT: C ycle t. count tran s m.

count transm [ 217 007 ] COMM1: Count 1 [ --. where C O U N T : S e t c o u n t e r 1 E X T and C O U N T : C o u n t 1 have to be replaced by the respective parameters. 3-345: Binary Count.] G COUNT: Reset USER [ 217 003 ] 0 1 0: don't execute = 0 min COUNT: Reset [ 217 005 ] 1: execute COUNT: Reset EXT [ 217 004 ] MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute 1 MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] 19Z81ANA Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 3-425 .P139 3 Operation COUNT: General enable USER [ 217 000 ] 0 COUNT: Enabled [ 217 001 ] 1 0: No MAIN: Device on-line [ 003 030 ] 1: Yes (= on) 1: Yes COUNT: Count 1 [ 217 100 ] m COUNT: Set counter 1 EXT [ 217 130 ] + Debouncing COUNT: Count 1 [ 217 100 ] CT=m R COUNT: Limit counter 1 [ 217 221 ] COMP COUNT: Warning count 1 [ 217 191 ] COUNT: Transmit counts USER [ 217 008 ] 0 COUNT: Transmit counts [ 217 010 ] 1 0: don't execute 1: execute C COUNT: Transmit counts EXT [ 217 009 ] C COUNT: Cycle t.--. The displayed logic is also valid for counters 2 to 4. (This diagram shows counter 1 as an example.

P139 3-426 3 Operation P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

Irrespective of the type a P139 is equipped with a detachable HMI or a fixed local control panel.2. (p. a parallel display consisting of multi-colored LED indicators is also incorporated (see Section 6. The local control panel is covered with a tough film so that the specified degree of IP protection will be maintained. In addition to the essential control and display elements. The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged cover at the bottom of the local control panel.P139 4 DESIGN The P139 is available in different types of cases and with different combinations of modules. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 4-1 . 6-2)). The meaning of the various LED indications is shown in plain text on a label strip.

➀) and removing the local control panel. Warning! ⚫ 4-2 For pin-terminal connection devices. 4-3). 4-1. 4-1. the terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals. ➁).1 4 Design Designs The P139 is available in a surface-mounted and a flush-mounted case. (p.P139 4. The flush-mounted case is connected at the back of the case. (p. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . The local control panel can then be secured by inserting the tabs in the slots in the left side wall (see Fig. Warning! ⚫ The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened. there is the danger that the resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the insulation. The threaded terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the front of the device after unscrewing the crosshead screws on the sides (see Fig. Electrical connections are made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. Depending on the connection type – pin-terminal or ring-terminal connection – the case sizes differ. 5-22)) show the available combinations of case widths and connection types. The location diagrams (Section 5.7. Warning! ⚫ The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting cable. 4-3). (p. Do not bend the connecting cable! Secure the local control panel by inserting it in the slots provided on the left.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 4-3 .4 Design P139 47Z14BBA Fig. removal of local control panel (or – in case of a detachable HMI – the case front panel). The illustration shows the 84TE case with (fixed) local control panel. 4-1: Surface-mounted case.

4 242.0 155.4 159.) 4-4 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 4-2: Surface-mounted 40 TE case.2.0 203. (Dimensions in mm.4 5.5 184.9 253.0 181.2 177.5 177. (Dimensions in mm.1 Dimensional Drawings for the 40 TE Case 147.5 4.1 213.6 260. flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets).5 Fig.3 Fig.0 5.0 168. 4-3: Flush-mounted case 40 TE with panel opening.6 213.2 257.) 227.P139 4 Design Dimensional Drawings 4.

4-5: Surface-mounted 84 TE case. 4-4: Flush-mounted case 40 TE with panel opening.2 224.6 4 Design 227.6 101.P139 177.) The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) is used for the flush-mounted case.0 481.5 177.2. (Dimensions in mm.1 Fig.4 186.5 184.) P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 4-5 .5 101.6 213.8 464.6 6.4 242.9 253.6 257.5 242.2 434. (Dimensions in mm. flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).6 Fig.5 260.5 4. Dimensional Drawings for the 84 TE Case 147.

(Dimensions in mm.9 259. flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets).P139 177. 4-6 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .6 445.0 25.5 481. (Dimensions in mm.0 Fig.6 6.8 159.9 464. 4-7: Flush-mounted case 84 TE with panel opening.0 168.) The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) is used for the flush-mounted case.5 101.4 186.) 227.6 434.8 464.0 177.9 253.5 4 Design 227.6 434.9 253. flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).9 5. 4-6: Flush-mounted case 84 TE with panel opening.0 410.6 Fig.0 101.0 5.0 284.

4-8: View of case 40TE for connection of detachable HMI.0 168.0 181. 20.0 46. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 4-7 .5 3.3 Fig. 107.2.5 148. 4-10: Detachable HMI with panel opening.3 197.P139 4 Design 4.0 192. 4-9: View of case 84TE for connection of detachable HMI.3 177.5 Fig.7 206.3 Detachable HMI Fig.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .7. ● ☐: depending on order. ● *: Module is not depicted in the terminal connection diagrams (Section 5. The following table gives an overview of the modules relevant for the P139.2. 5-22)).3 4 Design Hardware Modules The P139 is constructed from standard hardware modules. ● ○: optional. (p.P139 4. Key: 4-8 ● ●: standard equipment.

ETH CH2) 009651531 B ff Redundant Ethernet Board (100 Mbit/s. glass fiber. ETH CH2) 009651533 B ff Redundant Ethernet Board (100 Mbit/s. SC connector and RJ45 wire) 4TE ○ ○ ○ A(ETH CH2) 009651471 A ff Ethernet module (for 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. for 84 TE device) 4TE B 000336421 B ff * Bus module (analog) 4TE ● ● ● L 009651470 D ff * Graphic Serial (D)HMI 40TE 4TE ☐ ☐ ☐ L 009650561 D ff * DHMI Adapter Board 4TE ☐ ☐ L 009650563 F ff * Processor Unit Adapter Board 4TE ☐ ☐ ☐ N 000337086 B ff * Transient ground fault evaluation module 4TE ☐ ☐ ☐ P 009651571 E ff * Processor Unit 4TE ● ● ● P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 ● 4-9 . glass fiber. RSTP Protocol. glass fiber. ETH CH2) 009651532 B ff Redundant Ethernet Board (100 Mbit/s.P139 4 Design Type Item Number Description Width P139 P139 P139 ‑420 ‑421 ‑422 A(CH1 CH2) 009650356 A ff Communication module (for RS 485 wire connection) 4TE ○ ○ ○ A(CH1 CH2) 009650355 A ff Communication module (for plastic fiber) 4TE ○ ○ ○ A(CH1 CH2) 009650354 A ff Communication module (for glass fiber. glass fiber. ST connector) 4TE ○ ○ ○ B 000336187 D ff * Bus module (digital. glass fiber. ST connector) 4TE ○ ○ ○ A(Red. SHP Protocol. ST connector and RJ45 wire) 4TE ○ ○ ○ A(Red. for 40 TE device) 4TE ● ● B 000336188 C ff * Bus module (digital. ST connector) 4TE ○ ○ ○ A(CH3) 009651567 D ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (RS 485) 4TE ○ ○ ○ A(CH3) 009651569 D ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (for glass 4TE fiber) ○ ○ ○ A(CH3) 009651566 D ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (RS 232) 4TE ○ ○ ○ A(ETH CH2) 009651427 A ff Ethernet module (for 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. DHP Protocol. ST connector) 4TE ○ ○ ○ A(Red.

4 x V (ring connection) 8TE T(4I 5V) 009650308 A ff Transformer module 4 x I. switching threshold 146 V 4TE ☐ ☐ ☐ V(4I 8O) 009651544 B ff Power supply module 60 . switching threshold 155 V 4TE ☐ ☐ ☐ 009651538 B ff Power supply module 24 . switching threshold 90 V 4TE ☐ ☐ ☐ B ff Power supply module 24 . switching threshold 90 V ☐ ☐ ☐ V(4I 8O) 009651549 B ff Power supply module 60 . 5 x V (pin connection) 8TE T(4I 5V) 009650322 A ff Transformer module 4 x I.250 V DC / 4TE 100 .250 V DC / 4TE 100 .P139 4 Design Type Item Number Description Width P139 P139 P139 ‑420 ‑421 ‑422 T(4I) 009650309 A ff Transformer module 4 x I (pin connection) 8TE T(4I) 009650323 A ff Transformer module 4 x I (ring connection) 8TE T(4I 4V) 009650307 A ff Transformer module 4 x I. 4TE standard variant (switching threshold 18 V) V(4I 8O) 009651536 B ff Power supply module 24 . switching threshold 155 V ☐ ☐ ☐ V(4I 8O) 009651548 B ff Power supply module 60 .230 V AC.230 V AC. standard variant (switching threshold 18 V) ☐ ☐ ☐ V(4I 8O) 009651546 B ff Power supply module 60 . switching threshold 73 V ☐ ☐ ☐ V(4I 8O) 009651547 B ff Power supply module 60 .60 V DC.60 V DC.60 V DC.230 V AC.250 V DC / 4TE 100 . switching threshold 146 V ☐ ☐ ☐ 4-10 ☐ ☐ P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .60 V DC.230 V AC.250 V DC / 4TE 100 . switching threshold 73 V V(4I 8O) 009651537 B ff V(4I 8O) 009651539 V(4I 8O) ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ 4TE ☐ ☐ ☐ Power supply module 24 .230 V AC.60 V DC. 4 x V (pin connection) 8TE T(4I 4V) 009650321 A ff Transformer module 4 x I. 5 x V (ring connection) 8TE V(4I 8O) 009651534 B ff Power supply module 24 .250 V DC / 4TE 100 .

switching threshold 155 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(4H) 009651493 B ff Binary module (4 high-break contacts) 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(6I 3O) 009651512 B ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs. switching threshold 90 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(6I 6H) 009651521 A ff Binary I/O module (6 bin. standard variant (switching threshold 18 V) 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(6I 3O) 009651513 B ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs. inputs. switching threshold 73 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(6I 3O) 009651514 B ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs. inputs. 6 high break contacts). 3 output relays). switching threshold 155 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 Width P139 P139 P139 ‑420 ‑421 ‑422 4-11 . 3 output relays). switching threshold 146 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(6I 3O) 009651515 B ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs. inputs. 3 output relays). switching threshold 73 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(24I) 009651332 A ff Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs). 6 high break contacts). 4TE standard variant (switching threshold 18 V) ○ ○ ○ X(24I) 009651304 A ff Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs).P139 4 Design Type Item Number Description X(24I) 000337612 A ff Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs). 3 output relays). 3 output relays). switching threshold 90 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(6I 3O) 009651516 B ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs. standard variant (switching threshold 18 V) 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(6I 6H) 009651518 A ff Binary I/O module (6 bin. switching threshold 155 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(6I 6H) 009651517 A ff Binary I/O module (6 bin. 6 high break contacts). switching threshold 73 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(6I 6H) 009651519 A ff Binary I/O module (6 bin. switching threshold 90 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(24I) 009651443 A ff Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs). inputs. 6 high break contacts). switching threshold 146 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(24I) 009651360 A ff Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs).

6 output relays). 6 output relays). TE = 5.1. standard variant (switching threshold 18 V) 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(6I 6O) 009651305 A ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs. 6 output relays).P139 4 Design Type Item Number Description Width P139 P139 P139 ‑420 ‑421 ‑422 X(6I 6H) 009651520 A ff Binary I/O module (6 bin. 4-12 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . switching threshold 155 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(6O) 000336973 B/D ff Binary module (6 output relays) 4TE ○ ○ ○ Y(4I) 000337406 D ff Analog I/O module. 6 output relays). The location of the individual modules and the position of the threaded terminal blocks in the P139 are shown in the location figures and terminal connection diagrams. 5-22) and Section 5. switching threshold 146 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(6I 6O) 009651361 A ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs. inputs. switching threshold 90 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ Y(4I) 009651446 A ff Analog I/O module. (p. switching threshold 90 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(6I 6O) 009651444 A ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs. 6 output relays). switching threshold 146 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(6I 6O) 000337377 E ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs.2. 6 high break contacts).08 mm). (p. switching threshold 146 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ Y(4I) 009651363 A ff Analog I/O module. switching threshold 155 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ Y(9T) 009650735 C ff Temperature Sensor Board 9xRTD 4TE ○ ○ ○ The space available for the modules measures 4 HE in height by 40 TE or 84 TE in width (HE = 44.7.45 mm. standard variant (switching threshold 18 V) 4TE ○ ○ ○ Y(4I) 009651307 A ff Analog I/O module. Section 5.7. switching threshold 73 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ Y(4I) 009651335 A ff Analog I/O module. switching threshold 73 V 4TE ○ ○ ○ X(6I 6O) 009651333 A ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs. 5-22).

sufficient time should be allowed for acclimatization to the ambient temperature of the environment. Warning! ⚫ Only qualified personnel. Once the MiCOM products have been unpacked. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 5-1 . 5-11)). It is prohibited to install or run the communications cable to the detachable HMI next to high-voltage lines or high-voltage connections.5 mm² (US: AWG14 or thicker) must be connected to the protective grounding conductor terminal on the detachable HMI at one end and on the other end to the protective grounding conductor terminal on the device’s case. Where electrical equipment is being installed.5. Warning! ⚫ The instructions given in the Section 5. Warning! ⚫ Installation of the detachable HMI: A protective conductor (protective earth) with a cross section at least 1. Both the detachable HMI and the device have to be installed in the same substation. may work on or operate this device. In particular. (p. we recommend that they are energized within the three following months. This is to prevent induced currents that would lead to electromagnetic interferences. 5-8. Warning! ⚫ The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module cannot be connected at the same time. then the protective grounding should be checked again. as per the diagram “Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal” (Fig. before energization.P139 5 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION Warning! ⚫ Sustained exposure to high humidity during storage may cause damage to electronics and reduce the lifetime of the equipment. We recommend that storage humidity shall not exceed 50% relative humidity. (p. familiar with the “Warning” page at the beginning of this manual. 5-11) (“Protective and Operational Grounding”) should be noted. check that the protective ground connection is secured with a tooth lock washer. In order to prevent personal injuries the communications cable installed to the detachable HMI must never come in contact with parts that may be subjected to dangerous live voltages. If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it.

5-2 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .1 5 Installation and Connection Unpacking and Packing All P139 overcurrent and control devices are packaged separately into dedicated cartons and shipped with outer packaging. If the original packaging is no longer available.8 m. The design revision level of each module included in the device when shipped can be determined from the list of components (assembly list). Use special care when opening cartons and unpacking devices. both inner and outer packaging must be used. If the P139 needs to be shipped. make sure to remove supporting documents and the type identification label supplied with each individual device from the inside carton. make sure that packaging conforms to DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height ≤ 0.P139 5. After unpacking. and do not use force. This list of components should be filed carefully. In addition. each device should be inspected visually to confirm it is in proper mechanical condition.

One type identification label is located under the upper hinged cover on the front panel and a second label can be found on the inside of the device.2 P139 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type The nominal data and design type of the P139 can be determined by checking the type identification label (see below). P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 5-3 .5 Installation and Connection 5. A breakdown of the order number is given in Chapter “Order Information” of this manual. The P139 design version can be determined from the order number. 5-1: Example of the type identification label of a MiCOM P3x3 device. Another copy of the type identification label is fixed to the outside of the P139 packaging. Fig.

especially with respect to grounding and EMC. Therefore it is important when choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the operating conditions as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.3.nom 5.3.4 Electromagnetic Conditions Substation secondary system design must follow the best of modern practices. Solar Radiation: Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided to ensure that the LC-Display remains readable. 5 m/s². 0. Ambient air: The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust. gases or vapors. 3 x 1 cycle 5. 5. 8 Hz. 35 Hz..5 mm.1 VA.3 Electrical Conditions for Auxiliary Voltage of the Power Supply Operating range: 0. or salt. 5-4 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .1 Environmental Conditions Ambient temperature: -5 °C to +55 °C [+23 °F to +131 °F] Air pressure: 800 to 1100 hPa Relative humidity: The relative humidity must not result in the formation of either condensed water or ice in the P139.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz.3.2 to 3.2 Mechanical Conditions Vibration stress: 10 to 60 Hz.3.8 to 1.P139 5.3 5 Installation and Connection Location Requirements The P139 has been designed to conform to EN 60255-6. smoke. 5.5 mm / 1. 0. 8 ..nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA. Several of these important operating conditions are listed below. 3.4..5 g Earth quake resistance: 5 ..

(p. The dimensions and mounting dimensions are given in Chapter “Design”. the wiring to the P139 is normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. Fig. 4-4).5 Installation and Connection 5. D5Z50MBA Fig. (p. (p. 4-4). The other dimensions are the same for all cases. 5-5) shows such an opening. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 5-5 .2. When the P139 is mounted on a cabinet door. special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree of protection required for the cabinet (IP 51). test severity class 2 of the vibration test. Dimensions of the panel cutouts: Dimensional drawings of the panel cutouts for all cases and for the detachable HMI can be found in Section 4. When the P139 is surface-mounted on a panel.2. 5-2: Opening (cutout) for running the connecting leads to an 40 TE surface-mounted case. The opening width for the 40 TE surface-mounted case: 213 mm (shown in this figure).5. for the 84 TE surface-mounted case: 435 mm. If the wiring is to be at the back.4 P139 Installation The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given in Section 4. an opening can be provided above or below the surface-mounted case. Connection of protective grounding conductor: See “Protective and Operational Grounding” (Section 5. test severity class of the shock resistance test on operability as well as test severity class 1 of the shock resistance test on permanent shock are applied additionally. In this case. Flush-mounted cases are designed for control panels. 5-2. (p. 5-11)) Instructions for selecting the flush-mount method: The P139 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or – for the flush-mounted case – flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) is used.

replace the local control panel. the local control panel (or the front element of the case for devices with detachable display) must be taken down.5 screws with too much strength! (Fastening torque 1. 5-7)). Remove both top and bottom hinged flaps from the device. (p. 5-6 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 5-3. the longer M3.P139 5 Installation and Connection For flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame). Longer screws are enclosed within the device packing. 5-7)). Warning! ⚫ When replacing the local control panel.8 Newton meters. Then remove the local control panel. 3. After this. (Lift/lower both hinged flaps 180° up/down.5 screws (see Fig. The side mountings of both hinged flaps can then be disengaged. Remove the M3. The local control panel is removed as described below: 1. Now insert the P139 into the panel opening from the rear so that the upper M4 screws fit into the corresponding holes. Warning! ⚫ The local control panel (or front element) is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting cable. Do not bend the connecting cable! Then remove the lower M4 screws and only loosen the upper M4 screws (see Fig. Hold them in the middle and bend them slightly. 5-3. take care not to tighten the M3. (p. Make sure the connector position is correct.) If the control panel thickness is ≥ 2 mm.5 to 1. the procedure is as follows: Before the P139 can be installed into a control panel.5 and M4 bolts must be used. Then tighten all the M4 screws.) 2.

(p. 5-8). (p. see Fig. upper screws and loosen the upper hook device on side screws and insert plates to mount the device. Flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame ). 3. 5-5. 5-5. ➀ and mount the enclosed angle brackets using these same screws.5. 12Y6181B Fig. Remove the screws as shown in Fig. Warning! ⚫ The P139 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame. ≥ 2mm replace the M3 replace the M3 bolts and M4 screws by the with the enclosed longer screws longer M3 bolts provided. (p.P139 5 Installation and Connection For panels with a If panel thickness thickness ≥ 2 mm. 5-3: Installation of a case into a control panel. 5-4. the procedure is as follows: 1. 5-8)) is used. < 3 mm M4 M3. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 5-7 . Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5. 5-8)). 5-11). Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws (see Fig. 4. Then push the device into the control panel cutout from the front. Example for a device with a 40 TE case.5 Completely remove the lower screws before installation. For flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame). Assemble the cover frame and snap-fasten onto the fixing screws. (p. 2. Partly tighten the Before installation.

4 Height: 204mm M6 x 15 Frame for 280mm Width: E case the 40T 12Y6183B Fig. Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5. Warning! ⚫ The P139 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame.P139 5 Installation and Connection 45Z5058A Fig. 5-4: Mounting the angle brackets. (p. 5-5: Installation of a case into a control panel. see Fig. flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame). 5-11). Example for a device in a 40 TE case. 5-8)) is used. Angle brackets M6 B6 6. The cover frame height is for all cases: 204 mm. of the 84 TE case is: 486 mm. 5-8 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . (p. 5-5.5. The cover frame width of the 40 TE surface-mounted case is: 280 mm.

5-11). for example. or an empty sub-rack with a blank front panel. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 5-9 . (p. 5-6.P139 5 Installation and Connection A rack mounting kit can be used to combine a flush-mounted 40 TE case with a second sub-rack to form a 19″ mounting rack (see Fig. 5-7. (p. (p. The second sub-rack can be another device. Fit the 19″ mounting rack to a cabinet as shown in Fig. Warning! ⚫ Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5. 5-6: Combining 40 TE flush-mounted cases to form a 19″ mounting rack. Connection flange Tapped bush Bolt 61Y5077A Fig. 5-10).5. 5-9)).

Warning! ⚫ 5-10 Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5. 5-7: Installing the P139 in a cabinet with a 19″ mounting rack.5. 5-11). P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . (p.P139 5 Installation and Connection Covering flange Rack frame 61Y5078A Fig.

3 2 Tooth lock wash. All grounding connections must be low-inductance. A minimum cross section of 2. If a detachable HMI is installed.5 mm² (US: AWG14 or thicker) is required. a further protective conductor (ground/earth) of at least 1. 5-8: Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal. Description Pos. A minimum cross section of 1. The cross-section of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable national standards.A4. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut.P139 5 Installation and Connection 5. as the ground connection. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 5-11 . The protective conductor (earth) must always be connected to the protective grounding conductor terminal in order to guarantee the safety given by this setup.A4. these must be located within the same substation.5 Protective and Operational Grounding The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment grounding requirements.e.5 mm² (US: AWG14 or thicker) must be connected to the DHMI protective conductor terminal to link the DHMI and the main relay case. case flush-mount.5 mm² (≤ AWG12) is required. it must be kept as short as possible. a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply module (identified by the letters “PE” on the terminal connection diagram) is also required for proper operation of the device. 1 2 1 3 2 3 4 4 PE terminal PCT terminal PE terminal PCT terminal surface-mount. appropriately marked. case Pos. The flush-mounted case must be grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. i. In addition.3 3 Clamp bracket 3 Clamp bracket 4 Bolt M4 4 Bolt M4 19Y5220B Fig. Description 1 Nut M4 1 Nut M4 2 Tooth lock wash. The bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol: The cross-section of the ground conductor must conform to applicable national standards.

Three-pole or two-pole connection is possible to suit the individual power system and substation. this can be taken into account when making settings (see Chapter “Settings”).1 Power Supply Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P139 power supply. All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. 5. it must be ensured that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with the nominal value of the auxiliary system voltage.6. The P139 is generally fitted with four current-measuring inputs. (p. 5-12 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .1. the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.6.6 5 Installation and Connection Connection The P139 Feeder Management and Bay Control must be connected in accordance with the terminal connection diagram as indicated on the type identification label. 5. the output relays and the power supply input. the terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals. In general copper conductors with a cross section of 2.7. it must be ensured that the secondary nominal currents of the system and the device correspond. If the CT or VT connection is reversed. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential.6. To reduce CT knee-point voltage requirements. Warning! ⚫ 5.P139 5. Connecting the Time-Overcurrent Protection Measuring Circuits The system current and voltage transformers must be connected in accordance with the standard schematic diagram shown in Fig.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits 5. (p. or in Section 5. Warning! ⚫ The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened.1. The relevant terminal connection diagrams that apply to the P139 are to be found either in the supporting documents supplied with the device. Copper conductors having a cross section of 1. there is the danger that the resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.1.3 For pin-terminal connection devices.2 Current-Measuring Inputs When connecting the system transformers.5 mm² (US: AWG14) are adequate to connect binary signal inputs. 5-9. 5-13). It is essential that the grounding configuration shown in the diagram be followed. 5-22).6. it may be necessary to install shorter copper conductors with a greater cross section between the system current transformers and the current inputs on the P139.5 mm² (US: AWG12) are sufficient to connect a system current transformer to a current input on the P139.

then the T 4 current transformer must be connected to a core balance current transformer or a current transformer in Holmgreen configuration.4 Connecting the Measuring Circuits for Ground Fault Direction Determination If the P139 is to function using ground fault direction determination by steadystate values (the GFDSS function). The steady-state ground fault direction determination requires either the three phase-to-ground voltages or. An additional voltage transformer (T 90) is available in the P139 to connect an open delta winding.6. the selected voltage needs to be taken into account. When setting the protection function. If the metal shield of the cable is routed through the core balance transformer.1. The cable sealing end must be attached so that it is isolated from ground.P139 5 Installation and Connection A B C IA IB IC IN U V W N P139 19Z5092A Fig. This ensures that any currents flowing through the shield will not affect measurement. The phase voltages are drawn from the same transformers like the measured variables for the time voltage protection. the ground wire must be fed through the core again before it is connected to ground. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 5-13 . 5. alternatively. 5-9: Standard schematic diagram for time-overcurrent protection. the neutral-point displacement voltage from the open delta winding of a voltage transformer assembly as the measured voltage.

rel. (p. or Transm. (p. Fig. The coils of the all-or-nothing relays must be designed for half the loop voltage. Connection to Connection to Holmgreen group Window-type CT A B C BS A K k L l B C I̲N k N(e) E(n) l P139 LS 19Z5290 Fig.6. Twisted pair cores should be used as pilot wires.5 Connecting Protective Signaling Either a transmission device or pilot wires are required for signal transmission. there must be an all-or-nothing relay in each station for coupling received and transmitted signals. 5-10. depending on the operating mode selected.1. 5-14) shows the standard connection for ground fault direction determination by steady-state values where the voltage measuring circuit is connected to an open delta winding. 5-11. rel. 5-15) shows the connection with two cores and Fig. 5-12. break con. A reversed connection is possible for the system current or voltage transformer if the appropriate setting is configured. In the first case the break contact of the 5-14 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . (p. Two or four cores are required. 5. 5-10: Connecting the steady-state ground fault direction determination function to Holmgreen-configuration and core balance transformers. “forward/LS” is displayed if a ground fault occurs on the line side. If only two cores are available. make con.P139 5 Installation and Connection Fig. With this connection configuration. 5-16) the connection with four cores. The protective signaling transmitting relay can be set to either Transm.

5-11: Connection of protective signaling with two cores.relay) [ 037 024 ] -K1 PSIG: Receive EXT [ 036 048 ] L+ L- P139 Protection device b L- PSIG: Receive EXT [ 036 048 ] L+ -K2 L+ L- PSIG: Send (transm.P139 5 Installation and Connection transmitting relay must be wired. break con. Protection device a L+ L- PSIG: Send (transm. The figures show the connection for the setting Transm.relay) [ 037 024 ] P139 D5Z50DBA Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 5-15 . rel. and in the second case the make contact must be wired.

5-12: Connection of protective signaling with four cores. 5-16 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .relay) [ 037 024 ] PSIG: Receive EXT [ 036 048 ] L+ L- P139 L- Protection device b L+ PSIG: Send (transm.P139 5 Installation and Connection L+ Protection device a L- PSIG: Send (transm.relay) [ 037 024 ] PSIG: Receive EXT [ 036 048 ] L+ L- P139 D5Z50DCA Fig.

the P139 can automatically configure the binary inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of switchgear units. 5-17)). (p.6. A connection example for a direct motor control is shown in the following diagram.6 Connecting a Resistance Thermometer A resistance thermometer can be connected if the device is fitted with analog module Y.6.6. The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire method (see Fig. 5. Connection to binary inputs can be made as desired. 2. (p. 2. 5-13: Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method.1. The polarity for connected binary signal inputs is to be found in the terminal connection diagrams (see supporting documents supplied with the device or in Section 5. PT 100 P139 S8Z52H9A Fig.7 Connecting Binary Inputs and Output Relays The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable. Once the user has selected a bay type. isolating links or grounding switches is in accordance with the “List of Bay Types” (see Appendix). This is to be understood as a recommendation only. No supply conductor compensation is required in this case. (p. 2-13)). When configuring these components it is important to note that the contact rating of the binary I/O modules (X) varies (see Section 2. 5-13.5.1.7. one binary input is configured for the status signal and one output relay is configured for triggering and resetting the motor relay. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 5-17 . This analog I/O module input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer. (p. 5. The standard configuration of binary inputs and output relays for each bay type is given in the list of bay types to be found in the Appendix (see Vol. Configuration of appropriate output relays to trigger the armature and shunt windings of motors on load disconnect switches.1.P139 5 Installation and Connection 5. 5-22)). (p. Chapter A5. Vol.7. Chapter A6. A51). A6-1)).8 Connection of Switchgear Units Having Direct Motor Control In the case of bay types having direct motor control.

bay type No.6. It is connected by a BNC connector. MOTOR RELAY MONITORING CLOSE MOTOR RELAY ‑K200.1 P139 ‑X061 3 5 9 ‑X062 2 6 for Q1 Q0 OPEN Q0 A1 8 3 for Q2 A2 A1 5 ‑X072 6 8 for Q8 A2 A1 A2 ‑K200 CLOSE ‑K200.1 ‑K705.2 ‑K604.3 ‑X072 7 9 ‑K705.1 4 ‑X071 CLOSE OPEN ‑K604.P139 5 Installation and Connection CIRCUIT BREAKER OPEN DRIVE Q1 DRIVE Q2 DRIVE Q8 TRIGGER.2 ‑K605.2 P139 ‑X061 2 8 ‑X062 5 E1 E3 ‑X071 E1 E3 E3 ‑X073 M3 M2 M1 2 E1 8 X//Y ‑U706 P139 E4 E4 E4 ‑X073 9 ‑K200.2 ‑M1 ‑X061 ‑X071 4 6 OPEN CLOSE CLOSE ‑K601. Shunt wd. 5-18 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .1 4 CLOSE ‑K701. 89 (A23.1 1 ‑X072 OPEN ‑K606.1 CLOSE ‑X062 CLOSE OPEN ‑K602.2 ‑K706. A coaxial cable having a characteristic impedance of 50 Ω must be used as the connecting cable. 5-14: Connection example.1 ‑K603.2 P139 ‑X072 5 S8Z01G3A Fig.1 ‑X061 1 7 OPEN ‑K601. feeder bay with circuit breaker.2 Connecting the IRIG‑B Interface An IRIG‑B interface for time synchronization may be installed as an optional feature.1 ‑K702. motor with shunt winding for a direct motor control.2 6 4 CLOSE OPEN ‑K702. 5.2 ‑X071 OPEN ‑K606.M04).2 ‑K602.105. double busbar.2 ‑K701.1 ‑K706.1 ‑K605.2 ‑M2 ‑X062 3 1 ‑M3 9 OPEN 7 CLOSE ‑K603.

(p. A cable with two symmetrical twisted pair wires is required for a 4-wire data link. Warning! ⚫ The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply voltage for the device is shut off. 5-16. and a 4-wire data link is shown in Fig.g. ● All shielding must be connected to an effective protective ground surface at both ends. 2-wire data link: The transmitter must be bridged with the receiver on all devices equipped electrically with a full duplex communication interface. a central control station.3. Warning! ⚫ 5. To connect the RS 485 communication interface the following must be observed: ● Only twisted pair shielded cables must be used.6.5 Installation and Connection 5. Data transfer between devices using the RS 485 interface is set up only for a half duplex transmission mode. the female connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is required per VDE 0106. A 4‑wire data link as an alternative to a 2-wire communications link is also possible. Communication Interfaces The communication interfaces are provided as a permanent connection of the device to a control system for substations or to a central substation unit. The two P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 5-19 .3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces 5. Communication interface 2 is only available as an RS 485 interface.1 PC Interface P139 The PC interface is provided so that personnel can operate the device from a personal computer (PC). The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable requires special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this operating manual.6. 5-15. the P139. P139. ● Unused conductors must all be grounded at one end.2 The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection. part 101. Consequently. The communication master could be. The RS 485 interface available on the P139 was designed so that data transfer in a full duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between devices. Depending on the type. communication interface 1 on the device is connected either by a special fiber-optic connector or an RS 485 interface with twisted pair copper wires. ● Conductor insulation and shielding must only be removed from the core in the immediate vicinity of the terminal strips and connected according to national standards. The same is valid if channel 1 on the communication module is available as a RS 485 interface. are set-up as slave devices. A 2-wire data link is shown in Fig.g. e. ● At least one symmetrical twisted pair of wires is necessary. e. An RS 485 data transmission link between a master and several slave devices can be established by using the optional communication interface. Devices linked to the communication master. 5-20). that are common in telecommunication installations. 5-21) as an example for channel 2 on the communication module.3. for instance. (p.6.

g. 4-wire data link: Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in the device situated on one far end of the data transmission conductor. and also in the P139. The last device in line (master or slave device) on the data transmission conductor must have the transmitter and receiver terminated with a 200 to 220 Ω resistor each. to the line connect. -X10 200 .. 5-15: 2-wire data link. are connected to the transmitter of the communication master device. to the line (e. 5-20 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 220Ω D1[T] D2[R] D2[R] D1[T] P139 XXXX First participant Last participant connect. An external resistor is therefore not necessary.P139 5 Installation and Connection devices situated at either far end must have a 200 to 220 Ω resistor installed to terminate the data transmission conductor. In MiCOM Px3x devices. The receivers of slave devices. and the transmitters of slave devices are connected to the receiver of the master device. The second resistor must be connected externally to the device (resistor order number see Chapter “Accessories and Spare Parts”). e. In MiCOM Px3x devices. and also in the P139. a 220 Ω resistor is integrated into the RS 485 interface hardware and can be connected with a wire jumper. the master) -X10 D2[R] P139 D1[T] D2[R] D1[T] XXXX Device with halfduplex interface 19Z6480A Fig..g. Devices equipped electrically with only a half duplex RS 485 communication interface are connected to the transmitter of the communication master device. the P139. that have an electrically full-duplex communication interface as part of their electrical system. An external resistor is therefore not necessary. a 220 Ω resistor is integrated into the RS 485 interface hardware and can be connected with a wire jumper.

220Ω D1[T] D2[R] D2[R] D1[T] P139 XXXX First participant Last participant connect..P139 5 Installation and Connection -X10 200 . to the line connect. to the line (e.g.. 5-16: 4-wire data link. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 5-21 . the master) -X10 D2[R] P139 D1[T] D2[R] D1[T] XXXX Device with halfduplex interface 19Z6481A Fig.

5.P139 5 Installation and Connection 5.5.7 Location and Connection Diagrams 5. then these are alternatives.7. “Protection Conductor Terminal (PCT) / Case Grounding / Protective Earth” 5-22 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . See also Section 5. ETH CH2 07 4I A N A 06 T CH1 CH3 CH2 ETH CH2 05 6O 4I Y 9T 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Each of the numbered slots can be fitted with max. If a location diagram shows several modules for a particular slot. (p. depending on the ordering options. The RTD module is equipped with a grounding bar providing connectors for the 9 cable shields.7. 1 module. ETH CH2 06 4I A N ETH CH2 05 T 6O 4I Y 9T 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Location diagram for P139 in 84 TE case ● 01 02 03 Ring terminal connection (P139 -422) 04 P A A 08 09 10 11 13 X T X 12 14 15 X 6I 6H X 4I 4V 6I 6O 16 17 X 6I 6H 24I X Y 6I 6O 19 X 20 21 V 4I 8O X 4I 6I 3O X 4I 5V Y 18 4H T 24I Red.2 Terminal Connection Diagrams P139‑420/421/422 “_” is a placeholder for the slot.1 Location Diagrams Location diagrams for P139 in 40 TE case ● Pin-terminal connection (P139 -420) ● Transformer module: Ring terminal connection. other modules pin-terminal connection (P139 -421) 01 02 03 04 P A A CH1 CH3 CH2 A 6I 6H T X 07 08 09 6I 6H 24I 4I 8O X X Y 6I 6O 6I 6O 4H X 4I 6I 3O T X 4I 5V Y 10 X X X V X 4I 4V 24I Red. 5-11).

P139 5 Installation and Connection Type T Transformer module Ring Pin X041 X041 -/4I -/4V/5V Voltage measuring inputs Option: 13 1 VAG 14 2 VBG 15 3 VCG 16 4 17 5 Ring Pin X_1 X_1 1 1 2 2 3 3 T5 T6 T7 VNG T90 6 18 7 12 8 X042 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 Vref 4I / 8O T2 IC T3 IN T4 Ring Pin X_1 X_1 Ring High-break contacts 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 4 4 5 5 6 6 K_01 4 10 1 11 2 12 3 13 4 5 15 6 16 7 17 8 5 K_01 + K_02 X_2 K_03 11 2 12 3 1 2 21 3 22 4 23 5 24 6 1 11 2 X_3 12 3 1 13 4 14 5 15 6 16 7 17 8 18 9 19 2 K_03 + Vin 26 8 27 9 K_04 + 6I / 6H Ring Pin X_1 X_1 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 High-break contacts 7 26 8 27 9 X_3 Vin U_02 Vin U_03 Vin U_04 Pin Pin X_1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 1 2 K_02 + 7 7 8 8 9 9 + K_03 6O X_1 2 K_01 Type X Binary module Ring 1 Vin U_01 Vin 19 1 20 2 U_02 Vin 21 3 22 4 U_03 Vin 23 5 24 6 U_04 Vin 25 7 26 8 U_05 Vin 27 9 U_06 U100 6I / 6O X_1 Signalinputs PE Type X X_1 + + Vaux - Binary module Ring K_03 U_01 Power supply 25 K_02 K_02 K_08 9 20 K_01 + 10 20 Signal inputs 19 Output relays X_2 K_04 K_05 K_06 K_07 5 14 4 X_3 Type X 6I / 3O Pin 1 18 Binary module Type X Binary module X_1 X_2 IB 4H 1 Output relays T15 Current measuring inputs Option: T1 IA Type X Binary module X_1 7 Option: 11 Type V Power supply module Output relays K_01 K_02 7 Type X Binary module Ring 24I Pin X_1 X_1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 Output relays K_01 K_02 Signal inputs Vin U_01 U_02 U_03 U_04 U_05 U_06 U_07 U_08 K_03 K_04 X_2 X_2 10 1 10 1 11 2 11 2 12 12 3 13 14 15 6 16 7 17 8 18 1 10 1 3 11 2 11 2 13 4 12 3 12 3 4 14 5 13 4 13 4 5 15 6 14 5 14 5 15 7 15 6 15 6 17 8 16 7 16 7 18 9 17 8 17 8 9 18 9 9 + + K_05 K_06 + 1 20 2 21 3 22 4 23 5 24 6 25 7 26 8 27 9 K_05 K_06 18 X_3 _ X_3 19 X_2 X_2 10 K_04 Signal inputs Vin Vin Vin Vin Vin Vin U_01 U_02 U_03 U_04 U_05 U_06 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 19 1 20 2 21 3 22 4 23 5 24 6 25 7 26 8 27 9 K_03 Signal inputs Vin Vin Vin Vin Vin Vin X_3 X_3 U_01 U_02 U_03 U_04 U_05 1 19 1 20 2 20 2 21 3 21 3 22 4 22 4 23 5 23 5 6 19 K_04 K_05 24 6 24 25 7 25 7 26 8 26 8 27 9 27 9 K_06 Vin U_09 U_10 U_11 U_12 U_13 U_14 U_15 U_16 Vin U_17 U_18 U_19 U_20 U_21 U_22 U_23 U_24 U_06 5-23 .

20 mA PT100 # 1 1 2 T7 4 5 8 Type A T8 U24 4 D1[T] 5 RS 422 / 485 X//Y X34 5 T9 3 D2[R] 4 U20 4 M5[DCD] D2[R] D1[T] 2 X//Y 3 D1[T] 5 7 U88 # E E2[G] U27 +UB RS 422 / 485 RS 232 U89 IRIG-B time synchronization # 1 X/Y U17 X/Y U18 or optical fiber link SC Ethernet [IEC].P139 5 Installation and Connection 4I X_1 1 1 2 2 3 3 Measuring outputs X81 1 K_01 valid 2 T1 4 4 5 5 6 6 U 4 # 0..20 mA U_09 T4 # 3 4 5 T5 5 15 6 16 7 17 8 18 Vin U_02 Vin U_03 U_04 Vin 21 3 22 4 23 5 24 6 0.. ETH / CH2 TX X8 # # RX X7 1 D1[T] 3 X11 Ethernet [IEC] optical fiber link ST TX 2 U87 # 3 U_06 ETH / CH2 RX U19 1 Per order TX D2[R] 2 Serial [Channel 2] wire link only X10 9 # Communication module RX U86 X83 7 U_05 X//Y 1 D2[R] or wire link U 2 U 1 20 or wire link RS 422 / 485 # 6 X_3 19 5 U_01 Vin 9 T6 9 U 14 8 U 4 U 13 X//Y U23 X33 X//Y 4 U85 U 7 X//Y U22 1 # 6 Signal and measuring inputs X//Y U18 3 U84 U 2 U 11 2 1 X32 or wire link valid 1 X31 X//Y U17 X8 X9 U 1 Per order Serial [COMM3] optical fiber link CH3 U83 K_02 X_2 Type A Serial [Channel 1] optical fiber link 1 X82 10 Communication module (InterMiCOM) Per order X7 # 9 CH1 / CH2 1 # 6 8 U81 # 3 Type A Communication module Temperature measuring inputs U Pin X_1 9T U Ring Type Y RTD module U Type Y Analog module D1[T] RS 422 / 485 Serial [COMM2] wire link Port supervision 7 X10 1 2 D1[T] RS 422 / 485 5-24 K21 Alarm Port 2 K22 IRIG-B time synchronization U20 4 Alarm Port 1 9 D2[R] 3 5 8 X//Y X11 1 # # U21 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . Port 2 optical fiber link ST X10 X12 U17 X14 TX X/Y X/Y X8 X13 U26 U21 Communication Type A module Red.20 mA 7 7 8 8 9 9 5 U_08 T2 7 T3 U82 1 12 3 2 # 0. Port 1 optical fiber link ST X7 and wire link RX 2 X/Y U28 X/Y U29 Serial [COMM2] wire link only X//Y D2[R] 3 U20 4 5 RJ45 U18 X15 1 X//Y U25 X/Y Ethernet [IEC]..

ground faults. This requires a suitable PC and a specific operating program. All the data required for operation of the protection device is entered from the local control panel. The following tasks can be handled from the local control panel: ● Controlling switchgear units ● Readout and modification of settings ● Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic status signals ● Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs ● Readout of event logs after overload situations.1 Local Control Panel (HMI) Switchgear installed in the bay can be controlled from the local control panel (HMI). or short circuits in the power system ● Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in testing and commissioning Control is also possible through the PC interface. and the data important for system management is read out there as well.P139 6 LOCAL CONTROL (HMI) 6. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-1 .

P139 6 Local Control (HMI) 6.2.3 Contrast of the Display The contrast of the LC display can be adjusted by pressing 3 keys on the local control panel at the same time. 6. 6-2 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . ) to raise or lower the contrast.2 Display Illumination If none of the control keys are pressed. there are twelve keys and 17 LED indicators. 3-75). the function “return time illumination” (L OC: R eturn ti me i llumin . (The configuration of the LED indicators is described in Section 3. If continuous display illumination is required. as follows: Keep the Enter key ( ) and the Clear key ( ) pressed simultaneously. respectively. 6.2.) is set to blocked.2 Display and Keypad 6. (p.) H4 H3 H2 H1 H17 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16 TRIP ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY EDIT MODE Fig. then you can press “Up” or “Down” ( .2. the display illumination will switch off once the set “return time illumination” (setting in menu tree: “Par/Conf/LOC”) has elapsed. Pressing any of the control keys will turn the display illumination on again.10. Moreover. Reactivation of the display illumination is also possible by using a binary input. 6-1: View of the local control panel and layout of the LED indicators for the graphic display.1 Graphic Display The local control panel is a graphic LC display with a resolution of 128 × 128 pixels (divided semi-graphically into 16 lines of 21 characters each). In this case the control action that is normally triggered by that key will not be executed.

When the “left” and “right” keys are pressed. ● “Left” key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the left. the “up” and “down” keys have a different function. 6. Menu Tree Level: Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. If the unit is in input mode.4.2. press the “up” and “down” key to change the logic operator of the value element. the “left” and “right” keys have a different function. ● “Up” key: the next higher value is selected.1 “Up” and “Down” Keys P139 Panel Level: The “up”/“down” keys switch between the pages of the Measured Value Panel. which is signaled by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE.2. In the case of a list setting.2.2 “Left” and “Right” Keys Menu Tree Level: Press the “left” and “right” keys to navigate through the menu tree in a horizontal direction.3 ENTER Key Panel Level: Press the ENTER key at the Panel level to go to the menu tree. ● “Right” key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the right. With list settings. Press the “up” and “down” keys in this mode to change the setting value.4. If the unit is in input mode. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-3 .2. Press the ENTER key a second time to accept the changes as entered and exit the input mode. which is signaled by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE.4. 6.4 CLEAR Key Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event data. The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.4. Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode. press the “left” and “right” keys to navigate through the list of items available for selection. 6.2. Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode.4 Short Description of Keys 6. ● “Down” key: the next lower value is selected.6 Local Control (HMI) 6. the cursor positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled value moves one digit to the right or left. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is active. Menu Tree Level: Press the “up” and “down” keys to navigate up and down through the menu tree in a vertical direction.

8 Selection Key Bay Panel: The Selection key is effective only in the Bay Panel and only if local control is activated. pressing the selection key selects the switchgear unit to be controlled.9 OPEN Key The OPEN key is effective in the Bay Panel only.2.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) Input mode: When the CLEAR key is pressed all changes entered are rejected and the input mode is exited. or between remote&local and local control (setting R & L <-> L).2. Menu Tree Level: When the page key is pressed the Menu Tree Level is exited and the Bay Panel is accessed. The local/remote key is the transfer switch between remote and local control (setting R <-> L).5 READ Key Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel level or from any other point in the menu tree.2. The selected external device will be marked by an asterisk (*) – as long as no external device names are displayed. 6.4. Signal Panel: The Selection key is used to select a flashing signal (not yet acknowledged) and will also automatically switch to pages that might be available.4. Otherwise the external device name will flash and will be displayed in the status line. If the “Local/Remote” key is set to switch from Remote control to Local control.7 Page Key Panel Level: Pressing the page key shows the next panel. 6-4 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . Pressing the OPEN key controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into account the interlock equation – to assume the “open” status. 6.6 „Local/Remote“ Key The local/remote key is effective in the Bay Panel except where a binary signal input has been configured for this function. 6.4.4. 6.2. 6.4. then this can only occur if the password has first been entered first. If local control has been selected.2. When the last flashing signal has been reached pressing the Selection key again will start with the first flashing signal. Switching from Local to Remote control will occur without checking the password.

4. Pressing the CLOSE key controls the selected switchgear unit taking into account the interlock equation to assume the “closed” status.6 Local Control (HMI) 6.2. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-5 .10 P139 CLOSE Key The OPEN key is effective in the Bay Panel only.

measured variables. signals. The “menu tree” level below the panel level allows the user to select all data points (settings. etc.) and to change them. press the “READ” key: 6-6 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . To access a selected event recording from either the panel level or from any other point in the menu tree.3 6 Local Control (HMI) Display Levels All data relevant for operation and all device settings are displayed on two levels.P139 6. At the Panel level. data such as measurements are displayed in Panels that provide a quick overview of the current state of the bay. if appropriate.

On the hardware side the protection unit must be fitted with the binary module X(6I 6O) to a slot supporting this module. is accessed. From the control and display panels (e. retu rn ti me has elapsed the protection unit will also return automatically from the menu tree level to the control and display panel last selected. (If previously no panel was selected.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) 6. By selecting and sending a bay type (with parameter MA IN: Type of ba y) a bay type has been generated. 2.e. after a system restart. measured value panels or the bay panel) the user can access the menu tree level by pressing the “ENTER” key.g. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-7 . The user can move from a bay panel to a measured value panel by pressing the key “Cursor left” and back again by pressing the key “Cursor right”. press the “READ” key . To access a selected event recording from either the panel level or from any other point in the menu tree. then the bay panel. if available. i.) After the set LOC : Au tom. To return to the previously selected control and display panel from the menu tree level the user must simultaneously press the keys “Cursor up” and “RESET”.4 Availability of the Bay Panel The Bay Panel is only available under these conditions: 1.

.5 Display Panels on the Graphic Display The following display panels are available with the graphic display: ● Bay Panel ● Signal Panel ● Measured Value Panels. resulting information may be sub-divided into up to eight pages. each with a time tag. Bay Panel Signal Panel Measured Value Panel(s) (state-dependent) Event Panel Record View Control and Display Panels  Device type Parameters Operation Device ID Cyclic measurements Configuration parameters Function parameters Global Control and testing Operating data recordings Events Event counters Measured fault data Event recordings Measured operating data Main functions Parameter subset 1 Physical state signals Logical state signals Parameter subset .P139 6 Local Control (HMI) 6. Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available. depending on the operating mode. If user-defined bay types are applied. acknowledged. such as the opening of a switchgear unit. Control Menu tree Fig. which are called up according to system conditions ● Event Panel The Bay Panel displays the up-to-date switching status of the selected bay as a one line diagram. 6-2: Display panels and menu tree. The Event Panel displays the most recent events. 6-8 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . A maximum of 28 physical and logic binary status may be configured to one Signal Panel and.. Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels.

its meaning.) are selected using a menu tree. as selected by the user.6 Local Control (HMI) 6. The value associated with the selected data point. When navigating through the menu tree.6 P139 Menu Tree and Data Points All data points (setting values. etc. measured values. and its unit of measurement are displayed in the line below. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-9 . The data points are found at the lowest level of a menu tree branch and they are displayed either with their plain text description or in numerically encoded form. the first two lines of the LC-Display always show the branch of the menu tree that is active. signals. as selected by the user.

The individual value elements of a list data point are found at this sub-level.7 6 Local Control (HMI) List Data Points List data points are a special category. the symbol ‘↓‘ is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD. In the case of a list parameter. programmable logic functions. This category includes tripping matrices.P139 6. In contrast to other data points. indicating that a sub-level is situated below this displayed level. and event logs. When a list data point is selected. 6-10 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . list data points generally have more than one associated value element. the individual value elements are linked by operators such as “OR”.

A small black square to the right of the enter key indicates that the LED indicator labeled Edit Mode is illuminated. The examples used here are not necessarily valid for the device type described in this manual. they merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-11 .6 Local Control (HMI) 6.8 P139 Note Concerning the Step-by-Step Descriptions The following presentation of the individual control steps shows which displays can be changed in each case by pressing keys.

6-12 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . The Bay Panel is displayed.9 6 Local Control (HMI) Changing Between Display Levels Jumping from Panel Level to Menu Tree Level After start-up of the device. IP. Note: It is important to press the “up” key first and release it last in order to avoid unintentional resetting of stored data. ↑ ↓ After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: “Par/Conf/LOC”).max prim. 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked 1: Remote Q8 1088A Curr. Jumping from Menu Tree Level to Panel Level Control Step / Description Step 0 From the Menu Tree Level. Alternatively first press the “up” key and hold it down while pressing the CLEAR key. IP. Step 1 Press the Page key. Control Step / Description Step 0 Control Action Display Example of a display after start-up of the device. the display is at the Panel Level. Step 1 ↑ ↓ P139 Parameters Press the Enter key to go from the Panel Level to the Menu Tree Level. the display will switch automatically to the Bay Panel. Control Action Display Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Device on-line No (=off) P139 BB1 BB2 or 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 + Locked 1: Remote Q8 1088A Curr.max prim. P139 BB1 BB2 Note: When the device is delivered. The display shown in the example will not appear until a “real” bay type has been selected.P139 6. Therefore only the name of the device appears on the Bay Panel. it is set for a dummy bay without switchgear units. the user can jump to the Panel Level from any position within the menu tree.

the user can move from one Panel type to another by pressing the Page key (in one direction only) or the “left”/”right” keys (in both directions). The fourth line from the bottom shows (in abbreviated form) whether a bay interlock is active. In the example shown here.10.10.1. The top line shows the device type on the left and the current time of day on the right.1 Information Displayed on the Bay Panel Fig. The symbols shown in the following table are used to represent the switchgear units and other external devices as well as the status of switchgear units. remote control is activated. Together with a customized Bay Type with more than one Bay Panel page the top line will include a page marker in the center. (p. Character set 3 is identical to character set 1 in as-delivered condition but can be replaced by a user-defined character set – by using a special ancillary tool. The third line from the bottom indicates whether remote or local control is permitted. The symbols of character set 1 are used in the following description. 6. The user can switch between character sets 1. Fig. 6-3: Example of a Bay Panel. and 3. 6-13) shows an example of a Bay Panel.10 P139 Control at Panel Level At Panel Level. The two lines at the bottom contain measured value data. The page markers run from “PAGE A” (first page) to “PAGE H” (eighth page). P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-13 .6 Local Control (HMI) 6. The arrows to the right of the measured value data indicate that additional measured values can be called up by pressing the “up” or ”down” keys. 6-3.1 Bay Panel 6. The Bay Panel shown below in one-line diagram representation is a function of the set bay type. 2.

Disconnector 1: Open 2: Closed 3: Faulty position 0: Intermediate pos.g. Fuse unit 1: Open 2: Closed 6-14 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . Switch disconnector 1: Open 2: Closed 3: Faulty position 0: Intermediate pos.P139 External device 6 Local Control (HMI) Position. e. Switch truck 1: Open 2: Closed 3: Faulty position 0: Intermediate pos.: DEV01: Control state Circuit breaker Setting LOC: Character set 1: Character set 1 2: Character set 2 1: Open 2: Closed 3: Faulty position 0: Intermediate pos.

IP. A configuration step determines whether the measured value will also be displayed in bar chart form. no bar chart display has been configured for the measured value. The arrows under the bar chart indicate that additional measured values can also be displayed. 10:33:22 Q1 A configuration step determines whether the measured value will also be displayed in bar chart form.10.max prim.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) 6. P139 BB1 BB2 or ↑ ↓ 10:33:25 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked 1: Remote 1000A Current A prim. In the example shown.1. Step 1 Display Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked 1: Remote Q8 1088A Curr. P139 BB1 BB2 By pressing the “up” or “down” key the next measured value is displayed. The position of the bar chart can also be set for horizontal or vertical display (the setting applies to all measured values). P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 Q8 ↑ ↓ 6-15 .2 Measured Value Display in the Bay Panel Control Step / Description Step 0 Control Action Measured values are shown one at a time.

6-16 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . (p.10. If the local/remote key is set to switch between remote and local control (R↔L).9.1. Some action steps and the behavior of the P139 depend on the setting L OC: Oper ati on mode. then the switch from “remote” to “local” operation requires a password.P139 6. 6-47)) the following description will apply accordingly. provided that the unit has been set for “local control”. When more than one Bay Panel page is used only joint “local/remote” switching is available. If the password has been changed by the user (see Section 6.3 6 Local Control (HMI) Controlling Switchgear Units Switchgear units can be controlled from the local control panel.11. The following example is based on the (R↔L) setting for the local/remote key and the factory-set L/R password.4.

Step 1 Press the “local/remote” key (L/R) to switch the device to local operation. The device type appears in the first line and eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt to enter the password. Step 2a Press the following keys in sequence: P139 ↑ ↓ 10:33:22 ******** P139 10:33:22 “Left” * “Down” P139 10:33:22 * “Right” P139 10:33:22 * “Up” The display will change as shown in the column on the right. The Bay Panel is no longer displayed.max prim. IP. P139 BB1 BB2 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked 1: Remote Q8 1088A Curr. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 ↑ ↓ 6-17 . The third line from the bottom will display “Local”. P139 10:33:22 * Now press the Enter key.max prim. the Bay Panel will re-appear.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) Control Step / Description Step 0 Control Action Display Select the Bay Panel. Q9 Locked 2: Local Q8 1088A Curr. P139 BB1 BB2 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 If an invalid password has been entered. If the correct password has been entered. IP. the display shown above in Step 1 will appear.

that the “Open” (or “Close”) key may now be pressed. ↑ ↓ LOC: Ope r ation mode = LOC Direct: P139 BB1 BB2 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked 2: Local Q8 1088A Q0 LOC: Operation mode = LOC SBO option 2: P139 BB1 BB2 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked 2: Local SELECT<O>/<I> Q0 Q8 LOC: Operation mode = LOC SBO option 1: P139 BB1 BB2 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked 2: Local SELECT<O>/<I> Q0 6-18 Q8 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . Step 3a Press the Selection key to select a switchgear unit. L OC: Oper ation mode is set to LOC Direct or to LOC SBO option 1 then still the current position is displayed. the selected switchgear unit will be marked by a flashing asterisk (*). This is a signal for the user. The external device designation for the selected switchgear unit –“Q0”. the position is displayed that will be assumed by a successful operation. no flashing characters are used. however. (Pressing the key again selects the next switchgear unit.max prim. If the display of external device designations has been disabled. If LOC: Op erat ion mode is set to LOC SBO option 2. (For this line.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) Control Step / Description Step 2b This control step can be canceled at any time by pressing the CLEAR key before the Enter key is pressed. Control Action Display P139 BB1 BB2 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked 1: Remote Q8 1088A Curr. The external device designation for the selected switchgear unit also appears in the bottom line of the display. IP. If.) Only switchgear units that are electrically controllable can be selected. etc. the switchgear unit's position also changes.) If L OC: Operation mode is set to LOC SBO option 1 or to LOC SBO option 2 the symbols [O] („open“) and [I] („close“) are displayed as flashing characters in the nextto-last line. for example – is displayed in flashing characters.

compliance with bay interlock conditions – if applicable – is checked. While the switch command is being executed. there is one more operation step: P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-19 . Pressing the Selection key selects another switchgear unit. Before this switching action is executed.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) Control Step / Description Control Action Step 3b To cancel the selection of a switchgear unit. press the keys “Open” or “Close” to control the switchgear unit. Step 4 After selecting a switchgear unit. press the CLEAR key. no further switchgear unit can be selected. IP.max prim. The “off-end” (intermediate position) symbol is displayed while the switchgear unit is operating. IP. Display P139 BB1 BB2 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked 2: Local Q8 ↑ ↓ 1088A Curr. there is a simplified operation: If the check of bay interlock conditions determines that an operation can be carried out. or Step 4a For the setting L OC: Op eration mode = LOC Direct.max prim. then the switch command is executed. LOC: Oper atio n mode = LOC Direct: P139 BB1 BB2 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked 2: Local Q8 1088A Curr. ↑ ↓ Step 4b If LOC: Op erat ion mod eis set to LOC SBO option 1 or LOC SBO option 2.

[O]) together with a prompt to the Enter key (in flashing characters). IP. will be illuminated.max prim. If the LED indicators have been configured accordingly. Display LOC: Ope r ation mode = LOC SBO option 1: P139 BB1 BB2 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked Q8 2: Local OPERATE<O><ENTER> Q0 LOC: Operation mode = LOC SBO option 2: P139 BB1 BB2 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked Q8 2: Local OPERATE<O><ENTER> Q0 Step 4c For LOC: Op erat ion mode = LOC Direct: If the check of interlock conditions determines that switching is not allowed. the LED indicator for MAI N: Inter lock equ. 6-20 ↑ ↓ P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P139 6 Local Control (HMI) Control Step / Description Control Action If the check of bay interlock conditions determines that an operation can be carried out.g. then the next-to-last line displays the symbol of the the selected switching or operation (e. viol. LOC: Operation mode = LOC Direct: P139 BB1 BB2 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked 2: Local Q8 1088A Curr. then the selected switchgear unit is no longer highlighted.

max prim. P139 BB1 BB2 ↑ ↓ 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked 2: Local Q8 1088A Curr. IP. the resulting switching status is displayed. Control Action Display LOC: Oper at ion mode = LOC SBO option 2: P139 BB1 BB2 10:33:22 Q1 After these 5 seconds the P139 cancels the selection of the switchgear unit and displays the Bay Panel as at the end of step 2. using flashing letters. Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked 2: Local SBO not OK Q0 Q8 LOC: Operati on mode = LOC SBO option 1: P139 BB1 BB2 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked 2: Local SBO not OK Q0 Step 5 For LOC: Op erat ion mode = LOC SBO option 1 or LOC SBO option 2: If the operation can be carried out. No new switchgear unit can be selected until the execution of the current command has been finished. Step 6 Once the operating time of the switchgear unit has elapsed.max prim. After this. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 ↑ ↓ 6-21 . then the next-to-last line displays the error message “SBO not OK” for 5 seconds.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) Control Step / Description Step 4d For L OC : Oper at ion mode = LOC SBO option 1 or LOC SBO option 2: If the check of bay interlock conditions determines that an operation cannot be carried out. The “off-end” (intermediate position) symbol is displayed while the switchgear unit is operating. IP. the Enter key can be pressed. P139 BB1 BB2 Q8 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked 2: Local Q8 1088A Curr. the switch command is executed.

this is accomplished without a password prompt. Control Action Display P139 BB1 BB2 10:33:22 Q1 Q2 Q0 Q9 Locked 1: Remote Q8 1088A Curr.) or the return time for selection (LOC: Re tu rn ti me s el e ct. 6-22 ↑ ↓ P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . then the selection is canceled. IP.) has elapsed.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) Control Step / Description Step 7 If no control action takes place within a set time period after selection of a switchgear unit or if the return time for illumination (LOC : Re tur n time i l lu min. Step 8 Press the local/remote key (L/R) to switch to remote control.max prim.

configured to a panel of the Bay Panel page can be set to call for user attention either by having the status marker or both signal lines flash when a new event has occurred.10. Using the Page key will make the display jump to the other panels at any time. There is a difference between no signaling (acknowledgement is not necessary. The second line shows the full text for this signal. 6. When the last flashing signal has been reached pressing the Selection key again will start with the first flashing signal. or manually by pressing the “Up”/ “Down” keys. switching between pages is carried out automatically. the displays of Overload Panels.2. The next flashing signal can be called up by pressing the Selection key again. The switching control will then automatically switch to the page.P ane l) is used. 6. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-23 . Depending on the range of functions available in the device. Moreover. after the parameter panel hold-time (L OC : Hol d-t ime for Pan el s) has elapsed.act iv. which includes the first signal that has this flashing experienced a status change. ▀ black Signal active / powered.ind.Si gn.2. Ground Fault Panels or Fault Panels have a higher priority and will be shown when an event has occurred.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) 6.Sign. □ clear Signal inactive / not powered. By using the parameter (LO C: Indicat. Pan el) the signaling of status changes of signals in the Signal Panel is controlled.2 Signal Panel(s) The Signal Panel is used to display the up to 28 different physical and logical binary states that the device has available. Each status change of signals.1 Automatic Activation When automatic activation of the Signal Panel is set (L OC : Au t. As with all other panels. This will distinguish between a clear/black square alone and the simultaneous change over from normal display to highlighting of text in both lines (the first line with the status marker will remain unchanged). The following empty line separates the heading from actual signals. signaling by the flashing status marker “▣” alone or by flashing of the two lines (change over from normal display to highlighting of text and the status marker).Pane l) each status change of signals. The flashing frequency is fixed and may not be changed. After pressing the Selection key signal is selected on the current page (signal preceded by a flashing cursor “>”). configured to a panel. the Signal Panel is switched on at any status change). The top line in the display shows the panel designation “Signals” and the current time of day.10. but. ▣ flashing Signaling. Each signal consists of two lines. This gives display capacity of up to seven signals to one Signal Panel. At this point it may occur that the display will automatically jump to the next page.Sign. the first line shows the associated function group.2 Status Display and Signaling To differentiate between the states “signal active / powered” and “signal inactive / not powered” shown on the Signal Panel the parameter (L OC: St at . is automatically switched from the Bay Panel page or the Operation Panel/ Event Panel (depending on the actual selection) to the Signal Panel. Additional pages are created when more than seven signals have been configured.10. The first line shows a status marker (square). if so configured.

PC.10.Sign .cau s . The selection will remain active until the time set for L OC: Re tu rn ti me s elect. for example a LED configured to this signal will also be triggered as flashing even if the operating mode is set to Without signalling. As long as the Selection key is pressed and no resetting has occurred the current page will be continuously displayed (no automatic switching to the next page). This signal is made available in the selection tables for the function groups LED. 6-24 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . 6. shows the status change of the Signal Panel as an alternating signal with a frequency of about 0. When the time has elapsed the display will jump to the next page.3 Acknowledging Flashing Signals Acknowledging a flashing signal that has been selected will occur by pressing the CLEAR key . OUTP. will show the status change of the Signal Panel as a static signal.2. It is generated independent of the operating mode as set in LO C : Sign. has elapsed.4 Status Change Signaling As long as at least one status change signal in the Signal Panel has not been acknowledged. This signal is only made available in the selection tables for the function groups LED.5 Hz. caus. the flashing signal will remain until it has been acknowledged. During an active selection the user may at any time jump to the next or the previous page by pressing the “up” or “down” keys (similar to the Measured Value Panel and the Event Panel).P anel flash.Sig.e. 6. The status change is generally shown as ’storing” i.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) Depending on LOC : Sign. LOC : Ch g. OUTP and LOGIC.2. Pan elthe cause of a flashing signal may be set. COMM1 and COMM2.. This will not reset illuminated LED indicators but will only acknowledge the display. Either each status change of the binary information or only “incoming” edges for transient signals will lead to a flashing signal. Si gn.P ane l. The flashing will stop when the CLEAR key is pressed and a static status display will appear. The second internal logic signal LOC : C hg.Sig. Then the display will automatically jump to the next flashing signal.10. This will enable the user to acknowledge any flashing signals by multiple pressing of the CLEAR key.P ane l stat. In order to be able to continue with the processing of flashing signals the device has two internal logic signals available. LOGIC.

P139 6 Local Control (HMI) Description Step 1 Example of a Signal Panel with status display by status markers (squares) Display Signals 23:56:10 ■INP: State U 1604 □MAIN: M. Cursor “>” is flashing.acc.active ■ OUTP: Outp.b. trip Vref EXT ■FT_RC: Fault mem. overflow ■LOC: Rem.acc.c.c. relays blocked □PSS: Activate PS 3 EXT ■LOGIC: Reset 3 EXT Step 2 Example of a Signal Panel with status display by status markers (squares) and highlighting of lines Signals 23:56:10 ■ INP: State U 1604 □ MAIN: M. Cursor “>” and highlighted text are flashing. overflow ■ LOC: Rem. trip Vref EXT ■ FT_RC: Fault mem.b.block. Step 3b Example of the selection of a status display with status markers and highlighting of text. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 >SFMON: Battery failure >SFMON: Battery failure >SFMON: Battery failure >SFMON: Battery failure 6-25 . relays blocked □ PSS: Activate PS 3 EXT ■ LOGIC: Reset 3 EXT Step 3a Example of the selection of a status display with status markers.active ■OUTP: Outp.block.

Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available. they can be viewed one page at a time by pressing the “up” or ”down” keys. 20. and the Fault Panel. In this example.values 16:57:33 Voltage A-B prim.11. the device detects an overload or a ground fault. then the corresponding Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or ground fault situation exists. The selected set of values for the Operation Panel is always available. The device will also show the or next page of the Measured Value Panel after the set Hold-time for Panels (setting in menu tree: “Par/Conf/ LOC”) has elapsed.8 kV Current A norm. Please see the section entitled “Setting a List Parameter” (Section 6.7 A ↓↑ P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . for example. The measured value display can be structured by inserting a dummy or placeholder in the list of selected measured values. Display Meas.7 kV Voltage B-C prim. the display shows measured operating values (abbreviated as “Meas. 1. 20. then the Fault Panel is displayed and remains active until the measured fault values are reset. 20. the Ground Fault Panel. Up to six selected measured values can be displayed on the Panel simultaneously. The user can select different sets of measured values for the Operation Panel. If the device detects a fault. Step 1 6-26 If more than six measured values have been selected.5 A Current B norm. 417 A ↓↑ Meas. 0. for example. 1. If. (p.5.10.P139 6.6 A Current C norm. Control Step / Description Step 0 Control Action The uppermost line of the display shows the type of measured values being displayed.6 kV Voltage C-A prim. then that panel is disabled. the Overload Panel.6 kV Voltage C-A norm. The time of day is shown at the upper right of the display. by pressing the CLEAR key . 415 A Current B prim. 0. 0.3 6 Local Control (HMI) Measured Value Panels on the Graphic Display The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can first be selected in the menu tree under Par/Conf/LOC.8 kV Current A prim.7 kV Voltage B-C norm. 1. If the MAIN: Without function setting has been selected for a given panel. The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions.values 16:57:35 Voltage A-B norm. 416 A Current C prim. 6-34)) for instructions regarding selection. values”).

501 MAIN Trip command End 21.13 05:21:32.04. The arrows at the bottom of the display area indicate that additional signals can also be displayed. 16:57:33 20.331 Trip command Start MAIN 05:21:35. Control Step / Description Step 0 Control Action Display Events The uppermost line of the display shows the panel designation and the current time of day.501 MAIN Trip command End 21.04.688 GRUND Blocked/faulty End ↓↑ P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-27 .10.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) 6.13 00:03:57. or 16:57:35 05:21:35.677 MAIN Blocked/faulty Start 08:10:59.4 Event Panel on the Graphic Display The Event Panel shows the signals relevant for operation. The Event Panel is based on entries in the operating data memory (menu tree: “Oper/Rec/OP_RC”). each with the complete time tag (date and time of day).677 MAIN Blocked/faulty Start ↓↑ Step 1 Events Pressing the “up” or “down” keys will display the signals one at a time.13 00:03:57.04. Below this line. A maximum of three signals are displayed. the signals are shown in chronological order.

yy Fig. which form the first folder level.11 Control at the Menu Tree Level 6.11. “Measurements & Tests” and “Fault & Event Records”. 6-28 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . the tree branches into the three main folders “Settings”.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree Folders and Function Groups All data points are organized in different folders based on practical control requirements.01. 6-4: Basic menu tree structure.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) 6.mm. Unit type Folder plane 1 PX yyy PX yyy Parameters Folder plane 2 Folder plane 3 Function groups Data points PX yyy Operation PX yyy Events Oper/ Cyclic measurements Oper/Cycl/ Meas. At the end of each branch of folders are the various function groups in which the individual data points (settings) are combined. operating data Oper/Cycl/Data/ MAIN Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN Date 01. Up to two further folder levels follow so that the entire folder structure consists of three main branches and a maximum of three folder levels.99 dd. At the root of the menu tree is the unit type.

that is. signals. In the address mode the display shows settings. In plain text mode the settings. press the CLEAR key and either the “left” key or the “right” key simultaneously. In the following examples. In either case.030 0 or P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-29 . The active branch of the menu tree is displayed in plain text in both modes.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode and plain text mode. and measured values are displayed in the form of plain text descriptions. Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Device online No (=off) Step 1 To switch from address mode to plain text mode or vice versa.11. and measured values in numerically coded form. the display is shown in plain text mode only. as addresses. Par/Func/Glob/MAIN 003. signals. the user switches from plain text mode to address mode. This can be done at any + point in the menu tree. control is guided by the menu tree.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) 6. Control Step / Description Control Action Display Step 0 In this example.

6-43)). all further changes – with the exception of specially protected control actions (see Section 6. Thereafter. the following description will apply accordingly. ● Selective change-enabling function: Password input prior to any setting change. This safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings. If the password has been changed by the user (see Section 6.11.11. 6-41)) – are enabled without entering the password. 6-30 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . The change can only be made after the password has been entered. parameter to Yes (menu tree: Oper/CtrlTest/LOC). (p.11.8.9.3 6 Local Control (HMI) Change-Enabling Function Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the associated value by pressing the keys. There are two ways to enter the input mode. ● Global change-enabling function: To activate the global changeenabling function. This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global change-enabling function has been activated. (p.P139 6. The following example is based on the factory-set password. cha nge enabl. set the LOC: P aram. it is not possible to switch directly to the input mode.

11. select the LOC: Param. change enabl. change enabl. Now press the enter key. Step 3 Change the setting to Yes. change enabl. No * The display will change as shown in the column on the right. Yes The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global changeenabling function has been activated. Yes Step 4 Press the enter key again. change enabl. the global change-enabling function has been activated. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. and the P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-31 . change enabl. In the following examples. change enabl. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. the change-enabling function is automatically deactivated. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line of the display.3. No ******** Step 2 Press the following keys in sequence: Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. No Step 1 Press the ENTER key. 6.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) Control Step / Description Control Action Display Step 0 In the menu tree Oper/CtrlTest/LOC. No * “Left” “Right” Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. If several settings are to be changed. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. the display shown in Step 1 appears. change enabl. change enabl.1 Automatic Return The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from remaining activated after a change of settings has been completed. No If an invalid password has been entered. This method is recommended for a single setting change only. The unit is enabled for further setting changes. then the global change-enabling function is preferable. re tur n ti me. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. This indicates that the setting can now be changed by pressing the “up” or “down” keys. No * “Down” Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. The LED indicator will go out. Once the set return time (L O C: Aut om. menu tree “Par/Conf/LOC”) has elapsed. No * “Up” Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. parameter.

3. Such settings include the configuration settings. The following entries in the “Change” column of the “Telegram Documentation” (part of the separately available “DataModelExplorer”) indicate whether values can be changed or not: ● “on”: The value can be changed even when the protective function is enabled.2 Forced Return The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by first pressing the “up” key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key. For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function (MAIN : D ev ice on-li ne. Even when the change-enabling function is activated.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the current system condition. by means of which the device interfaces can be adapted to the system. ● “off”: The value can only be changed when the protective function is disabled. The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is pressed.11. 6. menu tree: Par/Func/Glob/MAIN). ● “–”: The value can be read out but cannot be changed. It is important to press the “up” key first and release it last in order to avoid unintentional deletion of stored data. not all settings can be changed. 6-32 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

Par/Conf/LOC Autom. press the CLEAR key. return time 50010 s Step 6 If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on). the change-enabling function is activated and the protective function is disabled. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out and the device will now operate with the new value. Par/Conf/LOC Autom.11. return time 5001̲0 s Step 5 Press the ENTER key. In the meantime the device will continue to operate with the old value. Control Step / Description Step 0 Example of a display. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. return time 50000 s P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-33 . Control Action Display Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. if necessary. In this example.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) 6. The last digit of the value is highlighted by a cursor (underlined). Par/Conf/LOC Autom. Par/Conf/LOC Autom. Press the keys to select another setting for a value change. Par/Conf/LOC Autom. return time 5000̲0 s Step 4 Change the value highlighted by the cursor by pressing the “up” and “down” keys. Par/Conf/LOC Autom. the desired setting can be entered. The LED indicator will go out and the device will continue to operate with the old value. change enabl. A further setting can be selected for a value change by pressing the keys. Yes Step 1 Select the desired setting by pressing the keys. return time 50000̲ s Step 3 Press the “left” or “right” keys to move the cursor to the left or right.4 Changing Parameters If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied. return time 50000 s Step 2 Press the ENTER key.

11. the selected elements are linked by an “OR” operator.1 Setting a List Parameter Using list settings. 6-34 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . As a rule. AND.11. the user is able to select several elements from a list in order to perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measurements that will be displayed on Measured Value Panels.5. NOT OR and NOT AND) are available in the LOGIC function group for linking the selected list items. In this way binary signals and binary input signals can be processed in a Boolean equation tailored to meet user requirements.5 List Parameters 6. The definition of a trip command shall be used here as an illustration.0 communication protocol.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) 6. the user defines the class of a setting instead of assigning operators. For the DNP 3. OR. Other operators (NOT.

t rip cmd. The symbol “#01” in the display indicates the first item of the selection.assign. There is no limitation on the selection of classes. the “OR” operator is always assigned automatically when the ENTER key is pressed.trip cmd. #02 DIST Trip zone 4 Step 5 Select the operator or the class using the “up” and “down“ keys. then this means that no function assignment has yet been made. OR #02 DIST Trip zone 4 Step 6 Press the ENTER key.assign. Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. press the CLEAR key.trip cmd.assign. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.1 at “Par/Func/Glob/ MAIN” in the menu tree). There is no automatic assignment of classes. The assignment has been made.trip cmd. OR #02 DIST Trip zone 2 6-35 . #05 MAIN ????? Step 3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the list.assign. OR #02 DIST Trip zone 4 Step 0 ↓ If no operator has been selected. Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will be extinguished.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) Control Step / Description Control Action Display Select a list setting (in this example.assign.assign. only the “OR” operator can be selected. The unit will now operate with the new settings.trip cmd. The LED indicator will go out. Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct. the parameter MAIN : Fct . The down arrow (↓) indicates that a list setting has been selected. Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct. #01 DIST Trip zone 1 Step 2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions by pressing the “right” and “left” keys.trip cmd. #02 DIST Trip zone 2 Step 4 Scroll through the assignable functions by pressing the “right” and “left” keys in the input mode. The first function and the first selected signal will appear in the third and fourth lines. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. Step 1 Press the “down” key. In this particular case. Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assig. the display shown on the right will appear.trip cmd.trip cmd. Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct. OR #02 DIST Trip zone 2 Once the end of the list is reached. Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct. ↓ Step 8 If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on). Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.trip cmd.assign.assign.assign. Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct. respectively. Step 7 Press the “up” key to exit the list at any point in the list.trip cmd. If MA IN: Wi th out funct ion appears for the first item.

then all the following items are deleted.2 6 Local Control (HMI) Deleting a List Parameter If MAIN : Wit hou t fun ction is assigned to a given item.11. If this occurs for item #01. 6-36 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . everything is deleted.P139 6.5.

P139 6 Local Control (HMI) 6. Control Action Display Oper/Rec/OP_RC Operat. such as the enabling or disabling of a device function.13 11:33 PSIG Enabled USER Yes Step 3 Press the “right” key to display the previous entry. Oper/Rec/OP_RC Operat. Oper/Rec/OP_RC 01. after which the oldest entry is overwritten. ↓ P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-37 . The latest entry is displayed.13 11:33 ARC Enabled USER No Step 4 Press the “up” key at any point within the operating data memory to return to the entry point. A maximum of 100 entries is possible. data record. Control Step / Description Step 0 Select the entry point for the operating data memory. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not possible. The following memories are available: ● In the menu tree “Oper/Rec/OP_RC”: Operating data memory ● In the menu tree “Oper/Rec/MT_RC”: Monitoring signal memory ● Event memories ■ ■ ■ In the menu tree “Events/Rec/FT_RC”: Fault memories 1 to 8 In the menu tree “Events/Rec/OL_RC”: Overload memories 1 to 8 In the menu tree “Events/Rec/GF_RC”: Ground fault memories 1 to 8 Not all of these event memories are present in each unit.6 Memory Readout Memories can be read out after going to the corresponding entry point.01.01.11. This does not necessitate activating the change-enabling function or even disabling the protective functions.13 11:33 ARC Enabled USER No Step 2 Press the “left” key repeatedly to display the entries one after the other in chronological order.11. ↓ Step 1 Press the “down” key to enter the operating data memory. Oper/Rec/OP_RC 01. 6. pressing the “left” key again will have no effect.01. Once the end of the operating data memory has been reached. Oper/Rec/OP_RC 01.6.1 Readout of the Operating Data Memory The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during operation. data record.

syst. Mon. 01. A maximum of 30 entries is possible.13 13:33 SFMON Checksum error param ● First Time when the signal first occurred ● Updated First: 13:33:59. signal record.01. signal record.11. ● Number The signal occurred x times. ● Acknowledged The fault was no longer detected by the selfmonitoring function and has been reset (Yes).13 13:33 SFMON Checksum error param Step 4 If the “down” key is held down while a monitoring signal is being displayed. 01. signal record. After that an “overflow” signal is issued.01. ↓ Step 1 Press the “down” key to enter the monitoring signal memory.13 13:33 SFMON Checksum error param Step 2 Press the “right” key repeatedly to display the entries one after the other in chronological order. the “overflow” signal is displayed as the last entry. signal record. 01. Oper/Rec/MT_RC Mon.6. Step 5 Press the “up” key at any point within the monitoring signal memory to return to the entry point.744 Updated: Yes Acknowledged: No Number: 5 The fault is still being detected (Yes) or is no longer detected (No) by the self-monitoring function. 01. Mon.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) 6. Control Step / Description Step 0 Select the entry point for the monitoring signal memory. the following additional information will be displayed: Mon. Control Action Display Oper/Rec/MT_RC Mon. then an entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. Step 3 Press the “left” key to display the previous entry. Mon.01. signal record. The oldest entry is displayed.2 Readout of the Monitoring Signal Memory If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring routines or if it detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning of the unit.01. signal record.13 10:01 SFMON Exception oper. ↓ 6-38 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . If more than 30 monitoring signals have been entered since the last reset.

The latest event is stored in event memory 1. for example. the fault number is shown.01. In this example it is the 22nd fault since the last reset. in progress Start Step 4 Press the “up” key at any point within the fault memory to return to the entry point. Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example. in progress End Step 3 Press the “left” key to see the previous measured value or the previous signal. Control Step / Description Control Action Display Step 0 Select the entry point for the first fault memory.6. the previous one in event memory 2. Fault recording 1 0 ms FT_RC Record.13 10:00:33 ↓ P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-39 .01. the third line of the display will show the date and time the fault began. and so forth.3 Readout of the Event Memories (Records) There are eight event memories for each type of event. The time shown in the second line is the time.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) 6.17 s Once the end of the fault has been reached (after the “right” key has been pressed repeatedly).11. pressing the “right” key again will have no effect. Events/Rec/FT_RC Fault recording 1 01. then there are no entries in the fault memory.13 10:00:33 ↓ Step 1 Press the “down” key to enter the fault memory. in progress Start Fault recording 1 241 ms FT_RC Record. If the third line is blank. measured from the onset of the fault. First. at which the value was measured or the binary signal started or ended. Fault recording 1 200 ms FT_DA Running time 0. Events/Rec/FT_RC Fault recording 1 01. Fault recording 1 0 ms FT_RC Record. If the memory contains entries. Fault recording 1 FT_RC Event 22 Step 2 Press the “right” key repeatedly to see first the measured fault data and then the binary signals in chronological order.

Resetting a single memory from the local control panel is described in the following with the example of a fault memory. Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 10 Execute Step 3 Press the ENTER key. 10 in this example. Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 10 6-40 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . the LED indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new fault – provided that the appropriate operating mode has been selected – so that they always indicate the latest fault. in principle. and the fault recordings remain stored unchanged in the protection unit’s memory. This action also triggers an LED indicator test and an LCD display test.7 6 Local Control (HMI) Resetting All information memories – including the event memories and the monitoring signal memory – as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. so that inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset signal pattern is reliably prevented. The value in line 3 is reset to 0. after a function test). The event memories are not affected by this action. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. In addition. The LED indicator will be extinguished.P139 6. Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 10 Don't execute Step 2 Press the “Up” or “Down” keys to change the setting to Execute. Because of the ring structure of the event memories. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will be extinguished. In this example the global changeenabling function has already been activated. Control Step / Description Control Action Display Step 0 Select the reset setting. press the CLEAR key. Deleting the event memories completely (e. Line 3 of the display shows the number of faults since the last reset. which is always possible in the standard control mode.11.g. Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 10 Step 1 Press the ENTER key. Any setting can be selected again for a value change by pressing the keys. The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key. the data for eight consecutive events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should not be necessary. An overview of all resetting actions can be found in section “Resetting Actions” in Chapter “Operation”. can be accomplished by various resetting actions including the configuration of a group resetting for several memories. Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 0 Step 4 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault recordings after leaving the standard control mode (the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on).

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-41 . This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global change-enabling function has been activated.11.11. (p.8 P139 Password-Protected Control Actions Certain actions from the local control panel such as a manual trip command for testing purposes can only be carried out by entering a password so as to prevent unwanted output even though the global change-enabling function has been activated (see Section 6.9. If the password has been changed by the user (see Section 6. 6-30)).3.6 Local Control (HMI) 6. The password consists of a pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval.11. 6-43)). (p. the following description will apply accordingly.

USE R. the control action can be terminated by pressing the CLEAR key. Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. USER Execute Step 4 Press the enter key again. The unit will execute the command. trip cmd. USER Don't execute ******** Step 2 Press the following keys in sequence: Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. USER Don't execute 6-42 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . trip cmd. USER Don't execute * “Up” Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line of the display. trip cmd. USER Don't execute Step 3 Change the setting to execute. USER Don't execute * “Left” “Right” Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. trip cmd. Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) Control Step / Description Control Action Display Step 0 In the menu tree “Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN”. trip cmd. trip cmd. USER Don't execute Step 5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on. trip cmd. Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. This indicates that the setting can now be changed by pressing the “up” or “down” keys. Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. USER Don't execute * The display will change as shown in the column on the right. Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cm d. Now press the enter key. USER Don't execute * “Down” Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. USER Don't execute Step 1 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will be extinguished. trip cmd. trip cmd. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out. select the parameter MAI N: Man .

9 Changing the Password 6. “up” and “down” keys may be used to define the password and represent the numbers 1.1 Local Control Panel with Password Protection The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered sequentially within a specific time interval. respectively: 3 1 2 4 The password can be changed by the user at any time.9. 3 and 4. “right”. The starting point is the factory-set password. The “left”.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) 6. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-43 . 2.11.11. The procedure for this change is described below.

The display will change as shown in the column on the right. Asterisks appear in the third line. “up” and “down” keys to enter the valid password. Par/Conf/LOC Password ******** Step 1 Press the ENTER key. Par/Conf/LOC Password ******** * Par/Conf/LOC Password ******** * Par/Conf/LOC Password ******** * Par/Conf/LOC Password ******** * Step 3 Now press the enter key.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) Control Step / Description Control Action Display Step 0 In the menu tree “Par/Conf/LOC”. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. Par/Conf/LOC Password ******** ******** Step 2 Press the “left”. The third line shows an underscore character ( _ ) as the prompt for entering a new password. and a cursor (underscore) in the fourth line prompts the user to enter the new password again. which in this example is done by pressing the “up” key followed by the “down” key. “right”. Par/Conf/LOC Password * Par/Conf/LOC Password ** Step 5 Press the enter key again. select the LOC: P assword setting. Par/Conf/LOC Password _ Step 4 Enter the new password. Par/Conf/LOC Password ** _ Step 6 Re-enter the password. Par/Conf/LOC Password ** * Par/Conf/LOC Password ** ** 6-44 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line of the display.

2 Local Control Panel without Password Protection Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also possible. the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE remains on and the display shown on the right appears. Par/Conf/LOC Password ******** Step 7b If the password has been re-entered incorrectly. Par/Conf/LOC Password ** _ Step 8 The change in password can be canceled at any time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR key. immediately press the ENTER key a second time in steps 4 and 6 of Table. 6-44). 6-30)). and no control actions involving changes will be possible until the global change-enabling function has been activated (see “Change-Enabling Function”. the original Password continues to be valid. The new Password is now valid. To select this option.11. The password has to be re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the change of the Password by pressing the CLEAR key (see Step 8).P139 6 Local Control (HMI) Control Step / Description Control Action Display Step 7a Press the ENTER key again. If this is done. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-45 . the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE goes out and the display appears as shown on the right. without entering anything else. This will configure the local control panel without password protection.9. (p. Section 6. If the password has been re-entered correctly.3. Par/Conf/LOC Password ******** 6.11. (p.

the password is displayed. Step 2 Step 3 When this condition is detected during startup.9. Control Action Display TEST Password 1234 After the four keys are released. At the very beginning of device startup.11.3 6 Local Control (HMI) Display the Password If the configured password has been forgotten. Control Step / Description Step 0 Turn off the device. “right”. “up” and “down”) at the same time and hold them down. it can be called up on the LCD display as described below. press the four directional keys (“left”. Step 1 Turn the device on again.P139 6. The procedure involves turning the device off and then on again. startup will continue. TEST 6-46 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

4 P139 Changing and Displaying the L/R Password In order to enable local control on devices fitted with the graphic display HMI (ordering option) the L/R password has to be entered.9.11. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-47 .6 Local Control (HMI) 6.

select the LOC: Password L/R setting. Par/Conf/LOC Password L/R ******** * Par/Conf/LOC Password L/R ******** * Par/Conf/LOC Password L/R ******** * Par/Conf/LOC Password L/R ******** * Step 3 Now press the enter key. Par/Conf/LOC Password L/R ** * 6-48 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . Par/Conf/LOC Password L/R ******** Step 1 Press the ENTER key. which in this example is done by pressing the “up” key followed by the “down” key. Asterisks appear in the third line. Par/Conf/LOC Password L/R ******** ******** Step 2 Press the “left”. “right”. The display will change as shown in the column on the right. The red LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will be illuminated.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) Control Step / Description Control Action Display Step 0 In the menu tree “Par/Conf/LOC”. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line of the display. “up” and “down” keys to enter the valid general password. Par/Conf/LOC Password L/R * Par/Conf/LOC Password L/R ** Step 5 Press the enter key again. and a cursor (underscore) in the fourth line prompts the user to enter the new Password L/R again. Par/Conf/LOC Password L/R 1423 Step 4 Enter the new password. The current Password L/R will appear in the third line. Par/Conf/LOC Password L/R ** _ Step 6 Re-enter the new Password L/R.

the original Password L/R continues to be valid.P139 6 Local Control (HMI) Control Step / Description Control Action Display Par/Conf/LOC Password L/R ** ** Step 7a Press the ENTER key again. Par/Conf/LOC Password L/R ** _ Step 8 The change of the Password L/R can be canceled at any time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR key. Par/Conf/LOC Password L/R ******** P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 6-49 . the red LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will be extinguished and the display appears as shown on the right. The new Password L/R is now valid. The new Password L/R needs to be re-entered. the red LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE remains illuminated and the display shown on the right hand side appears. If the new Password L/R has been re-entered correctly. It is also possible to cancel the change of the Password L/R by pressing the CLEAR key (see Step 8). If this is done. Par/Conf/LOC Password L/R ******** Step 7b If the new Password L/R has been re-entered incorrectly.

P139 6-50 6 Local Control (HMI) P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

These parameters are described in Chapter “IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator”. In contrast to P139 versions before P139‑630. a signal. in most cases. ● None of the functions of the protection or control function to be cancelled may be assigned to a binary input. Therefore these settings are not listed in this chapter or the following chapter. The P139 devices are supplied with a factory-set standard configuration of settings that. The sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree. This chapter gives instructions for determining the settings. are separately available as a set of interlinked PDF files for user-friendly navigation. General Notes on the Configuration of Function Group “Binary Input” (INP) The P139 has optical coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the system. packed in one ZIP archive named DataModelExplorer_P139_en_P01. Instead.zip. including complete selection tables and IEC 60870‑5‑103 protocol properties. correspond to the default settings or become apparent after a “cold restart”. ● No functions of the device function being cancelled can be selected in a list setting. which are located in the folder titled “Parameters” in the menu tree. these parameters are set with a special IEC 61850 operating software. named “IED Configurator”.P139 7 SETTINGS 7. All settings must be re-entered after a cold restart. ● None of the signals of the protection or control function may be linked to other signals by way of an “m out of n” parameter. The number and connection schemes for the available binary inputs are shown in the terminal connection diagrams.1 Parameters The P139 must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by appropriate settings. ● None of the signals of the protection or control function may be assigned to a binary output or an LED indicator. or a measured value belongs is defined by the function group designation (example: “LIMIT:”). the implementation of the IEC 61850 protocol now features parameters that cannot be modified from the local control panel (HMI) or with the operating program. The protection or control function to which a parameter. The P139 is blocked in that case. Cancelling a Protection or Control Function The user can adapt the device to the requirements of a particular high-voltage system by including the relevant protection or control functions in the device configuration and cancelling all others (removing them from the device configuration). Note Detailed information about all parameters. The following conditions must be met before cancelling a protection or control function : ● The protection or control function in question must be disabled. The “DataModelExplorer” (available P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 7-1 .

The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The number and connection schemes for the available binary output relays are shown in the terminal connection diagrams. then the configuration addresses for the missing binary signal inputs are automatically hidden in the menu tree. The P139 identifies the installed modules during startup. Otherwise there will be an error message.) Depending on the connection type chosen for the P139 – pintype or ring-type cable socket terminals – the symbolic slots A. make sure that all binary inputs specified in the List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the device. The user can specify whether the presence (active ‘high’ mode) or absence (active ‘low’ mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic “1” signal . 7-2 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals. The “DataModelExplorer” (available as a separate ZIP archive file) gives information about the configuration options for all binary outputs. and the new bay type will not be activated. The P139 identifies the installed modules during startup.P139 7 Settings as a separate ZIP archive file) gives information about the configuration options for all binary inputs. B and C refer to the following slots: Symbolic slot Pin-type cable socket terminals Ring-type cable socket terminals A 06 12 B 07 14 C 08 16 The configuration of binary inputs for each bay type – in the case of autoassignment – is given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix. When configuring binary inputs. Otherwise there will be an error message. Before selecting a new bay type. General Notes on the Configuration of Function Group “Binary Output” (OUTP) The P139 has output relays for the output of binary signals. (Whether automatic configuration occurs. If a given binary I/O module is not installed or has fewer output relays than the maximum number possible at this slot. make sure that the binary inputs at slots A and B as well as the binary inputs U C01 to U C08 are configured for functions from the DEVxx function groups only. the triggering signals must persist for at least 30 ms. Thus one function can be activated from several control points having different signal voltages. and the new bay type will not be activated. The configuration in slots A and B and the configuration for the binary inputs U C01 to U C08 will be changed with the selection of a new bay type. the following notes apply: Before selecting a new bay type. If a given binary I/O module is not installed or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum number possible at this slot. then the configuration addresses for the missing output relays are automatically hidden in the menu tree. one should keep in mind that the same function can be assigned to several signal inputs. In the case of auto-assignment. is defined in the setting MA IN: Autoassignme nt I /O.

the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled. H 2 is labeled “OUT OF SERVICE” and signals a blocking or malfunction. Selecting a new bay type can change the configuration for slots A and B. An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled. It is important to note that the contact rating of the binary I/O modules (X) varies (see Chapter “Technical Data”). and the new bay type will not be activated. the LED indicator will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES) mode (“open-circuit principle”) or normally-energized (NE) mode (“closed-circuit principle”) and in either latching or non-latching mode. LED indicator H 17 indicates that the user is in the “EDIT MODE”. and the new bay type will not be activated. make sure that the output relays at slots A and B are configured for functions from the DEVxx function groups only. Depending on the set operating mode. LED indicators H 2 and H 3 are not configurable either. For LED indicators operating in latching mode. It is labeled “HEALTHY” and signals the operational readiness of the protection unit (supply voltage present). An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Section “Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED)” in Chapter “Operation” describes the layout of the LED indicators and the factory setting for LED indicator H 4. make sure that all output relays specified in the List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the device. With the multi-color LED indicators (H 4 – H 16) the colors red and green can be independently assigned with functions. Depending on the selected operating mode.) Depending on the connection type chosen for the P139 – pintype or ring-type cable socket terminals – the symbolic slots A and B correspond to the following slots: Symbolic slot Pin-type cable socket terminals Ring-type cable socket terminals A 06 12 B 07 14 The configuration of output relays for each bay type – in the case of autoassignment – is given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix. One signal can also be assigned simultaneously to several output relays for the purpose of contact multiplication. Before selecting a new bay type. General Notes on the Configuration of the LED Indicators The P139 has LED indicators for parallel display of binary signals. For output relays operating in latching mode. Otherwise there will be an error message. The third color amber results as a P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 7-3 . LED indicator H 1 is not configurable. (Whether automatic configuration occurs. the output relay will operate in either an energize-onsignal (ES) mode or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or non-latching mode.P139 7 Settings The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as command relays or as signal relays. the following notes apply: Before selecting a new bay type. Otherwise there will be an error message. is defined in the setting MA IN : Autoassignme nt I/O. H 3 is labeled “ALARM” and signals a warning alarm. In the case of auto-assignment.

P139 7 Settings mixture of red and green. These settings should only be changed if the design version of the P139 is modified.e.1. when both functions assigned to the LED indicator are simultaneously present. i. 7. 7-4 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .1 Device Identification The device identification settings are used to record the ordering information and the design version of the P139. They have no effect on the device functions.

This display cannot be altered.mm. [spacer] DVICE: DM I EC 618 50 ve rsion Not measured 0 002 059 65535 [spacer] Software version of the communication software based on the device's protocol per IEC 61850. This display cannot be altered. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 7-5 . [spacer] DVICE: S W date [spacer] 010 168 65535 [spacer] 01. This display cannot be altered.97 07.01. These customized data models contain an identifier defined by the user while preparing the data model. This identifier is displayed at this point in the menu tree. [spacer] DVICE: Text vers . The display cannot be altered. Not measured 0. 1997. until November 7th. Standard data models have the identifier ‘0' (factory-set default).dat a mode l 0 0 002 121 255 [spacer] Using the ‘text replacement tool' provided by the operating program. [spacer] DVICE: S W ve rsion communic.98 dd. the user can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and load them into the device. The supported dates range from January 1st. Note: The centuries are not displayed.35 DVICE: S oft ware ve rsi on 6X X Not measured 0 0 Software version for the device.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default Device Address Min Max Unit DVICE: De vice t ype 139 000 000 0 65535 [spacer] The device type is displayed. [spacer] DVICE: Lang uage v ersion 0.0 002 123 899.97 010 167 65535 DVICE: S oft ware ve rsi on 7X X Not measured Logic Diagram 002 122 01.9 [spacer] Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model.01.0 0. This display cannot be altered.yy Date the software was created. [spacer] DVICE: F numb er 0 [spacer] 002 124 0 9999 The F number is the serial number of the device.11. 2098.00 002 103 655.35 [spacer] Software version for the device's communication software.00 002 120 655. This display cannot be altered. [spacer] DVICE: S oft ware ve rsi on Not measured [spacer] [spacer] 0. This display cannot be altered.

12 0 [spacer] 0 000 008 DVICE: Order ext . 1 0 [spacer] 999 0 000 011 999 0 000 012 999 0 000 013 999 0 000 014 999 0 000 015 999 0 000 016 999 0 000 017 999 DVICE: Order ext . 14 0 [spacer] 0 000 009 DVICE: Order ext . 11 0 [spacer] 999 DVICE: Order ext . No. 7 0 [spacer] 999 DVICE: Order ext . 001 200 0: [spacer] Order numbers for the device. No. No. No. No. 4 0 [spacer] 0 000 004 DVICE: Order ext . 3 0 [spacer] 999 DVICE: Order ext . 001 000 0: [spacer] DVICE: PCS Or de r No. No. 15 0 [spacer] 999 DVICE: Order ext . 5 0 [spacer] 999 DVICE: Order ext . 13 0 [spacer] 999 DVICE: Order ext . No. The user cannot alter this number. No. [spacer] DVICE: Order ext . No. 2 0 [spacer] 0 000 003 0 000 018 999 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram DVICE: AFS Order No. 16 0 7-6 0 000 010 DVICE: Order ext . 6 0 [spacer] 0 000 005 DVICE: Order ext . No. No. 8 0 [spacer] 0 000 006 DVICE: Order ext . No. 9 0 [spacer] 999 DVICE: Order ext . No. No. 10 0 [spacer] 0 000 007 DVICE: Order ext . No. No.

No. No. No. 18 0 [spacer] Min DVICE: Order ext . slot 4 086 053 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ar. 19 0 [spacer] Max DVICE: Order ext . No. 22 0 [spacer] 000 020 DVICE: Order ext . 27 0 0 Logic Diagram 999 DVICE: Order ext . 24 0 [spacer] 0 000 021 DVICE: Order ext . slot 7 086 056 65535: Not fitted P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 7-7 . No. slot 1 086 050 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ar. No. 21 0 [spacer] 0 0 000 028 999 DVICE: Order ext . [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ar. 26 0 [spacer] 0 000 022 DVICE: Order ext . slot 5 086 054 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ar. slot 6 086 055 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ar. slot 2 086 051 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ar. 20 0 [spacer] 0 Unit 000 019 DVICE: Order ext . 25 0 [spacer] 999 DVICE: Order ext . 17 0 [spacer] Address 000 029 999 [spacer] Order extension numbers for the device. No.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] 999 0 000 023 999 0 000 024 999 0 000 025 999 0 000 026 999 0 000 027 999 DVICE: Order ext . slot 3 086 052 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ar. 23 0 [spacer] 999 DVICE: Order ext . No. No. No. No.

slot 8 086 057 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule var. slot 1 5 086 064 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule var. [spacer] DVICE: M odule vers . slot 1 2 086 061 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule var. slot 1 0 086 059 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule var. slot 3 086 195 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule vers . slot 2 086 194 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule vers . slot 1 9 086 068 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule var. slot 1 4 086 063 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule var. slot 1 086 193 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule vers . slot 2 0 086 069 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule var. slot 1 3 086 062 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule var. slot 4 086 196 27: Not fitted 7-8 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . slot 1 8 086 067 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule var. slot 1 6 086 065 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule var.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram DVICE: M odule var. slot 2 1 086 070 65535: Not fitted [spacer] Item number of the module inserted in the respective slot 1 to 21. The display always shows the actual component configuration at any given time. slot 1 1 086 060 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule var. slot 1 7 086 066 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule var. slot 9 086 058 65535: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule var.

slot 1 0 086 202 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 1 5 086 207 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 8 086 200 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 6 086 198 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 5 Unit Logic Diagram 086 197 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers .P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 2 0 086 212 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 1 9 086 211 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 7-9 . slot 2 1 086 213 27: Not fitted [spacer] Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted in the respective slot. slot 9 086 201 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 1 2 086 204 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 1 1 086 203 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 7 086 199 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 1 7 086 209 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 1 4 086 206 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 1 6 086 208 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 1 8 086 210 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 1 3 086 205 27: Not fitted [spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers .

[spacer] DVICE: M AC add ress module A 104 061 2: [spacer] MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. [spacer] DVICE: Variant of module L 086 048 65535: Not fitted [spacer] Item number of module L in this design version. [spacer] DVICE: Variant module B (a) 086 046 65535: Not fitted [spacer] Item number of the analog bus module B in this design version. [spacer] DVICE: Vers ion of module A 086 190 27: Not fitted [spacer] Index letter specifying the version of module A.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram DVICE: Variant of module A 086 047 65535: Not fitted [spacer] Item number of module A in this design version. [spacer] DVICE: Variant of module B 086 049 65535: Not fitted [spacer] Item number of module B in this design version. [spacer] DVICE: IP addres s 111 000 2: [spacer] DVICE: S ubnet mas k 111 001 2: 7-10 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . This address is introduced during manufacture and can only be read. [spacer] DVICE: Vers ion of module B 086 192 27: Not fitted [spacer] Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B. [spacer] DVICE: Vers ion of module L 086 191 27: Not fitted [spacer] Index letter specifying the version of module L. [spacer] DVICE: Vers ion m odul e B (a) 086 189 27: Not fitted [spacer] Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.

00 [spacer] 99.99 DVICE: Cust omer ID data 7 0.00 [spacer] 99. Further instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective operating program.99 DVICE: Cust omer ID data 4 0.00 000 044 99. This can be useful for network analysis.00 000 043 99.00 000 042 DVICE: Cust omer ID data 5 0.99 DVICE: Cust omer ID data 8 0. [spacer] DVICE: De vice ID 0 000 035 0 9999 [spacer] ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting. [spacer] DVICE: Cust omer ID data 1 0. especially if these settings have been retrieved via DHCP. [spacer] DVICE: Location 001 201 0: [spacer] Reference input for the device's location as selected by user.00 000 046 99.00 [spacer] 0.00 000 045 99.99 0.00 0. [spacer] DVICE: S ubst ation ID 0 [spacer] 0 000 036 9999 ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting.00 [spacer] 0. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 7-11 . MAC address.99 DVICE: Cust omer ID data 2 0.00 000 041 DVICE: Cust omer ID data 3 0.00 [spacer] 0.99 0.00 [spacer] 99.00 [spacer] 0. Further instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective operating program.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram DVICE: M AC address 111 003 2: [spacer] Display of the IP address (or subnet mask.00 000 040 0.99 [spacer] Set your numerically coded user data here for your records.99 DVICE: Cust omer ID data 6 0. respectively) of the Ethernet interface of the processor module.00 000 047 99.

P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .Chin.00 002 131 0. [spacer] DVICE: De vice p assword 1 0 [spacer] 0 000 048 9999 DVICE: De vice p assword 2 0 0 000 049 9999 [spacer] ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes.35 Internal software version numbers. Parameter Default Local control panel Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram LOC: Local HM I ex is ts 221 099 1: Yes [spacer] 7-12 When set to Yes it is apparent that the device is fitted with the local control panel (HMI). Further instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective operating program.35 DVICE: S W ve rs.17 [spacer] 655.DHMI DM 1.00 008 233 655.10 [spacer] 0. See description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting instructions.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram DVICE: Fee de r ID 0 000 037 0 9999 [spacer] ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting.35 DVICE: S W ve rsion DHMI DM 1. [spacer] DVICE: S W ve rsion DHMI Not measured [spacer] 0.00 002 132 655.

3-6) [spacer] This setting defines whether the “Locked” or “Unlocked” status shall be displayed on the bay panel.1. 3-3. (p. ex t. 3-6) [spacer] This setting defines whether the external device designations shall be displayed on the Bay Panel. [spacer] LOC: Pas s word L / R 1423 221 040 0 4444 [spacer] The password used to change the setting from “Remote” to “Local” control can be defined here. [spacer] LOC: De cim al de limit er 003 021 1: Dot [spacer] Character to be used as decimal delimiter on the local control panel. (p. (p.2 Configuration Parameters Parameter Default Local control panel Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram LOC: Languag e 003 020 2: Reference language [spacer] Language in which texts will be displayed on the user interface (HMI). 3-3. [spacer] LOC: Pas s word 1234 003 035 0 4444 [spacer] The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel can be defined here. stat .) [spacer] LOC: Dis pl. inte rl. 3-3. [spacer] LOC: Bus bar1 Name by Use r 218 191 0: [spacer] LOC: De signation busbar 1 1: BB1 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 221 033 Fig. 1: With 221 071 Fig.P139 7 Settings 7. [spacer] LOC: Dis pl. 3-3. 3-6) 7-13 . (Switching from “Local” to “Remote” control occurs without checking the password. [spacer] LOC: Dis play L/ R 1: With 221 070 Fig. (p.de sig 1: With 221 032 Fig. [spacer] LOC: Oper ation mode 011 240 0: LOC Direct [spacer] This setting defines which of the three implemented operating modes the P139 shall use for the local control of switchgear units via LOC. 3-6) [spacer] This setting defines whether the control site – “Local” or “Remote” – shall be displayed on the bay panel.de v.

At LOC: Bus bar1 Name by Use r any text (max. When one of the pre-defined designations is selected at LOC: De signat. A designation with more than 3 characters is internally truncated. bus se ct .P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram LOC: Bus bar2 Name by Use r 218 192 0: [spacer] LOC: De signation busbar 2 2: BB2 [spacer] 221 034 Fig. 7-14 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .1 1: BSa [spacer] 221 035 Fig. (The same is true of BB2.. Note: Character set 3 is identical to character set 1 in the factory default setting.1-Name Use r 218 195 0: [spacer] LOC: De signat. (p.. 3 characters) may be entered which will then be used as the designation. 3-3. At LOC: BB S ect.) [spacer] LOC: BB S ect.1 it will be used and LOC : BB S ect . (p.1 has been set to BB-Sect..User Name. 3-3.2-Name Use r 218 196 0: [spacer] LOC: De signat. (The same is true of busbar section 2. (p. (p. bus se ct . bus se ct . 3-6) The user can choose between several character sets to represent switchgear and their switching states on the Bay Panel. but can be replaced by an user-defined character set.1-Name Use r any text (max 3 characters) may be entered which will then be used as the designation. When instead one of the pre-defined designations is selected at L OC: Designat ion busbar 1 it will be used and L OC : Busbar 1 Name by User will be ignored.) [spacer] LOC: Character se t 1: Character set 1 [spacer] 221 038 Fig. 3-6) [spacer] Setting for the busbar designations to be displayed on the Bay Panel. 3-3. 3-3. 3-6) LOC: BB S ect. A designation with more than 3 characters is internally truncated.2 2: BSb 221 036 Fig. if the associated parameter LOC: De signat. by applying an accessory tool to the operating program. (p. 3-3. 3-6) LOC: Bus bar3 Name by Use r 218 193 0: [spacer] LOC: De signation busbar 3 3: BB3 221 043 Fig. 3-6) [spacer] Setting for the busbar section designations to be displayed on the Bay Panel.1 -Na meUse r will be ignored. bus sect. if the associated parameter LOC: De signat ion busbar 1 has been set to BB-User Name.

) [spacer] LOC: Fct.Fault Pane l 060 000: MAIN: Without function 053 004 Fig. [spacer] LOC: Fct. m enu jmp li st 2 030 239 060 000: MAIN: Without function [spacer] Selection of specified functions which will be sequentially displayed by repeated reading of the menu jump list 1 (or 2). If several functions have been selected then they will be sequentially triggered by repeated pressing of the read key. (p. (p. m enu jmp li st 1 030 238 060 000: MAIN: Without function [spacer] LOC: Fct. (p. [spacer] LOC: Fct. 3-6. [spacer] LOC: Fct. 3-7. Ove r lo ad Pane l 060 000: MAIN: Without function 053 005 Fig. [spacer] LOC: Fct.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram LOC: Fct. (p. so that they are always reset when the RESET key is pressed. (Resetting LED indicators and measured event values is permanently assigned internally. ass ign. Grd. 3-13) [spacer] This setting defines whether the (electric) key-operated switch switches between remote / local control (L↔R) or between remote+local control / local control (R&L↔L). re set ke y 060 000: MAIN: Without function 005 251 Fig. 3-5. 3-10) Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel. 3-8. Event counters and event recordings are offered for selection. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 7-15 . re ad ke y 080 110 060 000: MAIN: Without function [spacer] Selection of up to 16 functions to be triggered when pressing the read key. 3-9. 3-11) [spacer] Definition of the values to be displayed on the Ground Fault Panel. (p. (p. Operat ion P anel 060 000: MAIN: Without function 053 007 Fig. 3-89. 3-9) [spacer] Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also referred to as the Operation Panel. 3-124) [spacer] Selection of counters and memories that are reset by pressing the RESET key on the local control panel. [spacer] LOC: Fct. L/R k e y 1: R <-> L 225 208 Fig. Fault Panel 060 000: MAIN: Without function [spacer] 053 003 Fig. 3-12) [spacer] Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel. [spacer] LOC: Fct.

3-4. either the primary current IB or the per-unit current IB shall be selected for the numerical display. The perunit current IB shall be entered at the same position in the selection list for the bar chart display. 3-3. (p. However. Note: Measured values to be displayed in bar chart form must also be selected for display as numerical measured values.activ. 3-8) [spacer] Definition of cause for signaling (every change of state / incoming signals only). 3-8) [spacer] Definition of display type of active / inactive signals on the Signal Panel. 3-3. 3-3. 3-8) [spacer] Definition of the values to be displayed on the Signal Panel. (p. 3-8) [spacer] Activation of the automatic switching to the Signal Panel at every change of state of a configured signal. [spacer] LOC: Indicat. Example: Current IB is to be displayed. b ar displ. [spacer] LOC: Fct. 3-4. 3-4. (p.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram LOC: Fct. 3-6) [spacer] Definition of the measured values to be displayed on the Bay Panel in numerical form. [spacer] LOC: Sig n. 060 000: MAIN: Without function [spacer] 221 042 Fig.S ign . (p. [spacer] LOC: St at. 060 000: MAIN: Without function 221 041 Fig. dis pl. 3-6) Definition of the measured values to be displayed on the Bay Panel in bar form. num.S ign. [spacer] LOC: Fct. asg . [spacer] LOC: Bar disp lay ty pe 0: No bar display [spacer] 7-16 221 039 Fig. 3-8) [spacer] Definition of signal type at change of state and response to an acknowledge command. 3-4. (p.ind. [spacer] LOC: Aut.as g. Sig nal Panel 060 000: MAIN: Without function 221 072 Fig. In this case.S ign.P anel 1: Filled box 221 074 Fig.S ign. (p. (p. a dummy or placeholder must be included in the selection list for the bar chart display at the same point at which a measured value that cannot be displayed in bar chart form appears in the selection list for numerical measured values. 3-6) Disabling the bar chart display or definition of the orientation of the bar chart to display measured values on the Bay Panel.caus . P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . (p. not all measured values that can be displayed in numerical form can also be displayed in bar chart form! In such cases. 3-4.P ane l 0: Activation off 221 073 Fig.P anel 1: All status changes 221 078 Fig.P anel 0: Without signalling 221 075 Fig.

3-4. 60 60 221 030 60000 s Fig. re t ur n t ime 60 60 003 014 60000 s Fig. [spacer] LOC: Dis play b ar scale 221 046 1: Yes Fig. This setting is only relevant if more values are selected than can be shown on the LC-Display. 3-5. [spacer] LOC: Re t ur n time illumi n. (p. (p. 3-8) Fig. 60 [spacer] 60 003 023 60000 s Fig. before switching to the next panel. 3-6) [spacer] If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time period. [spacer] LOC: Re t ur n time selec t. bar dis play V 221 045 1: 1. [spacer] LOC: Hold. 3-9) [spacer] Setting for the time period during which a panel is displayed. (p.tim e for P anels 5 1 031 075 10 s Fig. (p. meas. (p.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram LOC: Scal. With a setting to Blocked this automatic switching forward to the next measured value will be deactivated. 3-8) Fig. 3-4.v.2 Inom Fig. (p. 3-3. and any switchgear selection that might have been made is cancelled. then the selection of a switchgear unit is cancelled. (p. 3-6) [spacer] Setting this window can disable the scalable bar chart. bar dis play I 221 044 1: 1. (p. then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off. 3-5.t. 3-3. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 7-17 . 3-9) [spacer] If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time period.2 Vnom Fig. [spacer] LOC: Scal. 3-3. [spacer] LOC: Autom . Independent of this the next or the previous configured measured value may be selected by pressing the keys “cursor down” or “cursor up”. 3-6) If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time period. 3-3. [spacer] LOC: Hold. 3-3. 3-6) [spacer] Scaling of measured voltage values to be displayed in bar chart form. the change-enabling function is deactivated. 3-6) [spacer] Scaling of measured current values to be displayed in bar chart form. (p. dis pl Blocked 1 031 072 60 s [spacer] Always when the time period set here has elapsed the next value will be shown on the Bay Panel display.

3-15) [spacer] Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface. 3-15) [spacer] Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined telegram via the PC interface. 003 185 060 000: MAIN: Without function Fig. 3-15) [spacer] Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface. e nable 003 187 0: None Fig.0 003 055 0. 3-10. 003 189 060 000: MAIN: Without function Fig.2: 115. [spacer] PC: Select.2 kBaud Baud [spacer] Baud rate of the PC interface. (p. 3-15) [spacer] A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. (p. 3-15) [spacer] Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface. 3-10. 3-15) [spacer] Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the P139. (p. 3-15) [spacer] Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in communication via the PC interface. (p.0 %Vnom Fig.enab. 3-10. [spacer] PC: Baud rate 003 081 115. 3-10. (p. dat 003 084 0: Without Fig. [spacer] PC: IP addr es s 192 7-18 111 004 0 255 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . [spacer] PC: Trans m.cyc l. 3-15) [spacer] A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. 3-10.0 15. (p. [spacer] PC: De lta I 3. s pontan. 3-15) 003 181 1: Even Fig. 3-15) PC: De vice addr ess 1 003 069 0 255 Fig. 3-10. sig. [spacer] PC: Parit y bit Fig.0 003 056 0. d ata ILS t e l. [spacer] PC: Spontan. (p. [spacer] PC: De lta V 3. [spacer] PC: Cycl.0 %Inom Fig. 3-10. (p. (p. 3-10. (p. 3-10. si g. 3-10. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses.0 15.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default PC link Min Max Unit Logic Diagram PC: Bay addre ss 1 [spacer] Address 003 068 0 254 Fig.

● PC: S ubnet mask 2. The device’s front panel display only displays the IP address distributed to these four data model addresses: ● PC : IP add re ss. [spacer] PC: Subnet mas k 255 [spacer] 0 255 PC: Subnet mas k 2 111 010 0 255 PC: Subnet mas k 3 0 [spacer] 111 009 0 255 [spacer] 255 PC: Subnet mas k 1 255 [spacer] 111 008 111 011 0 255 Subnet mask of the Ethernet interface of the processor module. Note: In the operating program. PC: Subnet mas k. e. ● PC: IP addr e ss 1. ● PC: Sub net mas k 1. The device’s front panel display only displays the mask distributed to these four data model addresses: ● PC: Subnet mask. This is the Ethernet interface of the processor module and can be used for special service activities. Note: This interface can only be used if it has been configured (PC: IP addr es s.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Unit Logic Diagram 255 PC: IP addr es s 2 111 006 0 255 PC: IP addr es s 3 2 [spacer] Max 111 005 0 1 [spacer] Min PC: IP addr es s 1 168 [spacer] Address 111 007 0 255 IP address of the Ethernet interface of the P139's processor module. the complete IP address is displayed at PC: IP addr es s. for uploading new firmware. the complete mask is displayed at PC: Subnet mas k. PC : IP addre ss mode) and activated via PC: IP Enable co nf ig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 7-19 . ● PC: IP ad dres s 2.. ● PC: I P ad dres s 3.g. ● PC: S ubne t mask 3. Note: In the operating program.

3-10. ● Device address: The setting of PC : IP addr ess shall be used for the first three number values of the IP address.0 2. (p. PC: IP Enable conf ig. 3-10.0 003 057 0.0 Fig. [spacer] PC: De lta P 15. [spacer] PC: Time-out 1 [spacer] 7-20 003 188 1 60 min Fig. 3-10. 3-15) [spacer] The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta from the last measured value transmitted. (p. 3-15) [spacer] The active power value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram PC: IP addr es s mode 111 016 1: DHCP [spacer] [spacer] Setting of the method how the IP address of the Ethernet interface of the processor module shall be defined. 111 017 0: don't execute [spacer] Activating the Ethernet interface of the processor module.0 %fnom Fig.0 003 059 0.0 15. (p. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .0 003 155 15. (p. 3-10. (p. 3-10. ● DHCP: The IP address shall be retrieved from a DHCP server. [spacer] PC: De lta t 1 003 058 0 15 min Fig. [spacer] PC: De lta f 2.0 0.v.0 %Snom Fig. 3-15) Setting for the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC interface before activating the second communication channel of communication module A. 3-15) [spacer] The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.ILS te l 3. [spacer] PC: De lta meas. ● Fix: The setting of P C: IP addre ss shall be used. the fourth number value of the IP address shall be the value of PC : De v ic e addr ess. 3-15) [spacer] All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered by the other delta conditions.

P139 7 Settings Parameter Default “Logical” communication interface 1 Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram COMM 1: Functio n gr oup CO MM1 056 026 0: Without [spacer] Cancelling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. 3-17) 103 040 Fig. 3-17) Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication interface. 3-11. 3-11. prot ocol 060 000: MAIN: Without function [spacer] 003 220 Fig. 3-11. [spacer] COMM 1: Addit . 3-11. with the exception of this setting. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration. 3-17) [spacer] Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol. [spacer] COMM 1: General enabl e USE R 003 170 0: No [spacer] Disabling or enabling communication interface 1. 3-17) 003 167 Fig. 3-11. then all associated settings and signals are hidden. (p. (p. 3-11. . (p. [spacer] COMM 1: Com m unicat. [spacer] COMM 1: DNP3 enable 0: No [spacer] Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3. [spacer] COMM 1: MODB US e nable 0: No [spacer] Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol. [spacer] COMM 1: Addit .10 1 e nable 0: No 003 216 Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 7-21 . I LS e nable 0: No 003 217 Fig. (p. (p. 3-17) 003 231 Fig. (p. 3-11. 3-17) [spacer] Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on IEC 870-5-101. [spacer] COMM 1: COUR IER e nable 0: No [spacer] Enabling settings relevant for the COURIER protocol. 3-17) [spacer] Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.0 protocol. (p. [spacer] COMM 1: Basic IE C87 0-5 e nabl e 0: No 003 215 Fig.

3-20) Fig. 3-13. (p. 3-16. 3-19) Fig. 3-18) Fig. 3-22) Fig. 3-16. 3-23) [spacer] 7-22 Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected to the P139. (p. 3-21) Fig.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max Logic Diagram COMM 1: -103 pr ot. [spacer] COMM 1: Parity bit 2: Even 003 171 Fig. 3-15. (p. (p. (p. 3-19) Fig. (p. 3-19) Fig.2: 19. (p. [spacer] COMM 1: Baud rate 19. (p. [spacer] COMM 1: MODB US prot . 3-15. 3-13. 3-18) The user may select between two variants of the 103 protocol. 3-13. (p. (p. 3-12. 3-15. 3-23) [spacer] Setting for the line idle state indication. 3-20) Fig. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-xxx protocol is enabled. (p. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . (p. 3-15. 3-20) Fig. 3-12. 3-17. (p. 3-14. 3-14.2 kBaud 003 071 Fig. 3-14. 3-21) The user may select between two variants of the MODBUS protocol. variant 1: Compatible [spacer] 003 214 Fig. 3-21) Fig. 3-18) Fig. (p. Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled. 3-22) Fig. 3-21) Fig. 3-12. 3-22) Fig. (p. (p. var iant 1: Private [spacer] Unit 003 178 Fig. 3-12. [spacer] COMM 1: Line idle stat e 1: Light on / high 003 165 Fig. 3-18) Fig. 3-17. (p. (p. (p. 3-17. 3-23) [spacer] Baud rate of the communication interface. (p. 3-16.

3-13. 3-20) Fig. (p. (p. time pol ling 25 3 003 202 254 s Fig. 3-15. Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.0 protocol is enabled.addr. (p. addre ss 1 0 254 003 072 Fig. 3-22) Fig. 3-21) Fig. 3-22) Fig. (p. Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3. 3-15. (p. The address that can be set here is the higher-order octet. 3-21) Fig. 3-20) Fig. 3-18) Fig. (p.DNP 3 0 [spacer] 0 255 003 240 Fig. 3-20) Fig. (p. 3-13. [spacer] COMM 1: Octet comm. (p. (p. (p. 3-19) Fig. (p. (p. (p. (p. 3-17. 3-23) [spacer] The P139 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause occurs within a telegram. 3-19) Fig. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 7-23 .P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram COMM 1: Dead t ime moni toring 003 176 1: Yes Fig. 3-19) Fig. 3-15. 3-16. “ASDU”: Application Service Data Unit [spacer] COMM 1: Oct. 3-13. (p. 3-16. 3-17. 3-12. 3-18) Fig. 3-18) Fig. 3-16. (p. 3-14. [spacer] COMM 1: Mon. 3-21) Fig. (p. (p. (p. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not required. 3-23) [spacer] The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less than the time set here. 3-14.2 comm. a 16-bit address is used to identify devices. 3-22) Fig. 3-17. 3-12.0 protocol. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. whereas the address set at COM M1: Octe t comm. 3-12. 3-14. 3-23) [spacer] The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in communication via the interface. addr ess is the lower-order octet of the DNP address. 3-16. 3-22) In the DNP 3.

3-21) Fig. 3-14. 3-14. 3-16. 3-18) Fig.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram COMM 1: Pos. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. (p. (p. 3-13.2: short message with a fixed block length of 5 characters ● Single character E5: single control character COMM 1: Tes t m onit or on 003 166 0: No Fig. 3-18) Fig. 3-12. (p. (p. (p. 3-18) Fig. (p. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. 3-22) Fig. 3-19) Fig. 3-19) Fig. (p. [spacer] COMM 1: Name of manufac ture r 1: SE 003 161 Fig. acknowle dge me nt 103 060 1: Single character E5 [spacer] [spacer] The following transmission frame formats are available (according to the standard): ● Short message FT 1. 3-17. (p. 3-15. 3-19) Fig. 3-19) Fig. 3-20) [spacer] Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication interface. (p. 3-20) [spacer] Setting for the name of the manufacturer. s ig. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. 3-12. enabl e 65535: All 003 177 Fig. (p. 3-13. 3-13. 3-12. Note: [spacer] ● This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility. (p. 3-20) Fig. 3-13. COMM 1: Octet address ASD U 1 0 255 003 073 Fig. 3-14. ● This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. 3-20) [spacer] The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in communication via the interface. (p. 3-14. 7-24 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . (p. “ASDU”: Application Service Data Unit [spacer] COMM 1: Spontan. 3-12. 3-18) Fig. (p. 3-23) [spacer] Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities. (p.

(p. 3-18) Fig. (p.0 %Snom Fig.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram COMM 1: Se le ct. 3-18) Fig. 3-14. (p. 3-12. 3-12. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 7-25 . (p. [spacer] COMM 1: Transm.c ycl. 3-20) [spacer] The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. 3-13.0 15. 3-19) Fig. (p. 3-13. 3-18) Fig. 3-18) Fig. (p.sig. 003 179 060 000: MAIN: Without function Fig. 3-12.0 %Inom Fig. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. 3-20) [spacer] Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined telegram via the communication interface. 3-12. 3-18) Fig. 3-20) [spacer] Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via “logical” communication interface 1. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.0 003 051 0. 3-12. 3-13. 3-19) Fig. 3-14. 3-13. (p. (p.0 003 050 0. 3-18) Fig.enab. (p. dat a ILS t e l. 3-19) Fig.0 %Vnom Fig. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. 3-14. 3-13. 3-14. (p. 3-13. [spacer] COMM 1: Delta I 3. (p. [spacer] COMM 1: Delta V 3. (p. 3-12. 3-14. 3-20) [spacer] A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. 3-14. 3-20) [spacer] A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. 3-19) Fig. (p. 3-20) [spacer] Enabling of cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication interface.0 15.0 15.dat 003 074 0: Without Fig. (p. s pont an. [spacer] COMM 1: Cycl. 3-19) Fig. (p.0 003 054 0. (p. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. (p. 003 175 060 000: MAIN: Without function Fig. 3-19) Fig. [spacer] COMM 1: Delta P 15. (p. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.

v. 3-18) Fig. (p. [spacer] COMM 1: Delta m e as. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. 3-14. (p. [spacer] COMM 1: Delta t (e ne r gy) Blocked 0 003 151 15 min Fig. (p. 3-12. 3-18) Fig. 3-13. 3-20) [spacer] All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered by the other delta conditions.ILS t el 3. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. (p. 3-12. signals.0 003 150 15. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. [spacer] COMM 1: Cont in. 3-20) [spacer] The measured values for active energy and reactive energy are transmitted via the communication interface after this time has elapsed. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. (p. 3-19) Fig.0 0. 3-19) Fig. 3-19) Fig. (p.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max Unit Logic Diagram COMM 1: Delta f 2. 3-12. (p. 3-14. (p.0 Fig. 3-18) Fig. 3-12. 3-13. 3-13. 3-20) [spacer] The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. (p. 3-20) [spacer] The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. (p. 3-19) Fig.0 003 052 0. 3-19) Fig. 3-13. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. 3-14. 3-12. and monitoring signals through the communication interface during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures that there will be data consistency with a connected control system. [spacer] COMM 1: Delta t 1 003 053 0 15 min Fig. (p. 3-18) Fig. ge ner al scan Blocked 10 9000 003 077 s Fig. The time to be set defines the minimum time difference between two telegrams. (p. 3-20) [spacer] A continuous or background general scan means that the P139 transmits all settings.0 2. (p. (p. 3-18) Fig. 3-14. 3-13.0 %fnom Fig. 3-14. (p. 7-26 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 .

Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set. (p. 3-19) Setting for the communication address length. obj. (p.3 addr. 3-19) Setting for the length of the common address for identification of telegram structures. (p. 3-13. 2 [spacer] 2 3 003 196 Byte Fig. 3-13. ASD U 0 [spacer] 0 003 194 255 Fig. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.>funct. (p. 0 [spacer] 0 255 003 197 Fig. 3-19) Setting for the length of the address for information objects. 3-19) Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification of telegram structures. 0 [spacer] 0 003 200 255 Fig. “ASDU”: Application Service Data Unit [spacer] COMM 1: Octet 2 addr. 3-13. inf. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set. le ngth 003 192 1: W/o source address [spacer] Fig. 3-19) Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address. 3-13. P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 7-27 . [spacer] COMM 1: Oct. [spacer] COMM 1: Octet 2 comm. (p. [spacer] COMM 1: Address le ngt h AS DU 1 [spacer] 1 2 003 193 Byte Fig. 3-13. 3-19) Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be reversed in the object address. (p. “ASDU”: Application Service Data Unit [spacer] COMM 1: Addr.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Min Max Unit Logic Diagram COMM 1: Com m . Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set. 3-13. 3-19) Setting for the length of the cause of transmission. addr.le ngth inf.t ype 0: No [spacer] 003 195 Fig. [spacer] COMM 1: Inf . Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set. 3-19) Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects. (p. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set. addr ess le ngth 1 [spacer] Address 1 2 003 201 Byte Fig.obj. [spacer] COMM 1: Caus e transm. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.<.No. 3-13. 3-13. (p.

3-13. 3-13. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set. [spacer] COMM 1: Balance d ope ration 003 226 0: No [spacer] Fig. (p.10 003 228 2. 003 190 1: Single signal [spacer] Fig. [spacer] COMM 1: Direction bit 0 [spacer] 0 003 227 1 Fig. (p. 3-19) Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced basis (full duplex operation). 3-13. “ASDU”: Application Service Data Unit [spacer] COMM 1: Init ializ.P139 7 Settings Parameter Default [spacer] Address Min Max Logic Diagram COMM 1: Tim e tag length 003 198 3: 3 [spacer] Unit Byte Fig. (p. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set. 3-13. [spacer] COMM 1: AS DU1 / ASDU20 conv . 3-13.55 s Fig.out int erv al 0. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled. 3-19) Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued. 3-19) Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at the control center and to '0' at the substation. (p. 3-19) Setting for the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the acknowledgment command is issued. 7-28 P139/EN M/R-21-A // P139-313-651 . (p. 3-19) Setting for the time tag length. (p